The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutFLYING J PROJECT MANUALPROJECT MANUAL OF SPECIFICATIONS FOR: FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida OWNER: FLYING J INC. 50 West 990 South P.O. Box 678 Brigham City, Utah 84302 DATE: January 15, 1998 ARCHITECT: WIESER ARCHITECTS 50 WEST 990 SOUTH P.O. BOX 678 BRIGHAM CITY, UTAH 84302 (801) 734-6507 DIVISION 0 _ BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00010 Pre -Bid Information; Notice to Contractors 00100 Instructions to Bidders, AIA A701 i 00150 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders -- 00220 Soil Investigation Data 00300 Bid Proposal Form 00305 Schedule of Values j 00310 Substitution Listing 00500 Agreement Form, AIA A101 00600 Bonds and Certificates; AIA A312, G702, G703, and G704 00610 Lien Waiver Forms 00700 General Conditions of the Contract, AIA A201 00800 Supplementary General Conditions f . 00950 Index to Drawings I DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 01020 Allowances and Work by Owner 01030 Special Project Procedures 01035 Change Order Procedures - 01045 Cutting and Patching 01050 Field Engineering 01100 Description of Alternates 01200 Project Meetings 01410 Testing Laboratory Services _ 01430 Special Observations and Inspections 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01700 Contract Closeout DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 02100 Site Preparation 02110 Site Clearing 02200 Earthwork 02201 Trench Safety System 02237 Cemented Coquina Shell Base 02240 Stabilized Subgrade 02444 Chain Link Fences and Gates 02510 Site Concrete 02512 Asphalt Concrete Paving 02525 Concreete Curbs 02576 Pavement Sealing 02580 Pavement Markings 02660 Water Distribution _ 02700 Sewerage and Drainage 02720 Storm Sewer System 02725 Trench Drain Systems 02800 Landscape Specifications - 02810 Irrigation Construction INDEX - 1 INDEX TO THE SPECIFICATIONS h DIVISION 3 CEMENT 03100 Concrete Framework 03200 Reinforcement 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03370 Concrete Curing DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04210 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 METALS 05010 Approved Metals Fabricators 05120 Structural Stee12 05210 Steel Joist 05310 Metal Decks 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05500 Miscellaneous Metals and Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06200 Finish Carpentry 06400 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07112 Bituminous Waterproofing 07150 Dampproofing 07200 Insulation 07322 Concrete Tile Roofing 07420 Composite Fascia Panels 07464 Vinyl Siding & Soffits 07500 Elastomeric Sheet Roofing 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07631 Gutters and Downspouts • 07740 Exterior Insulation Finish System 07900 Sealants DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Steel Doors and Frames 08210 Wood Doors 08360 Upward Acting Sectional Doors 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08700 Builders Hardware 08823 Insulating Glass and Glazing DIVISION 9 '- - FINISHES 09010 Exterior Finishes and Color Listings - 09250 Gypsum Drywall 09300 Tile - 09510 Acoustical Ceilings ' 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpeting • 09900 Painting INDEX - 2 09950 Wall Coverings DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES _ 10440 Signage 10520 Portable Fire Extinguisher 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11140 Underground Fuel Storage Tanks 11301 Oil/Water Separators -- 11400 Food Service Equipment DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13000 Service Station General Requirements 13420 Fuel Pipe and Pipe Fittings DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used ' DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL / PLUMBING: 15010 General Mechanical Requirements 15030 Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work 15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 15170 Motors 15190 Mechanical Identification 15261 Culinary Water Pipe Insulation 15262 Underground Piping Insulation 15263 Refrigerant Piping Insulation 15264 Roof Drain Pipe Insulation 15280 Equipment Insulation 15290 Ductwork Insulation 15335 Dry -Pipe Automatic Sprinkler System 15411 Culinary Water Piping Systems - 15412 Soil, Waste & Vent Piping Systems 15430 Plumbing Specialities 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15459 Gas Fired Storage Type Water Heaters 15481 Compressed Air Systems 15489 Natural Gas Systems 15530 Refrigerant Piping Systems 15535 Refrigerant Specialties 15625 Make -Up Air Units 15640 Flues 15671 Air -Cooled Condensing Units 15780 Rooftop Gas Heating/Air Conditioning Units 15869 Exhaust Fans 15887 Disposable Filters j 15891 Ductwork INDEX - 3 15892 Non Metal Ductwork 15896 Duct Lining 15911 Fire and Fire/Smoke Dampers 15940 Air Outlets & Inlets 15970 Control Systems DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16001 Electrical General Provisions 16051 Electrical Construction Report 16070 Electrical Connections for Equipment ^ 16110 Conduit Raceways 16120 Conductors and Cables 16135 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 16136 Supporting Devices & Raceways 16140 Wiring Devices 16155 Motor Starters 16170 Motor and Circuit Disconnects .. 16181 Transformers 16426 Electrical Service and Distribution Switchboards 16452 Grounding 16470 Electrical Panelboards 16475 Overcurrent Protective Devices 16510 Interior and Exterior Building Lighting 16660 Seismic Bracing 16700 Auxiliary Systems Thru - 16800 Auxiliary Systems 16721 Automatic Fire Alarm and Detection Systems 16740 Telephone Systems (Raceways) 16741 Television Antenna Systems - Roof Antenna 16775 Sound System Fuel Centers INDEX - 4 DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00010 Pre -Bid Information; Notice to Contractors 00100 Instructions to Bidders, AIA A701 00150 Supplementary Instruction to Bidders 00220 Soils Investigation Data 00300 Bid Proposal Form 00305 Schedule of Values 00310 Substitution Listing 00500 Agreement Form, AIA A101 00600 Bonds and Certificates; AIA A312, G702, G703, and G704 00610 Lien Waiver Forms 00700 General Conditions of the Contract, AIA A201 00800 Supplementary General Conditions 00950 Index to Drawings i ' DIVISION O SECTION 00010 PRE -BID INFORMATION ,u-1.00 NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS: _ . 1.01 BIDS: A. Bids will be received from pre -qualified General Contractors by invitation from the Architect only, others will not be considered. All Bids must be faxed, mailed or hand delivered and addressed to Mrs. Valda Condie, Owners Independent Accounting Representative. All mailed or hand delivered Bids must be within two sealed envelopes. The inner envelope shall be sealed and labeled "SEALED BID," "PROJECT NAME, "PROJECT LOCATION' and 'TIME AND DATE OF BID." The exterior envelope shall be addressed. and delivered to Mrs. Valda Condie, Owners Independent Accounting Representative. All delivered bids must be delivered by a representative of the General Contractor, or, a courier appointed to act as a representative for the General 'Contractor and delivered to Mrs. Valda Condie, Owners Independent Accounting Representative. All faxed li Bids shall be faxed to (801) 734-6581 and addressed to Mrs. Valda Condie, Owners Independent Accounting Representative. To ensure the security of a faxed Bid, mail a Base Bid, several days prior to the Bid date as instructed above. Fax your add/deduct to the base Bid. Do not list your mailed in Base Bid on the fax. List only the adjustment "add/deduct". B. Sealed bids will be received for the Owner, Flying J Inc., at the office of the Owner, located at, 50 West 990 South, P.O. Box 678, Brigham City, Utah 84302, by the Owners Independent Accounting Representative up 1 to 2:00 p.m. (Mountain Time Zone) February 10, 1998, for the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, and services for the construction of the Flying J Travel Plaza located at Northwest Quadrant of Interstate 95 & State Road 68, St. Lucie, Florida. The bids will be logged, by date and time received. All received and logged bids will then be opened on the date of the bid. All Bids will be opened by the Architect j I at the Office of the Owner, read, recorded, and submitted to the Owner for consideration at the time of opening. General Contractors submitting bids may, but are not required to, be present at the bid opening. -,i C. All bids shall be submitted on the Bid Proposal Forms included in this Project Manual of Specifications. Bid break downs may follow up the bid within 24 hours. i, — D. Bids submitted shall be a single stipulated sum for the Base Bid with Alternate Bid items specified in the Contract Documents being either additive or deductive to the Base Bid. E. The Owner reserves the right to award more than one contract on the Project. The successful bidder(s) to be known as the General Contractor(s) shall have responsibility for proper execution of all work contracted -, by them. f F. The Owner reserves the right to accept or to reject any or all proposals for any reason or waive any informality in a proposal. k 1. Any exceptions or clarifications deleting items required by the Contract Documents may cause the proposal to be rejected. G. All Bidders are required to be bondable and licensed, General Contractors under the contracting licensing laws of the State in which this Project is located, at the time the bid is submitted. Submittal of a bid constitutes the Bidders representation to the Owner that Bidder is duly licensed and bondable for the amount of the bid. 2.00 COMPLETION OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 2.01 Construction must be completed within a period of 200 consecutive calendar days commencing on the commencement date described in the Contract for Construction. The 20D-day construction period shall include normal weather delays. i 2.02 Liquidated Damages clauses (02,500.00 per day) normally used by the Owner in its construction agreements will be contained in the Contract for Construction. 3.00 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND BIDDING INFORMATION 3.01 Instructions, Drawings, Specifications, and Proposal Blanks will be available at the office of the Architect after January 20, 1998 for the purpose of bidding. h ! 00010 - 1 3.02 Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications) may be obtained by invited pre -qualified general contractors 9 upon receipt of a $1,000.00 deposit for 10 sets. Full refund will be made only upon return of all such Documents in good condition within seven calendar days after the bids are opened. Deposit shall be forfeited if Documents are retained beyond fourteen calendar days after the bids are opened. Bidders may purchase up to 10 additional sets for the purpose of bidding for a non-refundable charge of $125.00 per set (allow seven days for shipping and handling after payment has been received by the Architect). END OF SECTION 00010 00010 - 2 -� Instructions to Bidders AIA Document A701 - Electronic Format -` THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES: CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS.ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT MOO N --- „t t i r� t J Copyright 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 2000&5292. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecmion. 1. DEFINITIONS 2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES TABLE OF ARTICLES 5. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6. POST -BID INFORMATION 7. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AIA DOCUMENT A701 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - FOURTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A701-1987 User Document A701.DOC — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 —Page #1 7 F77 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or -Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other- sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 1 A A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. 1.6 ' An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: 2.1.1 The Bidder has read -and -understands -the -Bidding- -Documents and the Bid is made in accordance therewith. 2.1.2 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. _ rfe' ro g� m ra re r rr rriinwrn rtrans red fe tti g a 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1 A The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 COPIES 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. 1.6 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to 2 Sub -bidders or others unless specifically offered in the 1.9 A Sub -bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of instructions to bidders. --' AIA DOCUMENT A701 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - FOURTH EDITION -AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 -THE AMERICAN INS71TUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006.5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to 'i legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiation as noted below. Electronic Format A701-1987 User Document A701.DOC — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #2 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 3.1A In making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above -terms, -the -Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents. 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents --with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub -bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. disapproval -of -a prepesed substitlAien -6ha4 -be ib o sObBti,�on�tems sp��/r7Y'`G&I o , tor � e/r o qaf - ��o� 3fOr�nd" ro ag- .4rch7Y�artal 3.3.3 - If -the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an , Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 ADDENDA 3A.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3A.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 3A.3 No Addenda will be issued later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 3A.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on forts identical to the form included with the Bidding Documents. 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. 4.1.3 Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern. 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. AIA DOCUMENT A701 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS -FOURTH EDITION - AIA -COPYRIGHT 1987 -THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHHINJGTON, D.C., 20006-5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A701-1987 User Document A701.DOC — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #3 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. if no change --� in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without ^� t forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of the Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor, partnership, corporation or other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. 4.2 BID SECURITY 4.2.1 If so stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or supplementary instructions to bidders, each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required, pledging that the Bidder will enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if requited, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all, obligations arising -I thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to famish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Subparagraph 6.2.1. 4.2.2 I€- surety bead -is Fequk@d;4t-9M4-W vgitteaen AJA Doeum@My93I& Bid Read; unless BASPA49R gre►gded is 4he Bidding Beemmeafs, -aced 4he Ememey i8-fu whe exesates4he bead-akehal€-ef4he safety shall affiN-te the 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all Bids have been rejected. 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving -the Bids -and -shall -be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID' 4A.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. 4A.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.. J AIA DOCUMENT A701 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - FOURTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHr 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHrfECfS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHNGTON, D.C., 20006-5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Ibis document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as 1 noted below. Electronic Format A701-1987 User Document: A701.DOC — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page 94 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6.1 OPENING OF BIDS 6.1.1 Unless stated otherwise in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids will be made available to Bidden;. When it has been stated that Bids will be opened privately, an abstract of the same information may, at the discretion of the Owner, be made available to the Bidders within a reasonable time. 6.2 REJECTION OF BIDS 6.2.1 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids, reject a Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or reject a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 Br 3S� tro saqu� . =to; r:sti y w tht ose_ t is a mten ofil a Owner tom a Contract e owest responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests. 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates Altemates'not accepted et the tupe of ;awarding offg jq ConhYeci.'ntay be e,"scepted eat,3he�o�tlon"'of_ttie'Owtet;q� , ror th`e price stipulated /n the proposan InSett wC 'S 3 3 The O►pper- t�3f11 judg-oii o� biro"cii ies onsib/bty b/us pest p rorrtteilco,oeto , equ/pment, rend ability t0 perlomtdc�eomtea tlb o n Ctreet m aysehs/ecto�agdgccepteh%�manrtarlat w"nMir the 1rme hmi specNie rF a Owner sw!!1"be�sa judge,of a Con{Iacfor's responsr6l tfyr ARTICLE 6 POST -BID INFORMATION 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 6.1.1 Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY 6.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 6.3 SUBMITTALS 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: AIA DOCUMENT A701 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - FOURTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A701-1987 User Document: A701.DOC — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10l1/1997 — Page #5 1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers, products and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to famish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents, 6.3.3 Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option, (1) withdraw the Bid, or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. 1 6.3A Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and ArchitecL ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall fitrnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. 7.1.2 If the fuFffifihing of such hea&4 stipalated4s4he- M in the Bid. if thefUMisking Of 9"Ah beeds-is-sequired$RerFeeeipf of bids and befem emeeution of*he 6entmst; the egst-of-sash bends OW-beAdded4e4he-BW-in deteFmieiagGentfar Sum. T/tl# dof�t limJ9 iJng a Hal ep n, s st%�u%t In YJte+Bldd/ng Doc m a nc u e = F�a? 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS 7.2.1 The RiddeF-shag delivee-the fequifed hends4o4he- Gvmef -a" 4atef 4hea gme -days g -the -date -GA execution -of -the Contrast. iT a ve t �ogayeDL%f7ofo EcuhOttotil it e or is to cowmen pnor eretc m response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Subparagraph 7.2.1. 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney -in -fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix ' thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 8.1 FORM TO BE USED 8.1.1 Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. _ A[A DOCUMENT A701 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - FOURTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHRECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. mpyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be rcprodumd without violation until the date of expiration as ',noted below. Electronic Format A701-1987 User Document: A701.DOC — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #6 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00150 SUPPLEMENTARY TO BIDDERS The Supplementary Instructions to Bidders hereinafter specified contain changes, additions, and alterations to the AIA Instruction to Bidders Document A701, 1987 Edition. Where any part of said instructions to bidders is modified, altered, or voided by these Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the unaltered provisions shall remain in full force and effect. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION 2.1.2 Add the following: - --_—_ The Contractor shall visit the site to thoroughly familiarize themself with all existing site and building conditions related to the scope of this project. ARTICLE 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.2 Amend to read as follows: "No substitution to items specified in the Contract Documents shall be allowed, unless submitted in writing by the Contractor with their original Bid Proposal in accordance with Section 00310 and approved in writing by the Architect and Owner." ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCESS 4.1.18 Include fully executed Section 00305, Schedule of Values - Bid Breakdown Form with Bid Submittal. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATIONS OF BIDS 5.2.2 Add the following: Should the successful Bidder refuse to enter into a Contract for Construction or fail to furnish bonds as required under Article 7 - Performance Bond and Material and Labor Payment Bond, the Contract award will be annulled and, at the discretion of the Owner, award may be made to another Bidder whose proposal is acceptable and such Bidder shall fulfill every stipulation embraced herein as if they were the party to whom the first award is made. 5.3.1 Add the following: Bid Surety is not required to be submitted with Bid Proposals. 5.3.2 It is intended that the sum of the Base Bid plus any Alternates or Substitutions accepted at the time of bidding, or intended to be awarded during the Contract Period, shall form the basis for selection of the Contractor. Alternates not accepted at the time of awarding of the Contract may be accepted at the option of the Owner and for the price stipulated in the proposal. 5.3.3 The Owner will judge a Contractor's responsibility by his past performance, organization, equipment, and ability to perform and complete their Contract in a satisfactory and acceptable manner and within the time limit specified. The Owner will be sole judge of a Contractor's responsibility. ARTICLE 6 POST -BID INFORMATION 6.1.2 Add the following Each bidder shall be properly licensed and classified by the State Commission of Business Regulations, Department of Contractors, or similar entity of the State in which this Project is located to do the type of work required under this Contract, and in accordance with current Laws of the State where this Project is located. They shall present satisfactory evidence of licensing and that they are fully prepared with the necessary finance, equipment, materials, and the personnel and that they have been regularly engaged in 00150 - 1 the type of work being let for bid to the full satisfaction of the Owner and the Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 7.1.2 Delete and Substitute the following: The cost of furnishing Performance and Payment Bonds stipulated in the Bidding Documents shall be included in the Bid. 7.2.1 Amend to read -as follows:- - - "The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner prior to execution of the Contract." END OF SECTION 00150 s 00150 - 2 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00220 SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA 1.00 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 1.01 SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA: A. Soil and subsurface investigations have been conducted at site by the Owner's geotechnical engineering I consultant. B. A partial copy of this investigative report including soil boring locations and soil boring log data is enclosed herewith for Bidder review and reference in preparing unit prices for bid proposals. 2.00 INTERPRETATION OF SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA Soil investigation data is provided only for information and the convenience of bidders. The Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Owner's Representative disclaim any responsibility of the accuracy, true location, and extent of the soils investigation that has been prepared by others. They further disclaim responsibility for interpretations of that data by bidders as in projecting soil bearing values, rock profiles, soil stability, and the presence, level, and extent of underground water. END OF SECTION 00220 00220 - 1 BID PROPOSAL FORM Name of Bidder: —' Address: Date: To: Flying J Inc. 50 West 990 South Brigham City, Utah 84302 Gentlemen: DIVISION 0 SECTION 00300 BID FORM The Undersigned, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the Flying J Travel Plaza at ST. Lucie, Florida having examined the Drawings and Specifications and related documents and the site of the proposed work and being familiar with all the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project including the availability of labor, hereby propose to furnish everything necessary for and incidental to the completion of said work in strict compliance with the Contact Documents prepared therefore by Wieser Architects, within the time set forth and for the amounts stated below. These amounts, when accepted are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the Contract Documents of which this Proposal is a part. ', I/We acknowledge receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Date Received: I/We propose to furnish everything necessary for and incidental to the satisfactory completion of all work called for, shown, or implied from the Contract Documents, Drawings, and Specifications for the following stipulated sum. BASE BID: DOLLARS ($ ) All Allowances are included in this Base Bid Figure along with profit, overhead, and General Conditions Costs for all Allowance Items. (Attach cost breakdown showing cost of all various branches of the Work in its entirety included in the amount shown above for a complete project including all labor, equipment, and materials.) For your consideration, We further propose to provide the following Alternate Bid Items, as indicated in the Contract Documents for the following total amounts to be added to or deducted from the above Base Bid amount. Base Bid shall incorporate sufficient completion time to accommodate any combination of the following alternates. Alternate No. 1; Description Here Add/Deduct:$ Total for Alternates: Add/Deduct:$ The Contractor guarantees to complete the work within calendar days from date shown on Owner's Notice to Proceed. Normal weather delays are included. Time is of the essence. E Should the Owner elect or require changes in the Scope of this Work, the Contractor proposes to limit the total mark-up to actual costs of the changes in the work for profit, overhead, extended costs of general conditions, etc., of the Contractor and Sub -Contractors as follows: For changes in the Work performed by Contractor's own forces; %. 00300 - 1 For changes in the Work performed through the Contractor's Sub -Contractors' (or Suppliers') forces; %. (Of _ this limit, % is General Contractor mark-up, and % is Sub -Contractor mark-up). The Contractor shall commence the work within ten (10) days of receipt of Notice to Proceed issued by the Owner and shall substantially complete the entire contract within the time specified in this proposal. Time is of the essence of this contract and the Contractor agrees that for each and every day any portion of the work which remains unfinished after the time specified in this proposal, or extended by the Owner for its completion, the Owner shall deduct and retain out of the money which may be due or become due said Contractor under this Agreement, liquidated compensatory damages as specified in Article 8.2.4 in the Supplemental General Conditions. In case there shall not be sufficient money due or to become due said Contractor under his Contract, then said Contractor shall pay to the Owner the sums. In view of the difficulty of estimating damages, said sums are hereby agreed upon, fixed and determined by the parties hereto as liquidated compensatory damages that the Owner will suffer by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time agreed upon, and such daily compensation shall apply to each portion of said work after the time herein agreed upon for its completion. The Contractor shall notify all Sub -Contractors of the completion date and liquidated damages clause. This proposal shall remain in full force and effect for not less than sixty (60) days following and after the date for opening of proposals. Attached is the required cost breakdown showing cost of all various branches of the work. Attached is a full and complete Proposed Substitution Listing (Section 00310) for your consideration. Title: Bidders Name: Corporate Seal Bidders Address: License Type: License Number: END OF SECTION 00300 I 00300 - 2 BID BREAK DOWN FORM NAME OF BIDDER: DIVISION 0 SECTION 00305 BID BREAK DOWN FORM BASE BID AMOUNT: ALTERNATES: 1. 2. 3. 4. The following portion of this form is to be completed by listing each branch of work as listed below. (DO NOT LUMP MULTIPLE BRANCHES TOGETHER.) This form is to be confidential between the bidder and the owner. The purpose of this form is to help the owner evaluate the bids. This form shall not be used in any way to negotiate pricing between bidders, but shall be used to find possible error which may occur during bidding. Branch Description Amount 00600 Bonds & Insurance 00700 Taxes 01020 Allowances 01050 Field Engineering 01060 Permits 01200 Project Meeting 01410 Testing Lab Services 01500 Cons. Facil. & Temp. Control (01510 Temporary Utilities) 01540 Security 01700 Contract Closeout 01710 Cleanup 02050 Demolition 02110 Site Clearing 02210 Rough Grading 02220 Excavation & Backfilling 02281 Termite Control 02401 Dewatering 00305 - 1 02444 Chain Link Fences and Gates 02480 Landscaping 02513 Asphalt Paving 02515 Concrete Paving 02576 Pavement Sealing - 02577--Pavement Markings 02711 Natural Gas Systems 02713 Water Systems 02717 Fire Water Systems 02721 Storm Sewer Systems 02722 Sanitary Sewer Systems 02725 Trench Drain Systems 02742 Grease Interceptors 02810 Site Electrical Service 02821 Telephone Service Lines 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Reinforcement 03300 Cast -in place Concrete Total (03302 Interior Concrete) (03303 Exterior Concrete) 03370 Concrete Curing 04210 Brick Masonry 04223 Split -face Unit Masonry 04510 Masonry Cleaning 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joist 05320 Metal Decks 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05500 Misc. Metal and Metal Fabrications 06200 Finish Carpentry 06400 Architectural Woodwork 07112 Bituminous Waterproofing 07150 Dampproofing 00305 - 2 07200 Insulation 07322 Concrete Tile Roofing 07420 Composite Fascia Panels -- 07464 Vinly Siding and Soffits 07500 Elastomeric Sheet Roofing 07600 Flashing & Sheet Metal _ 07631 Gutter and Dounspouts 07900 Sealants 08100 Steel Doors and Frames 08210 Wood Doors 08360 Upward Acting Sectional Doors 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefront 08500 Metal Windows 08700 Building Hardware 08823 InsulatingGlass and Glazing 09250 Gypsum Drywall 09300 Tile 09510 Acoustical Ceilings Systems 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpeting 09900 Painting 09950 Wall Coverings 10440 Signage 10521 Portable Fire Extinguisher 10800 Toilet & Bath Accessories 11301 Oil/Water Separator 11140 Service Station Equipment 11145 Fuel Systems Total (11146 Above Ground) (11147 Below Ground) (13413 Underground Storage Tanks) 11400 Food Service Equipment 00305 - 3 13411 Propane Systems 14300 Hoists & Lifts 15400 Plumbing 15500 Fire Protection 15800 HVAC _ - -- 16050 Electrical 17100 Profit & Overhead 41003 Project Supervision 41004 Subsistence 41005 Field Personnel 41006 Weather Protection Preparation 41008 Small Tools 41009 Freight End of Section 00305 J 00305 - 4 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00310 SUBSTITUTION LISTING PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION LISTING TO: Flying J Inc. (hereafter called the "Owner") 1. Pursuant to bidding requirements for the Work titled: Flying J Travel Plaza, ST. Lucie, Florida The Contract Sum "Base Bid" proposed by the undersigned on the bid proposal form is for the Work as shown on the Drawings, described in the Specifications, and otherwise defined in the Contract Documents. However, the - - undersigned proposes the following substitutions for the Owner's consideration. Should the Owner accept any or all of the proposed substitutions, the bidder's proposed Contract Sum "Base Bid" will be reduced by the amount shown. 2. Specified Drawing Proposed Total Product Number Reduction or or Spec Proposed in Contract Material: Section: Substitution: Sum: BIDDER: PROVIDE SIGNATURE IDENTICAL TO THAT SHOWN ON THE BID FORM (ON EACH PAGE SUBMITTED). END OF SECTION 00310 00310-1 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum AIA Document A101 - Electronic Format THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQIIFNCES:CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHe IICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMBU MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. _ The 1997 Edition of AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by referenee. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified This doarmenthas been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1962,1967,1974,1977, copyright 1987 the American institute of Architects,173S New YorkAvmue, N.W., Washington, D.C., 20006-Ml Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws ofthe United States and will be subjectto legalprosecution. AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year ofNineteen Hundred and BETWEEN the Owner. (Name andaddreer) and the Contractor. (Name and ad*asr) The Project is: (None and location) The Architect is: (None cold address) The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below. AIA DOCUMENT A101 - OWNER -CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - TWELFTH EDITION' AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTI7ITIE OF ARC1i1TECT5, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006.5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution Thin document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Farmers A101-1987 User Document Al01.CON — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #1 ARTICLE 1 i THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall execute the entire Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others, or as follows: ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 3.1 - The date of commencement is the data from which the Contract Time of Paragraph 3.2 is measured, and shall be the date of this Agreement; as first written above, unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be foxed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (hunt the dope ofe mmencemen4 V71 donfrom the date of thisdgreement, or, Vapplfcabk, state that the date will befhaed In a mike toproaeed) Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed issued by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days before commencing the Work to permit the timely Sling of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. 3.2 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than (Invert the aakndar date or manber of aakttdm days xdkr the date of eonanencement Also haunt any requirements for earlier Subsiantial Completion of certain Pardons ofthe Work tfnotstated e1wwhere hs the Contract Docueens) , subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. 0mrlProvidonb Ifany for liquidated damages relating tofaduve to cawlete on thee) ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract the Contract Sum of Dollars (S ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the mmnbem or other idemjfrcation of accepted ahernates If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach ascheduk of mch other alternates showing the amoumfor each and the date until which that amount Is wild) 4.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows: ARTICLE 5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS AIA DOCUMENT AI01 • OWNER -CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1987 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format AI01-1987 User Document A101.CON — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #2 5.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: 5.3 Provided an Application for Payment is received by theArchitectnot later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make — - payment to the Contractor not later than the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fused above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment SA Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment i 5.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment 5.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: 5.6.1. Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the Schedule of Values, less retainage of percent ( a/o) . Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute may be included as provided in Subparagraph 73.7 of the General Conditions even though the Contract Sum has not yet been adjusted by Change Order, 5.6.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of percent ( %); 5.6.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner, and 5.6A Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of the General Conditions. 5.7 • The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Paragraph 5.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: 5.7.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to percent ( %) of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work and unsettled claims; and 5.7.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions. 5.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: (7fIt Is intended prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work to reduce or limit the retainage msulengfrom the percentages inserted in Subparagraphs 5.6.1 and5.6.2 above, andthis Is not esplalnedeLsewhere in the Contract Document; insert here provistomfor such reduction or ltmitodon.) ARTICLE 6 FINAL PAYMENT Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when (1) AIA DOCUMENT AI01 • OWNER -CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1987 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF -' ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A101-1987 User Document A101.CON — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #3 the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of the General Conditions and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; and (2) a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect; such final payment shall be made by the Owner not more than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. Ansert rate of burrestagreed upom trany) Wavy laze and requbemenu under the Federal Duth in Lending Ac4 similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the Owners and Conirwor!' principal plains of burhwA the location of the Project and elsewhere may r�ect the validiy of 1Ms provision Legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or modDfleadonx and also regarding regabementssuch as written dlwlosnves or xvtvws.) 7.3 Other provisions: ARTICLE 8 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. 8.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 9 OF CONTRACT 9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows:. 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AIA Document A101, 1987 Edition. 9.1.2 • The General Conditions are the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1987 Edition. 9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated , and are as follows: Document Title Pages 9.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 9.1.3, and are as follows: (Either list the Spedficadons here or refer to an erh Air atuwhedto this Agreement) Document Title Pages 9.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated unless a different date is shown below: (Ether list the Drawings ten or refer to an eshibb anached to this Agreement) Number Date Pages 9.1.6 The addenda, if any, are as follows: AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNERLONTRACrOR AGIMEMENT • TWELFrH EDMON • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1987 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE. OF ARCHrrECIS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., wAsHNGTON, D.C., 200065292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This doeument was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A101-1987 User Document A101.CON — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #4 Number Date Pages Portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements ate not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9. 9.1.7 Other documents, if any, forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: (LLtthexmryaddltlonddocwmwwhichax Weededtofarmpanofdw ContractDocwmntx The Cemral Condldonsprovide that bhUbrgrcqulxmentr such= adxrtWment or brvttalton to W btstruettonr to Bidders_smVilr fornss and the Cma adMi blare not partof the Contract Doeunrntr unless enumerated to da, Agxement-77#eyA=Ubetbredhexunl ifbuendedtobepartofdmCmm=tDomnew.) This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year fast written above and is executed in at least three original copies of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner. P e, n (S7gmme) (Prbaed norm and NQe) CONTRACTOR 94nalws) (PrWedmmne and ale) AIA DOCUMENT A101 • OWNER -CONTRACTOR AGREEWNT • TWELFTH EDITION • AIA • COPYRIGHT 1987 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C, 20006.5292. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and _ is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of j aspiration as noted below. Electronic Format A101-1987 User Document: A101.CON — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #5, e "..ti Performance Bond AIA Document A312 - Electronic Format THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES: CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. Any singular reference to Contract, Surety, Owner or Other Parr Shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): OWNER (Name and Address): CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: Description (Name and Location): BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: Modifications to this Bond: CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company: Name and Title: (Corporate Seal) (Any additional signatures appear on the last page) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY - Name, Address and Telephone) AGENTorBROKER: SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business) [ )None SURETY Company: Signature: _ Name and Title: [ ] See Page (Corporate Seal) OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other AIA DOCUMENT A312- PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. - AIA 8• THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292 - THIRD PRINTING - MARCH 1987. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A312-1984 User Document: A312.CON -- 9/10/1997. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #1 party): 1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their hews, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1. 3 If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Sub -paragraph 3.1; and 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: 4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors; or 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: .1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. 5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction AIA DOCUMENT A312• PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. • AIA 0- THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292 • THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A312-1984 User Document: A312.CON -- 9110/1997. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 -- Page #2 Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for: page. 6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under -Paragraph 4; and - - - 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. 7 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors. 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the .minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted here from and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall. be deemed incorporated -herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12 DEFINITIONS 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Signature: Company: (Corporate Seal) Name and Title: SURETY AiA DOCUMENT A312• PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. • AIA @- THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292 • THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. „ Electronic Format A312-1984 User Document: A312.CON - 9/10/1997. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/l997 -- Page #3 Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: _ Name and Title: AIA DOCUMENT A312• PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. • AIA 8- THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292 • THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A312-1984 User Document: A312.CON -- 9/10/1997. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 -- Page #4 C Payment Bond AIA Document A312 - Electronic Format CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): OWNER (Name and Address): CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: Description (Name and Location): BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: Modifications to this Bond: SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): [ ] None CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: Signature: Signature:_ Name and Title: Name and Title: (Any additional signatures appear on the last page) (FOR INFORMATION ONLY- Name, Address and Telephone) [ ] See Page (Corporate Seal) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): AIA DOCUMENT A312- PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND - DECEMBER 1984 ED. - AIA ®- THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292 - THIRD PRINTING - MARCH 1987. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A312-1984 User Document: A312.CON -- 9/10/1997. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 -- Page #5 I I The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor: 2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity whose claim, demand, lien or suit is for the payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default. 3 With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. F' 4 The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: 4.1 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor: .1 Have furnished written notice to the Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed; and .2 Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and .3 Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor. 5 If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is sufficient compliance. 6 When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: 6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. 6.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. 8 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this AIA DOCUMENT A312• PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. • AIA 8- THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292 • THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A312-1984 User Document: A312.CON -- 9/10/1997. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 -- Page #6 Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 11 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent - jurisdiction in the -location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2.3, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) fast occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with- said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS: 14 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 15 DEFINITIONS — —15.1 -Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. 15.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: (Corporate Seal) i r r i AIA DOCUMENT A312• PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND • DECEMBER 1984 ED. • AIA 0- THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF 1. ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C., 20006-5292 • THIRD PRINTING • MARCH 1987. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be - reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A312-1984 User Document: A312.CON -- 9/10/1997. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 -- Page #7 APPUGATIWAdMERiiFIGArE FVK P%.Affi CODiSTRUMONMANAGER=ADVISER-EDIMN _.- ALA DOCUMENT G702/CMa PAGE ONE OF PAGES TO OWNER: FROM CONTRACTOR: PROJECT: APPLICATION NO: PERIOD TO: PROJECT NO: CONTRACT DATE: Distribution to: =OWNER =CONSTRUCTION MANAGER =ARCHITECT =CONTRACTOR VIA CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: CONTRACT FOR: VIA ARCHITECT: CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, Appplication is made for payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract Continuation Sheet, AIA Document G703, is attached. 1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM $ 2. Net change by Change Orders $ 3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line I t 2) $ 0.00 4. TOTAL COMPLETED & STORED TO DATE $ (Column G on G702) 5. RETAINAGE: a. % of Completed Work (Column D + E on G703) b._ % of Stored Material (Column F on 0703) Total Retainage (Lines 5a+5b or Total in Column I of G703) 6. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE (Line 4 less Line 5 Total) 7. LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT (Line 6 from prior Certificate) 8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE 9. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE (Line 3 less Line 6) information and belief the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and that current payment shown herein is now due. CONTRACTOR: am State of: County of: Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of Notary Public: My Commission expires: CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT $ 0.00 In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on onsite observations and the data comprising this application, the Construction Manager and Architect certify to the Owner that to best of their knowledge, information and belief the Work has progressed as indicated, the quality $ of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to $ 0.001 payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. $ 0.00 AMOUNT CERTIFIED ................$ CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY ADDITIONS DEDUCTIOM Total changes approved in previous months by Owner Total approved this Month TOTAL $0.00 $0.00 (Attach explanation ifamount certlfied differsfrom the amount appliedfor. Initial all figures on this Application and on the Continuation Sheet that changed to conform to the amount certified.) CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: By: Date: ARCHITECT: By: Date: This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to the Contractor named herein. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any NET CHANGES b Change Order 0.00 rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract. A DOCUMENT G7021CMa-APPLICATION D R A I F R PAYMENT - CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMANAGER-ADVISER EDITION - 1992 EDIT 199 D Ma-1992 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1745 NEW YORKAVE., N.W.. WASHINGTON, DC 200Dri5292. Users may obtain validation of this docoment by requesting of the licensee a completed AIA Dowment D401-Cenifirele of Authenticity. APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT AIA DOCUMENT G702 PAGE ONE OF PAGES TO OWNER: PROJECT: APPLICATION NO: Distribution to: =OWNER PERIOD TO: =ARCHITECT FROM CONTRACTOR: VIA ARCHITECT: =CONTRACTOR PROJECT NOS: _ CONTRACTFOR: CONTRACT DATE: CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Application is made for payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract Continuation Sheet, AIA Document 0703, is attached. 1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM .......... ................ S 2. Net change by Change Orders ........... ................ S 3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 t 2) .............. $ 4. TOTAL COMPLETED & STORED TO DATE .......... S (Column 0 on 0703) 5. RETAINAGE: a._%of Completed Work (Column D +E on 0703) b._% of Stored Material (Column F on 0703) Total Retainage (Lines Sa+ 5b or Total in Column I of G703) ........ ................ S 6. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE .................... S (Line 4 Less Line 5 Total) 7. LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT (Line 6 from prior Certificate) .............S S. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE ............................ $ 9. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE .....S (Line 3 less Line 6) 0.00 0.00 CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY ADDITIONS DEDUCTIONS Total changes approved in previous months by Owner Total approved this Month TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractoes knowledge, information and belief the Work covered by thisApplication for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work for which previous Certificate for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and that current payment shown herein is now due. By. Date: State of: County of: Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of Notary Public: My Commission expires: ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on on -site observations and the data comprising the application, the Architect certifies to the Owner that to the best of the Arohiteefs knowledge, information and belief the Work has progressed as indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. AMOUNT CERTIFIED ........... S (Attach explanation if amount certified differrfrom the amount applied Initial allfigures on this Application and on the Continuation Sheet that are changed to conform to the amount caBfied.) ARCHITECT: Date: This Certificate is not negotiable. TheAMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to the Contractor named herein. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are without NET CHANGES b Change Order 50.00 prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract. AN DOCUMENT 0702• APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT• 1992 EDITION • AK - 01992 � TNEAMERrANNS1iMEOFARCIrnWM,1735NEWYORKAVF-.KW..WASNINGTON,DC3a99&= Users may obtain validation of this document by requesting of the license a completed ALA Document D401- Certification of Document's Authenticity CONTINUATION SHEET AIA Document G702, APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYM Contractors signed certification is attached. In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. Use Column I on Contracts where variable reteiaage for line items may apply. AM APPLICAHUN NO: APPLICATION DATE: PERIOD TO: ARCHMCTS PROJECT NO: PAGE OF PAGES A B C D I E F 0 H I ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION OF WORK SdF ULED VALUE WORKCOMPLETED MATERIALS PRESENTLY STORED (NOT IN DORE) TOTAL CONG42 FD AND STORED TO DATE (DtE+F) % (0+C) BALANCE TOFiNISH (C-0) ' RETAINAGE (IF VARIABLE RATE) FROM PREVIOUS APPLICATION (D+E) THIS PERIOD GRAND TOTALS AIA DOCUMENT G703 • CONTINUATION SHEET FOR 0702. 1992 EDRION • AIA • 0 1992-THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORKAVE, N.W., WASHINOMN, DO 2DD0ae29Z r Certification of Substantial Completion AIA Document G704 - ,� Electronic Format OWNER [] ARCHITECT [ ] CONTRACTOR [] FIELD [ ] OTHER [ ] it THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS ,_- COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENP D401. �I t PROJECT: •, II� (Nameanda&d=) P� TO OWNER (Nmne and addrecr) DATE OF ISSUANCE: PROJECT OR DESIGN PORTION SHALL INCLUDE: PROJECT NO.: CONTRACTFOR CONTRACT DATE: TO CONTRACTOR (Name andaddmu) The Work performed under this Contract has been reviewed and found, W the Architect's best knowledge, information and belief, to be substantially complete. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby established as which is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below `A D& of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. a tatture to include any items on such es not atter the ,�• responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. {, ARCHITECT BY DATE .� The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within days from the above Date of JSubstantial Completion CONTRACTOR BY DATE The Owner accepts the Work or designated portion thereof as substantially complete and will assume full possession thereof at (time) on (date). OWNER BY DATE IS responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, lieat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance AIA DOCUMENT G704 - CERTIFICATION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION - 1992 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1992 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGION, D.C., 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws band is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format G704 - 1992 User Document G704.CON — 9/24/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #1 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00610 j LIEN WAIVER FORMS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 CONDITIONAL LIEN WAIVER AND RELEASE FORMS: A. The General Contractor shall be responsible to compile and submit to the Owner, Conditional Lien Waiver and Release Forms. Each month the Contractor shall submit Conditional Lien Waivers and Release Forms, which shall equal the previous month's draw. The Conditional Lien Waiver and Release Form shall accompany the Sl Payment Application Form. B. The General Contractor shall submit Conditional Lien Waiver and Release Forms for all Subcontractors, ' Materialmen, and Suppliers. This shall also include City, County or Privately Owned Utility Companies, which have performed work on the project for the General Contractor., 1.02 FINAL LIEN WAIVER AND RELEASE FORMS: The General Contractor shall be responsible to compile and submit Final Lien Waivers and Releases, which shall accompany the Final Application for Payment Form (less 10% percent Retention). The General Contractor shall 4provide a Final Lien Waiver and Release Form from everyone that has provided work or materials on the project. 2,00 FORMS i� 2.01 SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS: Attached herein and labeled Subcontractor/Supplier Conditional Lien Waiver and Release. ._ 2.02 GENERAL CONTRACTORS: Attached herein and labeled General Contractor Conditional Lien Waiver and Release Form. 2.03 FINAL, SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIERS: Attached herein and labeled, Subcontractors/Suppliers Final Lien Waiver and Release. 2.04 FINAL, GENERAL CONTRACTOR: Attached herein and labeled, General Contractor Final Lien Waiver and Release. 3.00 EXECUTION ` v 3.01 SUBMITTAL PROCESS: A. Lien Waivers and Release Forms shall be submitted for the first payment. At the same time the second application for Payment Request is submitted to the Owner's Representative. i B. Lien Waiver and Release Forms shall be submitted for each Application for Payment, for the previous payment. 3.02 FINAL LIEN WAIVER AND RELEASE SUBMITTAL: A. The General Contractor shall at the same time of his or her Final Application for Payment (less 10% percent retention), submit a Final Lien Waiver and Release from each Subcontractor, Subcontract Materialman, and Supplier, who services or materials were used on the project. I' B. The Final Lien Waiver and Release shall accompany the Final Application for Payment (less 10% percent retention), and shall be submitted through the Owner's Representative. I 00610 - 1 END OF SECTION 00610 �r GENERAL CONTRACTOR FINAL LIEN WAIVER AND RELEASE The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of payment in full or all work performed on the below listed project and hereby stipulates and agreed as follows: 1. The undersigned hereby waives any and all claims and rights to lien the Project hereafter described that the_ _ _— _ undersigned,-its-officers,—employees,—agentsand-suppliers how have or may hereafter have against CFJ Properties, - Flying J Inc., and its affiliates including PDG INC., their contractors, subcontractors and materialmen, arising from services or labor performed at or upon the Project or from materials supplied to the Project or to any person or entity _ for incorporation into or use at the Project and which labor service or materials were provided prior to the date hereof. 2. The undersigned hereby agrees to release and extinguish any and all liens, rights to liens, claims and liabilities that the undersigned now has or hereafter may have, foreseeable or unforeseeable (i) CFJ Properties, Flying J Inc., PDG INC., �-- and their contractors, subcontractors, and materialmen (ii) the Project (iii) materials provided by the undersigned, if _ any, to the Project or for incorporation into or use at the Project or, fiv) the Owner of the Project, CFJ Properties, and Flying J Inc. arising from of relating to services or labor performed by the undersigned at or provided to the Project or from materials supplied to the Project or to any person or entity for incorporation into or use at the Project and which labor, services or materials were provided prior to the date hereof. 3. The undersigned hereby agrees to execute and file such release instruments as CFJ Properties, and Flying J Inc., PDG INC., the Project and the Owner of the Project to be released of record so that the Project shall be free and clear of all claims, liens and encumbrances of the undersigned arising from matters existing prior to the date hereof. 4. The undersigned agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless CFJ Properties, and Flying J Inc., from and against I� any and all claims, suits, liens, judgements, expenses (including reasonable attorney's fees) and losses arising from the undersigned's failure to pay its subcontractors or suppliers for services, labor or materials provided to the Project prior to the date hereof and from the undersigned's failure to release and discharge all liens and encumbrances required to be released pursuant to this agreement. 5. For purposes of this agreement the term Project shall mean the IN WITNESS, this Waiver and Release is made Its authorized representative of Company 00610 - 2 P i GENERAL CONTRACTOR CONDITIONAL LIEN WAIVER AND RELEASE FOR AND IN CONSIDERATION of the payment of ($ ), in hand paid to the undersigned, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the undersigned hereby stipulated and agrees as follows: 1. The undersigned hereby waives any and all claims and rights to lien the Project hereafter described that the undersigned, its officers, employees, agents and suppliers now have or may hereafter have against CFJ Properties, Flying J Inc., and its affiliates including PDG INC., their contractors, subcontractors and materialmen, arising from services or labor performed at or upon the Project or from materials supplied to the Project or to any person or entity for incorporation into or use at the Project and which labor, service or materials were provided prior to the date hereof. ( 2. The undersigned hereby agrees to release and extinguish any and all liens, rights to liens, claims and liabilities that the —r undersigned now has or hereafter may have, foreseeable or unforeseeable (i) CFJ Properties, Flying J Inc., PDG INC., and their contractors, subcontractors, and materialmen GO the Project (III) materials provided by the undersigned, if any, to the Project or for incorporation into or use at the Project or, (iv) the Owner of the Project, CFJ Properties, and Flying J Inc. arising from or relating to services or labor performed by the undersigned at or provided to the Project or from materials supplied to the Project or to any person or entity for incorporation into or use at the Project and which labor, services or materials were provided prior to the date hereof. 3. The undersigned hereby agrees to execute and file such release instruments as CFJ Properties, and Flying J Inc., PDG INC., the Project and the Owner of the Project to be released of record so that the Project shall be free and clear of all claims, liens and encumbrances of the undersigned arising from matters existing prior to the date hereof. I 4. The undersigned agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless CFJ Properties, and Flying J Inc., from and against ' any and all claims, suits, liens, judgements, expenses (including reasonable attorney's fees) and losses arising from the undersigned's failure to pay its subcontractors or suppliers for services, labor or materials provided to the Project t� prior to the date hereof and from the undersigned's failure to release and discharge all liens and encumbrances required to be released pursuant to this agreement. 5. For purposes of this agreement the term Project shall mean the 4 IN WITNESS, this Waiver and Release is made this day of 4 19 iI Company Its authorized representative 00610 - 3 SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER FINAL LIEN WAIVER AND RELEASE The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of payment in full for all work performed on the below listed project and hereby stipulates and agreed as follows: 1. The undersigned hereby waives any and all claims and rights to lien the Project hereafter _described that the -- undersigned, -its -officers, —employees, —agents -and suppliers now have or may hereafter have against CFJ Properties, Flying J Inc., and its affiliates, their contractors, subcontractors and materialmen, arising from services or labor performed at or upon the Project or from materials supplied to the Project or to any person or entity for incorporation into or use at the Project. 2. The undersigned hereby agrees to release and extinguish any and all liens, rights to liens, claims and liabilities that the undersigned now has or hereafter may have, foreseeable or unforeseeable (i) CFJ Properties, Flying J Inc., and its affiliates, their contractors, subcontractors, and materialmen (ii) the Project (iii) materials provided by the undersigned, if any, to the Project or for incorporation into or use at the Project or, (iv) the Owner of the Project arising from or relating to services or labor performed by the undersigned at or provided to the Project or from materials supplied to the Project or to any person or entity for incorporation into or use at the Project. 3. The undersigned hereby agrees to execute and file such release instruments as CFJ Properties, Flying J Inc., the Project and the Owner of the Project shall be entirely released of record so that the Project shall be free and clear of all claims, liens and encumbrances of the undersigned arising from matters existing prior to the date hereof. 4. The undersigned agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless CFJ Properties, and Flying J Inc., and its affiliates, and the Owner of the Project from and against any and all claims, suits, liens, judgements, expenses (including reasonable attorney's fees) and losses arising from the undersigned's failure to pay its subcontractors or suppliers for services, labor or materials provided to the Project and from the undersigned's failure to release and discharge all liens and encumbrances required to be released pursuant to this agreement. 5. For purposes of this agreement the term Project shall mean the following: IN WITNESS, this Waiver and Release is made this day of 19 By Its authorized representative 00610 - 4 SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER CONDITIONAL LIEN WAIVER AND RELEASE (During the Course of Construction) i FOR AND IN CONSIDERATION of the payment of ja ), in hand paid to the undersigned, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged but subject to final payment by the bank upon which the draft or check is drawn, the undersigned hereby stipulates and agrees as follows: 1. The undersigned hereby waives any and all claims and rights to lien the Project hereafter described that the —ji undersigned, its officers, employees, agents and suppliers now have or may hereafter have against CFJ Properties, y Flying J Inc., and its affiliates, their contractors, subcontractors and materialmen, arising from services or labor performed at or upon the Project or from materials supplied to the Project or to any person or entity for incorporation into or use at the Project and which labor, service or materials were provided prior to the date of the undersigned's request for payment. 2. The undersigned hereby agrees to release and extinguish any and all liens, rights to liens, claims and liabilities that the undersigned now has or hereafter may have, foreseeable or unforeseeable (i) CFJ Properties, Flying J Inc., and its affiliates, their contractors, subcontractors, and materialmen (ii) the Project (iii) materials provided by the undersigned, if any, to the Project or for incorporation into or use at the Project or, (iv) the Owner of the Project arising from or relating to services or labor performed by the undersigned at or provided to the Project or from materials supplied to the Project or to any person or entity for incorporation into or use at the Project and which labor, services or materials were provided prior to the date of the undersigned's request for payment. 3. The undersigned hereby agrees to execute and file such release instruments as CFJ Properties, and Flying J Inc., and the Owner of the Project may request from time to time to be released of record so that the Project shall be free and clear of all claims, liens and encumbrances of the undersigned arising from matters existing prior to the date of the undersigned's request for payment. 4. The undersigned agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless CFJ Properties, and Flying J Inc., and its affiliates and the Owner of the Project from and against any and all claims, suits, liens, judgements, expenses (including reasonable attorney's fees) and losses arising from the undersigned's failure to pay its subcontractors or suppliers for services, labor or materials provided to the Project prior to the date of the payment request and from the undersigned's failure !' to release and discharge all liens and encumbrances required to be released pursuant to this agreement. r 5. For purposes of this agreement the term Project shall mean the following: IN WITNESS, this Waiver and Release is made this day of , 19 ++' Its authorized representative I -1 00610 - 5 SU BCONTRACTORISUPPLIER LIEN WAIVER AND RELEASE The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of payment in full for all work_ performed on_the _below listed project and_ — -hereby stipulates -and agreed -as follows: — 1. The undersigned hereby waives any and all claims and rights to lien the Project hereafter described that the undersigned, its officers, employees, agents and suppliers now have or may hereafter have against CFJ Properties, Flying J Inc., and its affiliates, their contractors, subcontractors and materialmen, arising from services or labor performed at or upon the Project or from materials supplied to the Project or to any person or entity for incorporation I' into or use at the Project and which labor, service or materials were provided prior to the date hereof. 2. The undersigned hereby agrees to release and extinguish any and all liens, rights to liens, claims and liabilities that the undersigned now has or hereafter may have, foreseeable or unforeseeable (i) CFJ Properties, Flying J Inc., and its affiliates, their contractors, subcontractors, and materialmen (ii) the Project (iii) materials provided by the undersigned, if any, to the Project or for incorporation into or use at the Project or, (iv) the Owner of the Project arising from or relating to services or labor performed by the undersigned at or provided to the Project or from materials supplied to the Project or to any person or entity for incorporation into or use at the Project and which labor, service or materials Bwere provided prior to the date hereof. 3. The undersigned hereby agrees to execute and file such release instruments as CFJ Properties, Flying J Inc., the Project and the Owner of the Project shall be entirely released of record so that the Project shall be free and clear of all claims, liens and encumbrances of the undersigned arising from matters existing prior to the date hereof. 4. The undersigned agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless CFJ Properties, and Flying J Inc., and its affiliates, 1� and the Owner of the Project from and against any and all claims, suits, liens, judgements, expenses (including ` reasonable attorney's fees) and losses arising from the undersigned's failure to pay its subcontractors or suppliers for services, labor or materials provided to the Project and from the undersigned's failure to release and discharge all liens and encumbrances required to be released pursuant to this agreement. `. 5. For purposes of this agreement the term Project shall mean the following: 1 . IN WITNESS, this Waiver and Release is made this day of 19 Company Its authorized representative I 00610 - 6 n J �a General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201 - Electronic Format q�.—. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS G COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF Tins ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. .� This document has been approved and endorsed by the Associated General Contractors of America - Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1927, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue N.W., Washington D.C. 20006-5292. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the 'copyright laws ofthe United States and will be subject to legal prosecutions. r TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 8. T1ME 2. OWNER 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3. CONTRACTOR 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND '= PROPERTY 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE. CONTRACT 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS ° 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK SEPARATE CONTRACTORS �i V CHANGES IN THE WORK l . }� AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiation as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Document: NEWA201.DOC—10/10/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #1 INDEX (', Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 4.2.3, 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.2, 4.3.9, 8.3.1,10.1.4, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Addenda 1.1.1, 3.11 Additional Costs, Claims for 4.3.6, 4.3.7, 4.3.9, 6.1.1,10.3 Additional Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 9.8.2, 12.2.1,13.5 Additional Time, Claims for 4.3.6, 4.3.8, 4.3.9, 8.3.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 3.3.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13, 4.5.1 Allowances 3.9 All-risk Insurance 11.3.1.1 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.7, 9.2, 93, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 11.1.3,14.2.4 Approvals 2.4, 3.3.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 3.12.4 through 3.12.8, 3.18.3, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 11.3.1.4, 13.4.2, 13.5 Arbitration 4.1.4, 4.32, 4.3.4, 4.4.4, 4.5, 8.3.1, 10.1.2, 11.3.9,11.3.10 Architect 4.1 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.4, 3.12.6, 4.2, 4.3.2, 4.3.6, 4.4, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.6, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5. 9.6.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1,13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 3.3.3, 3.12.8, 3.12.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.2, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.6 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 2.4, 9.8.2, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract 42, 4.3.6, 4.3.7, 4.4, 9.4, 9.5 Architect's Approvals 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.10.2, 3.12.6, 3.12.8, 3.18.3, 4.2.7 Architect's Authority to Reject Work 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.1.2,12.2.1 Architects Copyright 1.3 Architect's Decisions 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13.4.3.2, 4.3.6, 4.4.1, 4.4.4, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 10.1.2, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Architect's Inspections 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Architect's Instructions 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.8, 4.3.7. 7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2 Architect's Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.7 Architect's On -Site Observations 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1, 13.5 Architect's Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect's Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 3.12.11, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.12, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7.3.4, 9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 Architects Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7 Architects Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architects Site Visits 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Asbestos 10.1 Attomeys' Fees 3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.1.4 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 5.2.1, 11.4.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance 11.3.2 Bonds, Lien 9.10.2 Bonds, Performance and Payment 7.3.6.4, 9.10.3. 11.3.9, 11.4 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization. 1.4 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.2 Certificates for Payment 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 3.12.11, 13.5.4 Certificates of Insurance 9.3.2, 9.10.2,11.1.3 Change Orders 1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.8.2.4, 3.11, 4.2.8, 4.3.3, 5.2.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4,11.3.9,12.1.2 Change Orders, Definition of 72.1 Changes 7.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 10.1.3 Claim, Definition of 43.1 Claims and Disputes 43, 4.4, 4.5, 6.2.5, 8.3.2, 9.3.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.4,10.1.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 45.6 Claims for Additional Cost 4.3.6, 43.7, 4.3.9, 6.1.1,10.3 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.6, 4.3.8, 4.3.9, 8.3.2 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 43.6 Claims for Damages 3.18, 4.3.9, 6.1.1, 6.2.5, 8.3.2, 9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Claims Subject to Arbitration 4.3.2, 4.4.4, 4.5.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 13.7 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.1.2, 2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 4.3.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 3.9.1 4.2.4, 5.2.1 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 11.3.5, 12.2.2, 13.7.1 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 4.2.9, 4.3.5.2, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.8. 9.9.1, 12.2.2, 13.7 Compliance with Lawsl .3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.13, 4.1.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2,13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 4.3.6 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 6.1.1 Consent, Writtenl. 3.1, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4.4.5.5, 9.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 10.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4, 11.3.11, 13.2,13.4.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHrrECfS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006.5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This.document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Document NEWA201.DOC—10/10/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #2 Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.3, 9.3.I.1 6.2.4, 9.5.1.5, 10.2.1.2. 10.2.5, 10.3, 11.1, 11.3, 12.2.5 Construction Schedules, Contractors 3.10, 6.1.3 Damage to the Work 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.3, 11.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4 Damages, Claims for 3.18, 4.3.9, 6.1.1, 6.2.5, Continuing Contract Performance 43.4 8.3.2, 9.5.1.2, 10.1.4 Contract, Definition of 1.1.2 Damages for Delay 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 OF THE 4.3.7, 5.4.1.1,14 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Contract Administration 3.3.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, Decisions of the Architect 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 3.10, 5.2, 9.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11A.1 _ _ 4.2.12, 4.2.13,_4.3.2, 4.3.6, 4.4.1,4.4.4, 4.5, 6.3 - ---Contract-Documents,-The - `- — — — ——1.1,1.2, 7 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.3, 2.2.5, 5.3 9.9.1, 10.1.2,13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Contract Performance During Arbitration 4.3.4, 4.5.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Contract Sum 3.8, 4.3.6, 4.3.7, 4.4.4, 5.2.3, 6.1.3, Rejection and Correction of 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.1, 7.2, 7.3, 9.1, 9.7, 11.3.1, 12.2A, 12.3, 14.2.4 4.2.6, 4.3.5, 9.5.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.5, 12, 13.7.1.3 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Defective Work, Definition of 3.5.1 Contract Time 4.3.6, 4.3.8, 4.4.4, 72.1.3, 7.3, 8.2.1, Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1. 3.5.1, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 8.3.1,9.7, 12.1.1 4.1.1, 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 4.3.1, 4.3.8.1, 4.3.8.2, CONTRACTOR 3 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.4, 7.3.5, 7.3.8, Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 7.3.9, 8.1.1, 93, 10.3.1, 14.1.1.4 Contractors Bid 1.1.1 Disputes 4.1.4, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 6.2.5, 6.3, 7.3.8, 9.3.1.2 Contractor's Construction Schedules 3.10, 6.1.3 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Contractor's Employees 3.3.2, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18, 4.2.3, Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 4.2.6, 8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1,14.2.1.1 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 1.1.1, 1.3, Contractor's Liability Insurance 11.1 2.2.5, 3.11, 5.3 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors Duty to Review Contract Documents and Field Conditions 3.2 and Owners Forces 2.2.6, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 12.2.5 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2,11.1.2 Contractors Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.4, 3.3.2, Emergencies 4.3.7,103 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8,14.2.1.2 Employees, Contractors 3.3.2., 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.1, Contractors Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 8.1.2, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 14.2.1.1 3.3.3, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, Equipment, Labor, Materials and 1.1.3,1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1. 4.2.12, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7.3.4. 9.8.2, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.5 3.8.2, 3.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, Contractor's Representations 1.2.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.7, 6.2.2, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.4, 14 8.2.1, 9.3.3 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3,1.2.3, 3.2, 3.4.1, Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.5.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.4, 4.3.8, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 3.18, 4.2.3, 10 7.3.9, 8.2, 8.3, 9.5, 9.9.1, 10.2, 14.2,14.3 Contractors Review of Contract Documents 1.2.2, 3.2, 3.7.3 Execution, Correlation and Intent of the Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 9.7 Contract Documents 1.2, 3.7.1 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1 Extensions of Time 4.3.1, 4.3.8, 7.2.1.3, 8.3, 10.3.1 Contractors Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, Failure of Payment by Contractor 9.5.1.3, 14.2.1.2 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, Failure of Payment by Owner 4.3.7, 9.7, 14.1.3 10.12, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Contracors Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.4, 3.3, 4.3.5, 9.10,11.12, 11.1.3, 11.3.5, 12.3.1, 13.7 3.4, 4.2.3, 8.22, 82.3, 10 Financial Arrangements, Owners 2.2.1 Contractual Liability Insurance 11.1.1.7, 11.2.1 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 11.3 Coordination and Correlation 1.2.2, 1.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.7, GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Governing Law 1.3.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.3, 2.2.5, 3.11 Guarantees (See Warranty and Warranties) Correction of Work 2.3, 2.4, 4.2.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, Hazardous Materials 10.1, 10.2.4 12.1.2, 12.2, 13.7.1.3 Identification of Contract Documents 1.2.1 Cost, Definition of 7.3.6, 14.3.5 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Costs 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.4, 3.8.2, 3.15.2., 4.3.6, 4.3.7, 4.3.8.1, Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.1.4, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7 5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 6.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.7, 9.7, 9.8.2, 9.10.2, Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.1.3, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.1. 12.2.4, 4.3.4, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.6, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 12.2.5,13.5,14 9.10.3, 10.1.4, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.6 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 43.9 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, Inspections 3.3.3, 3.3.4, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, MA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA . COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Document NEWA201.DOC—10/10/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 —Page #3 I 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.8.1, 4.2.8, 5.2.1, 7, 12.1, 13.5.2 Insurance 4.3.9, 6.1.1, 7.3.6.4, 9.3.2, 9.8.2. 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 113.2 Insurance, Contractor's Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Insurance, Loss of Use 11.3.3 Insurance, Owner's Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 113 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2, 11.3.1.4 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1, 11.3.11 Insurance Companies, Settlement with 11.3.10 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.3, 3.12.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 Interest 13.6 Interpretation 1.2.5, 1.4,1.5, 4.1.1, 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 8.1.4 Interpretations, Written 42.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.7 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required 4.5.6 Judgment on Final Award 4.5.1, 4.5.4.1, 4.5.7 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1. 1.3, 1.1.6,3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 3.12.7,3.12.11, 3.13, 3.15. 1, 4.2.7, 6.2.1, 7.3.6. 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 12.2.4, 14 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.5.5 4.5.7,9.9.1,102.2,11.1,11.3,13.1,13.4,13.5.1,13.52,13.6 Liens 2.1.2, 4.3.2, 4.3.5.1, 8.22, 9.3.3, 9.10.2 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 4.5.5 Limitations, Statutes of 4.5.4.2, 12.2.6, 13.7 Limitations of Authority 3.3.1, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.3, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 5.2.2, 5.2.4, 7.4,11.3.10 Limitations of Liability 2.3, 3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.12.8, 3.12.11, 3.17, 3.18, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.22, 9A.2, 9.6.4, 9.10.4, 10. 1.4, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.3.7, 13.4.2, 13.5.2 Limitations of Time, General 2.2.1, 2.2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.10, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.3.2, 4.3.3,4.3.4,4.3.6,4.3.9,4.5.4.2,521,5.2.3,6.2.4,7.3.4,7.4. 8.2, 9.5, 9.6.2, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.2,11.3.5, 11.3.6,12.2.1,12.2.2,13.5,13.7 Limitations of Time, Specific 2.1.2, 2.2.1, 2.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.15.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.11, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 5.3, 5.4, 7.3.5, 7.3.9, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.9.2,9.10.$11.1.3, 11.3.6,11.3.10, 11.3.11, 12.2.2,12.2.4,12.2.6,13.7,14 Loss of Use Insurance - 1133 Material Suppliers 1.3.1, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.6.5, 9.10.4 Materials, Hazardous 10.1, 10.2.4 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3,1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 3.12.7, 3.12.11, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.7. 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 12.2.4, 14 Means,Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1. 4.2.3, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, 4.2.8, 4.3.7, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.73, 3.11, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7 Mutual Responsibility 62 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 123 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3.1, 4.3.5, 9.5.2, 9.8.2, 12, 13.7.1.3 Notice 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.1. 3.2.2, 3.7.3, 3.7.4, 3.9, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.17, 4.3, 4.4.4, 4.5, 5.2.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1, 8.2.2, 9.4. 1. 9.5.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 11.3, 12.2.2. 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14, Notice, Written 2.3, 2.4, 3.9, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 4.3. 4.4.4,4.5,5.2.1, 5.3, 5.4.1.1, 8.2.2, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7,9.10, 10.1.2, 10.2.6, 11.1.3, 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,133, 13.5.2, 14 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Notice to Proceed 8.2.2 Notices, Permits, Fees and 2.2.3, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Observations, Architect's On -Site 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1, 13.5 Observations, Contractor's 1.2.2, 3.2.2 Occupancy 9.6.6, 9.8.1, 9.9, 11.3.11 On -Site Inspections by the Architect 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.2, 9.10.1 On -Site Observations by the Architect 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.3.6, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1, 13.5 Orders, Written 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.7, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 22. 4.3.4, 6, 9,10.1.4. 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 14.1.1.5, 14.1.3 Owner's Authority 3.8.1, 4.1.3, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, I IA.1, 12.2.4, 13.5.2, 14.2, 14.3.1 Owners Financial Capability 2.2.1, 14.1.1.5 Owner's Liability Insurance 11.2 Owners Loss of Use Insurance 11.3.3 Owners Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2.1, 5.4.1, 9.6.4 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 2.4, 12.2.4, 14.2.2.2 Owner's Right to Clean Up 63 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1, Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.3,4.3.7 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owners Right to Terminate the Contract t14.2 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents 1.1.1,13, 2.2.5, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.11 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.6 Patents, Royalties and 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 9.2, 93, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 14.2.4 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 4.3.7, 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final 14.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 4.3.5. 9.10, 11.1.2 11.1.3, 11.3.5, 12.3.1 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.6.4, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4 Payments, Progress 4.3.4, 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.3, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9,14 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2. 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4. 11.3.8, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT' FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS; 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASIINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. Ibis document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Document: NEWA201.DOC—10/10/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.6.4 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11. Permits, Fees and Notices 2.2.3. 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2. PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 1 Polychlorinated Bipheny 10.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12. • Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings .11, 3.12, 4.2. Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 4.3.4, 8 Progress Payments 4.3.4, 9.3 9.6, 9.8.3, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2. Project, Deftnitionofthe— - -- — - - — —1.1. Project Manual, Definition of the 1.1. Project Manuals 2.2. Project Representatives 4.2.1 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 1 Regulations and Laws 1.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.5. 4.5.7,10.2.2,11.1,11.3,13.1,13.4,13.5.1,13.5.2,13.6,1 Rejection of Work 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12. Releases of Waivers and Liens 9.10. Representations 1.2.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.7, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.10. Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1 4.2.1, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 13.2. Resolution of Claims and Disputes 4.4, 4. Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 42.3, 6.1.3, 6.2,1 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2,9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 1.2.2, 3.2, 33.3, 3.12. Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12 4.2.7,4.2.9,5.2.1,5.2.3,9.2,9.8. Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12. Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.15.2 4.2.6,4.3.6,4.5,5.3,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,11.3.1,91.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5 10.3, 12.22,12.2.4,13A,1 Royalties and Patents 3.1 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 4S Safety of Persons and Property 10 Safety Precautions and Programs 4.2.3, 4.2.7,10. Samples, Definition of 3.12. Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, 4.2. Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.1 Schedule of Values 92, 9.3. Schedules, Construction 3.1 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.14.2, 4.2.4 4.5.5, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2. Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2. Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2. Site Inspections 1.2.2, 3.3.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9 4.3.6, 9.8.2, 9.10.1, 13. Site Visits, Architect's 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.6 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2,9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13. Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13. Specifications, Definition of the 1.1. Specifications, The 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.4, 1.3, 3.1 Statute of Limitations 4.5.4.2, 12.2.6, 13. Stopping the Work 2.3, 4.3.7, 9.7, 10 1.2, 10.3, 14.1 4 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 11.3.1.4, 12.2.4 2 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 0 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.3, 5.4 2 Subcontractual Relations 53, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.2, 7 9.6.3,9.6.4,10.2.1,11.3.7,11.3.8,14.1.1,14.2.1.2,14.3.2 2 Submittals 1.3, 3.2.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3. 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 10.1.2, 11.1.3 3 Subrogation, Waivers of _ _ _ _6.11,_11.3.5,.113.7- 4 _ Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 4.3.5.2, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 7 8.2.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 13.7 5 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 0 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 3 Substitution of the Architect 4.1.3 0 Substitutions of Materials 3.5.1 5 Sub -subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2 4 Subsurface Conditions 4.3.6 2 Successors and Assigns 13.2 2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.4, 33, 3.4, 1 4.2.3, 4.3.4, 6.1.3, 6.2.4. 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 10, 12, 14 Surety 4.4.1, 4.4.4, 5.4.1.2, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.22 I Surety, Consent of 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 5 Surveys 2.2.2, 3.18.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 143 0 Suspension of the Work 4.3.7, 5.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.3 3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 4.3.7, 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 7.3.6.4 7 Termination by the Contractor 14.1 3. 10. 1,Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1,142 Termination of the Architect 4.1.3 2 Termination of the Contractor 14.2.2 TERMINATION, OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 5 Tests and Inspections 3.3.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 12.2.1,13.5 TIIHE 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 4.3.8, 7.2.1, 83 4 Time Limits, Specific 2.1.2, 2.2.1, 2.4. 3.10, 3.11, 3.15.1. 7 4.2.1, 4.2.11, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 5.3, 5.4, 7.3.5, 7.3.9, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3. 1, .2 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.8.2, 9.10.2, I LI.3, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 2 11.3.11, 12.2.2,12.2.4,12.2.6, 13.7, 14 1 Time Limits on Claims 4.3.2, 433, 4.3.6, 4.3.9, 4.4, 4.5 3 Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3 7' UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 1 Uncovering of Work 12.1 1 Unforeseen Conditions 4.3.6, 8.3.1, 10.1 0 Unit Prices 7.1.4, 7.3.3.2 Use of Documents 1.1.1,1.3, 2.2.5, 3.12.7, 5.3 5 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 I Values, Schedule of 92, 9.3.1 7 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment 435, 4.5.1, 9.10.3 1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.4, 11.3.7, 13.4.2 5 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 4.3.5, 4.5.1, 9.9.3, 9.10.3. 11.3.3, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 13.4.2 5 Waiver of Liens 9.10.2 5 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7 6 Warranty and Warranties 3.5, 4.2.9, 1 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 12.2.2, 13.7.1.3 7 Weather Delays 4.3.8.2 AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - �- THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be �I reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 � User Document NEWA201.DOC—10/10/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #5 When Arbitration May Be Demanded 4.5.4 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.3.1, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.5.5, 9.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3,10.1.2,10.1.3 11.3.1, 11.3.1.4,11.3.11, 13.2,13.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.7 Written Notice 2.3, 2.4, 3.9, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 4.3, 4.4.4, 4.5,5.2.1,5.3,5.4.1.1,8.2.2,9.4.1,9.5.1,9.7,9.10, 10.1.2. 10.2.6, 11.1.3. 11.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 133, 13.5.2, 14 Written Orders 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.7. 7, 8.2.2. 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - ` THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHrTECfS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed .� photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. b Electronic Format A201-1987 User Document NEWA201.DOC—10/10/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #6 ,i y i GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements). 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The — Contract may be amended or modified only by a j Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor or (3) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1A THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.6 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. f 1 8, `The Yerm-,Pr�otluctvin�c/ui/esr,miilena/s��"s�em,�s' and ei7u'pment; f t 9 Tse�emi p�; nc u es a_rmSfiing end"Inst�r» a prodpct,,-�,--compl06 m place ope7f0gah , es end app�ro�ve'dJ, f 1 10 `The term bWUmg c e end t refer �M; ,regu/Boons of �govemmerltel agencres�avrng rynsdreton TT7f - The et rms epprov a regmre'�, es� directed` refer to and Indicate the work or maCerialr that3 may be approved, -required, or direcfetl by the Archrtect ac6ngas the agen[_of the Owner'v�"` - 12 fThe46fn7"4"r7ar means rn•its general sense^andi not necessanly rdehoca/.; f 1.13 7-7Themon -WW, own, e" noted,' scheduled, and terms of similar rmport,',refer,to requirements contained rn the,,Contmct DocumenL"r':? 1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Document: NEWA201.DOC — 10/10/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #7 Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The -intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results. 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. nz 6 Prudence of the �dr Docu� q/te m: os31 recently rssued�document takes p�recedenc'e over pievr6us' issues of the same document. Thd order of Precedence 1s ss foUows wFfh the %hest auth- /isteda 'l f Agraemen Be eenwnerand on rac or, y 2 'Atldenda- 3 %Suppkmenfanar4Con�tors ��°General ndrtions 5,�r Spe�cafons a�d.Orawings Lange scale details take precedence rn regard to Vzjmensions 1 over smaller scale details in conf/icf with mechamcaNend structure/ 'drawings - except.. for thin size r`of s{ruciural� members_' Specdica/!y'trtled drawings and specdreetion sections take precedence for their respective portion_ of the, work over indication of these items in collateral Existing conditions take procedure over Drawings and - Speci cations with regard to d/merrsro� 1.2.8 -Lists of 'Work lndaded'!and,='Work EXdrided are; not intended to enuimrete'eacti and every item of work or appurtenance required, and must be used rn co juncvon,= wtth othe6 portions o(ffie Cont acCOocumenis _. 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECTS DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Document: NEWA201.DOC — 10/10/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #8 t 1 ' derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved rights. 1.4 CAPITALIZATION 6 1A.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions h I include those which are (1) specifically defied, (2) the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. Y 1.5 INTERPRETATION 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents — frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or j an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 DEFINITION 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shall famish to the Contractor in writing information which is t necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give 1 notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution of the Agreement and, within five days after any change, information of such change in title, recorded or unrecorded. _J 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER i 2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, prior to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. [Note: Unless such reasonable evidence were furnished on request prior to the execution of the Agreement, the prospective contractor would not be required to execute the Agreement or - , to commence the Work] _0 I 2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness _ to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. 2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Separate Contractors), Article 9 (Payments and Completion) and Article 11 (Insurance and Bonds). 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by written order signed personally -.or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner 'in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second seven-day period. If the Contractor within such second AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Document: NEWA201.DOC—10/10/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #9 l seven-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged -to -the -Contractor -are -both -subject -to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information famished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction. 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Architect at once. 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pursuant to Paragraph 3.12. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, - using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and -have seat£el -evff construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and --procedures and -for -coordinating —all pomons"of -the Work under the Contract unlessGentract Beewnents-give atheF 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for ' acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract r with the Contractor. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to performing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.3A The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed under this Contract to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 3A LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3A.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docur r `l free from defects not inherent in the quality required or accomplished by appropriate Modification. permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and properly approved and authorized, may be considered rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not such Work and shall bear the attributable costs. executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear 3.8 ALLOWANCES —, under normal usage. If required by the Architect, the The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered alto by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such 3.52 Contractor shelF'fumrshthe Ownei hls,wdt' persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the ' guarantee m'eccorda�ce with this Artrcle' He she// secure Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities all wnKen guanintees' and warranties ca//ed for` rn t/ie against which the Contractor makes reasonable objection. spaw!%catrons. The ,ContMctor�ts responsible for :the,, guarantee on;'tha entire project V 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract 3.6 TAXES Documents: 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and .1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received Work; or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. .2 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the .3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance completion of the Work which are customarily secured after amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and execution of the Contract and which are legally required not in the allowances; when bids are received or negotiations concluded r"rbee Owner, throug7r the Arc7rrtee3 wi/Ixsut ;�ngs andj Q 4 whenever costs are more than or less than eciHcatrons to tTi'e s ro rlatee pubbc eut%ronHes for ! PP P allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted 1 review and approve/ The�Owner wig pay a/% fees far,plan accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the ch- -king The Cantractaresha/I n'pu/l and Pay al! buiidiny Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference perrmK and mspectron fees as partof the Conract Suin between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.2 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.3. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance ` therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be if 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDMONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE ANIERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docum 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project -to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedules. 3,10 —7he �Conrractor wi/ikeep _ e tTwners RepresentobVe informed of the ConstrucUoit Schealule toy al/ow the Uwners5Repiesentartve, o,cooidiriare sch /igy3 of_wonFby�separateco"�'rrtr�ac�tor'work� z by0iyeeri 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The GestrasteF -sMR m -"the -site -feF 4he- AwaeF ene Fefsrd sepy -of-" BFawings addenda, Change OrdeFsaedAtheF A4edifisatieas,-ie-geed- eFdeF-and maF#6d GuFFegt}y{o FAGAFd shaages and seie6 iens made duFiag seastmi;ften, and -in addiden agpFeved -Shep- Drawings, Pradmt -Bata; Samples and similaF-equiFed be delivered to the -4-Felikent faf submittal t9 the QAq;Ar; upen 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. 3.12.6 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and fiel construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. Y i AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHNGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be mproduced without violation until the daze of expiration as noted below. �I Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docum l 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, - Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor, such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.15.3 At the time of acceptance and building by the Owner, the General Cot 31754,•Work that has been'`e%aned after,�ilrsteAa-lion 6y. the subcontractor does not relieve the,General Contractor ofx the iespenstbdiry of recleaning Ufa the trine ofj ...,... occupant y,rrf needed 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docum they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a_Subcontractor,-anyone directly or-indirectly'employed by — them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 3.18.3 -The obligations -of 4he CenWrAef undeF -this- ParagWh 34-9 -shall -net extend 4e 4he IiabiliEy -o€ -the- Affhiteel� -the Amhitest's censuhaeu, -and egeats -and- - any i••b out of(!) the Y" pppFpyptmaps, \ y�'pmSvy.av�uo+ �- to give directions `or instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. 4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 shall be subject to arbitration. 4.2 ARCHITECTS ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on -site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3.3. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons performing portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - TIiE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Dacum i 1 r�r I' li _I y tit t� �I t_ r, a� U be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractors Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the: intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.52 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,.Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract. Documents. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architects review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Content[ Documents. 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests Will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and wffi be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the patties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. ALA DOCUNMNr A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AWRICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docur not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.5.1 and 4.5.4 and Clause 4.5.4.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred --by the applicable statute -of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. 4.5.5 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration- of a dispute not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.5.6 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A party who files a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. When a party fails to include a Claim through oversight, inadvertence or excusable neglect, or when a Claim' has matured or been acquired subsequently, the arbitrator or arbitrators may permit amendment. 4.5.7 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an_authorized.representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" ..does not l - include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 6.1.2 A Sub -subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub -subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub -subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub -subcontractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 6.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated —to a special . design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice -of no reasonable objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall hot contract with a proposed i person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be _ required to contract with anyone tb whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. The Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. '- However, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and 1 responsively in submitting names as required. 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, r AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This doctmnent was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docun I I person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such change. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terns of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub -subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub -subcontractors. 5:32 Each agreement between.the CoMctor ari3'tik? Venous Subvontractors hall bee'mended as,lol/oivs/ 7 "'= 7ha�` the work required to be performed tinder thtis' Subcontractor Agreement shalt not be started, nor shall the' Contractor reuse send work owe started, unbf fflaj fo/%gwrng conditrons have been satlsfacton/y met: �'""� "`' (o) :All surfaces, protect oondrtrons, locations and work'of„ other trades against which;, overS which; or adiacent to- which the Sub contiactor's work is to be insta/!ed sha0 be thoroughly rrispected by;effected craftsmen;` /bf- Ths Sub=contractor; she//.immedratety report; in deta�; and rn' writing to the ConlrectorSany and,'ell conditions observed during said °;inspection. which, may tend to contribute to�'an unsatisfactory install, " n,or --A -' -- of `the'Work regr tied hereunder; ',o `" ". - (cI 7/te Con;rector and the Sub conboctdr, 'as pdncipa, parties to thii Agreement `thereby agree `that no woik shall a be staKed ,installed; epphed or completed you over, of against objectionable surfaces or _conditions •.until _"said objectionable surfaces or conditions 'have been; sabsfabtodty eoriected by, the Contractor on _the vede- rasporisble there/oie. ' 2 That ]n case -of inability to agree oN thekegu ied correction or on 'dtsptrted ,i urtaces or candttionsi both) parties hereto agree to submtt-satd dispute or disagreement' to theArchtteetr.for`final and'^,mutually bridmg judgementr 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. 5.4.2 If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNERS RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owners own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. AIA DOCUMENT A20I - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docum If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate_ Owner -Contractor -Agreement— - — — 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. 6.1 A Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage, of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contactor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contactors' completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. I 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 4.3 provided the r separate contractor has reciprocal obligations. 6.2.6 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and Patching as are described for the Contractor in Paragraph 3.14. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in Paragraph 3.15, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGES 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contact, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contact Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contact Documents, and the Contactor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. i AIA DOCUNWNT A201 - GENERAL CONDMONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - ' THE ANIERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCH17ECfS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHNGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docum i 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or I Construction Change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial t� inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 4 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and _Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: _ 1 .1 a change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if '4 any; and i _ .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. 1' 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work and stating a 1 proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum, or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or, other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or A as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with, appropriate supporting data Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; A costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. �) AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 2000ti-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed Photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with pennission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. _..r Electronic Format A201-1997 User Docum 7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on -the basis of net increase, if any, with, respect to that change. 7.3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the adjustment in Contract Time or the method for determining it, the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect for determination. 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 7A MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7A.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall cant' out such written orders promptly. 7.5:��Conk1WC 4__ Ch'-- D'---- es 7_5.2 A Construcbon Change Directive"sha/l be usedin nn the absence of. Yota! agreement on the terms `of a Change order; 7.53 • ft the�Constr1VcthMXhange-Drectf9e provides for sn3. aeYiustment io fthe Contract Sum, the adjustment shalf obe based on one; of the following methods: .7 mutual acceptance of a lump sum property itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents ':or subsequently agreed upon; .3_cost to be determined in a manner_egreed upon by the parties and . -a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee= or. ; 4 riraserovided in Subparagraph 7.5;1i. 7 '_5' 5 q Constmcpon Change Dlre�c ivee signed by f Contractor indicates the agreement voEu the Coiitiacta therewith; me/udmg adjustment m Contract Sum and Contract ,Time or the method for determmmg them'Suc agreement sha/l be eNectivei�m'mediatefy and shag'Ir recorded as a Ghabge Ordef� " " 1 rcosts=bf labor, Inc/udmg`socra! secuiiry old aye anti unemployment insurance fringe benefits required by agreement. or custom and 'workers . or workmen s . -:_ compensaLon,msurance; 2' costs cJ matedals, `supplies and "equipment cost of inc/udirig` transportaboii'whethermcorporaredor consumed; :3 ,rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools' whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 costs: of pie-m/ums; for all b_onds,ead insurancepermlt; fees, and sales, use of similar taxes rre/ated to- the Wor. and 5 additional costs of supervision ` and field nfsrn' AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docum personnel directly attributable to the change. Z5.7_ _:Pending final determination of, cost to amounts - not, rri ' dispute may `be includes 7.58 /1 fhe 0wnei and Conacior do=noY agree with _ilia adjustment it Contract rme or the method for determining; iG=the 41djristment oi4fie method,shef/ bo referred to the: Archttect fordeYermuietloii3�'" � � W ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS ,w. 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. 8.1.4 The teFm-!day-'as-used-ia4heGent aGl Documents t, a mean leach. day ,.-. sss ,..t.,.-...:.e In3hrs'Contract the term day `shalt mean a cefendar day-af! 24 hours beginning aL 72 OOPmidnight 6T6'term Working Day shall mean any calendar day except Saturday., Sunday,;l and lager holidays et the place of budding _ LL' 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. -- Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docun or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3. 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. 8.3 4 Time'; rs oV the. essence'- oV She Contract Nab extensions ,ol time shell be a//owed or t onsidered :foil adverse weather unless She Contractor can substantiate'all, oflthe fol/owing 83,5 C/aims for extennsions of ume Ito abnomia adverse weather should be documented byte Contractor at each occurrence but "trig be considered for approvaFby the'. Owner `aR/y once collectively m conrteciYon Wi}h abnomia`l/y mdd weather conditions,�at 'The bmef Sutistanhal Completion: change will delay the Project's critical path of completion. 8.3.8 ..No additions to the Contract Sum for 7additionat; profit, overhead, or extended, costs of._Genera/ Conditions resulting from delays or extensions o%;time will be_ -" allowed. .._ ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the dateestablished for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract 9.3.1.1 Such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docum included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other reason. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site a 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architects reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of- 1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACr FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed Photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docurn .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will notbe completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub -subcontractors in similar manner. payment application must be submitted with for preceded by) final or full waivers from every entity involved with:, performance of the.work. Walver Fonts Submit waiverson forms; and axec_uted in-- - a manner, acceptable to owner. 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding — percentages of completion or amountsapplied-for by the— -- Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 7 and 9.6A. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Architect does not.issue a Certifirate for , Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, -- stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut -down, delay and start-up, which shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract j Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 1 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, _ ALA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - ' THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. A201 1987 Electronic Format User Docun is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item, upon notification by the Architect. The Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, beat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the -Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Subparagraph 11.3.11 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully perforated, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final I ALA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation will the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docum 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently_ _ - in-effecfand will nofbe cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attomeys' fees. 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted: If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been famished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 4.3.5. 9.10.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to the waiver described in Subparagraph 4.3.5. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, , maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not i thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in accordance with final determination by the Architect on which arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under Article 4. 10.1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article 7 to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB). 10.1A To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Owner or anyone for whose acts the Owner may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Subparagraph 10.1.4. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed _ photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. i Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docurt+_ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub -subcontractors; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss, (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub -subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.12 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and. Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE " 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase, from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located. such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docum .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractors employees; A claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by another person;. .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and .7 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims -made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. (e7 WonF s Compeiuehon lnsirrancey fb) /tutor»obJreLrebrTitylnsuranc`e fc) Commerciai General LlebrTity (nsuranee 4 For the duration of this contract, The Contractor shall; maintain Commercial Genera/ Liability Insurance with the following limits: General Aggregate: 52,000,000, Products/Completed; Operations Aggregate; Limit: $$000,000, Each Occurrence: $1,000,000; Fire Damage: $50,000,• Medical. Expense,, one person: $5,000. The Contractor .shall require subcontractors -to prowde;j - Commercra/ Genera/ Liabi/ityy Jnsurance with the same'; minimum limits as outlined above. (d) UmbrelleL/ebfl.ty/nsurance Fbr the ,duration of this cohfract,,-The Contractor shag maintaim Umbre/ja Lrabdrty"Insurance with the fo/%wing] gmrt; S5,'000 D00 Combined Single limit each occurrencela .-` 1gP Th'e=required rnsuranee must be wntfen by a.Company licensed to do bus'mess in` tfie State where the'Pro/ec[ is dated at the time the poli Iocy rs Issued In add" icon tfr Campa`ny must be,acceptab/e to�the `a�wnyer.� 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or ' allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docu payment and are reasonably available, all additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 ThO G vtterahallbe Fespexsible feF pwskasixg theQwvieF4xay parskase-WA fRaintainather se-fer- SOW PFetestioii against elahxs avbislx -xtay aFise fret[[ epeeatiexs andeF4he hex[Fast.--'he10e11t£asteF shall-xetbe- Fespensible -fef puffhasing axd maintakiing 4his optional- 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance in the... amount of the initial Contract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever is earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors in the Work. 11.3.1.1 RrepeFty ixsaFaxse -hall be -on -M all Fwi pelisy €eras and -shall iasare against the -perils -of -fife and- extexded Beverage and physical bns eF damage ipsladixg - witheateaplisatiexefeeverage 4he11;-VaR4alism xtallsieas misehie eellapse, false work, tempeFaFy buildings -axd- demos Femeval aasladill demelit+ert eseasiened br- enfercemenF of any app4isable4egalFegnitenients,-aFA shall severfeasenahle sempensation- F AM114e6t'S sea ices and expenses fequkedasa Fesakef-iis{i ipsirFedIess —Coverage €eF ether -perils -shall -net be Feguired axles otherwise 11.3.1.2 if-theAvmo _dGes-pet itttead-te paFshase L PFOPOFty insufanes Fequired by the GGHIFaet e..d ..AAh all. of the seveFages4R41iieameant%essribedabeve, theOwaeF shall -se tpfeFM -the Ge$tFa6teF 4a mw+ting -pFiGF 4e- ate seIvhtehivtll pFetestinteFa$Es of thA Gentraster-, SabeeAtiaster$ eadSub subeentFacter-s-ia4he WeAE; by- the$wirer.- if the(;sRkasteF-is d mrged-b-the €ailaF9er- negleet-efihe Owner4a puFshaseeF maiptaix ipsatattseas- a above, • t.eut so •as • the re_t....et.._ the.. the Awner-hall-bear.all Fasonable nests prepeFly andbatable 11.3.1.3 DgeameiatS, -the Gextfaeter -shall -pay nests -pet aeveFed besaase e€ -ash dedastibles - 4€ 4he $wxer -OF ixstseF increases 4he FegaiFed mipiMUM d0dastibles above 4he- ameants-e idepti€ied-of if theQwxeF sleets -to paFehase�ltis because e€ -sash ipsreased -OF velHR", deductibles. - 4f- dedastiblesaro not identified -ix the ContFast DeGufflonts, the 9wxeF-hag-M Gests-pet severedbesaasee€ deductibles.. The Contractor'shall Dame the Owner;`Architect, sand their' representatives,as,additional insured on al/ Certificates,ot Insurance: LL AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docur 11.3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site afieFmwiftee&pprevel-0t'4h9- ANmeF -at-the value established 4n the appreval, and also portions of the Work in transit. 11.3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall -- —specifically cover such insured oobijects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 11.3.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owners option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owners property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owners property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or for other special hazards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost there of shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner,shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contactor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, ` Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph11.3- _ J or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except i such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, agents and - employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would 1 otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.3.8 A loss insured under Owners property insurance I shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements- of any applicable , mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to. make payments to their Sub -subcontractors in similar manner. 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owners duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate ` account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award i in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.5. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of damaged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order. 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust 1 and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1957 - I THE AtvERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be - 1 ' mprodumd without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docur occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 4.5. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of such arbitrators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. 11A PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the 11A.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK . 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. 12.2.2 If, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work fast performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive acceptance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and arc neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Architect, the Owner may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does not pay costs of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' AIA DOCUNM74T A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AhtERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docum written notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been borne by the Contractor, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor -shall — pay the difference to the Owner. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractors liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made -'w' ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract j Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION . AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCIETECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be , reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docu I- 1 ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and.all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any warranty, provided under Paragraph 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last. 4 T®mporary Signsy SignsF ai ,advetisemenfs, ha/( not be perrP/fti- fo 'bet splayed Wthout prior approval of the Architect end sha!! conform; to the requirements speafrad herein:. 73-9 Standards AIA DOCUb1EWr A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMIERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON D.C. 20006.5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docu GENERAL ELECTRICAL STANDARDS. FINISHES American Institute of Architects (A/A) American Association of State Highway Officials;`I American Society for Testing Mate ne/s (ASTM) _ American Standards Association IASAI Uniform Building CodeYUBC/ Standard Building Cade: (SBCC/J, Commerce National SL American WOOD: MECHANICAL, Institute of Electrieal and Electronic EngineersIEEEI Nationa(;Fire Protection Assadiston -' National ctric; Cade'fNEPAL7.� .._.yEle Nations! NEC/ElectnceIS afety Code (NESCI NationaCElectr/cal Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Am�e, neon Soaery of Testing'Nlafena/s IASTMI' ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: A issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction; .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, making material unavailable; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; A if repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions by• the Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less; or .5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACr FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1987 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGION D.C. 20006-5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Docw 14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with i respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to _the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor. .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may; subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor, .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4; and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased cost of performance, caused by suspension, delay or interruption. No adjustment shall be made to the extent:. .1 that performance is, was or would have been so . suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract. 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee. AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - FOURTEENTH EDITION - AIA - COPYRUUtir Uvsi - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW PORK AVENUE N.W., WASIINGTON D.C. 20006r5292.. WARNING; Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1987 User Document: NEWA201.DOC—10/10/1996. AIA License Number 104339, which expires on 10/1/1997 — Page #37 DIVISION 0 SECTION 00800 GENERALCONDITIONS The Supplementary General Conditions hereinafter described contain changes and additions to the AIA General Conditions Document A201, 1987 Edition. Where any part of the AIA General Conditions is modified or voided by these Supplementary General Conditions, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect. TABLE OF CONTENTS TO STANDARD ARTICLES AMENDED BY THESE SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS: 1 General Provisions 3 Contractor 4 Administration of the Contract 5 Subcontractors 7 Changes in the Work 8 Time 9 Payments and Completion 10 Protection of Persons and Property 11 Insurance and Bonds 3.10 12 Uncovering and Correction of Work 13 Miscellaneous Provisions 1.00 GENERAL PROVISIONS: 1.1 Basic Definitions. Add the following paragraphs: 1.1.8 The term "product" includes materials, systems, and equipment. 1.1.9 The term "provide" includes furnishing and installing a product, complete in place,operating, tested, and approved. 1.1.10 The term "building code," and the term "code," refer to regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 1.1.11 The terms "approved," "required," and "as directed" refer to and indicate the work or materials that may be approved, required, or directed by the Architect acting as the agent of the Owner. 1.1.12 The term "similar" means in its general sense and not necessarily identical. 1.1.13 The terms "shown," "indicated," "detailed," "noted," "scheduled," and terms of similar import, refer to requirements contained in the Contract Documents. 1.2 Execution, Correlation, and Intent. Add the following paragraphs: 1.2.6 Precedence of the Contract Documents: The most recently issued document takes precedence over previous issues of the same document. The order of precedence is as follows with the highest authority listed a "1 ": 1. Agreement Between Owner and Contractor 2. Addenda 3. Supplementary General Conditions 4. General Conditions 5. Specifications and Drawings 1.2.7 Specifications and Drawings are complementary, what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by both. Should they disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide for the most expensive combination of quality and quantity in the Contract Sum for the work indicated or reasonably inferred in the Drawings and Specifications. In the event of such disagreements, the Architect in consultation with the Owner's Representative shall determine the appropriate method for performing the work in question. Written dimensions take precedence over scaled measurements. Large scale details take precedence in regard to dimensions over smaller scale details in conflict with mechanical and structural drawings except for the size of structural members. Specifically titled drawings and specification sections take precedence for their respective portion of the work over indication of these items in collateral way. Existing conditions take procedure over Drawings and Specifications with regard to dimensions. 00800 - 1 1.2.8 Lists of "Work Included" and "Work Excluded" are not intended to enumerate each and every item of work or appurtenance required, and must be used in conjunction with other portions of the Contract Documents. _ 1.2.9 When work is governed by reference to standards, building codes, manufacturer's instructions, or other reference documents, the current edition shall apply whether or not proper edition is specified. When a newer edition becomes effective during the execution of a contract, the original edition shall apply unless a change is properly authorized by the Architect. 3.00 CONTRACTOR 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures. 3.3.1 Delete the following from the last sentence of this paragraph: ", and have control over", "unless Contract Documents give other specific instruction concerning these matters 3.5 Warranty. Add the following paragraph: 3.5.2 Contractor shall furnish the Owner his written guarantee in accordance with this Article. He shall secure all written guarantees and warranties called for in the specifications. The Contractor is responsible for the guarantee on the entire project. 3.7 Permits, Fees and Notices 3.7.1 Add the following to this paragraph: "The Owner, through the Architect, will submit Drawings and Specifications to the appropriate public authorities for review and approval. The Owner will pay all fees for plan checking. The Contractor shall 'pull' and pay all building permit and inspection fees as part of the Contract Sum." Contractor's construction schedules. 3.10.4 Add the following paragraph: Delete this paragraph in its entirety and substitute the following: "The Contractor will keep the Owner's Representative informed of the Construction Schedule to allow the Owner's Representative to coordinate scheduling of work by separate contract or work by Owner." 3.11 Documents and samples at the site. 3.11.1 Delete this paragraph in its entirety and substitute the following: "The Contractor will maintain at the Project site on record, a copy of all Contracts, Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, and other Modifications pertaining to the Project, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to the Architect and the Owner's Representative and shall be delivered to the Architect for the Owner upon completion of the Project." 3.15 Cleaning up.. Add the following paragraphs: 3.15.3 At the time of acceptance and occupancy of the building by the Owner, the General Contractor shall have all portions of the Work in a finished and clean condition ready for use without additional work or attention by the Owner. All areas and surfaces shall be clean and dust free from paint spatters or other marks, sill and mullions washed; floors shall be washed and vacuumed; walls shall be dusted and washed if necessary; counter tops shall be washed and thoroughly clean and all labels removed; light fixtures shall be cleaned and lenses washed; remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorated work; clean all hardware. The Contractor shall also comply with all special cleaning instructions contained in the specifications. 3.15.4 Work that has been cleaned after installation by the Subcontractor does not relieve the General Contractor of the responsibility of recleaning it at the time of occupancy, if needed. 3.18 Indemnification. 00800 - 2 3.18.3 Revise to read as follows: "The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 3.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, his agents or employees arising out of the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs, or specifications." 5.00 5.3 Subcontractual Relations. Add the following paragraph: 5.3.2 Each agreement between the Contractor and his various Subcontractors shall be amended as follows: That the work required to be performed under this Sub -contractor Agreement shall not be started, nor shall the Contractor cause said work to be started, until the following conditions have been satisfactorily met. (a) All surfaces, project conditions, locations and work of other trades against which, over which, or adjacent to which this Sub -contractor's work is to be installed shall be thoroughly inspected by affected craftsmen. (b) This Sub -contractor shall immediately report, in detail and in writing, to the Contractor any and all conditions observed during said inspection which may tend to contribute to an unsatisfactory installation or application of the Work required hereunder. (c) The Contractor and the Sub -contractor, as principal parties to this Agreement, thereby agree that no work shall be started, installed, applied or completed on, over, or against objectionable surfaces or conditions until said objectionable surfaces or conditions have been satisfactorily corrected by the Contractor or the trade responsible therefore. 2. That in case of inability to agree on the required correction or on disputed surfaces or conditions, both parties hereto agree to submit said dispute or disagreement to the Architect for final and mutually binding judgement. 3. That the Contractor reserves the right to submit said dispute to arbitration in accordance with the Contact Documents where it can be shown that hardship or extensive delay of completion of the required work may result from either the dispute of the Sub -contractor or the final and mutually binding judgement of the Architect. 7.00 CHANGES IN THE WORK Add the following paragraphs: 7.5 Construction Change Directives: 7.5.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.5.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in on the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 7.5.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.5.6. 7.5.4 Upon a receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, 00800 - 3 provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.5.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.5.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the_Contract — _ - - - Sum,, -a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In -such case, and also under Clause 7.5.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract. Documents, costs for the purposes of this - Subparagraph 7.5.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance; - - .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or _ others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. 7.5.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner amounts not in dispute may be included in the Applications for Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor. to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 7.5.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the adjustment in Contract Time or the method for determining it, the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect for determination. 7.5.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 8.00 TIME 8.1 Definitions. -- 8.1.4 Add the following to this paragraph: "In this Contract, the term day shall mean a calendar day of 24 hours beginning at 12:00 midnight. The term Working Day shall mean any calendar day except Saturday, Sunday, and legal holidays at the place of building." 8.2 Progress and Completion: 8.2.4 Add the following paragraph: Time is the essence of the Contract. Contractor shall commence the Work within ten 00) days following and after written Notice to Proceed, from the Owner, and shall substantially complete all Work included in this Contract in a manner satisfactory to the Owner in the time period specified in the Bid Proposal. The Contractor agrees that for each and every day any portion of the Work remains unfinished after the time herein fixed or extended by the Owner for its completion, the Owner shall deduct and retain out of the money which may be due or become due _ said Contractor under this agreement, the sum of 2,500.00 a day for liquidated compensatory damages, in case there shall not be sufficient money due or to become due said Contractor(s) under his Contract, then said , Contractor(s) shall pay to the Owner the above stated sum per day, said sum as consideration and liquidated damages for Contractor's failure to complete his Contract as herein specified. -- 00800 - 4 In view of the difficulty of estimating damages, the above sums are agreed liquidated compensatory damages that the Owner will suffer by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time agreed upon, and such daily compensation shall apply to each portion of said Work after the time herein agreed upon for its completion. The Contractor shall notify all sub -contractors of the completion date and liquidated damages clause. 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time: 8.3.4 Add the following paragraphs: "Time is of the essence of the Contract. No extensions of time shall be allowed or considered for adverse weather unless the Contractor can substantiate all of the following: 11 That adverse weather conditions were abnormal for the area and were not reasonably anticipatable. 2) All reasonable efforts have been exhausted by the Contractor to make-up days lost due to abnormal adverse weather, including working all available calendar days, through the entire Contract Time Period. 3) All processes and construction techniques available to all trades were employed in an effort to allow the work to continue without delay. 4) The abnormal adverse weather delayed the Project's critical path of completion. 8.3.5 Claims for extensions of time due to abnormal adverse weather should be documented by the Contractor at each occurrence but will be considered for approval by the Owner only once, collectively in connection with abnormally mild weather conditions, at the time of Substantial Completion. 8.3.6 Awarding of days shall be based on daily logs and work in progress for days of inclement weather. Only those days above normal as determined by the National Oceanic and Atmosphere Administration (NOAA) as published in its local Climatological Data Report will be considered; an average of the past 10 years will be used. Data Reports shall be from the nearest reporting station for NOAA. 8.3.7 No extensions of time shall be allowed or considered for changes in the work requested by the Owner (or the Architect or, Owners Representative acting as the Owner's agent), unless the Contractor can Substantiate all of the following: 1) the Contractor has made a reasonable effort to implement the change in a timely and cost- effective manner, 2) all processes and construction techniques all trades have been reasonably utilized and scheduled appropriately in an effort to allow the work to continue without delay, and 3) the requested change will delay the Project's critical path of completion. 8.3.8 No additions to the Contract Sum for additional profit, overhead, or extended costs of General Conditions resulting from delays or extensions of time will be allowed." 9.00 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3 Applications for payment: 9.3.1 Delete this paragraph in its entirely and substitute the following: "On or before the Fifteenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative an itemized Application for Payment, notarized if required, supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner, the Architect or, the Owner's Representative may require, and reflecting retainage, if any, as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative will assemble the Application with similar applications from other contractors on the Project into a combined Project Application for Payment and forward it with recommendations to the Architect within seven days. 9.3.2 Add the following: "In order to provide some degree of price protection for Subcontractors, payment will be made on the materials only that are stored on site or at a Bonded Warehouse, (Bond & Certificate of Insurance must be submitted with Payment Application). However, the Contractor shall assume all responsibility to insure any loss incurred during storage or transit." 9.6 Progress Payments. 9.6.2 Add the following: "Waivers of Lien: For each payment application, submit waivers of lien from every entity (including Contractor) who could lawfully and possibly file a lien in excess of $100 arising out of Contract and related to work covered by payment. Submit partial waivers for amount requested (prior to deduction or retainage on each item; and when 00800 - 5 application shows completion of item, submit final or full waivers. Owner reserves right to designate which entities involved in the work must submit waivers. Waiver Delays: Each progress payment must be submitted with Contractor's waiver for period of construction covered by application; but may, at Contractor's option be submitted with waivers from subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, and suppliers for previous period of construction covered by previous application; except final payment application must be submitted with (or preceded by) final or full waivers from every entity involved with performance of the work. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to Owner."-- 9.10 Final Completion and Payment. 9.10.1 Add the following: "Upon substantial completion of the entire project, Owner will pay a sum sufficient to increase the total payment to 90% of the Contract Price except that the Owner shall have the right, but is not compelled to do so nor liable for not doing so, to retain out of any payment due, an amount sufficient to pay any claim in full, and should there prove to be any such claim after all payments have been made; The Contractor hereby specifically covenants and agrees to refund to the Owner all money and expense that the Owner may pay or incur in discharging any lien or claim against the Contractor or the Owner on account of such work. However, in no event shall final payment to the Contractor occur earlier than thirty (30) days following Final Acceptance of the Project by the Owner. 10.00 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property: 10.2.7 Add the following: Contractor shall institute a safety program at the start of construction to minimize accidents, such program to continue to end of job and conform to the safety orders of the State where the Project is located. The manual of Accident Prevention in Construction may be used as a guideline for practices. The presence of an observer or other persons representing the Owner, the Architect, and/or their representatives shall not in anyway be construed as to limit the Contractor's full responsibility for safety of all oersons on the premises. 11.00 INSURANCE AND BOND 11.1 Contractors Liability Insurance: 11.1.2 Add the following: (a) Worker's Compensation Insurance: For the duration of this Contract, The Contractor shall maintain Statutory Worker's Compensation Insurance i and shall maintain Employer's Liability Insurance with minimum limits of $100,000 Each Accident, $500,000 _I Disease - Policy Limit, $100,000 Disease - Each Employee. Contractor shall require sub -contractors to provide Worker's Compensation Insurance and Employer's Liability Insurance with the same limits. (b) Automobile Liability Insurance: For the duration of this contract, The Contractor shall maintain Automobile Liability Insurance for all owned, non -owned, and hired vehicles with a minimum Combined Single Limit of $1,000,000. Contractor shall require subcontractors to provide Automobile Liability Insurance with same limits. (c) Commercial General Liability Insurance: For the duration of this contract, The Contractor shall maintain Commercial General Liability Insurance with the following limits: General Aggregate: $2,000,000; Products/Completed Operations Aggregate; Limit: $2,000,000; Each Occurrence: 01,000,000; Fire Damage: $50,000; Medical Expense, one person: $5,000. 00800 - 6 The Contractor shall require subcontractors to provide Commercial General Liability Insurance with the same minimum limits as outlined above. (d) Umbrella Liability Insurance: For the duration of this contract, The Contractor shall maintain Umbrella Liability Insurance with the following limit; $5,000,000 Combined Single Limit each occurrence (e) The Contractor shall name the Owner, Architect, and their representatives as additional insured on all Certificates of Insurance. (f) Contractor shall not commence work at the site under this Contract until they have obtained all required insurance and until such insurance has been approved by the Owner and the Architect. The Contractor shall not allow any subcontractor to commence work until all insurance required has been obtained and approved. Approval of the insurance by the Owner and the Architect shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor hereunder. Certificates of insurance shall be filed with the Owner and the Architect prior to commencing work. (g) The required insurance must be written by a Company licensed to do business in the State where the Project is located at the time the policy is issued. In addition, the Company must be acceptable to the Owner. IN The Contractor shall not cause any insurance to be canceled nor permit any insurance to lapse. All insurance policies shall include a clause to the effect that the policy shall not be canceled or reduced, restricted or limited until thirty (30) days after the Owner has received written notice as evidenced by return receipt, registered, or certified letter. Certificates of Insurance shall contain transcripts from the proper office of the insurer, evidencing in particular those insured, the extent of the insurance, the location and the operations to which the insurance applies, the expiration date, and the above mentioned notice of cancellation clause. 11.2 Owner's Liability Insurance: 11.2.1 Delete this paragraph in its entirety and substitute the following: For the duration of this contract, the Contractor shall provide and maintain Owner's and Contractor's protective liability insurance with bodily injury limits of $1,000,000 each person and $2,000,000 each occurrence and property damage insurance with limits of $1,000,000 aggregate for those properties where construction will occur, within the contract limit line. The Owner, Architect, and their representatives shall be named as additional insured in this policy. The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining Owner's liability insurance for the balance of property on which construction under this contract will not occur, if any. 11.3 Property Insurance: 11.3.1, Delete these paragraphs in their entirety and substitute the following: 11.3.1.1, 11.3.1.2, The Contractor shall effect and maintain property insurance on those properties upon which work 11.3.1.3 of this contract is to be performed. This insurance shall include the interest of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, and malicious mischief. The Contractor shall effect and maintain fire insurance including extended coverage with vandalism and malicious mischief endorsement, upon the entire new structures on which fire insurance would be applicable to one hundred percent (100%) of the "Insurance Value" thereof, including labor and materials connected therewith in or adjacent to the structures insured, materials in place or to be used as part of the permanent construction. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors in the Work. The Contractor shall name the Owner, Architect, and their representatives as additional insured on all Certificates of Insurance. 11.3.1.4 Delete the following from this paragraph: "after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval" 11.4.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Add the following: 00800 - 7 "Bond shall be executed on Standard Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond form, a copy of which is bound herein, with amount shown on each part equal to 100% of the total amount payable by terms of the Contract. Surety shall be a company licensed to do business in the same locality as the project and shall be acceptable to the Owner. 12_00 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work: 12-3.1- Add- the -following: - - - — - — - - --- - - — — — -- -- -- - "No work, which may be defective in its construction, or deficient in any way of the requirements of these - Contract Documents, will be considered as accepted in consequence of the failure of an inspector or observer connected with the Work, to point out said defects or deficiencies during construction, and the Contractor shall correct any imperfect Work whenever discovered, before the final acceptance of the Work of the Owner, and all Work done shall be subject to the guarantee as set forth in the Agreement and Bond." - 13.00 13.1 Governing Law. 13.1.1 Add the following: "The Contractor shall observe all "State, City, and County Ordinances" that in anyway affect the operations required in the construction of Work herein contemplated. No equipment shall be used on street or roadway right of way that are equipped with cleats or other injurious parts that may cause damage. No traffic, street, or control signs shall be removed until sanctioned by City Officials, and the Contractor shall assume and be responsible for accident or damage for failure to comply with the above instructions." 13.8 Temporary Signs. Add this heading and paragraph: Signs or advertisements shall not be permitted to be displayed without prior approval oftheArchitect and shall conform to the requirements specified herein. 13.9 Standards. Add this heading and paragraph: The work to be performed under these Contract Documents shall conform in every respect to the standards established by the Associations, Federal Specifications, Building Codes (National and Local), Councils and Societies listed hereinafter unless specified otherwise. In case of conflict, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern. GENERAL FINISHES - American Institute of Architects (AIA) American Association of State Highway Officials (AASHO) American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) American Standards Association (ASA) Uniform Building Code (UBC) Standard Building Code (SBCCI) National Building Code (BOCA) Commercial Standard of the U.S. Department of Commerce (CS) National Bureau of Standards American Standard Specifications - National Fire Protection Association American Waterworks Association (AWWA) National Electric Safety Orders (NESO) Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Occupational Safety and Health Standards; Safety and Health Regulations for Construction; and Safety and Health Standards for Construction (OSHA) American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) American Welding Society (AWS) Flat Glass Jobbers Institute (FGJI) -- Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 00800 - 8 Porcelain Enamel Institute (PEI) Tile Council of America American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants (ASAHC) National Builders Hardware Association (AMA) Steel Structure Painting Council (SSPC) WOOD: Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) National Woodwork Manufactures Association (NWMA) National Lumber Manufacturers Association (NMLA) Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB) _ Douglas Fir Plywood Association (DEPA) Hardwood Plywood Institute (HPI) _ West Coast Lumberman's Association (NHLA) Western Pine Association (WPA) National Hardware Lumber Association (NHLA) Southern Cypress Manufacturer's Association (SCMA) National Door Manufacturer's Association (NDMA) California Redwood Association (CRA) National Oak Flooring Manufacturer's Association (NOFM) United States Forest Products Laboratory American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC) MECHANICAL: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) National Fire Protection Association - National Electric Code (NFPA), (NEC) National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) ELECTRICAL STANDARDS: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (EEE) National Fire Protection Association - National Electric Code (NEPA), (NEC) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) END OF SECTION 00800 00800 - 9 DIVISION 0 GENERAL INDEX TO DRAWINGS GO.1 COVER SHEET G1.1 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN G1.2 ENLARGED SITE PLAN _-, G7.3 SITE DETAILS G1.4 SITE DETAILS - G1.5 SITE DETAILS G2.1 FUEL ISLAND CANOPY REFLECTED CEILING AND ELEVATION G2.2 GASOLINE ISLAND COLUMN DETAILS I - CIVIL Cl GENERAL NOTES AND SPECIFICATIONS C2 PROJECT BOUNDARY SURVEY C3 EXISTING TOPOGRAPHY (SOUTH PORTION) C4 EXISTING TOPOGRAPHY (NORTH PORTION) C5 PROJECT SITE PLAN C6 CLEARING PLAN C7 OVERALL HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN C8 DETAILED HORIZONTAL CONTROL C9 ROUGH GRADING PLAN (SOUTH PORTION) C70 ROUGH GRADING PLAN ( NORTH PORTION) C71 ONSITE SEWER AND WATER PLAN C12 LIFT STATION DETAILS C13 TRUCK AREA DRAINAGE PLAN C14 AUTO/RV AREA DRAINAGE PLAN C15 FUEL ISLANDS DRAINAGE PLAN C16 OIL/WATER SEPARATOR EFFLUENT POND DETAILS C17 TURN LANE CONSTRUCTION C18 PAVEMENT MARKING PLAN & GEOMETRY C19 NORTH ENTRY ROAD C20 TRUCK SCALE GRADING & DETAILS C21 WATER SYSTEM DETAILS C22 SEWER DETAIL AND PROFILE C23 PAVING AND DRAINAGE DETAILS C24 PAVING AND DRAINAGE DETAILS - C25 FORCE & GAS MAINS STATION 0+00 TO 11 +20 C26 FORCE & GAS MAINS STATION 11 +20 TO 20+00 C27 FORCE & GAS MAINS STATION 22+00 TO 32+80 C28 FORCE & GAS MAINS STATION 32+80 TO 43+60 C29 FORCE & GAS MAINS STATION 43+60 TO 54+40 C30 FORCE & GAS MAINS STATION 54+40 TO 65+20 C31 FORCE & GAS MAINS STATION 65+20 TO 70+60 C31 A FORCE & GAS MAINS STATION 70+60 TO 81 +40 C32 FORCE MAIN DETAILS _ C32A GAS MAIN DETAILS 1 KINGS HIGHWAY GAS MAIN COVER SHEET 2 KINGS HIGHWAY GAS MAIN STA. 2+00 TO 14+00 y 3 KINGS HIGHWAY GAS MAIN STA. 14+00 TO 26+00 4 KINGS HIGHWAY GAS MAIN DETAILS LD7 PLANTING PLAN LD2 PLANTING PLAN - STORE AND RESTAURANT LD3 LANDSCAPE DETAILS & SPECIFICATIONS LD4 IRRIGATION PLAN LD5 IRRIGATION PLAN -- STORE AND RESTAURANT 00950-1 STRUCTURAL S0.1 51.1 51.2 S1.3 52.1 53.1 53.2 S3.3 _53.4 - S3.5 S4.1 S4.2 S4.3 54.4 STRUCTURAL NOTES FOOTING & FOUNDATION PLAN ROOF FRAMING PLAN SECONDARY ROOF FRAMING PLAN SCHEDULES FOOTING & FOUNDATION DETAILS FOOTING & FOUNDATION DETAILS FRAMING DETAILS FRAMING DETAILS- --- - -- - FRAMING DETAILS TRUSS ELEVATIONS TRUSS ELEVATIONS BRACED FRAME ELEVATIONS BRACED FRAME ELEVATIONS ARCHITECTURAL A1.1 FLOOR PLAN A1.2 FLOOR PLAN DIMENSIONAL CONTROL A2.1 ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS A2.2 ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS A2.3 WALL TYPES A3.1 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS, FRONT AND REAR A3.2 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS, RIGHT & LEFT A4.1 BUILDING SECTION A5.1 WALL SECTIONS A5.2 WALL SECTIONS A5.3 WALL SECTIONS A5.4 WALL SECTIONS A5.5 WALL SECTIONS A5.6 WALL SECTIONS A5.7 WALL SECTIONS A6.1 ROOF PLAN A6.2 ROOF DETAILS A6.3 ROOF DETAILS & DRAFT STOPS A7.1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A7.2 CEILING FRAMING PLAN A7.3 CEILING FRAMING DETAILS A7.4 CEILING FRAMING DETAILS A8.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A8.2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A8.3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A8.4 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A8.5 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A9.1 DOOR SCHEDULE A9.2 DOOR AND WINDOW FRAME ELEVATIONS A9.3 DOOR AND WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A9.4 DOOR AND WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A9.5 DOOR AND WINDOW FRAME DETAILS A10.1 FASCIA & TRIM DETAILS A10.2 FASCIA & FLASHING DETAILS A11.1 MILLWORK, FUEL DESK PLAN, ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS A11.2 MILLWORK, DELI AREA, ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS A11.3 MILLWORK, MISC. CABINET DETAILS A11.4 MILLWORK, CIGARETTE RACK A11.5 MILLWORK, DETAILS Al2.1 TILE DETAILS FURNISHING & FINISH PLANS FF1.1 FINISH SCHEDULE FLOOR PLAN FF1.2 FINISH SCHEDULE FF2.1 RESTAURANT FLOOR PLAN 00950-2 FF2.2 FURNITURE FURNISHINGS & FINISH FURNITURE LAYOUT FF3.1 RESTAURANT LIGHTING PLAN FF4.1 RESTAURANT INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FF5.1 RESTAURANT INTERIOR DETAILS FF5.2 RESTAURANT INTERIOR DETAILS FF6.1 FURNITURE & FINISH FACILITY FLOOR PLAN FUEL EQUIPMENT EQ1.1 FUEL PIPING PLAN EQ1.2 DOUBLE WALL FIBERGLASS TANK & DETAILS EQ1.3 DOUBLE WALL PIPE DETAILS & OIL CONTAINMENT TANK EQ1.4 GASOLINE & R.V. ISLANDS EQ1.5 DIESEL ISLANDS & EQUIPMENT LIST E01.6 PIPING SPECIFICATIONS & MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS E01.7 MULTIPLE PRODUCT DISPENSER EQ2.1 LPG DETAILS EQ2.2 BULK LPG TANK DETAILS RESTAURANT EQUIPMENT EQ3.1 FLOOR PLAN EO3.2 SCHEDULE EQ3.3 ELEVATIONS EQ3.4 ELEVATIONS EQ3.5 CUSTOM EQUIPMENT DETAILS EO3.6 CUSTOM EQUIPMENT DETAILS FACILITY EQUIPMENT EQ4.1 FACILITY EQUIPMENT PLAN EQ4.2 FACILITY EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE MECHANICAL / PLUMBING P-1 PLUMBING SITE PLAN P-2 MAIN LEVEL PLUMBING PLAN P-3 LARGE SCALE DRIVER'S FACILITY PLUMBING PLAN P-4 LARGE SCALE KITCHEN AREA PLUMBING P-5 LARGE SCALE KITCHEN AREA PLUMBING ROUGH -IN PLAN P-6 WATER & WASTE PLUMBING SCHEMATICS P-7 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULES AND LRG. SCALE PUBLIC RESTROOMS P-D1 PLUMBING DETAILS P-132 PLUMBING DETAILS P-D3 PLUMBING DETAILS M-1 MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN AND NOTES M-2 MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL AND NOTES M-3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES M-D7 MECHANICAL DETAILS M-D2 MECHANICAL DETAILS ELECTRICAL E-1 SITE PLAN ELECTRICAL AND SCHEDULES E-2 MAIN AND UPPER LEVEL LIGHTING PLANS E-3 MAIN AND UPPER LEVEL POWER PLANS E-4 MAIN AND UPPER LEVEL AUXILIARY PLAN E-5 POINT OF SALES - ELECTRICAL E-6 LARGE SCALE KITCHEN PLAN ELECTRICAL E-7 ROOF PLAN - ELECTRICAL E-8 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULE E-9 POWER RISERS AND SCHEDULES E-10 FUEL ISLAND ELECTRICAL PLAN E-11 FUEL DISPENSING - ELECTRICAL E-D1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 00950-3 E-D2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E-D3 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E-D4 ELECTRICAL DETAILS FIRE PROTECTION FA.1 FIRE ALARM PLAN AND SPECIFICATIONS END OF SECTION 00950 00950-4 DIVISION 1 ' 01010 Summary of Work 01020 Allowances & Work By Owner 01030 Special Project Procedures 01035 Change Order Procedures 01045 Cutting and Patching 01050 Field Engineering 01100 Description of Alternates 01200 Project Meetings i 01410 Testing Laboratory Services 01430 Special Observations and Inspection 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01700 Contract Closeout I I .I DIVISION 1 SECTION 01010 _ SUMMARY OF i WORK CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and the General Provisions of the Drawings apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL The intent herewith is to give bidders a limited summary of products, systems, and construction responsibilities j involved in all parts of the Flying J Travel Plaza herein referred to as the Project. Each and every item described herein and all work required therefore and appurtenant thereto is specified elsewhere in this Project Manual of Specifications. Allowances and Work by Owner are described in -Section 01020. Alternate Bid Items are described in Section 01100. This Section is for clarification only and does not exempt or relieve any responsibility the General Contractor(s) has for full compliance with all Contract Documents and provisions therein. 2.00 BASE BID 2 2.01 SUMMARY OF WORK: A. The Project is the construction of the Flying J Travel Plaza including all labor, materials, and equipment incidental to the construction. The project is located at Northwest quadrant of the intersection of _ Interstate Highway 95 and State Road 65 (Orange Avenue), ST. Lucie, Florida Travel Plaza complex which contains a 24-Hour convenience store, Restaurant, drivers' facilities which includes showers, seating area, and fueling and parking facilities for automobiles, recreational vehicles, and trucks. B. Work of the "Base Bid" can be summarized by reference to the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Specification Sections bound herewith, Drawings as Indexed herein, Addenda, and Modifications to the Contract Documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of this Project Manual, and including but not necessarily limited to printed matter referenced by any of these. C. The Base Bid includes all items incidental to the construction of the project including all labor, material, equipment, taxes -and fees not specifically identified as an Alternate, Allowance, or Work by. Owner as defined below and summarized in Section 01020 and 01100. The General Contractor is responsible under the Base Bid to provide complete construction for the building and adjacent Site Work as identified on the Drawings. 3.00 ALTERNATES A. Definition: Alternates are defined as additional phases or portions of Work additive or deductive to the Base Bid and specifically identified as an Alternate herein or on the Drawings and briefly described in Section 01100. B. Such Alternates shall at the option of the Owner be selected and incorporated in the Work of the Project under the provisions established in Division 0 herein. When selected by the Owner such Alternates shall be recorded in the Contract and either supplement, delete, or displace corresponding basic requirements of the Contract Documents. Alternates may or may not substantially change the scope and general character of the Work; and must not be confused with "allowances", "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions. 4.00 ALLOWANCES A. Definition: Allowances are fixed sums, determined by the Architect in advance of bidding, or specific items which the Contractor will contract directly with a vendor or subcontractor of the Owner's choosing. The purpose for including allowances in* the Contract Sum is to provide uniformity in bid proposals for uniform equipment, products, and systems which the Owner prefers to incorporate in other similar Projects. B. Specific allowances are identified in Section 01020. The Contract shall include specific allowance dollar amounts in the Base Bid, and additionally include overhead, profit, delivery, and sales tax, when required, on each allowance item in the Base Bid (Contract Sum). 01010-1 Z 5.00 WORK BY OWNER Portions of the Work to be provided by the Owner's own forces and/or under separate contract by the Owner is identified in Section 01020. END OF SECTION 01010 01010-2 r I u M DIVISION 1 SECTION 01020 ALLOWANCES AND WORK BY OWNER CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 ALLOWANCES The intent and purpose of including Allowance items in the Contract Sum is to facilitate the Owner's requirement to provide uniform products, fixtures, equipment, and systems into this Project which are compatible to other similar Flying J facilities. 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS: A. In most instances the purchase price and Allowance item specifications have been negotiated with appropriate suppliers, except Landscaping. B. The General Contractor shall include the dollar amounts listed below for each Allowance item in the Contract Sum "Base Bid". C. The General Contractor shall, in addition to the amounts listed below, include profit, overhead, and applicable sales taxes in the Contract Sum "Base Bid" for all Allowance items. D. The General Contractor will be furnished "approved" manufacturer's/supplier's name, contact, and specifications for each Allowance item, except for Landscaping. E. The General Contractor shall contract directly with an "approved" manufacturer/supplier for materials and labor. General Contractor must receive Owner's approval of all contracts with suppliers prior to executing any agreement for any Allowance item. F. The General Contractor shall assume complete responsibility of contractual agreements, coordination, scheduling, and completion of the work for each Allowance item. Allowance items shall be considered _part of the entire Project and shall be included in the Contractors guarantee for the Project. 1.02 SPECIFIC ALLOWANCES: A. There are no specific allowances in the contract. 2.00 WORK AND MATERIALS FURNISHED BY OWNER 2.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS: A. The General Contractor shall be required to pay for all permits required. B. The General Contractor shall designate a separate secured storage area for Owner provided items at the Project Site. The General Contractor shall off load, receive, protect and store all Owner provided items listed herein, and bear full responsibility for these items until possession is taken by Owner at Substantial Completion of the Project. The Owner out of courtesy will request that all supplier give 24 hour notice to the General Contractor prior to delivery. The General Contractor shall off load all Owner Provided Items at time of arrival at the site regardless of the 24 hour notice. 2.02 ITEMS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER: The Owner shall furnish and install under separate contract, the following items. The General Contractor shall coordinate scheduling for installation with the Owner through the Owner's Representative. All work incidental to, adjoining, connecting this work to work provided by the General Contractor or identified herein shall be provided by the General Contractor and included in the Contract Sum "Base Bid". A. Interior and exterior signage, signage components, awnings including under canopy price signage, canopy signage fixed to canopy fascia. General Contractor is to provide power source, conduit runs, wiring, and main disconnects as indicated on drawings and shall be include with "Base Bid". B. Point of Sales (P.O.S.) Equipment and wiring. General Contractor to provide all conduit and pull strings as indicated on drawings. 01020 - 1 C. General Contractor to provide and install all conduit, ground rods, and pull cord for all phone systems and sound systems equipment. Owner to provide all wire, with associated pulling of wire to phone systems and sound systems equipment, all telephone equipment and sound systems equipment, including speakers. D. Underground Fuel System tightness testing. The Owners fuel sub -contractor must purge lines (100 gallons per hose) prior to testing. Fuel will be provided by Owner. E. Art work, accessories, miscellaneous restaurant decorations, and interior plants. F. Steam Cleaner,Floor Scrubber and Tenant Sweeper. G. Coffee Counter, Stool and Supports Brackets, Buffet Counters and Sneeze Guards, Restaurant Cashier Counter. (The General Contractor is to provide and install the ceramic tile at Coffee Counter base, and Buffet Counter tops). H. Telephone Booth Stools. I. Driver's Lounge Furniture, including audio/visual equipment. J. Interior free-standing millwork Trash Recepticals. K. Convenience Store equipment package ( including the walk-in cooler box, cooler doors,cooler refrigeration, fast food base cabinets and stainless steel counter top are to be installed by Owner). See paragraph 2.03 below). Refer to drawings. L. Kitchen Smallwares and also Kitchen Equipment as defined in Section 11400 of these Construction Documents. The Kitchen Equipment will be placed and installed through a separate contract by the owner. (The General Contractor shall be responsible for all final connections. This includes natural gas, electrical and pumping. The General Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Owner's Subcontractor in writing as to the completion date of the rough framing in the kitchen area). M. All dispensing equipment associated with the Fuel Additive Storage Tank (1,000 gal.) And associated wiring. (The General Contractor to receive, test, and make the final placement of the tank after delivery. General Contractor to provide associated conduit and pull cords per electrical plans - with weatherproof terminations). N. Restaurant booths, tables, chairs, curtain panel booth dividers, coffee counter stool and supports brackets. O. Truck Weigh Scale, Load Cells and associated Foundations, Load Cell Cables with Connectors, Concrete Slab immediately below the scales, and 10' (or per State Code) Level Concrete Platforms at the entry and exit of scale, Video Camera, Mounting Pole, Camera Lens, Weatherproof Housing, Video Coax Cable, Connectors and Black and White Monitor at fuel desk are included in this allowance. (The Approach and Departure Ramps, Sub and Finish Grading and Compaction, including Subgrade under 10' level pads, Conduit, Pulling of all wire including Load Cell Cables and Coax Cables, Power Source, Final Termination of 120 volt electrical, Scale Wheel -Guards, Concrete Pole Base for Video and Signal Lights and Phone are to be included in other appropriate Divisions of Contract Sum "Base Bid". Refer to 2drawings.) P. Canopies, Canopy Signage fixed to canopy fascia, under canopy lighting, canopy columns, non -shrink grout and canopy anchor bolts. (Concrete canopy footings, power source, wiring, and photo cell lighting controls are not to be included in this Allowance and must be included in appropriated divisions of Contract Sum "Base Bid" by the General Contractor. Refer to the drawings). Q. Office Supplies and Furniture. R. Large Screen Television and Video Equipment. S. Testing Laboratory Services as defined in section 01410. Fuel Storage Tanks, underground Fuel Piping, Island Forms, Dispensers, Hoses, Nozzels all excavation for tank and trenching for fuels piping, reinforced concrete deadmen/hold-down slab, tank tie down strapping, all tank hole and fuels piping treching backfill/compaction to the level below the finish pavement or landscaping topsoil where applicable, steel pipe bollards with associated pipe sleeves at 01020 - 2 the gasoline islands, as -built certified engineering survey of the fuels system prior to backfilling tank - hole/piping trenches, and tank/piping identification markers in the finish pavement. (Refer to EQ1 Drawings for a complete list of equipment). U. Locker located in Employee Break Room. V. 1,000 gallon retail Propane Tank, associated vaporizer, pump, meter, cabinet,wire and final connections. General Contractor shall provide electrical conduits with pull -cords, concrete slab and • pipe railings and painting of pipe rails and tank. W. Laundry Equipment, including all coin -operated and house laundry equipment. X. Ton Services monitors, computer cabinet stations and graphics (General Contactor to provide conduits with coax and pull strings for a complete fist see drawings). l �[ Y. III Graphics above Cooler in Convenience Store. _ Z. Sneeze guards kitchen equipment and graphics and signage for the fastfood area "Pepperoni's" . •� AA. Shoe Shine Chair located in the Drivers Lounge. . p.. AB. Fast Food Counter, Sneeze Guards, built-in Foodservice Equipment, and free standing Foodservice Equipment (the General Contractor to provide and install all associated ceramic tile on Fast Food Counters). AC. All the casework is to be provided and installed by the Owner under a separate contract. Which includes Fuel Counters Fast Food Counter, Deli Counter Buffet Counters, Office Counter Tops and Laundry Folding Tables. This does not include chair rails or base boards. .. `� AD. The Oil/Water Separator is to be provided by the Owner and installed by the Owners Fuel Contractor. The General Contractor will be required to provide all nessasary drainage piping to and from the Oil/Water Separator and electrical conduit and wire. 2.03 ITEMS FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR: The Owner shall furnish to the General Contractor and General Contractor shall install the following items. Installation for these items must be included in the Contract Sum "Base Bid". General Contractor must coordinate installation with other appropriate trades. Refer to drawings. 1 A. Exterior Trash Recepticals and Ash Urns. B. Deli Seating Booths and Trash Receptacle located in Driver's Lounge Area. C. Wall Repository located between Cashier Check Out and Accounting Office. Notify the Owner four weeks prior to framing observation. D. FJ 2000 Fuel Additive StorageTank to be received, tested, and put in final placement. E. Card Reader Pedestal. F. Restaurant lobby benches 1 contractor to assemble and place). G. Stools for the fastfood area "Pepperoni's" (contractor to assemble and place). H. Truck Weigh Scales' associated phone pedestal, traffic light, speaker box, video camera and box and 15' mounting pale. END OF SECTION 01020 01020 - 3 n DIVISION 1 SECTION 01030 SPECIAL PROJECT Id PROCEDURES e }, 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples as required by Contract Documents. Any required submittal, not reviewed by the Architect may cause that portion of work to be rejected on any Payment Applications. I� 2.00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work. B. Submit a minimum of six (6) copies of each submittal to the Owner's Representative to forward to the Architect for approval, two (2) copies will be retained by the Architect/Engineer. C. Submittals shall contain: 1. The Project Title, Location, and Architect's Project Number. 2. Date drawing is submitted and the dates of any previous submittals. 3. Contract Identification. 4. Name of Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier, and/or Manufacturer. 1 5. Identification of product, with Specification Section number. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Show relationship to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. B. Identify applicable standards, such as ASTM, Federal Specification Numbers, or other recognized criteria. 9. Clearly identify deviations from contract drawings and specifications. 10. Provide for a 8" x 4" blank space for contractor and Architect/Engineer stamps. 11. General Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying submittal meets requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. �t 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS: ■ j A. Shop drawings are to he drawn accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent features of the item and its method of connection to the work. k B. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers shown on the Contract ( Drawings. 2.02 PRODUCT DATA: i` A. Product Identification: ' 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls where applicable. B. Include manufacturers standard schematic drawings and diagrams. I' 01030 - 1 1. Modify drawing and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable. 2. Supplement standard information to provide data that is specifically applicable to work. 2.03 SAMPLES: Office Samples submitted shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: A. The functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. / B —The-full-range of color, texture —,and -pattern. -- —" C. Submit new samples for those products not approved as required in the initial submission. D. Submit names of supplier and manufacturer. 3.00 GUARANTEES General Contractor shall collect, review, and approve or reject 3 copies of all guarantees and warranties applicable to work herein called for. Collate said guarantees, material lists, etc., in to three (3) separate three ring hard cover binders and deliver same to Owner's Representative and Architect for review and forwarding to Owner. Arrange with Owner through the Owner's Representative for timing of operational instructions for Owner's personnel by factory trained manufacturer's agents where such is a part of equipment furnished. Satisfactorily complete all such requirements herein and in Section 01700, Contract Closeout as a condition of release of final payment. 4.00 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Submittals shall be transmitted to General Contractor. B. General Contractor shall review then transmit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Submittals to the Architect for review. C. Contractor shall distribute submittals which carry the Architect stamp of review. 5.00 RESUBMISSION OF REJECTED SUBMITTALS A. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. B. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative. C. Make corrections or changes in the submittals as required by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner's Representative and resubmit until approved. 6.00 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples prior to submission to the Owner's Representative and Architect for review. A. Verify dimensions with field measurements. B. Verify that submissions meet construction criteria. C. Verify that submissions conform with specifications. D. Verify catalog and model numbers and similar data. E. Coordinate each Submittal with the Requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. F. Notify Architect in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. G. Certify by affixing General Contractors stamp, initialed and signed, certifying to the review of Submittal and coordination of the information within the Submittal with requirements of the Work and of the Contract 01030 - 2 hDocuments prior to submittal to Owner's Representative and Architect. 1 H. Insure that no fabrication or work is begun, which requires submittals, until the submittals have been returned !� with Architect's approval. 9—� I. Distribute Architect approved Shop Drawings. Suppliers and Manufacturers shop drawings are to be submitted to the Owner's Representative who will after thorough review, transmit drawings, product data, and samples to Owner's Representative and Architect for approval. `I 7,00 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES RESPONSIBILITIES A. Owner's Representative will assist the Architect in reviewing submittals for compliance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. B. When submittals are received from the Owner's Representative by the Construction Manager, the Owner's `+ Representative will forward submittal with recommendations to the Architect for approval or rejection within three (3) days. 8.00 ARCHITECT'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Architect and Owner's Representative will review submittals within a two (2) week period following receipt from the General Contractor. Resubmittals will also be reviewed within a two (2) week period following receipt of resubmittal from the General Contractor. B. Review of submittals is for assistance in interpreting the design concept of the Project and compliance with (, information given in the Contract Documents, and does not change the Contract Requirements nor the �. Contractor's responsibilities. C. Architect will affix review stamp and initials or signature and indicate requirements for corrections or resubmittal. D. Architect will return reviewed submittals to General Contractor for distribution or resubmission. E. Architect will provide copy of all shop drawings to Owner. -. END OF SECTION 01030 I 4� V 01030 - 3 �A DIVISION 1 SECTION 01035 i CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES „--�, CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, and DIVISION 1, and the General Provisions of the Drawings apply to this ,. Section. 1.00 GENERAL �l A. The General Contractor shall make such changes in the Work, in the Contract Sum, in the Contract Time of Completion, or any combination thereof, as are described in written Change Orders and/or Construction Change Directives signed by the Owner and the Architect and issued after execution of the Contract, in accordance with the provisions of this Section. B. Changes in the Work are described further in the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. C. The General Contractor shall institute such measures as are needed to assure familiarity of the Contractor's staff, Sub -Contractors, and Suppliers with these procedures for processing Change Order data. D. The General Contractor shall maintain a full and complete "Register of Proposal Requests, Supplemental Instructions, Change Orders, and Construction Change Directives" at the job site, accurately reflecting the current status of all pertinent data and the progress of the changes in the Work. Make this Register available to the Owner's Representative and Architect for review at their request. `i I 2.00 RELATED DOCUMENTS i 2.01 Architect's Supplemental Instructions: �j A. From time to time during the progress of the Work the Architect may issue supplemental Instructions which interpret the Contract Documents or order minor changes in the Work without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. B. Should the Contractor consider that a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time is required, the Contractor shall submit an itemized "Proposal for Change Order" to the Architect through the Owner's Representative which includes all costs and/or time adjustments for the proposed change. This proposal must be submitted within 14 days of the issuance of the Architect's Supplemental Instructions and prior to proceeding with changes in the Work, otherwise no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be allowed. If the Owner's Representative and the Architect find the proposal in proper order, the Supplemental Instructions will be superseded by the Architect's preparation of a Change Order for processing. 2.02 Proposal Requests: A. From time to time during the progress of the Work the Architect may issue Proposal Requests for itemized . quotations for changes in the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time incidental to proposed modifications in the Contract Documents. B. A Proposal Request is not a Change Order and is not an authorization to proceed with changes described therein. 2.03 Construction Change Directives: 1 14 A. A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner directing a change in the Work. B. A Construction Change Directive shall be used in absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. -' C. Construction Change Directives are defined further in the Conditions of the Contract. D. Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in Work as outlined in the Conditions of the Contract. 01035 - 1 3.00 PROCESSING PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. The General Contractor must reply to the Architect within 14 days of the date shown on each Proposal Request. 1. Submit an itemized quotation for the proposed changes in the Work requested, which indicates all changes proposed to the Contract Sum and Contract Time of Completion, if any. 2. Clearly describe other changes in the Work, if any, required by the proposed change or desirable therewith. - _3. Include full and complete backup data such -as -subcontractor's -letters of -proposal, quotations, or similar information. 4. Submit this response in duplicate to the Architect via the Owner's Representative. B. The Architect and Owner's Representative will review the Contractor's response and when cost or credit adjustments to the Contract Sum and increases or reductions in the Contract Time are deemed appropriate by the Architect and Owner's Representative and agreed to by the Contractor, the Architect will prepare a Change Order for processing. 4.00 PROCESSING CHANGE ORDERS A. Change Orders will be prepared by the Architect, numbered in sequence, and dated. 1. The Change Order will describe the change or changes in the Work and will refer to Proposals for Change Orders, Proposal Requests, or Supplemental Instructions by date which support the Change Order. 2. The Change Order will include all changes to the Contract Sum and Contract Time required by the change. No hidden or extended costs nor additional time adjustments will be allowed. B. The Architect will issue three copies of each Change Order to the Contractor. 1. The Contractor shall promptly sign and return all copies to the Architect via the Owner's Representative. 2. The Owner's Representative shall, upon receipt of Change Orders signed by the Contractor, sign and affix their recommendation and approval and forward all copies to the Architect. C. The Architect, only upon receipt of Change Orders signed by the Contractor and the Owner's Representative, will sign all three copies of the Change Order and will then present the Change Order to the Owner for Approval. 1. The Change Order is not valid until the Owner has approved and signed. 2. The Contractor should not proceed with changes in the Work until a Change Order singed by the Owner is received. D. The Architect, upon receipt of the Owner's approval and signature, will retain one copy for the Owner, forward one copy to the Contractor, and one copy to the Owner's Representative of each Change Order. 1. The Contractor shall then proceed promptly with changes in Work as directed by the Change Order. E. In the event that agreement regarding changes to the Contract Sum or Contract Time cannot be reached between the Contractor, Owner's Representative, and the Architect, or the Contractor refuses to sign a Change Order, the Architect may issue'a Construction Change Directive. 1. The Contractor shall proceed with changes to the Work promptly, as directed by all Construction Change Directives, according to the Conditions of the Contract. END OF SECTION 01035 01035 - 2 I` DIVISION 1 SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, DIVISION 1, and the General Provisions of the Drawings apply to this Section. ti) < _S� 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS j 1.01 SUMMARY v — A. This Section establishes general requirements pertaining to cutting (including excavation), fitting, and patching of the Work required to: 1. Make the several parts fit properly; 2. Uncover work to provide for installing, observing, or both, of ill-timed work; 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents; and G 4. Remove and replace defective or rejected work. 1.02 RELATED WORK: `-' A. In addition to other requirements specified, upon the Architect's request uncover work to provide for observation by the Architect of covered work, and remove samples of installed materials for testing. B. Do not cut or alter work performed by the Owner or under separate contracts without the Architect's written „ authorization. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: [ A. Requests for Architect's Consent: 1. Prior to cutting which may effect structural safety or the performance of structural systems, submit a - written request to the Architect for permission to proceed wit cutting. 2. Should conditions of the Work, or schedule, indicate a required change of materials or methods for cutting and patching, so notify the Architect via the Owner's Representative and secure their written permission and required Change Order, if any, prior to proceeding. t B. Engineering Reports and Recommendations: 1. Submit for Architect's approval, when requested, complete reports and recommendations from experts I, suitable to the Architect that outline methods and techniques to be utilized in cutting and patching to be performed will maintain the structural integrity and continued performance of affected and adjacent portions of the Work. II 2. When such requests are made, do not proceed with work of this Section without written authorization. t -r C. Notices to the Architect: �i 1. Submit written notice to the Architect via the Owner's Representative outlining the time frames work will be uncovered, to provide for the Architect and/or Owner's Representative's observation. 1.04 COORDINATION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Contractor shall coordinate the work of all trades required for the proper completion of the Work of this (I Section. B. Contractor shall use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section. 01045 - 1 2.00 MATERIALS A. For replacement of items removed, use materials complying with pertinent Sections of this Project Manual of Specifications. B. Any deviation from specified items must have Architect's prior written approval. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: A. Inspection: 1. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling. 2. After uncovering the work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new work. B. Discrepancies: 1. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify the Architect and secure needed directions. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING: A. Provide required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring, bracing, and support to maintain structural integrity of the Work. 3.03 PERFORMANCE: A. Perform required excavating and backfilling as required under other pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 1. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the Work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work. 2. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. 3.04 PAYMENT AND TIME: A. Unless performed pursuant to a signed Change Order, the Owner will not reimburse the Contractor nor extend the Contract Time for cutting and patching. B. The Contractor shall perform all other cutting and patching at no additional cost nor time delay to the Owner. END OF SECTION 01045 01045 - 2 f i DIVISION 1 SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. d_ J 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: �- A. Contractor shall provide such field engineering services as are required for proper completion of the Workincluding, but not limited to: 1. Establishing the location of structures, equipment, and/ or elements of construction; 2. Establishing and maintaining lines and levels; y_l 3. Structural design of shoring, forms, and similar items, and formulation of temporary erosion control measures and environmental management plans required by the Work provided by the Contractor as part l of their means, methods, and timing of construction. B. Prepare an "As -Built" Survey as defined in Section 01700, Project Closeout. r`-- 1.02 RELATED WORK: A. Additional requirements for field engineering may also be described in other Sections of this Project Manua of Specifications. �) B. The Contractor shall field verify all physical characteristics, legal limitations, and actual utility locations, - described in the Drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Comply with all pertinent Sections of this Project Manual of Specifications requiring Shop Drawings, Product - Data, Samples, or other submittals. B. Upon request of the Architect, submit: 1. Data demonstrating qualifications of persons proposed to be engaged for field engineering services. field 2. Documentation verifying accuracy of engineering work. 3. Certification, signed by the Contractor's retained field engineer, certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance or nonconformance with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2.00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES A. In addition to procedures directed by the Contractor for proper, performance of the Contractor's ' responsibilities: 1. Locate and protect control points before starting work on the site. i 2. Preserve permanent reference points during progress of the Work. 3. Do not change or relocate reference points or items of the Work without specific approval from the !�-- r� Architect. 4. Promptly advise the Architect when a reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of other changes in the Work. a. Upon direction of the Architect, require the field engineer to replace reference stakes or markers. b. Locate such replacements according to the original survey control. 01050 - 1 ,I r�i It DIVISION 1 SECTION 01100 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, DIVISION 1, and the General Provisions of the Drawings apply to this Section. 1.00 SCOPE The intent herewith is to give the bidders a limited description of products, systems, and construction involved in all parts of The Project designated as Alternate Bid items. 'Each itemdescribedherein and all work required therefore and appurtenant thereto is specified elsewhere in this Project Manual of Specifications. Verify Alternate Bid item limitations with Architect prior to submitting Bid Proposals to the Owner. 2.00 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES There are no specific alternates in this contract. END OF SECTION 01100 01100-1 r� n DIVISION 1 SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. a (' 100 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Work included: To enable orderly review during progress of the Work, and to provide for systematic discussion of problems, the Owner's Representative will conduct project meetings throughout the construction period. A_ B. Related Work: The Contractor's relations with his subcontractors and materials suppliers, and discussions (( relative thereto, are the Contractor's responsibility and normally are not part of project meetings content. 1� 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Agenda items: To the maximum extent practicable, advise the Owner's Representative at least 24 hours in advance of project meetings regarding items to be added to the agenda. B. Minutes: 1. The Owner's Representative will compile minutes of each project meeting, and will furnish copies to the Architect, the Contractor, and the Owner. 2. Recipients of copies may make and distribute such other copies as they wish. �j 1.03 COORDINATION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. For those persons designated by the Contractor to attend and participate in project meetings, provide required �a authority to commit the Contractor to solutions agreed upon in the project meetings. 2.00 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE I. A. A Preconstruction Conference will be scheduled by the Contractor to be held within 15 days after the date it of the Owner's Notice to Proceed. B. Attendance and Facilities: 9. _ 1. Contractor shall provide facilities for the Conference and provide attendance by authorized representatives of the Contractor, Sub -Contractor's, and major material suppliers. 2. The Owner's Representative will advise the Architect and other interested parties, including the Owner and other contractors under separate contract with Owner on this Project, and request their attendance. C. Minimum Agenda: Data will be distributed and discussed on at least the following items. 1. Organizational arrangement of Contractor's forces and personnel, and those of subcontractors, materials suppliers, Owner's Representative, Architect, and Owner. 2. Channels and procedures for communication. 3. Construction schedule, including sequence of the critical path for completion of the Work. 4. Contract Documents, including distribution of required copies of original Documents and revisions. 5. Processing of Shop Drawings and other data submitted to the Owner's Representative, Architect, and Owner for review. 6. Processing of Architect's Supplemental Instructions, Proposals for Change Orders, and Construction Change Directives. Proposal Requests, and Change Orders. 01200 - 1 t 7. Rules and regulations governing performance of the work. B. Procedures for safety and first aid, security, quality control, housekeeping, and related matters. 3.00 PROJECT MEETINGS 3.01 PROGRESS MEETING SCHEDULE: A. Except as noted below for Special Project Meetings, Project Meetings will be held monthly. - — - - B—Coordinate-as necessary -to establish a mutually acceptable schedule —for meetings 3.02 MEETING LOCATION: A. The Owner's Representative will establish meeting location. To the maximum extente practicable, meetings will be held at the job site. However, Special Meetings may be required at other locations. 3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS: A. Attendance: 1. To the maximum extent practicable, assign the same person or persons to represent the Contractor at project meetings throughout progress of the Work. 2. Subcontractors, materials suppliers, and others may be invited to attend those project meetings in which their aspect of the Work is involved. B. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review, revise as necessary, and approve minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review progress of the Work since last meeting, including status of submittals for approval. 3. Identify problems which impede planned progress. 4. Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain planned schedule. 5. Complete other current business. C. Revisions to minutes: 1. Unless published minutes are challenged in writing prior to the next regularly scheduled progress meeting, they will be accepted as properly stating the activities and decisions of the meeting. 2. Persons challenging published minutes shall reproduce and distribute copies of the challenge to all indicated recipients of the particular set of minutes. 3. Challenge to minutes shall be settled as priority portion of "old business" at the next regularly scheduled meeting. 3.04 SPECIAL MEETINGS: A. The Contractor may be required to attend Special Meetings as requested by the Owner, Architect, and/or Owner's Representative as may be required by them. 1. As much advance notice as is practicable will be given to the Contractor regarding time, location, and agenda. 2. All expenses for Special Meetings incurred by the Contractor shall be the Contractors own responsibility. END OF SECTION 01200 01200 - 2 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES ^'=—? CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I 1.01 GENERAL: A. This Section describes testing and inspecting required to be provided by the Owner and coordinated by the -�` General Contractor. Ii fi B. Comply with all requirements for testing and inspecting described in the various Sections of these Specifications. y C. Required testing and inspecting Services are intended to assist in the determination on probable compliance of 4 the Work with requirements specified or indicated. I D. Testing, or the failure to test, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the ,I requirements of the Contract Documents. V 1.02 SCOPE: A. Contractor shall coordinate the services of independent engineering consultants and a testing laboratory provided by the Owner as required to provide all testing and inspecting required under this section of Specifications, and all testing and inspecting required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. B. The Owner may employ and pay for additional testing and inspecting by an independent testing laboratory as may be deemed appropriate to determine probable compliance of the Work with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. The Owner need not notify the Contractor prior to such testing nor is the Owner required to disclose such r testing results to the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Owner's testing laboratory to facilitate execution of required Il services. E. The Owner will provide for all testing and inspecting services specifically requested by the Architect or the Owner's Representative over and above those described in paragraph 1.02-A above, except as noted below. F. When testing requested by the Architect or the Owner's Representative indicates noncompliance with the Contract Documents all testing and subsequent retesting occasioned by the noncompliance shall be performed by the same testing laboratory and the costs thereof shall be paid by the Contractor. _ G. The Contractor shall be responsible for all additional testing costs incurred due to improper workmanship, or the failure of equipment or materials, or noncompliance with the Contract Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all pertinent Sections of these Specifications requiring submittals. r B. Submit Mix designs and other product data for review by the Owner's Representative and Architect as required by this Section. I 2.00 QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS '} 2.01 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY: } A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", published by American Council _ of Independent Laboratories. i? B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E 329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing 01410 - 1 Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction." C. Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located. D. Acceptable to Owner, Architect, and Owner's Representative. E. Testing equipment calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 2.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 301-73, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 2. Specification for Structural Joints. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) (latest editions): 1. ASTM C31, Making and Curing Concrete Compressive and Flexural Strength Test Specimens in the Field. 2. ASTM C39, Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 3. ASTM C42, Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 4. ASTM C109, Test for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars. 5. ASTM C143, Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. 6. ASTM C172, Method of Fresh Concrete, Sampling. 7. ASTM C231, Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 8. ASTM C567, Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete. 9. ASTM E164, Ultrasonic Contact Inspection of Weldments. 10. ASTM E605, Field Density and Thickness Testing of Direct Spray Fireproofing. D. American Welding Society (AWS): Structural Welding Code,D1.1, including latest revisions. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 TAKING SPECIMENS: A. Except as may be specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, have the testing laboratory secure and handle all samples and specimens for testing. 3.02 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF LABORATORY: A. Cooperate with Architect and Owner's Representative and qualified personnel for all testing and inspecting. B. Perform specified sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. C. Promptly notify Architect and Owner's Representative of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products. D. Laboratory is not Authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on the requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 01410 - 2 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection and submit copies to Architect, Owner's Representative, Owner, Engineer and Contractor. Each report shall include: •=?' 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and Architect's project number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 4' 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. i� 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and Specification Section. 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. r� 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Document Requirements. 12. Interpretation of test results that indicate unsatisfactory conditions. 3.03 REPAIR AND PROTECTION: _ A. Upon completion of inspection , testing, sampletaking, and similar services performed on the Work , repair damaged work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in the visual qualities of exposed finishes. B. Protect work exposed by or for testing or inspecting service activities and protect repaired work. C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. 3.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES: i . A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to Work or to manufacturer's operations. B. Allow laboratory to take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed for use and which require testing. C. Provide to laboratory preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixed which j require control by testing laboratory. D. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations (minimum of 2 days) to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at Project site or at source of product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. F. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's 01410 - 3 convenience. G. Cooperate with the Owner's testing laboratory and provide access to the Work at all times and at all locations where Work is in progress. Provide facilities requested to enable laboratory to perform it's functions properly. 4.00 SPECIFIC TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Earthwork: - -1:—In=8itu materials -(if -re -compaction is required) - a. Laboratory moisture/density relationship (modified proctor), ASTM D1557. 1) One test for each type of soil encountered. b. Field density test, ASTM D2922 method B. 1) Trenches: One test/50 feet/lift. 2) Building pads: One test/1000 s.f./lift. 3) Pavement: One test/2500 s.f./lift. 2. Imported materials, including base course for pavements. a. Laboratory moisture/density relationship (modified), ASTM D1557. 1) One test for each type of fill. b. Plasticity Index test, ASTM D424. 1) One test for each type of fill. C. Graduation test, ASTM D546. 1) One test for each type of fill. d. Field density test, ASTM D2922, method B. 1) Trenches: One test/50feet/lift 2) Building pads: One test/1000 s.f/lift. 3) Pavement: One test/10,000 s.f/lift. B. Flexible Pavements 1. Bituminous wearing course a. Laboratory Marshall mix, ASTM D1559. 1) One test for each type of mix proposed. b. Field Marshall test, ASTM D1559 (modified for field asphalt content only). 1) One test. C. Extraction test, ASTM D2172. 1) One test per 2,500 tons of hot mix. d. Graduation, ASTM D546. 1) One test per 2,500 tons. e. Thickness determination. 1) One test per 100,000 s.f. f. Field density test, ASTM D2922, method a (backscatter) 1) Non-destructive: One test/10,000 s.f. 2) Cored sample: One core/100,000 s.f. 2. Base course, Sub -base, and Sub -grade. (same as required for imported fill material) C. Rigid pavements 01410 -4 s 1. Portland cement concrete. a. Mix design 1) One design for each type and strength b. Field tests ' 11 Slump, ASTM C143: One test/truck 2) Air content, ASTM C231: One test/50 c.y. or day's placement for each type and strength of concrete. 3) Unit weight, ASTM C138: One test/50 c.y. or day's placement for each type and strength of concrete. 4) Strength specimens, ASTM C31: Four beams cast/50 c.y. or day's placement for each type and strength of concrete. �^ C. Laboratory flexural strength test, ASTM C78 or C293. 1) One specimen test at age 7 day, two tests at age 28 days and one specimen held for reserve. 2. Base course, Sub -base, and Sub -grade. (same as required for imported fill material) D. Concrete for buildings and structures. 1. Portland cement concrete. a. Mix design. 1) One design for each type and strength. ^, b. Field tests. 1) Slump, ASTM C143: One test/truck 2) Air content, ASTM C231: One test/50 c.y. or day's placement for each type and strength of concrete. 3) Unit weight, ASTM C138: One test150 c.y. or day's placement for each type and strength of concrete. 4) Strength specimens, ASTM C31: Four cylinders cast/50 c.y. or day's placement for each type and strength of concrete. c. Laboratory compressive strength test, ASTM C39. 1) One specimen test at age 7 days, two tests at age 28 days and specimen held for reserve. I 5.00 FUEL SYSTEM TESTING RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Owner shall provide independent testing services for volumetric and/or tightness testing of fuel system components. B. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owners testing agency and require that qualified installers be present at the site during testing to provide incidental related work at that time. C. The Contractor shall notify the Owner through the Owner's Representative when the fuel system will be ready for testing, a minimum of two weeks prior to anticipated testing date. It is the Contractors responsibility to schedule work to allow sufficient time for testing and corrections to occur without delay to the Project. Testing �must be completed prior to issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion for the Project. D. The Contractor must provide the following prior to testing: 1. Make sure underground storage tanks are topped off to top of fill pipe 8 hours prior to test start time. (Fuel to be provided by Owner. See item 6 below, also.) 2. Make sure submersible pumps can be vented. (Drill & tap riser or remove pumps.) 3. Make sure ball floats are removed. 4. Make sure lines are purged. 5. Make sure lines can be isolated at submersible pumps for line tests. 1j 6. Make sure to secure extra product. (55 gal. each tank.) 01410 - 5 a ` 7. Make sure there is an uninterruptible power source within 50'. B. Make sure there is power to all dispensers. END OF SECTION 01410 r 01410 - 6 1 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01430 SPECIAL OBSERVATIONS AND INSPECTIONS I CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this. Section. r _ f 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 GENERAL: A. This Section describes special observations and inspections required during the progress of the Work. B. Comply with all requirements of Local Code Authorities for construction inspections. C. Special inspections described herein are intended to assist in the determination of probable compliance of the Work with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Compliance with this Section shall not relieve the 'i Contractor of responsibility for compliance with all requirements, whether observed by others or not, of the Contract Documents. 1.02 SCOPE: A. The Contractor shall request Special Observations and Inspections in writing to the Architect through the Owner's Representative 14 days prior to the anticipated Observation or Inspection. B. The Contractor shall be responsible to prepare the Work so as to be ready for the Observation or Inspection prior to the arrival of the Architect's or Owner's Representative's forces at the site. C. Should the Work not be ready as required herein or in other pertinent Sections when the Architect or Owner's Representative arrives, subsequent additional observations and/or inspections shall be at the Contractor's expense. D. Comply with all pertinent Sections of these Specifications requiring special observations or inspections. E. After observation or inspection has been performed: 1. Make all corrections to the Work required. . Y 2. Do not proceed with additional work until a satisfactory observation or inspection has been conducted by the Architect and/or Owner's Representative as outlined herein. p 2.00 SPECIAL OBSERVATIONS y 2.01 UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION: A. This observation is to be performed by the Owner's Representative. B. This observation must be requested and performed prior to pouring of concrete floor slabs. The following items must be completed prior to requesting this observation: 1. All Underground Plumbing. r 2. All Underground Electrical. 3. All intended Construction Joints in floor slab should be visible. 4. All Floor Reinforcement must be in place. 7 } 5. Vapor Barriers must be in place. --'` 2.02 UNDERGROUND FUEL TANKS AND PIPING OBSERVATION: 1` A. Part of this observation is to be conducted during the actual installation of the underground fuel systems. This �l observations is to be preformed by the Owner's Representative. 01430 - 1 '•7 B. This observation shall be made during multiple trips to the site and must be scheduled with Owner's Representative prior to commencement of work. Items to be observed include: 1. Tank installation observation: a. Visual inspection of tanks for damage (Pressure test and soaping as per manufacturer recommendations). b. Receipt of tank registration, installation instructions, tank charts, installation check list and tank warranty, must be received by the Construction Superintendent and remain on site to become part of - - Project Close Out. C. Preparation of tank excavation. d. Placement of filter fabric when required. e. Inspection and placement of deadmen or slab (deadmen must be outside the shadow of tanks. Tank tie down shall be placed in exact position on ribs). f. Placement of pea gravel or crushed stone as per manufacturer specifications. g. Placement and installation of tanks as per manufacturer specifications. h. Leveling of tanks. L Installation of tank tie downs. j. Checking diameter of tanks to guard against over deflection while tightening tie down straps. k. Backfill placement around tanks, to be placed evenly as per manufacturers specifications. I. Placement of ballast in tank to include algicide. m. Retest tank after backfill is completed. 2. Fuel Piping Installation: a. Inspection of piping prior to installation. b. Inspection of equipment, tapering tools, clamping methods, heat blankets, adhesives, solvent, and etc. C. Treatment of pipe before and after installation, foreign materials and or contaminated will not be allowed. d. Tapering of primary pipe, including application of solvent, adhesive and insertion of pipe into fittings. e. Secondary pipe cutting procedures, as per manufacturer instructions. f. Secondary fitting, including dry fit up. g. Secondary pipe scarifying, application of solvent, adhesives, and insertion of pipe into fitting h. Both primary and secondary pipe must be observed by Owner's Representative. 2.03 FRAMING STAGE OBSERVATION: A. This observation is intended to be one trip to the Site for the purpose of observing Items 1 thru 4 listed below. If, for scheduling of work the Contractor elects to schedule these observation to create multi observation then the Contractor shall bear the cost of the additional observations requested. This observation is to be performed by the Architect, the Architect's Consulting Engineers, and the Owner's Representative. B. This observation must be requested and performed prior to concealing any portion of the Work required to be observed. Items to be observed include: 01430 - 2 wi.. I . Framing items; the following items must be complete and visible: ' a. All Beam Connections. b. All Anchor Bolt Connections. �j C. All Shear Wall Nailing. d. All Joist Hangers. e. All Required Blocking. f. All Structural Framing must be visible (one side of wall). P g. All Draft Stops must be framed and sheathed one side. 6� h. All Roof Sheathing must be complete . i. All Exterior Wall Sheathing must be complete. 2. HVAC items; the following items must be complete and visible: a. All Trunk and Lateral Runs including any flexible duct runs. b. All Duct Support Systems. p l C. All penetrations through draft stops. d. All Kitchen Exhaust hoods. ' e. Thermostat rough -ins. f. All Roof -Top Units set on curbs and "dryed-in". 1 I g. All duct vanes, dampers, and duct insulation. K 3. Electrical Items; the following items must be complete and visible: i a. Main Electrical Service Feeders roughed -in. b. Main Panel set and roughed -in. . n, C. Transformers set and roughed -in. d. Meters and Connection (CT) boxes set and roughed -in. e. All outlets, j-boxes, light, and switch boxes roughed -in. ' f. All light housings for recessed fixtures in -place. g. All feeders from transformer and feeders from Main distribution panels to sub -panels. h. All Circuit Wiring for lighting and power. i. All nail protection plates. Pi I 4. Plumbing items; the following items must be complete and visible. a. All plumbing rough -ins for showers, toilets, sinks, lavatories, urinals, and Kitchen Equipment and all - required supports. • --� b. All nail protection plates. yC. All blocking for fixtures, piping, and valves. 01430 - 3 d. All valve boxes. e. All pipe insulation (ready to receive building insulation). f. All water heaters, booster heaters, re -circulating pumps, and mixing valves. '3.00 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 3.01 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION: ——A—.This-inspection is to be conducted -by the Architect and -Owners Representatve. B. Comply with requirements contained in the Conditions of the Contract, Section 01700 Contract Closeout, and other pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 3.02 FINAL INSPECTION: A. This inspection if to be conducted by the Owner's Representative. B. Comply with requirements contained in the Conditions of the Contract, Section 01700 Contract Closeout, and other pertinent Sections of these Specifications. END OF SECTION 01430 01430 - 4 DIVISION 1 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION AND TEMPORARY FACILITIES " I CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS �i Facilities provided at the construction site by the General Contractor shall include, but are not limited to, the following: Office Facilities L Toilet Facilities Scaffold and Runways Bonded Security Service Protection of Public Fire Protection Temporary Enclosures Dust Abatement Telephone Service Water and Power Service Construction Sign 1.01 OFFICE FACILITIES: The General Contractor shall provide for the duration of the Work suitable temporary office facilities and furnishings for the Contractor's Superintendent, and the Owner and Architect, or their representatives. 1.02 TOILET FACILITIES: The General Contractor shall provide toilet facilities for workmen during the course of construction. 1.03 SCAFFOLD AND RUNWAYS: A. The General Contractor or in the event of a Sub -Contract the Sub -Contractor shall provide and maintain for the duration of the Work as required, all scaffold, hoists, falsework, staging, stairs, ladders, and runways, including platforms and guard rails connected therewith, as necessary for the performance of all work under the contract, except such as may be otherwise specified in the several specification sections bound herewith. B. All scaffold, runways, and the like shall comply with all requirements of applicable local, state, and Federal statutes, laws and ordinances, including safety rules and regulations of authorities and insurance carriers having jurisdiction. 1.04 BONDED SECURITY SERVICE: _ The General Contractor shall provide the services of a Bonded Security Service, suitable to the Owner, during non- working hours including, but not limited to, all times when workers are not present at the site during regularly �, scheduled work days, off hours (evenings, nights, and early morning), weekends, holidays, and non -work days. The Contractor must receive Owner's approval of Security Service prior to executing an agreement. Security services V shall begin at the time underground utilities start or building construction superstructure materials are scheduled to be delivered at the site which ever occurs first, and maintained throughout the construction period until the Owner accepts, occupies, and begins operation of the Project. 1.05 BONDED WAREHOUSE AND DELIVERY SERVICE FOR OWNER: A. The Contractor shall provide, as part of the Contract Sum, a bonded warehouse and delivery service for the Owners use for the duration of the Project. B. The Contractor shall submit warehouse and delivery qualifications, proposed contract terms, and conditions to Owner for review and approval prior to executing agreement. Submittal shall be made to the Architect through 1 01500 - 1 the Owner's Representative. C. The Owner shall designate all representatives which shall have access to the Owners warehouse. No access , to the warehouse shall be allowed without Owner's authorization. 1.06 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC: A. General Contractor shall provide temporary fences and barriers to protect construction personnel and the general public from any potentially hazardous areas. B. At the completion of Work, all temporary facilities shall be dismantled and removed from the site. 1.07 FIRE PROTECTION: Immediately following the initial delivery and storage of combustible materials at the site of the Work and throughout the construction period thereafter, the Contractor shall supply and maintain suitable and adequate means of fire protection about inflammable structures or grouping of combustible materials incidental to the work of the Contract. 1.08 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES: A. General Contractor shall provide temporary dust -tight enclosures as required to protect materials delivered, from weather, thievery, and vandalism. B. At the end of the day's work, close temporary enclosures. 1.09 DUST ABATEMENT: The Contractor shall provide necessary equipment and methods to eliminate dust in all areas of construction during the entire term of the Contract. Excess dirt or materials that are deposited beyond the Contract limits shall be immediately cleaned up and removed from the area. 1.10 UTILITY SERVICE: A. All temporary utility services shall be provided by the Contractor throughout the construction period until Substantial Completion. B. Telephone service shall be provided by the Contractor for the use of the several subcontractors and trades ' engaged on the Work. Charges for these facilities shall be paid for by the Contractor. J , C. Temporary water and power service shall be provided by the Contractor for the use of the several -� subcontractors and trades engaged on the work. Charges for these facilities shall be paid for by the Contractor. 1.11 SIGNS: A. The Contractor shall furnish erect and maintain in good condition construction signage as directed by the �!r Architect until completion of the project. B. Signs or advertisements shall not be permitted to be displayed without prior approval of the Architect and shall -' conform to the requirements specified herein. 1.12 STANDARDS: ` "i i A. Temporary facilities shall meet the requirements and recommendations of applicable portions described under GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, and as specified for each section of work performed. _ B. Temporary facilities shall comply with all applicable Local, State, and Federal statutes, laws and ordinances, including safety rules and regulations of authorities and insurance carriers having jurisdiction. 'h END OF SECTION 01500 - 1 01500 - 2 DIVISION 1 -'' SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. q 1.00 GENERAL A. This Section describes an orderly and efficient transfer of the completed work to the Owner. c ` v B. Additional activities relative to Substantial Completion and Contract Closeout are described in the General and Supplementary Conditions. C. Prior to requesting inspections by the Architect, use adequate means to assure that the Work is completed in accordance with the specified requirements and is ready for the requested inspection. Should the work be found by the Architect to not be ready for inspection, all expenses for subsequent reinspection shall be paid by the Contractor. L 2.00 PROCEDURES 2.01 CLEAN-UP: i I �. A. The premises and new construction shall be in a neat and orderly condition for the duration of this project. . Each respective trade shall be responsible for their own accumulations, however, the Contractor shall police and be responsible for the orderly storage of materials, tools, scaffolding, and equipment, seeing that each trade follows through with their divisional responsibility of removal of unwanted material and debris, initial cleandown of newly installed work, cleaning of existing work, and protection and cleaning of adjacent work affected by each respective trade's activity. B. At the time of acceptance and occupancy of the building by the Owner, the General Contractor shall have all portions of the Work in a finished and clean condition ready for use without additional work or attention by the _ Owner. All areas and surfaces shall be clean and dust free; windows shall be washed inside and outside and j free from paint spatters or other marks, and sills and mullions washed; floors shall be washed or vacuumed; i walls shall be dusted and washed if necessary; counter tops shall be washed and free of all marks and labels; plumbing fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned and all labels removed; light fixtures shall be cleaned and lenses washed; remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorated work; clean hardware. The Contractor shall also comply with all special cleaning instructions contained in the specifications. Unless specifically directed otherwise by the Owner's Representative or Architect in writing, broom clean all paved areas on the site and public paved areas adjacent to the site. Completely remove all resultant debris from cleaning activities. C. Should the Owner occupy the Work or any portion thereof prior to it's completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the Owner, responsibilities for interim and final cleaning shall be as determined by the Architect in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. 2.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Prepare and Submit a list of items to be completed as required by paragraph 9.8.2 of the General Conditions ' and a written request for a Substantial Completion Inspection to the Architect through the Owner's Representative. B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of the list, the Architect will inspect to determine status of completion. Should the Architect determine that the Work is not substantially complete: a. The Architect promptly will so notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the reasons therefore. b. Remedy the deficiencies and notify the Architect when ready for reinspection. _S c. The Architect will reinspect the Work at the Contractor's expense. C. Prior to the issuance of a "Certificate of Substantial Completion", the Contractor shall forward to the Architect -1 a Certificate of Occupancy. A Temporary Occupancy Permit with a full listing of items to be corrected will be accepted provided the only items on the listing to be corrected are items being provided by the Owner or by ` the Owners Separate Contractor. The project shall not be deemed Substantially Complete until this requirement y is fulfilled. 01700 - 1 D. When the Architect concurs that the Work is Substantially Complete: 1. The Architect will prepare a "Certificate of Substantial Completion" accompanied by a "List of Deficiencies" to be completed or corrected by the Contractor prior to Final Acceptance of the Work by the Owner. 2. The Architect will submit the Certificate to the Owner and to the Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. - 2.03 FINAL COMPLETION , A. Prepare and submit the written notice that the Work is ready fog final inspection and acceptance required by paragraph 9.10.1 of the General Conditions to the Architect through the Owner's Representative. B. Prepare and submit all close-out submittals to the Architect through the Owner's Representative for review, approval, and acceptance. Release of final payment will not be made until all close-out submittals are received, approved, and accepted by the Architect. C. Verify that the Work is complete including, but not necessarily limited to , the items in Paragraph 9.8 of the General Conditions. I') D. Certify that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed by the Contractor; 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents by all agencies having jurisdiction; 3. Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and all applicable codes and legal ordinances; 4. Equipment and systems have been tested as required, and are operational; 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. E. The Owner's Representative will make an inspection to verify status of completion. Should the Owner's Representative determine that the work is incomplete or defective: 1. The Owner's Representative promptly will so notify the Contractor, in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. Remedy the deficiencies promptly, and notify the Owner's Representative when ready for reinspection. The Owner's Representative will reinspect at the Contractor's expense. 2.04 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS A. Close-out submittals include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Project Record ("As Built") Documents described below. 2. Lender's Post -Construction Information Package. 3. Operation and Maintenance data for items so listed in pertinent other Sections of these Specifications, and for other items when so directed by the Architect; 4. Warranties, Guarantees, and bonds; 5. Keys and keying schedule; 6. Spare parts and materials extra stock; 7. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Certificates of Inspection; b. Certificates of Occupancy; 01700 - 2 S . x 8. Certificates of Insurance for products and completed operations; 9. Evidence of payment and release of liens; 10. List of subcontractors, service organizations, and principal vendors, including names, addresses, and telephone numbers where they can be reached for emergency service at all times including nights, -` weekends, and holidays. 11. "As -Built Survey" described below. 2.05 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS: k .'� A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Architect through the Owner's Representative, showing all adjustments to the Contract Sum. B. If determined to be necessary by the Architect, the Architect will prepare a final Change Order showing L-' adjustments to the Contract Sum which were not made previously by Change Orders. 2.06 INSTRUCTION: A. Instruct the Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of systems, equipment and similar items �., which were provided as part of the Work. i �- B. Obtain written release for each part of the work that instruction required was completed to Owner's satisfaction rr signed by Owner's Facility Manager and forward to Architect. - I 3.00 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 3.01 PROJECT RECORD ("AS -BUILT") DOCUMENTS: .� A. Throughout the progress of the Work, maintain an accurate record of all changes in the Contract Documents. This record shall be available for review by the Architect and Owner's Representative at all times. B. Upon completion of the Work, transfer, at the Contractor's expense, all recorded changes to a permanent reproducible set of final Project ("As -Built") Record Documents acceptable to the Architect. C. Accuracy of Records: 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other Documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. - 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. 3. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 4. Date all entries. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. 5. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect. D. Final Project Record Documents 1. The purpose of the Final Project Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination 2. Prior to submitting request for final payment, submit the Final Project Record Documents to the Architect and secure approval. Resubmit as required until approved. 3. Upon approval Final Project Record Documents to Architect for Owner's permanent records. 4 f 01700 - 3 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA: A. Preliminary: 1. Prepare a preliminary draft of each proposed Manual. 2. Show general arrangement, nature of contents in each portion, probable number of drawings and their size, and proposed method of binding and covering. 3. Secure the Architect's approval prior to proceeding. B. Final: Complete the Manuals in strict accordance with the approved preliminary drafts and the Architect's review comments. C. Manuals: 1. Provide 3 complete copies and distribute as directed by Architect. 2. Where instruction manuals are required to be submitted under other Sections of these Specifications, prepare in accordance with the provisions of this Section. 3. Format: a. Size: B-1/2" x 11". b. Paper: White bond, at least 20 lb weight. c. Text: Neatly written or printed. d. Drawings: 11 " in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. e. Flysheets: Separate each portion of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing portion; flysheets may be in color. f. Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers with binding mechanism concealed inside the Manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all binding is subject to the Architect's approval. g. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet and -inches, Ibs, and cfm; where items may be expected be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulas, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). 4. Provide front and back covers for each Manual, using durable material approved for the Architect, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ( 1 1 name and address of Work 1 ( 1 1 name of Contractor 1 1 1 1 general subject of this manual 1 5. Contents: Include at least the following: a. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual, giving immediate information as to the location within the Manual of all emergency information regarding the installation. b. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance for all equipment involved including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. c. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 01700 - 4 d. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor, `-� and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. ' e. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 4 f. Manufacturers' bulletins, cuts, and descriptive data, where pertinent, clearly indicating the precise items . - included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers' data with which n this installation is not concerned. g. Such other data as required in pertinent Section of these Specifications. 3.03 LENDER'S POST -CONSTRUCTION INFORMATION PACKAGE: A. In addition to items indicated above, prior to release of retainage and final payment, prepare and Submit the following to the Architect for review, approval, and acceptance. Items submitted shall be in one package, ' labeled as indicated above. --.t 1. Facility Construction Permits (City/County). Y 2. Underground Storage Tank System (UST) Construction Permits (City/County/State). F 3. Storm Water Discharge Permits (NPDES/City/County/State). 1 4 4. Recreation Vehicle Sewage Dump Discharge Permit (City/County/State). 5. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan Approvals (City/County/State). 6. Specific Final Project Record ("As -Built) Documents as follows: a. Title Sheet with Index. b. Field Engineer's Site and Stake out Plans including underground utilities. '- c. Field Engineer's Erosion and Sedimentation Control plans and details. `J d. Architectural Floor Plans. e. Structural Notes. 7. Underground Storage Tank (UST) System information as follows: ' a. Dispenser, Island, and Drain Trough and details. b. Fuel Piping plans and details. Including location of advanced leak detector systems (i.e., groundwater or vapor monitoring wells), type of backf ill, depth of trench, trench slope direction, and thickness of fill/concrete slab cover. c. Fuel Equipment Schedule including invoices supporting quantity '-� and type delivered. Equipment schedule should include, but not be limited to: 11 Tanks and fittings. 2) Vent pipes, float valves. ' 3) Fill pipes, catchment basins. 4) Piping and connectors. 5) Piping leak detector and. automatic shutoff/alarm devices. 6) Advanced leak detection (groundwater or vapor monitoring wells, etc.). 7) Automatic gauging, and inventory control and UST leak detection system. y 8) Piping automatic shutoff or continuous monitoring system. 9) Fuel dispensers, submersible pumps. 10) Cathodic protection devices. 11) Buoyancy control system. components it d. Copies of manuals describing the accuracy, operation, and maintenance of the following equipment: 1) Underground storage tanks. 01700 - 5 2) UST leak detection system. (monitoring well, electronic, etc.) 3) Overfill protection system. 4) Spill prevention system. 5) UST fuel/water level. monitoring system. 6) Piping leak detection system. 7) Piping, connectors, and joints. 8) Fuel dispensers and satellites. 9) Cathodic protection system. e. Calculations and recommendations from the design engineer concerning the buoyancy control requirements for each underground storage tank. f. UST Excavation Zone Plans and Details including locations of leak detection systems (i.e., groundwater or vapor monitoring wells), type of backfill, depth of excavation, thickness of fill/concrete slab cover. g. A letter detailing the location of each monitoring well within the tank farm and piping excavation area(s) and the associated design of each respective well including type and size of well screen used, screen placement below ground surface, total depth of well and observed depth of groundwater. h. Cathodic Protection System plan and details. L UST system installation contractors Statement of Qualifications: 1) State contractors license. 2) Tank manufacturer's endorsement. 3) State agency acknowledgement of contractor's competence. j. Certificate of Installation 11 Installers letter signed by an authorized company representative stating that: a) They have been authorized and/or certified to installed tank and piping by the manufacturers. b) All work listed in the manufacturer's installation check list has been completed. (Provide copy of all installation checklists completed and signed). c) All tanks and piping have been installed in accordance with a code of practice developed by a nationally recognized association or independent testing laboratory and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions (example: American Petroleum Institute, American National Standards Institute). d) All fuel warranties are valid. e) Tests for the proper operation of all leak detection systems have been conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. f) Manufacturers warranties on all UST system components are in effect. K. Certificate of Proper Operation of all Cathodic Systems from a Qualified Cathodic Protection system tester stating that: 11 The cathodic protection is adequate to continuously provide corrosion protection to all metal components of that portion of the tank and piping that routinely contain petroleum substances and ate in contact with the ground. 2) The inspection criteria used to determine that the cathodic protection is adequate and is in accordance with a code of practice developed by a nationally recognized association (example: National Association of Corrosion Engineers). L. Fully completed "Notification for Underground Storage Tanks", EPA Form 7530, as submitted to the implementing agency. r i M. City/County/Certificate to Operate the UST System 1) Building Inspector's Checklist. 2) Fire Inspector's Checklist 8. City/County Facility Certificate of Occupancy a. Building Inspector's Checklist 01700 - 6 b. Fire Inspector's Checklist , -'1 9. Field Engineer's On -Site Soil Survey • 10. Manufacturer's Technical Specifications and recommended installation procedures for other environmental control system including: a. Oil separators. b. Grease traps. c. Sanitary waste treatment systems. _ B. Other items as directed by Architect or Owner's Representative required by Owner's Lending Institution for Project Closeout. J 3.04 AS -BUILT SURVEY: A. Contractor is to provide an As -Built Survey to the Architect for review. The Survey shall comply with the most �. current minimum standard detail requirements as set forth by ALTA/ACSM Land Title Surveys as adopted by American Land Title Association and American Congress on surveying and mapping. The Architect shall approve, and accept the survey prior to release of Final Payment. B. As -Built Survey shall include the Following: 1. A caption sufficient to identify the parcel surveyed (the "Parcel") including legal description, lots, tracts, map reference, city, county, and state, and date of Survey. 2. The north point and scale. 3. The bearings, distances, and corner monuments of the exterior boundaries of their Parcel. If the Parcel compromises all or portions of multiple lots, the boundaries of each lot should be indicated by dotted lines and the lot number should be shown within each. Proof of establishment of all boundaries is of the utmost importance and it should be apparent on the survey why a particular boundary location was adopted. Label - the Point of Beginning ("POB"). 4. The square footage of the Parcel. _- 5. The streets, roads, or alleys whether existing or proposed, in the vicinity of the Parcel including their names, widths of the rights -of -way, and the widths of any proposed widening. 6. The curbs, curbcuts, and sidewalks on or adjoining the Parcel. 7. Access to and from the parcel from streets and adjacent property must be marked. S. The location of all parking stalls on the Parcel or the number of parking spaces must be certified to by the Surveyor. 9. The location and dimensions of: l a. Any building or other structure on the Parcel. b. Any building or other structure on adjacent property within five feet of any boundary of the Parcel. ` c. Any party wall and the nature of the use of said wall, i.e. "integral wall of both buildings". d. Any fence, wall (including gates, openings, doorways, etc.), driveway of other similar improvements. i Where possible, show the ownership of boundary fences and walls. e. Any easement, right-of-way, setback line, restrictive covenant, or other matter of record affecting the Parcel showing recording information, if any, i.e. book and page number. f. Any underground fuel or other storage tanks and facilities. y 10. The location of: i 01700 - 7 y a. Any drain, sewer, pipeline, conduit, water course, railroad track, roadways, driveway, 4-` r y y, pathway, whether abandoned or not, and similar rights -of -way which may indicate use of the Parcel by third parties. Where possible, show the property served. b. Any wire or cable (including its use) entering, crossing or leaving the Parcel, (except the ordinary two or three -wire service drops to the Parcel which may be omitted) and all wire bearing or light poles (including all guy wires) on or within five feet of the Parcel. Where possible pole numbers, should be noted. — c.— - Any sign -or billboard -including its content and-ownei, f known. d. Any encroachment of adjoining building, structures, etc. on to the Parcel. e. Any encroachment from the Parcel of any building, structure, etc. onto the adjacent property. 11. A certificate as follows (SAMPLE): CERTIFIED TO: OWNER SPECIFIED TITLE INSURANCE COMPANY "I hereby certify that this Survey made under my Supervision ( DATE) correctly shows the relation of the building and other structures to the property lines of the land indicated hereon; that this survey was made on the ground as per the record description, that it shows the true location of improvements; that the walls of said building are plumb; that there are no encroachments of adjoining buildings or structures onto the Parcel, nor overlap of buildings or structures from the Parcel, except as shown; that there are parking spaces on the Parcel; that the Parcel contains square feet and that it (is s no in a Flood Plan. R.E.# DATE (SIGNED) L.S.# or END OF SECTION 01700 01700 - 8 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED_DOCUMENTS A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Site preparation and demolition work as specified and shown on drawings, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Clearing and Grubbing 2. Building demoltion 3. Remove, or disconnect and cap, and identify and locate utility services. 4. Obtaining and paying for permits required for execution of this work. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. 02110 - Clearing B. 02200 - Earthwork 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Demolition procedures and operational sequence for review and acceptance by the Owner. B. Record Drawings: Indicate points of disconnection and capping, or abandonment, or removal of existing utility services; include utility names, sizes and locations, relationship to permanent structures located on site and on adjacent property and certificates of severance of utility services from respective utility companies or owners. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of federal, and local laws, regulations and codes having jurisdiction at project site or applicable requirements of these standards and specifications, whichever is more stringent. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid any delay or interference with other work. B. Nuisances: Keep dirt, dust, noise and other objectionable nuisances to a minimum. Use temporary enclosures, calcium chloride, coverings and sprinkling, P or combinations thereof, as necessary to limit dust to lowest practicable level, except do not use water to the extent that it causes flooding or contaminated runoff. a Section 02100 1 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 C. Traffic: Conduct work to ensure minimum interference with vehicular or pedestrian traffic and to permit unencumbered access to site and adjacent properties. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, sidewalks, alleys or other public passageways without permissiop from authorities having jurisdiction. 2. If required by governing authorities, provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. D. Protections: 1. Prevent movement and settlement of adjacent structures. Install temporary barriers, fences, guard rails, enclosures, shoring, bracing, planking, barricades, lights, warning signs and other protections required to protect structures, utilities, landscaping, and other items that are to remain in place. 2. Protect bench marks monuments and reference points from displacement or damage and, if displaced or damaged, replace at no cost to the Owner. 3. Install and maintain required bracing, shoring and supports when removing structural elements and be responsible for safety and support of structure. If safety of structure appears to be endangered, cease operations and immediately notify the Owner; do not resume operations until safety is restored. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SEDIMENT DRAINAGE FABRIC A. Non -biodegradable, sunlight stabilized, woven polypropylene fabric, type which will retain sediment and reduce water runoff velocity; one of the following by listed manufacturer, or approved equal: B. "Mirafi 10OX Sedimentation Control Fabric" by Mirafi, Inc., Charlotte, NC (800) 438-1855. C. "Propex 1325 Embankment/Erosion Control Fabric" by Amoco Fabrics Company, Atlanta, GA (404) 955-0935. D. "Trevira Spunbond Engineering Fabric Style 1115 or 1120" by Hoechst Fibers Industries, New York, NY (212) 869-3850. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to the Owner all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 3.02 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Install erosion and sediment control devices in accordance with Section 02200 paragraph 3.09. Section 02100 e— I Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 3.03 CLEARING & GRUBBING A. See Section 02110 - Clearing 3.04 UTILITIES - A. Contact local utility companies 48 hours minimum prior to start of demolition work. Confirm verbal notices and written notices. Verify locations of all utilities entering site and their locations on site. B. Cooperate with Owner's Representative, utility companies, adjacent property } owners, and other building trades in maintaining, protecting, rerouting or extending of utilities passing through work areas which serve structures located on project site and on adjacent properties. v C. Verify that utilities that are to be removed, capped or abandoned are turned off, or are disconnected, or are rerouted to new locations before starting demolition. 3.05 DEMOLITION A. General: 1. Remove and demolish materials in orderly and careful manner. 2. If departures from drawing requirements are deemed necessary by Contractor, submit details and reasons therefore to the Owner s Representative for action. Make no departures without prior written approval. 3. Repair or replace all demolition work performed in excess to that required, at no cost to the Owner. Repair or replacement shall match and equal construction, condition, and finish existing at time of award of contract. B. Remove following from locations to extent shown on drawings: 1. Asphalt pavement edges. Saw cut to neat line, as required to separate from existing shown to remain. 2. Designated utility services occurring within demolition areas, including disconnection, capping and complete removal or abandonment as shown and noted on drawings. Storm drainage pipe may be reused only upon inspection and approval of the Engineer. 3. Trees and their roots where they will interfere with the new construction of the building and paved areas except where designated on the drawings to remain. Removal shall be complete within 5 ft. of building foundations, on -site structures and paved areas. Roots may be left under other fills exceeding 5' depth. C. Backfill and compact areas excavated and open pits and holes resulting from demolition operations. Comply with requirements specified in Section 02200 for backfill materials, compaction, and installation methods. D. Rough grade site, within demolition areas, to meet adjacent contours and to provide positive drainage. Leave site in clean condition acceptable for performance of subsequent construction operations. Section 02100 r Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL A. Transport trash, rubbish and debris daily from site and legally dispose of. l 1. Remove and _promptly_dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered. 2. Do not.bury materials on site. B. Remove tools, equipment and protections when work is complete and when authorized to do so by local authorities having jurisdiction and the Owner. END OF SECTION n' Section 02100 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary. Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY ] A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protection of existing trees. 2. Removal of trees and other vegetation. 3. Topsoil stripping. 4. Clearing and grubbing. 5. Removing above -grade improvements. 6. Removing below -grade improvements. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. TRAFFIC: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. u B. PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS: Provide protections to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners. C. PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES AND VEGETATION: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place: against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning -of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating, formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain which are damaged by construction operations, in a manner acceptable to Project Employ a licensed arborist to repair damages to trees and shrubs. Replace trees which cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by arborist, with a similar variety and size to the satisfaction of the Project Architect/Engineer. C. SALVABLE IMPROVEMENTS: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged, and store on Owner's premises where indicated or directed. Section 02110 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING A. General: Remove trees, shrubs grass and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions as requiredto permit installation ofnew construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. "Removal". includes digging out and off -site disposing of stumps and roots. - Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner, where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping: Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil same as specified for disposal of waste material. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density r equal to adjacent original ground or as specified in Division-2 Section "Earthwork". C. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -grade improvements as indicated on the drawings and as necessary to facilitate new construction. Abandonment and/or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 sections. Removal of abandoned underground piping or conduit interfering with construction is included under this Section. Removal and/or demolition of abandoned underground structures is included in Division-2 Section "Site Preparaltion". 3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is permitted on Owner's property contingent upon the Contractor receiving all necessary and appropriate approvals and permits from jurisdictional agencies. B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from Owner's property on a continuous basis during clearing operations and promptly to avoid construction interference. Accumulation of debris on the site will not be permitted. If Contractor fails to remove excess debris promptly, in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, Owner reserves the right to cause same to be removed at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 02110 Section 02110 .) Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Section, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY '1 A. This Section includes the following: _f 1. Preparing of subgrade for building slabs, walks, pavements and landscaped areas. 2. Excavating and backfilling for underground sewers, mechanical and electrical utilities and buried sewer, mechanical and electrical appurtenances. 3. Excavating and Backfilling for Mechanical/Electrical Work: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 sections for excavation and backfill required in conjunction with underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances. 4. Final Grading, together with placement and preparation of topsoil for lawns and planting, is specified in Division 2 Section, "Landscape Work.' 1.03 DEFINITIONS Excavation consists of removal of material encountered -to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Project Architect/Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Project Architect/Engineer, shall be at Contractor's expense. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending Indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill - ma be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to the Project Architect/Engineer. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by the Project Architect/Engmeer. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify the Project Arc hitect/Engineer, who will make an inspection of conditions. If the Project Architect/Engineer determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable beanng materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. The Contract Sum may be ad'usted by an appropriate Contract Modification. Removal of unsuitable material an�its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in work. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, or other man-made stationary features occurring above or below ground surface. Section 02200 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 1.04 SUBMITTALS Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to the Project Architect/Engineer from the testing services, with copy to Contractor: Test reports on borrow material. Verification of suitability of each footing subgrade material, in accordance with specified requirements. Field reports; in -place soil density tests. One optimum moisture -maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each strata tested. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Trenching to comply with OSHA Standard 29CFR, Section 1926-650 subpart P. Contractor to provide written assurance of compliance. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ and pay for a qualified independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations. Degree of Compaction: Required compaction is expressed as a percentage of maximum density obtained by test procedures of ASTM D1557. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS Bidders shall inform themselves of location and nature of work, character of equipment and facilities needed for performance of work, general and local conditions prevailing at site, and other matters which may in any way affect work under this contract in accordance with DIVISION 0, BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT. Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design and are available to the Contractor for information only. Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by Contractor, at the Contractor's option; however, no change in the Contract Sum will be authorized for such additional exploration. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, pipingg or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult Project Architect/Bngineer and utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and ;--, facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities immediately to satisfaction of utility owner. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others, during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by the Project Architect/Engineer and then only after acceptable ternporary utility services have been provided. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to the Project Architect/Engineer, and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. Section 02200 i Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 -k Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are active. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. Protect structures, utilities, .sidewalks, 1 pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork r operations. Perform excavation by hand within dripline of large trees to remain. Protect root systems from damage or dryout to the greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with moistened burlap. Maintain existing bench marks, monuments and other reference points, if disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. Condition of Premises: Accept site as found and excavate, fill and backfill site as indicated on the drawings and as specified in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS "Satisfactory Fill Materials" include materials classified in ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, SW and SP properly worked by Contractor to obtain optimum moisture and compaction. Within 2 feet of the surface of the indicated grade, limit rock size to 3 inches. Below 2 feet of the surface of indicated grade, limit rock size to 12 inches. "Unsatisfactory Materials" include materials other than "Satisfactory Fill Materials"; however, materials of any classification that are determined by testing laboratory as too wet or too soft for providing a stable foundation for structure, paving and walks will be classified as "unsatisfactory". Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or, crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, and natural or crushed sand. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, muck, vegetation and other deleterious matter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner. Section 02200 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 3.02 GENERAL Public Safety: Accomplish work in a manner that provides for safety of the public and workers and provides for the protection of property. Construction: Do not close, obstruct or store material or equipment in streets, sidewalks, alleysor passageways-without_a_permit.in accordance_with_local__— ordinances, regulations, codes and Owner approval. -Interference: Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads and other facilities. Debris Removal: Do not store or permit debris to accumulate on site. If Contractor fails to remove excess debris promptly, Owner reserves the right to cause same to be removed at Contractor's expense. Erosion Repair: Take every precaution and temporary measure to prevent damage from erosion of freshly graded areas. Repair and re-establish grades to required elevations and slopes where settlement/washing occurs prior to acceptance of work. Temporary Structures: Remove temporary structures when no longer required. 3.03 LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS Be responsible for surveys, measurements and layouts required for proper execution of work. Lay out lines and grades from existing survey control system and as shown on Site Plan. Locate by stake and mark, locations and elevations of the following: Elevations of existing earth cut and fill. Final grades for landscape contours. Other items as required to execute work under this Section of the specifications. 3.04 CLEARING AND Within limits of areas designated for grading and site construction work, remove trees, brush, stumps, wood, debris, and other deleterious materials not required to remain as part of finished work. Remove all grass, plants, vegetation and organic material from same area. Burning of materials will be as set forth in Section 02100 "Site Preparation". Remove accumulated material promptly to prevent hazardous conditions. 3.05 EXCAVATION ! ' Begin excavation after stripping, clearing and compacting where applicable, has been completed. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered. Excavations for appurtenances and structures shall conform to dimensions and elevations and shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for placing and removal of forms and installation of services, except where the concrete for walls and footings is authorized to be deposited directly Section 02200 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 against excavation surfaces. All excavation below general machine excavation for footings and foundations shall be hand worked. Bottoms of all (footings and appurtenances) shall be on level planes. Remove "unsatisfactory materials" encountered from the building areas. Excavate in such a manner that quick and efficient drainage of storm water will be affected. Classify- excavated materials and stockpile separately suitable soils. for use as backi11 materials. If sufficient quantities of excavated materials meeting t requirements for backfill are not available on site, provide materials meeting these requirements. c Stockpile excavated material suitable for use as fill and backfill. 3.06 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Comply with OSHA Standard 29 CFR, Section 1926-650 subpart P. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet " piling, uprights, strangers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition for all trenches m excess of 5 feet deep. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time penod excavations will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as excavarion progresses. Contractor shall design and install a trench safety system for trenches m excess of 5 feet deep. 3.07 DEWATERING Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowingg into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not allow. water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey ram water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Dewater excavations for inspection and for construction so that no concrete or fill is placed in water and so that concrete less than 8 hours of age is not subjected to ground water pressure. Keep excavations free of water while backfilling and construction therein takes place. Dispose of water, resulting from dewatering operations in accordance with city, county, state and federal regulations. j Conduct operations so that storm water runoff sediment is not discharged to - the adjacent lakes, waterways, sewers, streets and adjacent properties. Section 02200 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 3.08 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where directed. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Locate and retain soil -materials-away-from edge -of -excavations. Do -not store -within -drip -line of -trees- - indicated to remain. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill. Material shall become property of Contractor and shall be promptly removed from the site. 3.09 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, and other construction and for inspection. Excavations for footings and foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, and other construction and for inspection. Do not disturb bottom of excavations, intended for bearing surface. 3.10 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross -sections, elevations and grades as indicated. 3.11 TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT Excavate trenches per requirements of Division 2, 15 and 16 to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 9 to 12 i inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and backfill with a 6-inch layer of tamped sand or j ! gravel prior to installation of pipe. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand -excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill deppressions with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to - relieve pipe bell of loads ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on bearing surface. 3.12 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION The work consists of compaction of existing earth (exclude rock), surfaces after excavation, filling and compaction of said area to levels required with suitable backfill material. Section 02200 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 J Materials: "Satisfactory Fill Materials" shall be sued in fills and backfills. Filling and Backfilling: Place "Satisfactory Fill Material" in horizontal layers not exceeding 12 inches in loose depth. Compact as specified herein. No material shall be placed on surfaces that are muddy. Compaction: Compaction shall be with equipment suited to soil being compacted. Moisten or aerate material, as necessary to provide moisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining specified compaction with equipment used. Compact each layer to not less than percentage of maximum density specified below, determined in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D. Insure that the compaction of previously prepared fill areas has maintained prior to placing new layers. Area Percentage Under structures and building 98 slabs, except footings each layer Under footings, top 1 foot in cut, 100 each layer of fill Under pavements and sidewalk areas, 98 top 12 inches, each layer Under pavements and sidewalk areas, 95 below 12 inches, each layer Under landscaped areas, each layer 85 Reconditioning of Subgrade: Where approved compacted subgrades are disturbed by the Contractor's subsequent operations or adverse weather, subgrade shall be scarified and compacted as specified hereinbefore to required density prior to further construction thereon. Recompaction over underground utilities shall be by power driven hand tampers. Backfilling: Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been accepted, underground utilities systems have been inspected, tested, and accepted, forms removed, and excavation cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be brought to indicated finish subgrade. Backfill shall not be placed in wet areas. Backfill materials and compaction shall be as specified herein. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to height of backfill above top of footing; area remaining shall be compacted by power -driven hand tampers suitable for material being compacted. Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes to avoid damage. Protection: Settlement or washing that occurs in backfilled areas prior to acceptance of work shall be repaired and grades re- established to required elevations and slope. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling is authorized by the Project Architect/Engineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. Section 02200 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: Inspection, testingand approval by UBC Inspectors, and recording locations of underground utilities have been performed and recorded. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory - - -materials. Cut off -temporary -sheet piling -driven below -bottom -of -structures - and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if required. Removal of trash and debris 'from excavation. 3.13 GRADING General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and existing grades. Grading between indicated elevations and/or contours to be uniform, continuous and sloped as indicated on the drawings. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes and as follows: Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and with finish surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade, and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2 inch above or below required subgrade elevation. Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification. 3.14 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE General: Subbase course consists of placing subbase material, in layers of thickness, over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course. Refer to Drawings and other Division 2 Paving sections for paving specifications. Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross -slope of subbase course. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each subbase course layer. Compact and roll at least a 1.2-inch width of shoulder simultaneous with the compaction and rolling of each layer of subbase course. Placing: Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform Section 02200 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placement operations. When a compacted subbase course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place i material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted. r� 3.15 BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE General: Drainage course consists of placement of drainage fill material, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs. Placing: Place drainage fill material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations. When a compacted drainage course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in thickness when compacted. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Notify, through Project Architect/Engineer, Owner's Testing Laboratory to perform specified tests at Owner's expense. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed. Tests of Materials shall be as follows: Soil Classification: One test from each type of material encountered and/or proposed to be used. Laboratory Tests for Moisture Content and Density: According to ASTM D1557 one test for each material encountered and/or proposed to be used. Field Tests for Moisture Content and Density: According to ASTM D1556 one test per layer of fill per 10,000 square feet of area, plus one test per 10,000 square feet of subgrade in cut. Control: Fill and topsoil mixture may be inspected at any stage of operation to determine compaction characteristics, densities and freedom from organic and plastic materials. Perform field density tests in accordance with methods listed in Item C. Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent and approval of each footing subgrade may be _ based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the Project Architect/Engineer. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field test for every 2,000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests. Section 02200 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 Foundation Wall Backfill: Perform at least two field density tests at locations and elevations as directed. If in opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills that have been placed are below specified density, perform additional compaction and testing until specified density is obtained. Notification: Give sufficient notification of placing of orders for fill and topsoil with supplier to permit full inspection including testing for compaction characteristics at source of supply. Obtain approval from Project Architect/Engineer before placing topsoil mixture at project site, without exception. 3.17 EROSION CONTROL Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of the project. Repair and re-establish grades to required elevations and slopes where erosion has occurred prior to Owner acceptance of work. 3.18 MAINTENANCE Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period in the opinion of the Project Architect/En ineer, the Contractor shall remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, arid replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or fmish to match adjacent work, and el"urinate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.19 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS Removal from Owner's Property: Contractor shall remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash, and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02200 Section 02200 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02201 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM t :f PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. �1 1.02 WORK INCLUDED ( A. Furnish all labor and materials for installation and maintenance of a trench safety system. B. Trench excavations in materials other than solid rock, greater than five (5) L ; feet in depth, or where directed by the Owner's Representative, the Contractor shall provide a trench safety system. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. B. Section 02660 - Water Distribution. C. Section 02700 - Sewerage and Drainage. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to construction, a"Trench Safety Plan" for protecting employees and the public exposed to the danger of moving ground for all excavations. The plan shall describe which method of protection or type of system will be used and where it will be used for each condition or situation encountered on the job. The plan shall comply with applicable OSHA standards. B. For any trench shoring system to be used other than that shown in Table P-2 ' from the OSHA standard for excavating operations, the Contractor must provide certification by a Registered Professional Engineer that the system d proposed by the Contractor provides protection "equal to" or "greater than" the by Trench Shoring Systems protection provided shown in OSHA Table P-2. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The trench safety system shall meet the appropriate requirements established in the Occupational Safety and Health Ad mintstrationq(OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P Excavations, Trenching, - and Shoring. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid any delay or interference with other work. B. Payment: The cost of the trench safety system shall be included in the Contractor's base bid, and shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 02201 Flying J Travel Plaza -' Project No. 96-31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Timber: Timber for trench sheeting shall be hardwood, a minimum of two inches in thickness,. solid and sound, and free from weakening -defects such - - as loose knots and splits. B. Steel Sheet Piling: Steel sheet piling shall conform to one of the following specifications: ASTM A328, ASTM A572 Grade 50, or ASTM A690. C. Stringers and Cross Bracing: Steel for stringers and cross bracing shall conform to ASTM A588. D. Portable Trench Boxes: Portable trench boxes shall be constructed of steel conforming to ASTM Specification A36. Connecting bolts used shall conform to ASTM A307. All welds and welding shall conform to AWS Dl.l. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner's Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 3.02 GENERAL A. The trench safety system shall be constructed, installed, and maintained in accordance with the plans and/or to the design prepared by the Contractor's Registered Professional Engineer, to prevent death or injury to to personnel or damage to structures in or near these trench excavations. Matenals excavated from the trench shall be stored no closer to the edge of the trench than one-half the depth of the trench. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Timber sheeting shall be installed in accordance with OSHA requirements. The timber sheeting shall be driven to the depth of the trench bottom. Cross braces shall be placed in the true horizontal position, spaced vertically and secured to prevent sliding, falling, or kickouts. B. Steel sheet piling of equal or greater strength may be substituted for timber trench shoring. The Contractor shall provide certification that the steel sheet piling substituted provides equal or greater protection than the timber shoring. The certification for the sheet piling shall be provide by a Registered Professional Engineer. The steel sheet piling shall be driven to the minimum depth below the bottom as recommended by the Registered Professional Engineer providing the design. Place cross braces in true horizontal position, spaced vertically and secure to prevent sliding, falling or kickouts. Section 02201 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 C. Portable trench boxes may be substituted for the timber trench shoring. The trench box shall be designed to provide equal or greater protection than the timber trench shoring. Certification of the design shall be provided by the Contractor prior to its use on the project. In cases where the top of the pportable trench box is will be below the top of the trench, the trench must be be to the approximate angle of repose for the soil conditions existing on the project. In ares where the sloped trench will affect the integrity of existing structures, the Contractor shall take measures necessary to protect the structures prior to sloping the trench. D. When trench jacks are used for cross bracing and or stringers, the Contractor shall provide certification by the Manufacturer, that the trench jacks provide protection greater than or equal to timber cross bracing. E. In trenches four (4) feet deep or deeper, the Contractor shall provide adequate means of trench egress using ladders or steps. Ladders must extend three (3) feet above the existing ground level. Ladders shall be positioned in accordance with the following: Trench Length Position of Ladder Less than 10 feet At Center Less than 25 feet At third points Less than 50 feet At each end and center Greater than 50 feet Not more than 25 feet 3.04 SUPERVISION A. The Contractor shall provide competent supervisory personnel at each trench, will work is in progress to ensure that the Contractor's methods, procedures, equipment and materials pertaining to the safety systems, are sufficient to meet the requirements of OSHA Standards and Regulations. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. The safety system shall be maintained in its original condition. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that the safety systems are not damaged during their use. If, at any time during its use, a safety system is damaged, personnel shall be immediately removed from the trench or excavated area and the safety system repaired. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that no excessive loads are imposed on the excavation. 3.06 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall make a daily inspection of the trench safety system to ensure that the system meets OSHA requirements. Daily inspectionsshall be made by competent personnel. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, all work in the trench shall cease until the necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel entering the trench. The Contractor shall maintain permanent records of all daily inspections. Section 02201 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31' 3.07 REMOVAL A. Backfilling and removal of trench supports shall progress together from bottom of trench upwards. The Contractor shall remove no braces or trench supports until all personnel have evacuated the trench. The trench shall be ` backfilled to within five (5) feet of natural ground prior to removal of the _ entire trench-safety-system._None of-the-trenchsafet�-system-can-remain ---- - _ in -place without the written permission of the Owner s Representative. END OF SECTION Section 02201 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02237 CEMENTED COQUINA SHELL BASE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The provision and placement of cemented coquina shellrock for paving base course. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. 02200 - Earthwork B. 02240 - Stabilization C. 02512 - Asphalt Concrete Paving 1.04 SUMBITTALS A. Proof of source as a Florida Department of Transportation approved source of cemented coquina shell. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Cemented Coquina Shell: Conform to specifications meeting applicable portions of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (FDOT), latest edition. B. Field testing: 1. The Owner reserves the right to make corings of the shell base to establish the base thickness. 2. Provide density tests at intervals not less than one test per 7,500 square feet of base course area. 3. Notify Architect/Engineer when base placement and grading is underway so that a representative can inspect and stringline the finish grade. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid any delay or interference with other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cemented Coquina Shell: Cemented coquina shell material for use as pavement base course shall meet the criteria of Section 915 of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition. Section 02237 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas in which is to be performed and in particular the condition of the stabilized subgrade prepared to receive the base course. Do not proceed with _ - _the work -until -all -defective areas -or unsatisfactory conditions -have -been - — corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.02 ARCHITECT/ENGINEERS APPROVAL A. Do not begin the work until the Architect/Engineer's representative has approved the stabilized subgrade to receive the shell base. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. All construction methods, equipment and procedures shall be in accordance with Section 250 of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition. Section 02237 Projecct No Travel - SECTION 02240 STABILIZED SUBGRADE PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED j A. The provision of stabilized subgrade for flexible asphaltic concrete paving. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. 02200 - Earthwork B. 02237 - Shell Rock Base Course C. 02512 - Asphalt Concrete Paving 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Stabilized Subgrade: Conform to specifications meeting applicable portions of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (FDOT), latest edition, for Type C Stabilization. B. Field testing: 1. The Owner reserves the right to make corings of the stabilized subgrade to establish the base thickness. 2. Provide density tests at intervals not less than one test per 7,500 square feet of stabilized subgrade area. 3. Provide Florida Soil Bearing Tests (FBV) at intervals not less than one test per 7,500 square feet of stabilized subgrade area. 4. Notify Architect/Engineer when stabilizing and grading is underway so that that a representative can inspect and stringline the finish grade. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid any delay or interference with other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Stabilized Subgrade: Stabilized subgrade shall meet the criteria of Section 160 of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition. Section 02240 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed and in particular the condition of the rouhg graded area where stabilization is to be performed. Do not proceed with the work until all defective -areas _ or unsatisfactory--conditions-have been-- - ---- - corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. All construction methods, equipment and procedures shall be in accordance with Section 160 of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, for Type C Stabilization. Section 02240 DIVISION 2 SECTION 02444 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1,00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A. Fence framework, fabric, and accessories. B. Excavation for post bases. C. Concrete anchorage for posts. D. Manual gates and related hardware. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. ANSI/ASTM F-1234 - Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings of Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. B. ANSI/ASTM B429 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. C. ASTM A1083 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -dipped Zinc -coated (Galvanized) Welded and seamless, for Ordinary uses. D. ASTM F-669 - Strength Requirements. E. ASTM A428 - Weight of Coating on Aluminum -coated Iron of Steel Articles. F. ASTM 094 - Ready -mixed Concrete. G. FS RR-F-191 - Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal. H. ASTM F-1234 - Coating Requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in commercial quality chain link fencing with two years experience. B. Installation: ANSI/ASTM F567. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit shop drawings and product data as required. B. Include plan layout, grid, spacing of components, accessories, fittings, anchorages, and schedule of components. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions as requested. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Cyclone Fence. B. Substitutions: Upon approval of engineer or owner. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Framework: ASTM F-669 Heavy Industrial Fence Pipe; Coatings per ASTM F-1234. 02444 - 1 B. Fabric: FS RR-F-191 Type I - zinc -coated steel. 2.03 CONCRETE MIX: A. Concrete: ASTM C94; normal Portland Cement 2500 psi at 28 days; 3 inch slump. 2.04 COMPONENTS: A. Line Posts: 2.5 inch diameter steel pipe. - B. Comer and Terminal Posts: 3:0-inch-pipe. C. Gate Posts: 3.0 inch diameter steel pipe. D. Top and Brace Rail: 1 5/8 inch diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled steel pipe. E. Fabric: 2 inch diamond mesh steel wire, interwoven, 9 gage thick, top selvange twisted tight, bottom selvage knuckle end closed. F. Caps: cast steel or malleable iron, galvanized; sized to post dimension, set screw retained. G. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings: Steel. H. Tension Wire: 9 gage thick steel, single strand. 2.05 FINISHES: A. Vinyl Coating: Black on galvanized coating. B. Vinyl Components: Black color. C. Accessories: Same finish as framing. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install framework, fabric, accessories (and gates) in accordance with ANSI/ASTM F567. B. Provide fence 6 feet. C. Space line posts at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. D. Set terminal gate and line posts plumb, (in concrete footings with top of footings 2 inches above finish grade. Footing depth below finish grade: (ANSI/ASTM F567.) 36 inches. E. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 7 inch long rail sleeves. F. Brace each gate and corner post back to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail, one bay from end and gate posts. G. Install center and bottom brace rail on corner and gate leaves. H. Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 100 feet maximum, whichever is less. 1. Position bottom of fabric 2 inches above finished grade. - J. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire ties maximum 15 inches on center. K. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips. L. Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts. END OF SECTION 02444 02444 - 2 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02510 SITE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Concrete Paving. B. Concrete Walks. C. Concrete slabs for truck scale. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Subgrade Preparation. B. Section 02512 - Asphalt Concrete Paving. C. Section 02525 - Concrete Curbs. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute: a. ACI 211.1 - "Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete." b. ACI 214 - "Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete." c. ACI 305 - "Hot Weather Concreting." d. ACI 315 - "Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." e. ACI 318 - "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. " f. ACI 347 - "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork." 2. American Society for Testing and Materials: a. ANSI/ASTM A185 - "Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. " b. ANSI/ASTM A497 - "Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. " c. ASTM A615 - "Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. d. ANSI/ASTM C31 - "Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field." e. ASTM C33 - "Concrete Aggregates." f. ASTM C39 - "Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. " g.ASTM C94 - "Ready -mixed Concrete." . ASTM C136 - "Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course A?gregates." i. ASTM C143 - "Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.' tASTM C150 - "Portland Cement." ASTM C156 - "Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials." 1. ASTM C171 - "Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete." Section 02510 Flying J Travel Plaza _ Project No. 96-31 in. ASTM C172 - "Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete." n. ASTM C173 - "Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method." o. ASTM C260 - "Air -entraining Admixtures for Concrete." p. ASTM C309 - "Liquid Membrane -forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. " q. ASTM D1751_ - "Preformed -Expansion Joint Fillers_for_Concrete_Paving. and Structural Construction (Nonextmding and Resilient Bituminous Types)." r. ASTM D1752 - "Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 3. Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction, 1992 edition (F.D.O.T.). 4. Coordinate and schedule in a timely manner with the Structural Testing/Inspection Agency for the following quality related items. a. Examine concrete in truck to verify that concrete appears properly mixed. b. Perform a slump test for each concrete load. Record if water or admixtures are added to the concrete at the job site. Perform additional slump tests after job site adjustments. _ c. For all concrete paving mold four(4) specimens per set for compressive strenght testing --one set for each 75 cubic yards of each mix design placed in any one day. For each set molded record. 1. Slump 2. Air content 3. Unit Weight 4. Temperature, ambient and concrete 5. Location of placement 6. Any pertinent information-- Addition of water, addition of admixtures, etc. Perform one(1) 7-day and two(2) 28-day compressive strenght tests. (Use one as a spare to be broken as directed by the Structural Engineer if compressive strenghts do not appear adequate.) d. Report in writing, as directed by the Architect/Structural Engineer,, on the same day that the tests are performed. Reports of compressive strenght tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete palcement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete design compressive strength, location of concrete palcement in structure, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strenght and type of break. 5. The ready -mixed concrete palnt shall be certified for conformance with the requirements of the National Ready Mix Concrete Association. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Flatwork: Wood or Steel of heights equal to the full depth of the finished work. Section 02510 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 B. Vertical surfaces: 1. APA Exterior Plyform BB with a medium density, smooth, hard, fused resin fiber overlay, or metal forms. 2. Form Ties: Approved by Owner's Representative. Where used in connection with exposed concrete surfaces, ties shall be of a type that can be either entirely withdrawn or partly left in the concrete when the forms are removed and will leave the holes clean cut of practically the same size as the metal removed, without fractures, spalls, shallows, depressions or other disfigurations. 3. Form Oil: -- a. "Eucoshp" - Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland OH (216) 631-0226. b. "Form Coating" - Nox-Crete Chemicals, Omaha, NB ( 02) 341-2080. 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Bars: ASTM A615 Grade 60. B. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185. Deformed type conform to ASTM A497. C. Reinforcing Accessories: Conform to Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Standard Practice. Include spacers and chairs with plastic tipped legs, ties and other devices necessary for properly assembling, placing, spacing and supporting forms and reinforcement in place. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dayton Superior Corp., Miamisburg, OH (513) 866-071i. b. Heckman Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL (800) 621-4140. c. Hohm ann & Barnard, Inc., Hauppaugge, NY (516) 234-0600. d. Richmond Screw Anchor Co., Inc., Ft. Worth, TX (817) 284-4981. e. Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc., San Diego, CA (714) 452-9000. D. The existing soil conditions pose a high corrosion potential for uncoated steel. Either coal tar epoxy or a corrosion protective paint must be used to protect any uncoated steel in direct contact with the subsurface soil. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150 Type I. Refer to F.D.O.T. Section 921. 2. High -early Strength Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type III. Refer to F.D.O.T. Section 921. B. Aggregates: ASTM C33. 1. Fine aggregate shall be natural sand, or sand prepared from stone or gravel. Grains shall be clean, hard, durable, uncoated and free from silt, loam and clay. Refer to F.D.O.T. Section 902. 2. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone, gravel, or other approved inert materials of similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong, durable pieces free from adherent coatings, Maximum size of pieces shall be 3/4" to #4 except for footings, which may be 1-1/2". The maximum size of aggregate may also be not larger Section 02510 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 than one fifth of the narrowest dimension between forms, nor lar&er than three fourths of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. Course aggregate to be Gradation No. 67, F.D.O.T. Section 901. C. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acids, salts, organic or other deleterious matter. Refer to F.D.O.T. Section 923. D. Air -Entrainment: 1. Use air -entrained concrete for exterior exposed concrete including walls, walks, paving, etc. where minimum daily temperatures are expected below 40d F during pouring or subsequent 28 day curing period. 2. Proportion air -entraining concrete to attain minimum 28 day compressive strength specified. 3. Total air -entrained in concrete shall be not less than four percent nor more than six percent volume of concrete. 4. Air -entraining shall conform to ASTM C260. Refer to F.D.O.T. Section 345-5. E. Admixtures: 1. May be used at contractors option to provide workability at low slumps, increased compressive strength, retardation or acceleration of the concrete. 2. The cement factor shall not be reduced and changes shall be made in the other mix proportions to insure the minimum strength requirements. Use f admixtures 3 ddi ional expense to the Owner approved will be allowed is Representative. No 4. No calcium chloride shall be used without the written approval of the Owner's Representative and upon approval the percentage shall not exceed 1-1/2%. 2.04 CONCRETE MIXES A. Concrete Proportions: 1. Concrete mixes shall meet the requirements of F.D.O.T. Section 345, Class I concrete. 2. Concrete shall be homogenous, and when hardened, shall have the regired strength, resistance to deterioration, durability, water ' tightness and the properties as specified. Minimum concrete strength at 28 days shall be 3000 psi unless otherwise specified on drawings. 3. Slump of concrete: a. Slabs on ground: 2-1/2" minimum to 4" maximum. b. Ramps & sloping surfaces: not more than 3". Section 02510 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 B. Ready -Mix Concrete: 1. Ready -mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C94. The mixing agitation shall begin within 30 minutes, and the concrete shall be discharged from the truck within one hour after the water has been added to the concrete mix. 2. Delivery tickets are to accompanyeach concrete truck and shall be kept in the job superintendent's file. Delivery tickets must indicate the following information or be subject to rejection: Name of project Supplier of concrete Truck identity & ticket serial number Batching time Point of deposit Total amount of water Weight of aggregate Daily temperature Number of cubic yards in load Date of delivery Brand of cement Cement content Strength classification Admixture content Name of Contractor Name of driver Time loaded & first mixing of concrete Reading of revolution counter 3. Quantity of water used for each batch shall be accurately measured. 4. No concrete shall be mixed when the atmospheric temperature is below 40d F. When weather conditions are hot, refer to ACI-305, Hot Weather Concreting. 2.05 JOINT MATERIALS A. Sealed expansion and contractionjoints: Filler of nonbituminous rubber or cork conforming to ASTM D1752. B. Slab -on -grade construction joints: Provide a full slab depth 24 gauge metal preshaped key, appproximate depth of key to be 114 slab thickness and a key width of about 1/10 slab thickness. C. Joint Sealer: ASTM C920. a. "TH C-900" - Tremco, Cleveland, OH (216) 292-5000. 2.06 CURING MATERIALS A. Sealers: ASTM C156 and ASTM C309, Type I. Material shall become integral part of concrete and leave slab free of residue or film. 1. "Polyseal" - Chem -Masters, Inc., Chagrin Falls, OH (216) 247-4277. 2. "Kure-N-Seal" - Sonneborn Div., Witco Chemical Corp., New York, NY (212) 605-3652. 3. "Cure -Hard" - W. R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin, IL (312) 683-4500. B. Membrane: Opaque -white ppolyethylene sheet, 0.006 inch thick, meeting requirements of ASTM C171. Section 02510 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner's Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution -of work. -Do-not proceedwithworkuntilunsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Conform with the requirements specified in Section 02200. B. The subgrade shall be thoroughly wetted and then compacted with two passes of a 500 pound roller. C. Where concrete paving or sidewalks are to be placed, yielding material deflecting more than 1/2" under a 500 lb roller shall be removed to a depth of not less than 4" below subgrade elevation and replaced with an approved granular material which shall then be compacted as described above. D. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when the concrete is placed. In cold weather the subgrade shall be prepared and protected so as to provide a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited. 3.03 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Meet the requirements of ACI 347. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check complete formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of form: Not more than 1/8" in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis not more than 1/4" in 10 feet. 3.04 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing shall be placed accurately in the position shown on the drawings. All reinforcing shall be supported and wired securely together to prevent displacement by construction loads and traffic, or the placing of concrete. For slabs on grade, supporting pieces of concrete blocks or bricks may be used. B. Place wire mesh reinforcing two inches above bottom of slab unless otherwise indicated. C. Reinforcement shall be kept clean from oil, dirt and loose mill scale or other coatings which might destroy the concrete bond. Remove tags and markings prior to concrete placement. D. No concrete shall be cast until the reinforcement has been inspected and approved by the inspector appointed by Owner's Representative and/or local authorities. Section 02510 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING A. Tamp and consolidate concrete with a suitable wood or metal tamping bar and the surface shall be finished to grade with a wood float. B. Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 3/16 inch from the testing edge of a 10 foot straightedge. C. Contraction Joints: Divide the surface of paving, walks and terraces into rectangular areas not to exceed 5'-0" each way for sidewalks and the courtyard. Service court pavement to be divided into rectangular areas not to exceed 12' by 12'. 1. Cut a groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of the slab thickness using a jointer or by sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power -driven saw. 2. Membrane -cured surface damaged during the sawing operations shall be resprayed as soon as the surface becomes dry. D. Slab Finishes: ACI 301, paragraph 11.7 and as follows: 1. Broom: On level walks. Broom in direction perpendicular to travel and approved sample panel. Submit joint pattern layout prior to starting work. 3.06 CONCRETE PAVING A. Heavy Duty Automobile Pavement - Service Court 1. Granular base, ** 4" ** thick minimum, compacted crushed stone (limerock) as per F.D.O.T. Section 200. 2. ** 6" ** thick Class I pavement with ** 6"x6" 10/10 WWF ** reinforcement. B. Sidewalk Pavement 1. Granular base, ** 4" ** thick minimum, compacted crushed stone (limerock) as per F.D.O.T. Section 200. 2. ** 4" ** thick Class I pavement with ** 6"x6" 10/10 WWF** reinforcement. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Horizontal slabs: Finished surfaces true with no deviation in excess of 1/8 inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge, non -accumulative. No coarse aggregate showing. 3.08 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Install transverse expansion joints at returns and 15 feet o.c. B. Install longitudinal expansion joints where curbs and paved areas abut each other, buildings, other concrete slabs or pads or vertical restraints. C. Place joint filler with top edge 1/4" below the surface and shall be held in place with steel pins or other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and finishing. Section 02510 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31. D. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, round joint edges with edging tool having a radius of 118". Remove concrete over the Joint filler. -- ---- - - - -E—At-the end -of -the curing -period: clean and fill -expansion joints -with— - .joint sealer. Fill joints flush with concrete surface. Dummy groove Joints shall not be sealed. 3.09 CURING A. Immediately after the finishing operations, the exposed concrete surface shall be cured for 7 days by the mat, impervious sheet, or membrane -curing method. 3.10 BACKFILLING A. After curing, debris shall be removed and the areas adjoining shall be backfilled, graded and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with the lines and grades indicated. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect the completed work from damage until accepted. Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction. Work that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed to the entire length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. B. Cars and trucks shall be excluded from newly constructed pavement for a minimum of 14 days. END OF SECTION Section 02510 i Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02512 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING } PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Granular Base B. Prime Coat. li C. Bituminous paving. D. Tack Coat. E. Sealer Coats. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. B. Section 02525 - Concrete Curbs. C. Section 02580 - Pavement Marking. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Bituminous concrete paving: Conform to specification meeting applicable portions of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 1992 edition (F.D.O.T). - B. Field Samples (Pavement Coring): 1. Owner reserves the right to make corings of the bituminous paving to establish the depth of the paving layers. 2. The location and timing of the corings shall be at the discretion of the Owner's Representative and at the Owner's expense. 3. The indicated depths are minimum; if a core indicates undersize, the Owner's Representative may require additional corings (at no expense to the Owner) to establish the extent of the undersizing. 4. If undersizing is indicated, methods of correction shall be submitted for Owner's Representative's approval. Correction shall be at no expense to the Owner. 5. Fill boring holes with bituminous material. I 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid any delay or interference with other work. Section 02512 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1_ uIVM A. Asphalt: The asphaltic material shall comply with the applicable reqquuirements of AASHTO Specification M226 (ASTM Specification D 3381), F.D.O.T. Section -_332. Cutback -asphalt -for -prime-coat-shalLbe-MC--30,--MC-70-for-dense surfaces;— - — or MC-250 for open surfaces complying with the requirements of AASHTO Specification M 82 (ASTM Specification D 2027), F.D.O.T. Section 300. Emulsified asphalt for tack coat -shall be:SS-1, SS-lh, CSS4, or CSS-lh diluted one part water to one part emulsified asphalt, F.D.O.T. Section 300. Before dilution the emulsified asphalt shall comply with the re uirements of AASHTO Specification M 140 or M 208 (ASTM D977 or D2397�. B. Mineral Aggregate: Mineral aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, stone or slag screenings, sand, mineral filler, or a combination of two or more of these materials. Coarse and fine aggggregates shall comply with all the quality requirements, except soundness, of AS I, Designation D692 and ASTM Designation D1073 respectively. Mineral filler shall comply with ASTM Designation D242. Combinations of aggregates having a history of polishing shall not be used in surface courses. Refer to F.D.O.T. Section 917. C. Base Course shall meet ASTM D3515 mix designation 19.0 min (3/4 in) and surface course shall be ASTM D3515 mix designation 9.5 min (3/8 in). Refer to F.D.O.T. Section 332 for aggregate requirements for Type II Asphaltic Concrete. D. Sealer: Coal tar based containing at least 50% solids, conform to Federal Spec R-P-355-D with sharp aggregate admixture for slip resistance added at 5 lb/gal. 1. "Multex GRS" - Koch Materials Co., Chicago, IL (312) 767- 8676. 2. "Jennite" - Neyra Industries, Inc., Cincinnati, OH (800) 543- 7077. 3. "Seal Master" - Wikel Manufacturing Co., Inc., Sandusky, OH (419) 626-5470. E. At the option of the Owner's Construction Representative, a nuclear testing gauge which complies with ASTM Test Method D2950 may be used after being calibrated for the density established by ASTM Test Method D1188 or D2726. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ( i A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner's Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Subgrade shall be earth compacted to density specified in Section 02200. B. Fine Grading: Section 02512 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 1. Grading and construction in strict accordance with specification for indicated type of construction of the F.D.O.T. Specification. 2. Subgrade and shoulders shall be final graded trimmed and finished within the limits and as required by the elevations shown on the Drawinggs. Grading operations shall be so conducted that materials shall not be removed or loosened beyond the required limits. The finished surfaces shall be left in smooth and uniform planes. 3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all lines, levels and measurements for this work. He shall provide his own instruments and survey crew to maintain this control throughout the duration of -his work. The Owner's Representative will assist only to the degree that he will point out the corner monuments and benchmarks. C. Bituminous paving shall not be placed when the ambient temperature is below 400F., or when there is frost in the base, during rain, or any other time when _ weather conditions are unsuitable for the type of material being placed. D. Material for spot subgrade reinforcement shall be bank -run gravel or crushed stone. E. Subgrade and Embankment Protection: 1. During construction, embankments and excavations in the area of the paving shall be kept shaped and drained. 2. Ditches and drains along the subgrade shall be maintained to drain effectively at all times. 3. Repair ruts or depressions of 1" or more in subgrade. 3.03 GENERAL A. Preparing Area to be Paved: The area to be paved shall be substantially true to line and grade. It shall have a dry, firm, and properly prepared surface before paving operations begin. All loose and foreign material shall be removed. B. Generally, the asphalt base shall be applied separately from the surface course. Early in the project the granular base and asphaltic base (or "binder") course i shall be applied in conjunction with curbs, gutter, stormdrains and other site utilities, to provide a satisfactory surface for construction traffic. C. Just prior to construction completion, or when directed by the Owner's Construction Representative, the asphalt surface course shall be applied. 3.04 PAVING - A. After pprepparing the subgrade as required in Section 02200, the Contractor shall 3rovide shellrock base, to the thickness specified on the plans, F.D.O.T. Section 50, which shall be of hard, durable, tough character reasonably free of soft, thin or elongated and laminated pieces. Compact to 98%" of Modified Proctor Density. B. When the compacted subgrade on which the asphalt base is to be placed is loosely bonded, it shall be primed with .25 gal sq. yd. of cutback asphalt prime coat (see 2.O1A). Immediately prior to application of the asphalt prime coat all loose and foreign material shall be removed by sweeping or by blowing, or both. Surfaces of curbs, gutters, vertical faces of existing pavements, and all structures to be in actual contact with the asphalt -aggregate mixture shall be Section 02512 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 given a thin, even coating of asphalt material. Care shall be taken to prevent splattering with asphalt surfaces that will be in contact with the asphalt -aggregate mixture. C. Placing the Mix: The surface course mixture shall be placed with an asphalt aver to provide a nominal compacted thickness as specified on the plans of s pat -)-Asphaltic-Concrete-per-F.D.O,T—Section-332. - P-lacing-the-mixture- sha-11 be a continuous operation. If any irregularities occur, they shall be corrected before final compaction of the mixture. The minimum lift thickness (surface course) shall.in accordance with F.D.O.T. criteria. D. Compacting the Mix: The mix shall be compacted immediate)y after placing. Initial rolling with a steel -wheeled tandem roller, steel three -wheeled roller, vibratory roller, or a pneumatic -tired roller shall follow the paver as closely as possible. If needed, intermediate rolling with a pneumatic -tired roller shall be done immediately behind the initial rolling. Final rolling shall eliminate marks from previous rolling. In areas too small for the roller a vibrating plate compactor or a hand tamper shall be used to achieve thorough compaction. E. Tack Coat: A tack coat of 0.15 (gal/yyd2) of diluted emulsified asphalt, of the type and grade designated in Section 2.01A, shall be applied on the sawcut, existing bituminous edge as indicated on the plans. The emulsified asphalt shall be diluted with equal parts of water. The tack coat shall be applied on only as much pavement as can be covered in the same day. F. Acceptance Requirements: 1. Acceptance of the compacted mixture with respect to density shall be based on relative density (specific gravity). Relative density is the ratio, expressed in percent, between the density determined on a specimen of compacted mixture from the finished pavement with the theoretical maximum specific vity. Both the field specimen and the mixture used to prepare the aboratory sample shall be obtained from the same truck loadof material. Obtain ten evenly distributed samples from the paved areas by coring or another acceptable method. Determine the specific gravity of samples usui ASTM Method of Test D1188. Determine the theoretical maximum specifiic gravity in accordance with ASTM Method of Test D2041. The compacted base and surface will be, accepted when the average of the five specific gravitydeterminations is equal to or greater than 92 percent of the theorietcal maximum specific gravity and when no individual determination is lower than 90 percent. 2. Thickness: The same cores used to test density (specific gravity) will be used to measure the thickness of the pavement in accordance with ASTM Method of Test D3549. The compacted base and surface shall have average thicknesses no less than specified on the plans and in this Section. Any deficiency in base thickness shall be made up with surface mixture when the surface course is placed. 3. Smoothness: The surface of the completed pavement will be checked longitudinally and transversely for smoothness with a 10-ft. straightedge. The surface shall not vary more than 1/8 in. in 10 ft. parallel to the centerline and not more than 1/4 in. at right angles to the centerline. 3.05 ALTERNATE CONSTRUCTION FOR INCLEMENT WEATHER A. If work cannot be completed because of weather or construction work, base course shall be placed and binder and wearing courses placed when directed. Fill ruts of base course, bring to correct grade, clean and prime before applying Section 02512 Flying 7 Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 binder course. Repair and clean binder course before applying wearing course. 3.06 FINISH A. After final rolling, no traffic shall be permitted on paving until it has cooled and hardened and in no case less than 6 hours. B The paved areas shall drain away from the building; no bumps or "bird baths" will be accepted. C. The black top shall be clean and free of dirt or debris ready for traffic painting as specified in Section 02580, after a minimum 30 day curing period. END OF SECTION Section 02512 SECTION 02525 CONCRETE CURBS PART 1- GENERAL Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Curbs. B. Curb/gutter combination. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. B. Section 02510 - Concrete Paving, Walks and Terraces. C. Section 02512 - Asphalt Concrete Paving. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge construction, 1992 edition (F.D.O.T.). a. Section 520 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid any delay or interference with other work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Except as specified herein, all materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300. B. Portland Cement: shall meet the requirements of AASTHO Designation M85, Type I. Refer to F.D.O.T. Section 921. C. Concrete: 3000 psi, air -entrained as per F.D.O.T. Section 345, Class I. D. Fine Aggregate: Sand shall be a white quartz sand or a crushed limestone, marble, granite, or other comparable light colored material and shall contain no iron or other discoloring matter. Refer to F.D.O.T. Section 902. E. Forms: Either steel or wood. Use flexible spring -steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. The condition and stability of the forms shall produce a concrete curb or concrete curb and ptter that will not deviate more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet in either grade or alignment. Section 02525 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 F. Expansion Joints: ASTM D1751 or D1752. G. Joint Sealer: ASTM D1850. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner's Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Subgrade: Conform with the requirements specified in Section 02200. B. The subgrade shall be thoroughly wetted and then compacted with two passes of a 500 pound roller. C. Yielding material deflecting more than 1/2" under the specified roller shall be removed to a depth of not less than 4" below subgrade elevation and replaced with an approved granular material which shall then be compacted as described above. D. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when the concrete is placed. In cold weather the subgrade shall be prepared and protected so as to provide a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited. 3.03 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Comply with the requirements of Section 03300 and the following: Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of form: Not more than 1/8" in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis not more than 1/4" in 10 feet. 3.04 REINFORCING STEEL A. Install in compliance with the requirements of Section 03300 and as required by the Florida Department of Transportation. 3.05 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Install transverse expansion joints at all returns and at a maximum spacing of 100 feet o.c. There shall always be an expansion joint at the point where curved and tangent section of curb or combination curb and gutter sections join. B. Install expansion joints where curbs abut concrete paving, stationary structures, buildings, other concrete slabs, pads or vertical restraints. Section 02525 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 C. Fill joints with 1/2" thick joint filler strips conforming to ASTM D1751 or D1752, or with resin -impregnated fiberboard conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM D1752. D. Place joint filler with top edge 1/4" below the surface and shall be held in place with steel pins or other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and finishing. E. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, round ]Joint edges with edging tool having a radius of 1/8". Remove concrete over the joint filler. F. At the end of the curing period, clean and fill expansion oints with joint sealer conforming to ASTM D1850. Fill joints flush with concrete surface. Dummy groove joints shall not be sealed. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT, FINISHING AND CURING A. General: Comply with the requirements of Section 03300 for mixing and placing concrete, and as specified herein. B. Moisten subgrade as required to reduce suction at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around structures until they have been brought to the required grade and alignment. C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. Sections less than 10 feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted except that in short radius curves (i.e. less than 200 ft) sections shall not exceed 6 ft. in length. D. Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at Contractor's option, if acceptable to the Owner's Representative. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to the required cross-section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified. E. After screeding and compacting, finish unformed surfaces with a wood float to produce a uniform texture and finish throughout. Inspect formed surfaces immediately after stripping forms, grind down fin and repair sand run and honeycombs with the same mix used for the curbs and gutters minus the coarse aggregates. Mortar used in pointing shall not be more than one hour old. All surfaces shall be kept wet during the finishing operation. F. Contraction Joints: Contraction joints are required at a spacing of 10 feet o.c., and can be either formed using a jointer or sawed using a power -driven saw. 3.07 CURING AND BACKFILLING A. Curing: Immediately after the finishing operations, the exposed concrete surface shall be cured for 7 days by the mat, impervious sheet, or membrane -curing method. B. Backfilling: After curing, debris shall be removed and the areas adjoining shall be backfilled, graded and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with the lines and grades indicated. Section 02525 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect completed work from damage until accepted. Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction. Work that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed to the entire length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. END OF SECTION Section 02525 lJ DIVISION 2 SECTION 02576 PAVEMENT SEALING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. i 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide asphalt seal coat over new asphaltic concrete paving. B. Provide silicone water seal over new concrete paving. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Applicator: Certified Applicator of seal coat manufacturer. B. Asphaltic Pavement Sealer acceptable Products: 1. Jennite NJ-S3: Neyra Industries, Inc. 10700 Evendale Drive Cincinnati, Ohio 45241 (800) 543-7077 2. Advanced Formula J-16 Pavement Sealer: Maintenance, Inc Wooster, Ohio 44691 (216) 264-6262 C. Concrete Pavement Sealer acceptable Products: 1. Life Time Water Sealant: Lifetime Sealant Products, Inc Attn: Sam Sisk 6901 South Pierce Street Littleton, Colorado 80123 (303) 973-1194 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's printed Product and Application Specifications to the Architect. B. Applicator's Certification: Submit letter from Manufacturer stating Applicator is their Certified Applicator. Letter to be submitted to Architect. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply materials in rainy or foggy conditions, or when temperature is below 50 degrees fahrenheit, or when such conditions are anticipated in subsequent 8 hours. B. Protection: Protect adjacent curbs, walks, fences, and other items from receiving seal coat. 02576 - 1 2.00 PRODUCTS: 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphaltic Concrete Sealer: 1. Seal Coat: Coal tar pitch emulsion. 2. band: — - Clean, hard and sharp, free from clay, salt and organic matter and graded within the following limits: U.S. SIEVE TOTAL % PASSABLE No. 20 100 No. 30 BO - 100 No. 50 20 - 60 No. 100 0-5 3. Water: Potable above 45 degrees fahrenheit, ambient temperature. B. Concrete Sealer: 1. Liquified silicone, perm rate ASTM E96-66, 7.25. 2.02 MIXES: (Asphaltic concrete sealer) A. Mix emulsion with power equipment to a homogeneous consistency in accordance with Manufacturer's instruction. B. For sand slurry, slowly add 4 to 6 lbs. of sand per gallon of emulsion, and mix to even slurry consistency. C. Add water to mix as required for application. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Inspect paving surfaces for conditions and defects that will adversely affect quality of work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition to the owner through normal preparatory work as specified below. B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. C. Do not place coating over unsound oil spots softened by fuel or oil. D. Verify that new asphalt is complete, has been accepted by Architect, and cured a minimum, of 14 days. E. Do not use curing compound on concrete to receive silicone water seal. Areas to receive sealant are as follows: 1. Gas, r.v., diesel islands and approach and departure aprons, trash enclosure, additive tank area, and fuel farm. 3.02 PREPARATION - NEW PAVING: A. Seal superficial oil spots with oil spot coating material by roller, brush or spray. B. Thoroughly clean surface prior to application. 02576 - 2 3.03 APPLICATION: A. Apply materials in accordance with Manufacturer's recommended procedures. B. Asphaltic Concrete Sealer Application Rates as follows: 1. First Coat: .10 - .15 gallons/SY with 4-6 Ibs/gallon sand 2. Second Coat:.09 - .12 gallons/SY with 4-6 Ibs/gallon sand C. Concrete Sealer Application Rates as follows: 1. One gallon/175 square feet s 3.04 CLEANING: p A. Remove seal coat from surfaces other than those requiring pavement sealer. END OF SECTION 02521 i I 1 .PLY 02576 - 3 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02580 PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Pavement marking as indicated on drawings and as specified in this section. B. Related Sections: ' ! 1. 02512 - Asphaltic Concrete Pavement. 1.02 REFERENCE \ A. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) 1991 Standard Specifications + ` for Road and Bridge Construction. Where reference is made herein to the FDOT Specifications, delete therefrom the basis of payment and other pay measurement requirements. Payment for the work specified in this section will be included as part of the lump sum bid for the entire project in accordance with • the contract documents. B. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways published by the U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, 1988. C. St. Lucie County Standard Specifications 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review before commencing work, paint tests, as specified in Section 971 of FDOT Specifications and as applicable to hereinafter specified material. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in a neat and accurate manner. B. All equipment shall be of a type and design which will readily obtain the requireduniformity of application of the pavement markings both as to thickness of coating and as to alignment. 1.05 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Paint: Provide the Owner with a minimum of 5 gallons of traffic paint from the same batch used in application of pavement markings. Also provide paint specifications and the manufacturer's identification number of the paint used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Traffic Paint: In accord with requirements as specified in Section 971-12 of the FDOT Specifications and colors indicated on Drawings. Al Section 02580 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A —Do -not -proceed -with -the -work -of this -section -until -conditions -detrimental -to the -- proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Time of Application: Painting shall be done only during daylight hours and, as far as practical, shall be terminated in time to permit sufficient drying by sunset. B. Weather Limitations: No paint shall be applied when any moisture is present on the surface to be painted or when the air temperature is below 40 degrees F. Painting shall not be done when winds are sufficient to cause spray dust. C. Preparation of Surface to be Painted: The surface to be painted shall be cleaned, by compressed air or other effective means, immediately before the start of painting and shall be clean and dry when the paint is ap lied. Any vegetation or loose soil shall be removed from the pavement be lore striping is begun. D. Mixing Paint: The paint shall be thoroughly mixed before it is poured into the painting machine and no thinnin of the paint in the machine will be allowed at any time. Before the start of each day's work the paint container, the connections and the spray nozzles on the machine shall be thoroughly cleaned with paint thinner or other suitable cleaner. E. Paint Application: The traffic markings shall be of the specified dimensions with clean, true edges and without sharp breaks in the alignment. A uniform coating of paint shall be obtained and the finished markings shall contain no light spots or paint skips. Any stripes which do not have a uniform, satisfactory appearance, both day and night, shall be corrected. F. Rate of Paint Application: The minimum rate of application for paint shall be as follows: 1. Four inch solid parking stall strips: 18.5 gallons per mile. 2. Any other width stripe or markings: A direct proportion of the above. G. Required Film Thickness: The minimum wet film thickness for all painted areas shall be 15 mils. H. Alignment of Strips: Where a stripe deviates from the correct alignment, as indicated by the string line, by more than one inch in any 20 foot length, it shall be obliterated and the stripe corrected hereinafter as specified in paragraph "Corrective Measures". 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protection of Stripes: All newly painted stripes, or other markings, shall be protected until the paint is sufficiently dry to permit vehicles to cross the marking without damage from the tires. B. Repair of Damaged Areas: Any portions of the stripes damaged by passing traffic or from and other cause shall be repainted at the Contractor s expense. Section 02580 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 3.04 DIMENSION AND ALIGNMENT TOLERANCE r A. Dimensions: No marking shall be less than the specified width. No markings shall exceed the specified width by more than 1/2 inch. Alignment tolerances shall be as specified in paragraph 3-01 H. B. Correction Rates: Any corrections of variation in the width of in the alignment of stripes shall not be made abruptly but the stripes shall be returned to the p design width at the rate of at least 10 feet for each 1/2 inch of correction. 3.05 CORRECTIVE MEASURES A. All painted markings which fail to meet the specifications, including the permissible tolerances and the appearance requirements, or are marred or damaged by traffic or from other causes, shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. All drip and spattered paint shall be removed. Whenever it is necessary to remove paint it shall be done by means which will not damage the underlying surface of the pavement. When necessary to correct a deviation which exceeds the pennissible tolerance in alignment, that portion of the stripe affected shall be removed and repainted in accordance with these specifications. B. Corrective Devices: Misalignment, defective surfaces, etc., shall be corrected by chemical agents, or by any other type of mechanical device which will effectively remove the paint without damage to the pavement surface, or - prevent the re -application of markings. END OF SECTION Section 02580 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02660 �! WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 -GENERAL u 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply. to this Section. 6 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Fire Protection System to within 5 feet of building. B. Domestic Water System to within 5 feet of building. C. Water Meters, Vaults and Testing. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog cuts and specifications data for all materials. +'1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE r A. Reference Standards: 1. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC). 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA), latest edition. 3. Ft. Pierce Utilities Authority Standard Specifications 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid 14 any delay or interference with other work. B. Bonds: All surety bonds for performance required by local regulatory agencies shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. / I PART 2 - PRODUCTS Y 2.01 MATERIALS A. Material shall conform to the requirements of UPC Chapter 10 as a minimum. B. Pipe: 1. Ductile Iron Class 52, as per AWWA C-150, cement lined as per AWWA C-151. t I 'll 2. Polyvinyl Chloride(P.V.C.) Pipe,as AWWA C-900, pressure class 150 SDR(18) for potable water mains, Sper M) for fire mains. Section 02660 Flying J Travel Plaza Y Project No. 96-31 C. Pipe fittings: Fittings shall be mechanical joint per AWWA C-110 or AWWA C-153. Fittings shall be cast or ductile iron, standard body,Class 250, cement lined and seal coated. D. Fire Hydrants: Mueller #A423 or American B84B (AWWA C-502) r E—Reduced_Pressure_Backtlow-Preventer:_As_determined and_supplied_by the-t. —___ Pierce Unilities Auhtority and purchased by the Contractor from FPUA. �. F. Mechanical Joint Restraints - Mechanical joint restraints.. shall be used on all fittings. No trust blocks to be utilized within the potable system. G. Valves: Non -rising stem iron body, bronze -mounted gate valves suitable for working pressure of 150 psi and meeting AWWA C500. Mueller or approved equal. H. Valve boxes: USF 7500 Screw -type valve box or approved equal. -' I. Water Meters: As determined by the Ft. Pierce Utilities Authority and purchased by the Contractor from FPUA. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner's Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all r( unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 3.02 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION A. Trenching, backfilling and compacting: In accordance with applicable " +f requirements of Section 02200. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Minimum depth of cover shall be 36". B. Vertical clearance between sewer and water lines: Center one 20 ft. length ofwater pipe at the crossingwith a minimum clearance of 18" above the top of the sewr line. Where 18"cannot be maintained center one 20 ft. length of D.I.P. water main at the crossing. 6" minimum clearance required when using Ductile Iron Pipe. C. Install polyethylene corrosion protection as per AWWA C-105. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Fire Protection System: Upon completion notify the St. Lucie County Fire District the Engineer to arrange for testing of the system. The testing of the system shall meet the Fire Marshall's requirements. Section 02660 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 aA 1 B. Pressure Tests: (Water Supply System(non-fire protection)) 1. After the pipe has been laid and ppartially backfilled, it shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi (200 psi for fire mains). When local conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, are such that the trench must be backfilled immediately after laying the pipe, the pressure tests may be made after backfilling has been completed but before replacement of permanent paving. If high -early strength concrete was used, test shall not be made until at least 48 hours after any thrust block has been poured. otherwise concrete must cure 5 days. _ 2. The duration of the test shall be two hours unless otherwise specified otherwise by the Engineer. 3. Each section of the pipeline shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure shall be ap lied by means of a pump connected to the pi e, thereby testing each valve for closure. The pump, pipe connection and i all necessary apparatus shall be furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish gauges for the test and make all required taps into the pipe and shall perform all tests under the direction of andwitnessed by the Owner's Representative. All air shall be expelled from the pipeline before making �y the test. 4. During the test, all exposed pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants, joints and couplings shall be examined. Any defective material or work shall be replaced and the test repeated until satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 5. Water for testing and flushing shall be potable water provided by the Contractor from a source approved by the Owner's Representative. C. Leakage Tests: 1. The hydrostatic pressure tests shall be performed as hereinabove specified and no installation, or section thereof, will be acceptable until the leakage is less than the number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula: L = ND M1/2 7400 in which, L = Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour N = Approximate number of joints in the section of main being tested D = Pipe diameter; in inches P = Average test pressure during the test, in psi gauge 2. Water shall be supplied to the main during the test period as required to maintain the test pressure as specified. The quantity used, which shall be compared :in the above allowable quantity, shall be measured by pumping from a calibrated container. A 5/8-inch meter installed on the discharge side of the pump may be used to measure the leakage for large mains when approved by the Owner's Representative. D. Sterilization: 1. The Contractor shall flush mains and arrange for complete sterilization by chlorination to be accomplished under the direction of the Ft. Pierce Utilities Section 02660 Flying J Travel Plaza iy Project No. 96-31 Authority and the Engineer. Work shall conform to applicable provisions of AWWA C601 "Disinfecting Water Mains." Water with a free residual M chlorine content of 100 P.P.M. shall be evenly distributed throughout the pipe system_ and allowed_to_remain_in the_pipe�or-24_hours-before-it-is flushed out and samples are taken by a certified laboratory, employed by the Contractor. All fees to cover the cost of bacteriological tests shall be paid by the Contractor. If.such samples do not demonstratesatisfactory results, chlorination will be repeated. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall present evidence of satisfactory pressure and leakage test results to the Owner's Construction Representative. END OF SECTION i Section 02660 ! Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02100 1 SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE ^� PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. J 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Storm Sewerage System. ,b B. Sanitary Sewerage System starting 5' outside building footprint. !� 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02200 - Earthwork. ! n 1.04 SUBMITTALS Y A. Pipe and appurtenances catalog cuts and specifications data for all submittals. B. Schedule for testing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Ft. Pierce Utilities Authority Standard Specifications. 2. Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition (F.D.O.T.). 3. Florida Department of Transportation Roadway and Traffic'Design Standards. 1 4. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), latest edition. 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA), latest edition. B. Contractor or Applicator qualifications. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid any delay or interference with other work. B. Bonds - All surety bonds for performance required by local regulatory agencies shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. (r Section 02700 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Pipe: Class 52, as per AWWA C-150, double thickness cement lined and seal coated for pressure pipe installations. Class 52, polyethylene lined B. Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drains and Sewer Pipe: Shall be class III and IV and shall conform to AASHTO Designation M170 and/or the latest AASHTO Interim Specification, and ASTM C-76. C. Flared End Sections: Provide flared end sections for pipe without headwalls or not ending in structures, as per F.D.O.T. Standard Index No. 270. D. Fittings: Provide proper fittings for installation and connection of lines meeting applicable requirements of associated types of pi e. Fittings shall be cast or ductile iron, standard body, conforming to AWWA C-I l , Class 250, cement lined and seal coated. E. Polyviny1-Chloride Sewer Pipe: Shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3034, SDR 35, conforming to ASTM 3034 for gravity mains. Pressure pipe shall be Class 150, SDR 18, conforming to AWWA C-900. F. Brick: Brick, if required, for manholes, catchbasins, inlets and other drainage structures shall be solid concrete brick, hard burned common brick having low absorption, or well burned no. 2 paving brick. Special radial brick or concrete brick may also be used with the Owners Representative's approval. G. Concrete: Concrete for storm sewer appurtenance construction shall be 3000 psi mix, F.D.O.T. Section 345, Class I. Joint mortar shall be 1:2 Portland cement sand mix, masonry mortar to be 1:3. At Contractor's option, hydrated lime may be substituted for cement not to exceed 10% of cement used in masonry mortar. H. Precast Structures: Precast reinforced concrete structures may be used at contractor's option. Precast structures shall meet F.D.0.T. Section 425. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner's Representative all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work encountered. 3.02 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION A. Trenching, backfilling and compacting: In accordance with applicable requirements of Section 02200. B. Generally, excavate to the line and grade shown. The excavations shall not be carried closer than to within two inches of final grade until the pipe is ready to b be installed. The remaining two inches shall be removed by fine graders lust ahead of the pipe laying operation. Section 02700 Flying 7 Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 C. Backfilling from bottom of trench to a point at least one foot over the top of pipe barrel shall be placed by hand in six inch layers and thoroughly tamped into place around the pipe. Extreme care shall be exercised to the level one foot above pipe barrel to insure that no damage is caused to the pipe or that its alignment or grade is not disturbed in any way. Only clean materials may be used in this operation, clean earth (no rocks) sand or rock dust. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF STORM SEWERS h A. Install sewer fines -in straight line and on uniform rate -of grade between points where changes in alignment or grade are shown. Bed barrel of pipe firmly at required line and grade. Keep stopper in mouth of pipe when pipe -laying is not in progress. Set bell of pipe upstream. Support barrels of pipe continuously and 4 scoop out space for proper clearance of be B. After installed pi ing has been tested and inspected, backfill excavations with approved material tamp and compact in place. Tamp carefully around pipe and above top of pipe in layers not over 6 inches. Observe care in backfillmg not to disturb pipe. t, C. Provide granular bedding and dewatering materials and methods required to facilitate installation. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION OF DRAINAGE STRUCTURES A. Masonry work shall be laid up true and plumb and horizontal joints shall not be more than 1/2":. Masonry units shall be laid in full bed of mortar and joints in each course shall be fill.solid with mortar before another course is laid on top. Brick shall be wet before being laid in warm weather. Brick shall not be laid in freezing weather. Protect brick work from the weather when storming or freezing and at other times when necessary during the progress of the work. Inlet frames shall be set - in a full bed of mortar and at the elevation established by the drawings. B. Precast structures shall be set on properly prepared granular or concrete subbase providing full support to unit. C. Cast in place structures shall be formed and poured in accordance with Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: 1. Ball Test: Prior to other tests all sewer lines should be cleaned and tested for major defects by flushing with an appropriately sized sewer cleaning ball. Precleaning by high velocity jet or other method may be necessary. 2. Visual Test: All sewer lines shall be inspected visually by the Contractor and checked by the Owner's Construction Representative to verify accuracy of alignment and freedom from debris and obstructions. The full diameter of the pipe should be visible when viewed between consecutive manholes. The method of test can be photography, closed circuit television or visually lamping with mirrors and lights. Section 02700 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 3. Deflection Testing:The maximum allowable pipe deflection is 7.5%. If the Owner's Construction Representative directs as a result of the visual test, a go, no-go"mandrel or sewer ball shall be used to prove pipe deflection is within allowable limits. The Contractor may, at his option, use a F deflectometer, calibrated television or photography. END OF SECTION Section 02700 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 SECTION 02720 STORM SEWER SYSTEM - PART 1 - GENERAL y 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1-Specification Sections, apply to this Section. n 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes stone sewerage system piping and appurtenances from a point indicated on the drawings to the point of disposal and includes all 4 accessories indicated on the drawings and specified in this Section. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation and backfill. B. Division 2 Section "Sewerage and Drainage". k C. Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Systems" for building storm drains. D. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Systems" for building storm drains. al 'i 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for drainage piping and piping specialties. ,6 2. Shop drawings for precast concrete storm drainage manholes and catch basins, including frames, covers, and grates. 3. Product data for filter fabric. 4. Product data and wiring diagram for trench drain pumping station. _ 4 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Environmental Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local environmental agency regulations pertaining to storm sewerage systems. B. Utility Compliance: Comply with local utility regulations and standards pertaining to storm sewerage system connection to off site storm sewerage system. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey and verify existing utility locations. Verify that storm sewerage system piping may be installed in compliance with original design and referenced standards. Locate existing storm sewerage system piping and structures that are to be abandoned and closed. Locate Section 02720 r Flying J Travel Plaza µ ; Project No. 96-31 existing storm sewerage system piping and structures that are to be cleaned and connected to new storm sewerage system. Keep materials stored on site in clean condition and in areas approved by Owner. Landscape material damaged by stored material to be replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner. 1-.06-SEQUENCING AND -SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work progress schedule with Owner and Project Architect/Engineer. B. Coordinate connection to off site sewerage system with appropriate authorities. C. Coordinate on site work with existing utilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: Provide pipe and pipe fitting materials compatible with each other, size and type as indicated on the drawings. B. Hub and Spigot Cast -Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, gray cast iron, for compression gasket joints. Class: Service. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, thickness to match class of pipe. C. Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe: AWWA C151, Class 50, for push -on joints. Lining: AWWA C104, asphaltic material seal coat, minimum 1-mil thick. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. D. Ductile -Iron and Cast -Iron Pipe Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile -iron or cast-iron, or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact fittings. Lining: AWWA C104, asphaltic material seal coat, minimum 1 mil thick Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. E. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent cement or elastomeric gasket joints. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. F. Reinforced Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76, Class III, Wall B, for rubber gasket joints. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber. G. Corrugated Metal Pipes: 1. Helically corrugated aluminum alloy round pipe shall conform to AASHTO M196. Thickness: 16 gage unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Helical corrugated aluminum -alloy pipe perforated shall conform to AASHTO M196. Thickness: 16 gage. 3. Perforated pipe shall conform with the following additional requirements; perforations shall be 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch diameter holes at 2-374 inches +/-o.c., with a minimum of 114 holes per linear foot. Section 02720 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 1 4. Helically corrugated steel pipe shall conform to AASHTO M36. Pipe - shall be fully bituminous coated in accordance with the requirements of 16 AASHTO M190, for Type A. Thickness: gage unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2.02 MANHOLES A. Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, 3,000 psi, precast reinforced concrete, size and of depth as indicated on the drawings. 1. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having a separate - base slab or base section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, lengths to provide depth 4 indicated. 3. Top Section: Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat -slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone to match grade rings. 4. Grade Rings: Provide 2 or 3 reinforced concrete rings, of 6 to 9 inches diameter frame and cover. total thickness and match 24-inch i ` 5. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty, ductile iron, 24-inch inside diameter by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch-diameter cover, indented top "STORM into design, with lettering SEWER" cast cover. 2.03 CATCH BASINS A. Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 or ASTM C 858, 3,000 psi, precast reinforced concrete, of type, size and depth indicated on the drawings. Base slab shall Sections shall have provision for rubber gasket joints. section have minimum thickness of 6 inches, riser sections shall have minimum thickness of 4 inches. Top section and grade rings shall match 24-inch frame and grate, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 1. Base Section: Base riser`section and separate base slab, or base riser section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: Sections shall be of lengths to provide depth indicated. 3. Top Section: Flat slab type with opening to match grade rings. ' 4. Catch Basin Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536 Grade 60 40-18, i heavy-duty, ductile iron, 24-inch inside diameter by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch-diameter flat grate having small square or short slotted drainage openings as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 DRY WELLS A. General: ASTM C 858, precast reinforced perforated concrete pipe, size as indicated on the drawings, with lift -off -type concrete cover having cast -in lift rings, as indicated. _ B. General: Provide aggregate -filled dry wells as indicated. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, gravel or stone. Film: Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick or other equivalent impervious material. Section 02720 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 2.05 TRENCH DRAIN SYSTEM A. General: Install trench drain system as detailed on the drawings. Width, depth and length to be as indicated on the drawings. Trench length indicated B. Trench drain to be ACO K100-S series presloped at 0.60% or approved equal 2.06 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT A. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3,000 psi. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type H. Fine Aggregate: ASTM G 33, sand. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. Water: Potable. B. Reinforcement Steel conforming to the following: Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, plain. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED STORM SEWER A. Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firtn, stable, and rock -free foundation, throughout the length of the pipe. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe: Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation. 3.02 PIPE APPLICATIONS FOR UNDERGROUND STORM SEWERS A. General: Pipe materials and sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings. The following applications shall apply in the event piping material is not otherwise indicated Pipe below paving and areas of traffic other than in trench drains: Reinforced concrete sewer pipe and fittings. Pipe connections to off site sewerage systems: Ductile -iron pressure pipe and fittings. Pipe connections from building roof drains to storm sewer system catch basins: Service -class hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe and fittings. Pipe connections from exterior slab area drains and gutter downspouts to storm sewer system: PVC solvent cement joint sewer pipe. Pipe connections between catch basins in non -traffic areas and in trench drains: Corrugated metal pipe and fittings. Section 02720 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 4 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate 1 ' the general location and arrangement of the underground storm sewerage system piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install the piping as indicated, to the extent J practical. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing _ upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Use manholes or catch basins for changes in direction, except where a fitting is indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, except where direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different size or p material' of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction pipes is prohibited. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, except where indicated otherwise. Extend storm sewerage system piping to connect to building storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Tunneling: Install ippe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be cut or otherwise disturbedp by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. Keep interior of storm sewer free of dirt and superfluous materials as work progresses. If maximum width of trench at top of pipe as specified is exceeded, install r - either concrete cradling, ppipe encasement or other bedding as may be required to support added load of backfill. Keep trenches for all section of sewer free from water until pipe jointing material has set and trench backfilled. Do not lay pipe when condition of trench or weather is unsuitable for such t work. Keep open ends of pipes and fittings securely closed at times when work is not in progress. When other conditions are such that pipe cannot be adequately supported on earth or tamped backfill, encase pipe in concrete or support it on a concrete cradle. W 3.04 PIPE AND JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. Join and install hub and spigot cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, with compression gaskets in accordance with CIS] "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Volume 1." Use "Service" or "Extra Heavy" class gaskets to match class of pipe and fittings. Section 02720 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 B. Join and install ductile -iron pipe with ductile -iron or cast-iron push -on joint fittings and rubber gaskets in accordance with AWWA C600, except that anchorages are not required. C. Join and install PVC pipe as follows: and 402.Pipe and gasketed fittings, joining with elastomeric seals in accoi with ASTM D 3212. Installation in accordance with ASTM D 2321. Join concrete pipe and fittings with rubber gaskets in accordance with ASTM C 443, and install piping in accordance with applicable provisions -of ACPA "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." Join corrugated metal pipe with locking bands with a rubber or neoprene gasket for a flexible watertight omt. Locking band shall conform to AASHTO M36 and gasket shall conform to ASTM C443-79. 3.05 MANHOLES A. General: Install manholes complete with accessories as indicated on the drawings. Form continuous concrete or split pipe section channel and benches between inlets and outlet. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finish surface where manholes occur in pavements. Elsewhere, set tops at finish surface with concrete collars, unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 CATCH BASINS A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. B. Set frames and grates in a mortar bed and adjust to elevations indicated on the drawings. 3.07 DRY WELLS A. Install as detailed and indicated on the drawings. B. Fill: Pack below and around dry well with 3/4 inch to 1-inch-size rock, to minimum of 12 inches below bottom and beyond dry well perimeter. 3.08 TRENCH DRAIN SYSTEM A. Install trench drains as detailed and specified by the manufacturer. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform testing of completed piping in accordance with the following procedure. Backfill trench prior to testing for leakage, up to at least the lower half of pipe. If required, place sufficient additional backfnll to prevent pipe movement during testmg, leaving joints uncovered to permit 'inspection. Correct visible leaks encountered regardless of leakage test results. Section 02720 Flying J Travel Plaza Project No. 96-31 An exfiltration test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 5 feet is provided above top of pipe at the upper end of pipe to be tested. Allow filled line to stand not less than 4 hours. The amount of water required to maintain this water level during a two hour test or exfiltration test shall not exceed 0.4 gallon/inch diameter per 100 feet of pipe line per hour: When leakage exceeds maximum amount specified, satisfactory correction shall be made and retesting accomplished. Testing, correction and retesting shall be made to the satisfaction of the Project Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to Owner. B. Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. r^ In large, accessible pi ing, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work stops. Flush piping between catch basins and/or manholes, if required by Project Architect/Engineer to remove collected debris. 'i Clean existing piping and catch basins if connected to the new system or as indicated on the drawings. C. Interior Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration, or other defects, correct such defects and reinspect. END OF SECTION 02720 I 1 Section 02720 1� DIVISION 2 SECTION 02725 TRENCH DRAIN SYSTEM CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: All materials, labor, and equipment necessary to install a pre -cast, sloped or neutral, chemical -resistant polymer concrete trench drainage system as specified and as shown on the working drawings shall be included. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Manufacturer shall submit test results from an independent testing laboratory stating the uniform live compression load in accordance with FAA specifications AC 150/5320-6B for drainage channel sections. When requested, manufacturer shall be approval of United States Department of Agriculture (USDA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Manufacturer will submit, product information and shop drawings showing a schematic plan of the total drainage system listing all parts being provided with exact center -line dimensions suitable for installation. Copies of the manufacturer's recommended method of installation and assembly shall be submitted for review. 1.04 WARRANTY: Manufacturer shall submit a 1 year warranty against defects, and a list of projects installed locally during the past five years. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to meeting the requirements of this section the following manufacturers are approved. A. ACO Polymer Products, Inc., B. Polycast, By Quazite 12080 Ravenna Road 3621 Industrial Park Drive Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44024 Lenoir City, Tennessee 37771 (800) 543-4764 (800) 346-3061 C. Polydrain D. Zurn Industries, Inc. P.O. Box 837/Murdock Road 2855 Grits Road Troutman, North Carolina 28166 Jamestown, NY 14701 (800) 438-6057 (716) 665-1132 2.02 PRODUCT: Product shall be sloped trench drain system including, extra heavy duty grates and frames of ductile iron, cast into top edge of channel. The trench drain system shall be designed to withstand H-20 wheel loads ("E" Class Load). Trench drain channels shall be pre -cast, sloped or neutral and interlocking, incorporating either polyester or vinyl ester resins and formulated aggregate, with grating lockdown devices cast into the grate frames and shall be formed from the same materials as the grate. Channels shall not have any projecting surfaces within 2" of the top of surfaces. Unit width - 6.1 inches Flexural strength - 2,900 psi Internal width - 4.0 inches Build -in slope - 0.6% Unit Depth - 5.6 to 12.4 inches Water absorption rate - not to exceed 1 % Comprehensive strength - 14,500 psi Jet Fuel Resistant 3.00 EXECUTION 02725 - 1 3.01 SITE PREPARATION: Excavate the area for channel placement wide and deep enough to accommodate the standard channel size and a minimum of the thickness of the pavement in which it services and at no time shall it be less the 4" of concrete encasement on both sides as well as underneath the channels. the channel must be evenly aligned with the surface b of the surrounding slab. (Note: The thickness of the concrete encasement must be at least as thick as the slab or pavement in which it services and never less than 4 inches.) 3.02 INSTALLATION: Channel sections are installed from the outlet end of the system mg rf om eithier catch basins orlarge numbers - Channel small numbers. Insert channels from above to allow ends to interlock. Channel sections shall be placed on brick, rebar basket, Channel Chairs or low slump concrete grout slurry, or suspended to obtain correct finished elevation. Cutting will be made if required, by masonry saw. Temporarily place grate in channel to avoid compression during concrete placement. 3.03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: Protect grates and channel interior during pouring of concrete. Place concrete in a manner -that will not dislodge the channels. Concrete shall be at finished level or 1 /B" above the top of the channel to ensure efficient drainage and adequate channel edge protection. 3.04 FINISHING AND CLEAN-UP: A. Following final set of concrete, remove grate protection, place grates in final positions and engage locking bolts in correct locations. B. Install trench drain system in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and shop drawings. END OF SECTION 002725 02725 - 2 LANDSCAPE SPECIFICATIONS section 02800 PART 1: GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.01 SCOPE: A. The landscape contract includes the supplying and planting of all trees, shrubs, vines, and ground cover together with all necessary labor, equipment, tools and materials needed for the successful completion, execution and maintenance of the landscape plans. 1.02 AGENCY STANDARDS: A. Grades and standards of plant materials to be used shall be true to name, size, condition and graded Florida #1 or better as stated in: Grades and Standards of Florida Plant Materials published by the State of Florida Department of Agriculture, Tallahassee, Florida. 1.03 SITE EXAMINATION: A. The Landscape Contractor shall personally examine the site and fully acquaint him/herself with all of the existing conditions in order that no mis-understanding may afterwards arise as to the character or extent of the work to be performed, and additionally, in order to acquaint him/herself with all precautions to be taken in order to avoid injury to property or persons. No additional compensation will be granted because of any unusual difficulties which may be encountered in the execution or maintenance of any portion of the work. 1.04 ERRORS AND OMISSIONS: A. The plant list is a part of the drawings and is furnished as a convenience. The plant list indicates the name, size and quantities of specific plant materials as called for and is located on the drawings. The Landscape Contractor is responsible for his/her own quantity count, and any discrepancy between drawings and plant list shall be considered as correct on the drawings. B. The Landscape Contractor shall not take advantage of errors or omissions in the specifications or contract drawings. Full instruction will be given if such errors are discovered. Upon the discovery of any discrepancies in, or omissions from the drawings or documents, or should the Landscape Contractor be in doubt as to their meaning, the Landscape Architect shall be notified and will determine the actions necessary to each query. C. If plans and specifications are found to disagree after the contract is awarded, the Landscape Architect shall be the judge as to which was intended. 1.05 EXECUTION OF THE WORK: A. The Landscape Contractor shall have his labor crews controlled and directed by a Foreman well versed in plant materials, planting methods, reading blueprints, and coordination between job and nursery in order to execute installation correctly and B. The Landscape Contractor shall provide a competent English-speaking Superintendent on the project at all times, who shall be fully authorized as the Contractors agent on the work. The Superintendent shall be capable of reading and thoroughly understanding the Plans, Specifications and other Contract Documents. If the Superintendent is deemed incompetent by the Landscape Architect, he (the superintendent) shall be immediately replaced. C. The Landscape Contractor shall be available for any meetings with the Owner and/or Landscape Architect during implementation of the job. Any additional work or changes required as a result of failure to communicate with the Owner or Landscape Architect during ; implementation will be the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor. 1.06 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PROPERTY: A. The Landscape Contractor shall protect all materials and work against injury from any cause and shall provide and maintain all necessary safeguards for the protection of the public. He shall be held responsible for any damage or injury to persons or property which may occur as a result of his fault or negligence in the execution of the work, i.e. damage to underground pipes or cables. 1.07 CHANGES AND EXTRAS: A. The Contractor shall not start work on any changes or "extras" in the project until a written agreement setting forth the adjusted prices has been executed by the Owner and the Contractor. Any work performed on changes or "extras" prior to execution of a written agreement may or may not be compensated for by the Owner at his discretion. 1.08 GUARANTEE: A. The Landscape Contractor shall famish a written guarantee warranting all materials, workmanship and plant materials, except sod, for a period of ONE (1) YEAR from the time of completion and acceptance by the Landscape Architect and Owner. Sod shall be guaranteed to 90 calendar days after acceptance by the Landscape Architect and Owner. All plant material shall be alive and in satisfactory condition and growth for each specific kind of plant at the end of the guarantee period. The guranteeing of plant material shall be construed to mean complete and immediate replacement with plant material of the same variety, type, size, quality and grade as that of the 1 originally specified material. During the guarantee period it shall be the Landscape Contractor's responsibility to immediately replace any dead or unhealthy material as determined by the Landscape Architect. The guarantee will be null and void if plant material is damaged by lightning, hurricane force winds, or any other acts of God, as well as vandalism or lack of proper maintenance. B. At the end of the specified guarantee period, any plant required under this contract that is dead or not in satisfactory condition, as determined by the Landscape Architect, shall be replaced. The Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for the full replacement cost of plant materials for the first replacement and share subsequent replacement (s) costs equally with the Owner, should the replacement plant fail to survive. i t J C. All replacements shall be plants of the same kind and size as specified in the plant list. They shall be furnished and planted as specified. Ya 1.09 CARE AND MAINTENANCE: A. The Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for the care and maintenance of all plant materials until final acceptance by the Owner or Landscape Architect. _i A. Upon final acceptance of the work, the Landscape Contractor shall fuunish the Owner with a written and detailed description for the care and maintenance of all plant material at the time of final acceptance. B. The Owner agrees to execute the instructions for such care and maintenance. 1.10 SAFETY: A. It shall be the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to protect all persons from injury and to avoid property damage. Adequate warning devices shall be placed and maintained during the progress of the work. B. It shall be the contractors responsibility to conform to all local, state, and federal safety laws and codes including the Federal Occupational Safety And Health Act (O.S.H.A.) . 1.11 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATION: A. The Owner may require the apparent contractor (s) to qualify him/herself to be a responsible entity by furnishing any or all of the following documentary data: 1. A financial statement showing assets and liabilities of the company current to date. 2. A listing of not less than (3) completed projects of similar scope and nature. 3. Permanent name and address of place of business. 4. The number of regular employees of the organization and length of time the organization has been in business under the present name. 1.12 INSURANCE AND BONDING: A. The contractor (s) shall submit proof of insurance for this job for the time period that the work is done. The minimum amount of insurance shall be $300,000.00 per person and $300,000.00 per aggregate. The successful bidder shall be required to have this coverage in effect before beginning work on the site. B. The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. 1.13 PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES: A. All contractors shall secure and pay for all permits and certificates required for his/her class of work. PART 2: MATERIALS 2.01 PLANT MATERIALS: A. A complete list of plants is shown on the drawings, including a schedule of -- quantities, sizes, and such other requirements deemed necessary.. In the event discrepancies -occur, the specifications on the drawings shall govern. B. Substitutions: Substitutions of plant materials or changes in size or spacing of materials will be permitted ONLY upon written authorization by the Owner or the Landscape Architect. If plant material is not of sufficient size to meet applicable codes, a letter of variance from the appropriate agency must be obtained by the Contractor prior to issuance of any change order. If material of smaller size is to be accepted, the quantity of material shall be increased, at no additional cost to the Owner, to meet the intent of the drawings. C. All plant materials shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and shall be healthy, vigorous and equal to or exceed the measurements specified in the plant list, which are the minimum acceptable sizes. Plants shall be measured before pruning with branches in normal position. Any necessary pruning shall be done at the time of planting. D. All plant materials shall be nursery grown, unless otherwise noted, Florida #1 or better and shall comply with all required inspections, grading standards and plant regulations as set forth by the Florida Department of Agriculture's Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants. Part I revised edition 1973, and Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part II for Palms and Trees, revised edition 1972. E. Plants that do not have the normal balance of height and spread typical for the respective plant shall not be acceptable. F. The Landscape Contractor shall install each plant to display its best side. Adjustments may be required if plants are not installed properly and/or approved by the Landscape Architect. 2.02 INSPECTION A. The Landscape Architect and Owner may inspect trees and shrubs at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. The Landscape Architect and Owner retain the right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Rejected plant materials shall be immediately removed from project site. 2.03 PROTECTION OF PLANT MATERIALS: A. Balled and burlapped plants (B & B) shall be dug with firm natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap similar materials and bound with cord, rope, or wire mesh. All collected plants shall be balled and burlapped. B. Plants with broken, damaged or insufficient balls will be rejected. 4 C. All plant material shall be protected from possible bark injury or breakage of branches. All plants transported by open trucks shall be adequately covered to prevent windburn, drying or damage to plants. r D. Plants which cannot be planted immediately on delivery to the site shall be covered with moist + soil, mulch or other protection from the drying of wind and sun. All plants shall be watered as necessary by the Landscape Contractor until planted. -, 2.04 STORAGE: A. All plant materials shall be stored on the site in designated areas, specified by the Landscape Architect or Owner's agent. B. No plant material shall be stored longer than seventy-two (72) hours. C. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject any plant materials not in conformance with these specifications. D. All rejected material shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no cost to the Owner. 2.05 PROTECTION DURING PLANTING: A. Trees moved by winch or crane shall be thoroughly protected from chain marks, girdling or bark slippage by means of burlap, wood battens or other approved methods. Battens shall NOT be attached to the tree with nails. 2.06 PLANTING SOIL: A. Planting soil for all plantings shall consist of existing native soil and shall be free of debris, roots, clay, stones, plants or other foreign materials which might be a hindrance to planting operations or be detrimental to good growth. 2.07 FERTILIZER: A. Commercial fertilizer shall comply with the state fertilizer laws. Nitrogen shall not be less than 40% from organic source. Inorganic chemical nitrogen shall not be derived from the sodium form of nitrate. Fertilizers shall be delivered to the site in unopened original containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Any fertilizer that becomes caked or otherwise damaged shall be rejected. B. To each cubic yard of planting soil (existing native soil) shall be added and thoroughly mixed 3 lbs. of commercial fertilizer. C. Tabletized fertilizer shall be Agriform planting tablets 20-10-5 formula, 21 gram or equal. All trees and shrubs shall be fertilized with tabletized fertilizer as follows. While backfilling plant holes, fertilizer tablets shall be equally spaced and placed adjacent to the ball mid -way in depth in accordance with the following rates: I gallon container 1 tablet 3 gallon container 2 tablets 5 gallon container 3 tablets —' 7 gallon 5 tablets - Large tubs, wire baskets, grow bags, and balled and burlapped material shall have 1 tablet for each 1/2 inch of trunk diameter (measured 3 feet from ground) or for each foot of height or spread of larger shrub material. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect and review the application of fertilizer. 2.08 MULCH: A. Mulch material shall be clean, dry Eucalyptus or Melaeluca Mulch free of weeds, seeds and pests, moistened at the time of application to prevent wind displacement. B. All trees and shrub beds shall receive 3" mulch immediately after planting and thoroughly watered. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 DIGGING: A. The Landscape Contractor shall exercise care in digging and other work so as not to damage existing work, including overhead wires, underground pipes and cables and the pipes and hydrants of watering systems. Should such overhead or underground obstructions be encountered which interfere with planting, the Owner shall be consulted and will adjust the location of plants to clear such obstruction. The Contractor shall be responsible for the immediate repair of any damage caused by his work. 3.02 GRADING: A. Grading for drainage, swales, etc. to within 4 inches of the finished grade to be provided by others. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to provide the final grading during the course of landscape installation so as to bring sod and planting areas to their proper elevations in relation to walks, paving, drain structures, and other site conditions. The site grading plan must be checked prior to installation of sod to insure that drainage and other conditions will NOT be modified. 3.03 PLANTING: A. Planting shall take place during favorable weather conditions. B. The Contractor shall ascertain the location of all utilities and easements so proper precautions can be taken not to damage or encroach them. C. Planting shall be located where it is shown on the plan. No planting holes shall be dug until the proposed locations have been staked on the ground by the Contractor. D. Excavation of holes shall extend to the required subgrades as specified on the planting diagrams located in the planting plans. Plant pits shall be circular in outline and shall have a profile which conforms to the aforementioned "Tree and Shrub Planting Diagrams". NJ E. A representative number of planting pits ( a minimum of one in every 25 feet throughout the entire site) shall be tested for proper drainage. See Landscape Plan for complete testing methods and requirements. F. Planting pits shall be excavated to the following dimensions and refilled with a mixture of planting soil [half (1/2) muck, half (1/2) existing native soil]; 1 Gallon material (I gal.): 12" x 12" x 12" min. 3 Gallon material (3 gal.): 20" x 20" x 18" min. Lerio material (7 gal.): 30" x 30" x 24" min. - Field grown material and trees: 1-1/2 times width of ball and depth of ball plus 12" min. G. No planting or laying of sod shall be initiated until the area has been cleaned of existing sod or other plant materials, rough grass, weeds, debris, stones etc. and the ground has been brought to an even grade, approved by the Landscape Architect. H. Each plant shall be planted in an individual hole as specified for trees, shrubs, and vines. All plants shall be set to ultimate finished grade. No filling will be permitted around trunks or stems. All ropes, wire, stakes, etc., shall be removed from sides and top of the ball and removed from hole before filling in. All flagging ribbon shall be removed from trees and shrubs before planting. K. Excess excavation (fill) from all holes shall be removed from the site, at no additional expense to Owner. L. All palms shall be planted in sand, thoroughly washed in during planting operations and with a shallow saucer depression left at the soil line for future waterings. Saucer areas shall be top - dressed two (2") inches deep with topsoil raked and left in a neat, clean manner. 3.04 PRUNING: A. Remove dead and broken branches from all plant material. Prune to retain typical growth habit of individual plants with as much height and spread as possible in a manner which will preserve the plant's natural character. B. Make all cuts with sharp instruments flush with trunk or adjacent branch, in such a manner as to insure elimination of stubs. Cuts made at right angles to line of growth will not be permitted. C. Trees shall not be poled or topped. D. Remove all trimmings from site. E. Paint all cuts one-half (1/2") in diameter and larger, with waterproof antiseptic tree paint. 3.05 GUYING: A. All trees over six (6) feet in height shall, immediately after setting to proper grade, be guyed with three sets of two strands, No. 12 gauge malleable galvanized 'iron, in tripod fashion. B. Wires shall not come in direct contact with the tree but shall be covered with rubber hose at contact points. Wires shall be fastened in such a manner as to avoid pulling crotches apart. D. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" lumber of sufficient length to satisfactorily support each tree. E. T-umbuckles-for guying trees shall -be -galvanized or cadmium -plated and shall -be of - adequate size and strength to properly maintain tight guy wires. 3.06 WATER: A. Each plant or tree shall be thoroughly watered in after planting. Watering of all newly installed plant materials shall be the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor until final acceptance by the Landscape Architect. B. All trees shall be deep watered for a period of ninety (90) days after planting. C. Water shall be potable and furnished by Owner. 3.07 SOD: A. The Landscape Contractor shall submit a unit price per cubic yard for the supply and distribution of planting soil (muck) to be applied at a depth of one inch (1 "), to all areas receiving sod. B. The Landscape Contractor shall sod all areas indicated on the drawings. C. It shall be the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to fine grade all landscape areas, eliminating all bumps, depressions, sticks, stones, and other debris. D. The sod shall be firm, tough texture, having a compacted growth of grass with good root development. It shall contain no noxious weeds, or any other objectionable vegetation, fungus, insects, or disease. The soil embedded in the sod shall be good clean earth, free from stones and debris. E. Before being cut and lifted, the sod shall have been mowed at least three times with a lawn mower, with the final mowing not more than seven days before the sod is cut. The sod shall be carefully cut into uniform dimensions. 6-6-6 fertilizer with all trace elements is to be applied at the rate of 40 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft. prior to laying sod. G. Solid sod shall be laid with closely abutting joints with a tamped or rolled, even surface. H. The finished level of all sod areas after settlement shall be one (1") inch below the top of abutting curbs, walks, paving and wood borders to allow for building turf. I. If in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean yellow sand will be evenly applied over the entire surface and thoroughly washed in. 3.08 SEEDING: A. The Landscape Contractor shall remove all vegetation and rocks larger than (1 ") in diameter from areas to be seeded, scarify the area, then apply fertilizer at a rate of 500 lbs. per acre. B. Application: Argentine Bahia Grass seed - 200 Pounds per acre mixed with common hulled Bermuda seed - 30 lbs. per acre. All other seed mixtures shall be applied per the manufacturers instructions. C. Roll immediately after seeding with a minimum 500 pound roller, then apply straw mulch at the rate of 2,500 pounds per acre. D. Apply fertilizer at the rate of 150 lbs. per acre 45-60 days after seeding. 3.09 CLEANING UP: A. The contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish caused by his employees or work. He shall leave all paved areas "broom clean" when completed with his work. 3.10 MAINTENANCE: A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is installed and shall continue until all planting has been accepted by the Owner or Landscape Architect. Maintenance shall include watering, weeding, removal of dead materials, resetting plants to proper grades or upright positions, spraying, restoration of planting saucer and/or any other necessary operations. B. - Proper protection to lawn areas shall be provided and any damage resulting from planting operations shall be repaired promptly. C. Replacement of plants during the maintenance period shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, excluding vandalism or damage on the part of others, lighting, or hurricane force winds, until final acceptance. D. In the event that weeds or other undesirable vegetation become prevalent, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove them. E. Trees or other plant material which fall or are blown over during the maintenance period will be reset by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner, the only exception being hurricane force winds. 3.11 COMPLETION INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE: A. Completion of the work shall mean the full and exact compliance and conformity with the provisions expressed or implied in the Drawings and in the Specifications, including the complete removal of all trash, debris, soil or other waste created by the Landscape Contractor. B. Inspection of work to determine completion of contract, exclusive of the possible replacement of plants, will be made by the Owner and/or Landscape Architect at the conclusion of all planting and at the request of the Landscape Contractor. C. All plant material shall be alive and in good growing condition for each specified kind of plant at the time of acceptance. The rating of each plant according to Florida Grades and Standards shall I be equal to or better than that called for on the plans and in these Specifications at the time of final inspection and acceptance. D. After inspection, the Landscape Contractor will be notified by the Owner of the acceptance of all plant material and workmanship, exclusive of the possible replacement of plants subject to guarantee. - - - -- — - END OF SECTION 10 1 SPECIFICATIONS FOR r IRRIGATION CONSTRUCTION section 02810 GENERAL A.The general conditions, supplementary conditions and special conditions apply to the work in this section. 1.01 DESCRIPTION A.Scope of Work: Provide all labor, materials, transportation and services necessary to furnish and a install irrigation systems as shown on the drawings and described herein. B.Contractor shall submit job schedule for all areas of the work. Coordinate with Owner's dates of occupancy. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE & REQUIREMENTS A.Permits and Fees: The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any and all permits and all inspections as required. i B.Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications. C.Ordinances and Regulation: All local, municipal and state laws, and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations or requirements out of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and drawings shall take precedence. D.Superintendent: 1.A Superintendent satisfactory to the Owner's Representative shall be provided. 2.The Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Owner's Representative. _ 3. The Superintendent shall be authorized to represent the Contractor. E.Explanation of Drawings: 1.Due to the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work furnishing such fittings, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be performed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting and architectural features. 2.The term Landscape Architect as used herein shall refer to the Owner's authorized representative. 3.The work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. 4.The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences and discrepancies in the area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative. In the event this notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary. 5.Work of this Section which is allied with the work of other trades shall be coordinated as necessary. F.Underwriters Laboratories: Electrical wiring, controls, motors, and devices shall be U.L. listed and so labeled. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Materials List: 1.The Contractor shall furnish the articles, equipment, materials or processes specified by name in the drawings and specifications. No substitution will be allowed without prior written acceptance by the Landscape Architect. 2.Complete material list shall be submitted prior to performing any work. Material list shall include the manufacturer, model number and description of all materials and equipment to be used. 3.Equipment or materials installed or furnished without prior approval of the Landscape Architect may be rejected and the Contractor required to remove such materials from the site at his own expense. 4.Approval of any item, alternate or substitute indicates only that the product or products apparently meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications on the basis of the information submitted. 5.Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability under the guaranties. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee. 6.If equipment is as specified, no manufacturer descriptive catalogs are necessary in submittal. B. Record and As -Built Drawings: 1.The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date and complete "as -built" record set of blueline ozalid prints which Saalln95 be corrected daily and show every change from the... an specifications and the exact "as -built' locations, sizes and kinds of equipment. Prints for these purposes may be obtained from the Landscape Architect for a fee. This set of drawings shall be kept on the site and shall be used only as a record set. 2.These drawings shall also serve as work progress sheets and shall be the basis for measurement and payment for work completed. These drawings shall be available at all times for reviews and shall be kept in a location designated by the Landscape Architect. Should the record blueline as -built progress sheets not be available for review or not up to date at the time of any- site reviews-will-be-assumed-no_.work has_been_completed-and _ the Contractor will be assessed the cost of that sitat the current billing rate of the Landscape Architect. No other on site reviews shall take place prior to payment of that assessment. 3.The Contractor shall make neat and legible notations on the as -built progress sheets daily as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually installed. For example, should a piece of equipment be installed in a location that does not match the plan, the Contractor must indicate that equipment has been relocated in a graphic manner so as to match the original symbols as indicated in the irrigation legend. The relocated equipment and dimensions will then be transferred to the original as -built plan at the proper time. 4.13efore the date of provisional acceptance, the Contractor shall similar mylar material procured from the Landscape Architect work shall be in waterproof India ink and applied to the mylar by a technical pen made expressly for use on mylar material. Such pen shall be similar to those manufactured by Rapidiograph, Kueffel & Esser, Rotring or Faber Castell. The dimensions shall be made so as to be easily readable even on the final controller chart (see Section 1.03-C). The original mylar "as -built" plan shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect for approval prior to the making of controller chart. 5.The Contractor shall dimension from two permanent points of reference, building corners, sidewalk, or road intersections, lines (dimension max. 100' along routing). a.Sprinkler control valves. b.Routing of control wiring. c.Quick coupling valves. d.Other related equipment as directed by the Landscape Architect. 6.On or before the date of work review for provisional acceptance, the Contractor shall deliver the corrected and completed sepias to the Landscape Architect. Delivery of the _ sepias will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing required information that may be omitted from the prints. C.Controller Charts: i 1.The chart shall show the area controlled by the automatic controller and shall be the maximum size which the controller door will allow. (size as directed by Landscape Architect) 2.The chart is to be a reduced drawing of the actual as - built system, of a maximum size that will fit inside controller housing, double sided if required for readability. . 3.The chart shall be blackline print and a different color shall be used to indicate the area of coverage for each station, using pastel or transparent colors. 4.When COMPLETED AND APPROVED, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils. 5.These charts shall be completed and approved prior to final acceptance of the irrigation system. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: . 1.Prepare and deliver to the Landscape Architect within 10 calendar days prior to completion of construction, two hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: a. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, list of equipment with name -F and addresses of local manufacturer's representative. b. Catalog and part sheets on every material and equipment installed under this contract. c. Guarantee statement. d. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major equipment. 2—In-addition-to-theabove-mentioned-nanuals,_provide the Owner's maintenance personnel with. instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Landscape Architect at the provisional acceptance inspection that this service has been rendered. E. Equipment to be Furnished 1. Supply as part of this contract the following tools: a. One quick -coupler key and matching hose swivel and globe valve for every five, or fraction thereof, valves installed. 2.The above mentioned equipment shall be turned over to the owner at the conclusion of the project. Before final acceptance can occur, evidence that the Owner has received material must be shown to the Landscape Architect. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Handling of PVC Pipe and Fittings: The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing of PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle which allows the length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Any section of pipe that has been dented or damaged will be discarded and, if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS AM the Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications, he may do so by providing the following information to the Landscape Architect for approval. 1.Provide a statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. Use a separate sheet of paper for each item to -be substituted. 2.Provide descriptive catalog literature, performance charts and flow charts for each item to be substituted. 3.Provide the amount of cost savings if the substituted item is approved. 4.Approval of any item as substitution or alternate is for design only, based on information or samples provided by the Contractor. 5.Contractor shall be responsible for the total performance of such substitution to equal or surpass the original in every respect. 6.If the substitution proves to be unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, Contractor shall remove such work and replace it with originally specified item (including installation) as part of the work of this section. B. The Landscape Architect shall have the sole responsibility for accepting or rejecting any substituted item as an approved equal to equipment and material listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. The guarantee for the sprinkler irrigation system shall be made in accordance with the following form. The general conditions and supplementary conditions of these specifications shall- be filed with the Owner or his representative prior to acceptance of the irrigation system. B.A copy of the guarantee form shall be included in the operations and maintenance manual. C.The guarantee form shall be retyped onto the Contractor's letterhead and contain the following information: GUARANTEE FOR SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM We hereby guarantee that the sprinkler irrigation system we-have-famished-andanstalled-is-freeirom-defects_in_materials_and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted. We agree to repair or replace any defects in material or workmanship which may develop during the period of one year from the date of acceptance and also to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the Owner. We shall make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time, as determined by the Owner, after receipt of written notice. In the event of our failure to make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice from the Owner, we authorize the Owner to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. PROJECT: CONTRACTOR: PHONE NO.: ADDRESS: t DATE OF ACCEPTANCE: BY: 2. PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.General: Use only new materials of brands and types noted on drawings, specified herein, or approved equals: 2.02 PIPE & FITTINGS A.Pressure Main Line Piping and Fittings: Size 2 1/2 inches or larger shall be PVC class 200 solvent weld type or (as a Contractor option)rubber gasket type, unless otherwise noted on drawing. B.Pressure Main Line Piping and Fittings: Size 2 1/2 inches and smaller shall be Schedule 40 PVC. C.Non-pressure lines: Shall be PVC class 200. D.Low voltage conduit: Shall be PVC class 200. E.AII pipe and fittings shall conform to specific requirements as follows: 1.PVC (Solvent Weld) a.Pipe: Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound in accordance with ASTM D 1784 or ASTM D 2241, cell classification 12454B, hydrostatic design less than 2,000 psi. b.Fittings (solvent weld or thread): Standard weight Schedule 40, side gated, injection molded PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, cell classification 46, including threads when required. 2.PVC nipples shall be Schedule 80 with molded threads. 3.AII PVC pipe must bear the following markings: a.Manufacturees name. b.Nominal pipe size. c.Schedule or class. - -d.Pressure-ratings in-A.S:T. (not required on -drip — tubing). e.NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approval (not required on drip tubing). Mate of extrusion. 4.Solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent -weld pipe and fittings shall be of type and installation method prescribed by the manufacturer. 2.03 ELECTRICAL (HIGH VOLTAGE) A.AII high voltage electrical service required for automatic controller and other equipment noted on the drawing for irrigation system will be provided by others. 2.04 ELECTRICAL (LOW VOLTAGE) A.Connections between controller and remote control valves shall be made with direct burial AWG-UF, 600 volt wire, insulation thickness 3/64 inch, utilizing low density high molecular weight polyethylene insulation. B.Splices, where permitted, shall be waterproof using Rain Bird, Pen-Tite Connectors, or fusible heat shrinking tubing and housed in a box. Boxes for other irrigation use may be utilized for this purpose, except where pull box has been designated on drawing. C.Wire sizing shall be a minimum of #14 "UP' 600 volt underground wiring, unless a shielded cable is used in which case #18 wire may be used. Common wire to be white in color, and all others a different color. 2.06 GATE VALVES A.3 inches and smaller (unless otherwise noted on drawings): ASTM B62 brass body, 150 pound saturated steam rated, with screwed joints, non -rising stem, screwed bonnet, solid disc. Provide with hand wheel. '3 2.07 QUICK COUPLING VALVES A.See Legend 2.08 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A.Valve Type: spring loaded, packless diaphragm activated, normally closed type with plastic body, equipped with flow control, transducer and pressure switch, and pressure regulation capabilities when noted. B.Valve Solenoid: 24 volt a.c. 7.0 watt maximum, 500 milli -amp surge, corrosion -proof, stainless steel construction, epoxy encapsulated to form a single integral unit. C.Provide bleeder valve to permit operation in the field without power at the controller. 2.09. ROTARY SPRINKLER HEADS A.See Legend 2.10 SMALL SHRUBBERY SPRINKLER HEADS A.Sprinkler shall be similar in all respects to type noted on drawing. B.Where noted, pop-up type body shall be used, with height as noted in legend on drawing. 2.11 VALVE BOXES A.Valve boxes shall be fabricated from a durable plastic material resistant to weather, sunlight and chemical action of soils. B.Valve box extensions shall be by the same manufacturer as the valve box. C.Gate valve boxes shall be round plastic boxes with flex lock covers. D-Remotecontrol-valve -boxes -shall-be-rectangular-plastic boxes with hinged covers with flex lock. 3. EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CONDITIONS A.AII scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all sizes dimensions and receive Landscape Architect's approval prior to proceeding with work under this section. B.Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities which are caused by his operations or neglect. Check existing utilities drawings for existing utility locations. C.Coordinate installation of sprinkler irrigation materials including pipe, so there will be NO interference with utilities or other construction or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs and ground covers. D.The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely proceed before. starting work on the sprinkler irrigation system. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Water Supply: 1.Sprinkler irrigation system shall be connected to water supply points of connection as indicated on the drawings. 2.Connections shall be made at approximate locations as shown on the drawings. Contractor is responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions. B.Observation Schedule: 1.Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect in advance for the following observation meetings, a. Pre job conference - 7 days. b.Pressure supply line installation and testing - 48 hours. _ c.Control wire installation - 48 hours. d. Lateral line and sprinkler installation - 48 hours. e.Coverage test and provisional observation for approval - 48 hours. f.Final work observation at conclusion of maintenance period -10 days. 2.When observations have been conducted by other than the Landscape Architect, show evidence in writing of when and by, whom these observations were made. 3.No site observations will commence without as -built drawings. In the event the Contractor calls for a site visit without as - built drawings, without completing previously noted corrections, or without preparing the system for said visit, he shall be responsible for reimbursing the Landscape Architect at his current billing rate per hour, portal to portal (plus transportation costs), for. inconvenience. No further site visits shall be scheduled until this charge has been paid and received. C.Final Observation Prior to Provisional Acceptance: 1.The Contractor shall operate each system in its entirety for the Landscape Architect at time of final observation. Any items deemed not acceptable by the Landscape Architect, or not in compliance with these specifications and drawings, shall be worked to the complete satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. 2.The Contractor shall show evidence to the Landscape Architect that the Owner has received all accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before final observation can occur. D.Physical Layout: 1.All piping or equipment shown diagrammatically on drawings outside planting areas shall be installed inside planting area whenever possible. 2.Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and location of sprinkler heads. 3.All layout shall be approved by Landscape Architect prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.General: 1.All plastic pipe and fittings shall be installed in complete 21ine Clearance: All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 6 inches from each other and from lines of other trades. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another. B.Trenching: 1.Excavate trenches to required depths. Follow approved layout for each system. 2.Trench bottom shall be flat to ensure piping is supported continuously on an even grade. 3.Where lines occurunder paved areas, consider dimension to be below the subgrade. 4.Provide minimum coverage as follows: a.Pressure supply lines (2 1/2 inches and smaller): 18 inches. b.Non-pressure lines: 12 inches. c.Control wire: 18 inches. C.Backfilling: 1.Buried pipe in trenches shall be center loaded only until all required tests are performed. Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials _approved for _backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other materials, free from large clods of earth or stones. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted in landscaped areas to a dry density equal to adjacent grades without dips, sunken or other surface irregularities. 2.A fine granular material backfill will be initially placed on all lines. No foreign matter larger than 1/2 inch in size will be permitted. 3.Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of the Landscape Architect. 4.If settlement occurs and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves; sprinkler heads, lawn or plantings, or other construction are necessary, the Contractor shall make all required adjustments without cost to the Owner. D.Trenching and Backfill Under Paving: 1.Trenches located under areas where paving, asphaltic concrete or concrete will be installed shall be backfilled with sand (a layer 6 inches below the pipe and 3 inches above the pipe), and compacted in layers to 95% compaction using manual or devices. Trenches for piping shall be compacted to equal the compaction of the existing adjacent undisturbed soil and shall be left in a firm unyielding condition. Trenches shall be left flush with the adjoining grade. The Contractor shall set in place, cap and pressure test all piping under paving prior to the paving work. 2.Piping under existing walks is generally done by jacking, boring or hydraulic driving. Any cutting or breaking of sidewalks and/or concrete necessary shall be performed by the Contractor and paving replaced as a part of the contract cost. Per mission to cut or break sidewalks and/or concrete shall be obtained from the Landscape Architect. No hydraulic driving will be permitted under asphaltic concrete paving. 3.Coordinate installation of piping and wires under paved E.Assemblies: 1.Routing of sprinkler irrigation lines as indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic. Install lines (and various assemblies) in such a manner as to con form with the details per plans. 2.lnstall no multiple assemblies in plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. 3.Install all assemblies specified herein in accordance with respective detail. In absence of detail drawings or specification pertaining to specific items required to complete work, perform such work in accordance with best standard practice, with prior approval from Landscape Architect. 4.PVC pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust and moisture before installation. - Installation and solvent welding methods shall be as recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer. 5.On PVC to metal connections, the Contractor shall work the metal connections first. Teflon tape or approved equal shall be used on all threaded PVC to PVC, and on all threaded PVC. Light wrench pressure is all that is required, threaded PVC adapters into which the pipe may be welded. 6. Quick coupling valves: Unless otherwise indicated, locate valves within 12 inches of. hardscape. 7.Controllers: Verify exact location with the Owner's Representative. F.Electrical Supply: 11ow voltage wiring shall be placed in the same 'ditch and along side of main lines unless otherwise approved. i 2.When more than one wire is placed in a trench, tape wires together at maximum 12 feet on center. 3.Provide a 12 inch expansion loop at each connection and directional change. 4.Use a continuous wire between controller and remote control valves. Except as otherwise approved, do not splice wire at any point. All approved splices shall be enclosed in a acceptable box. 5.Each controller shall be provided with separate ground wire. G.Flushing of System: 1.After all new sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, all necessary diversion work has been completed and prior to installation of sprinkler heads, the control valves and full head of water to flush out the system. 2.Sprinkler heads shall be installed only after flushing of the system has been accomplished to the complete satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. H.Sprinkler Heads: 1.Install the sprinkler heads as designated on the drawings and in accordance with their respective detail. 2.Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on,the drawings. 3.Fill area under box with a minimum of 3 cubic feet of pea gravel before box is installed. 4.Identification tags shall be attached to each remote control valve, showing number that corresponds with controller sequence. Tags shall be manufactured of polyurethane Behr color with black letter 2 3/4 inches by 2 114 inches. 5.AII boxes shall be permanently marked - on top, designating type of equipment installed therein stenciled in 2" high black letters/numbers using AVERO Black No. 206M paint or approved equal. 3.04 TEMPORARY REPAIRS A.The Owner reserves the right to make temporary repairs as necessary to keep the sprinkler system equipment in operating condition. The exercise of this right by the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the terms of the guarantee as herein specified. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Adjustment of the System: 1.The Contractor shall adjust all sprinkler heads and valves for optimum performance and to prevent as much as possible any overspray onto walks and roadways. No spray is permitted on buildings. 2.If it is determined that adjustments in the irrigation equipment will provide proper and more adequate coverage, the Contractor shall make such adjustments prior to planting. may include changes in nozzle sizes or degrees of arc, as required. 3.AII sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finished grades unless otherwise designated on the plans and at height and distance from walks, buildings; etc. as noted. B.Testing of Irrigation System: 1.Test all pressure lines under hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi, and prove watertight. 2.Testing of pressure main lines shall occur prior to installation of electric control valves, quick couplers or any other equipment that might prevent a proper test from being performed. 3.AII piping under paved areas shall be tested under hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi, and proved watertight, prior to paving in planting area at static pressure. 4.Sustain pressure in lines for not less than 2 hours. If leaks develop, replace joints and repeat test until entire system is proven watertight. - 5.AII hydrostatic tests shall be made only in the presence of the Landscape Architect, or other duly authorized representative of the Owner. No pipe shall be completely backfilled until it _inspected, tested and approved in writing. 6.Furnish necessary force pump and all other test equipment. 7.When the sprinkler irrigation system is completed, perform a coverage test in the presence of the Landscape Architect, to determine if the water coverage for planting areas is complete and adequate. Furnish all materials and perform all work o correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from plans, or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the drawings when it is obviously adequate, without bringing this. to the attention of the Landscape Architect. This test shall be accomplished before any ground cover is planted. 8.Upon completion of each phase of work, entire system shall be tested and adjusted to meet site requirements. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A.The entire sprinkler irrigation system shall be under full automatic operation for a period of seven days prior to any planting. B.The Landscape Architect reserves the right to waive or shorten the operation period. 3.07 CLEANUP A.Cleanup shall be performed as each portion of the work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be broomed or washed down, and any damage sustained to the work of others shall be repaired and work returned to its original condition. 3.08 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor shall be required to train Owner's maintenance personnel in proper operation of all major equipment. Provide written evidence of the person or persons so trained to the Landscape Architect. END OF SECTION 02801 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Reinforcement 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03370 Concrete Curing I DIVISION 3 SECTION 03100 —�, CONCRETE FORMWORK CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.00 SCOPE: Supply and install all formwork for all cast -in -place concrete as shown on the drawing and as specified herein. v 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit shop drawings showing location and layout of construction joints, form joints, locations of tie holes or d plugs, and procedure for pouring into formwork. B. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's data and installation instructions for form coatings. Manufactured form systems, ties and accessories. 1.03 COORDINATION: 7 A. Secure all pipe sleeves, conduit, anchors, bolts, clips, and other materials in connection with concrete - construction, in position before concrete is placed. j B. Contractor shall notify other trades and suppliers as to the dates when forms or slabs are ready to receive items 1 furnished by them so that proper coordination and embedment can take place without delay of progress on the job. C. Make cutting and/or patching made necessary by failure or delay in complying with these requirements at no cost to Owner. 1.04 STANDARDS: A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, design, construct, erect, maintain and remove forms and related structures for cast -in -place concrete work in compliance with the American Concrete Institute standard ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". B. The form installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which concrete formwork is to be performed, and notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 2.00 MATERIALS: 2.01 EXPOSED SURFACE FORMS A. Forms for flat exposed surfaces shall be 5-ply Exterior B-B (Concrete Form) panels conforming to the requirements of U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standard PS 1-66. Panels with raised or separate face veneers shall not be used for exposed concrete. B. Plywood panels shall have a smooth surface treatment to prevent any development of bond or adhesion to concrete and to seal plywood surfaces against moisture. Burke Form Sealer, manufactured by the W.J. Burke �1 Company, shall be used and shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's direction. C. Miscellaneous forming blockouts, reveals, and bulkhead shall be of douglas Fir -Larch, number two grade, seasoned, surfaced four sides. 2.02 FORM ACCESSORIES: A. Snap ties in foundation walls shall be metal, no wood spreaders will be permitted. l -"' B. Nails, bolts, screws, anchors, etc., as shown or needed shall be furnished and set. C. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings. i 03100 - 1 3.00 EXECUTION: 3.01 FORMWORK: A. Provide complete forms of such strength and construction as to prevent any spread, shifting, or settling when concrete is deposited, and tight enough to avoid any leakage or washing out of cement mortar. B. Construct forms to slopes, lines and dimensions shown, plumb, straight and sufficiently tight to prevent - --leakage securely-brace-and-shore-forms_to_prevent-displacement-and-to.safely_support_construction_Loads. . Provide access openings for cleaning and inspecting forms and reinforcing -prior to depositing concrete. Do not coat forms with material that will stain or cause injury to exposed concrete surfaces. Keep wood forms wet as necessary to prevent shrinkage. C. Form ties used for exposed concrete surfaces shall be of type approved -by Architect.. They shall have a minimum working strength when fully assembled of at least 3000 lbs. Ties shall be so adjustable as to permit complete tightening of forms and of such type as to leave no metal closer than 1 1 /2 inches to the surface. D. Plywood forms shall be treated with an approved form oil or lacquer. If oil is used, all excess oil shall be wiped off with rags to leave the surface of the forms just oily to the touch. Oil shall be used where surfaces are to be exposed. E. Remove all dirt, chips, sawdust, rubbish, water, etc. from forms by water hosing and air pressure before any concrete is deposited. Leave no wooden ties or blocking in concrete except where indicated for attachment of other work. Leave lowest board of forms along walls loose or provide cleanout pockets. At any columns and pilasters, provide holes in forms at bottom for cleaning purposes. Leave openings for the introduction of vibrators wherever necessary. Where required on account of excessive drop, or required by Architect, provide elephant trunks or side openings to receive concrete. F. Architect will cooperate with Contractor in the matter of removing forms and shoring as early as possible. The length of time forms must remain in place depends on the rate of time required for concrete to obtain a proper strength and on construction loads that will be placed on concrete. Forms shall not be removed until authorized by Architect. G. Forms for walls, columns, pilasters and the like shall not be removed or disturbed for at least 7 days from date of last pouring unless approved by Architect. END OF SECTION 03100 03100 - 2+ i DIVISION 3 SECTION 03200 v� REINFORCEMEN' CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE: I ! h Supply and install all reinforcing steel for concrete work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS: t,Submit shop drawings showing bending and placing of all reinforcing. 1.03 STORAGE: Store reinforcement to avoid excessive rusting or coating with grease, oil, dirt, or other objectionable materials. 1.04 STANDARDS: Comply with requirements set forth in the "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", published by the American Concrete Institute. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete i Formwork". 1.05 OBSERVATION: Reinforcing steel shall be observed after it is placed within the forms by the Architect and major concrete pours shall not be made until acceptance of the placement of said reinforcing steel. Sufficient notice, minimum four (4) days, shall be given by the Contractor prior to major concrete pours to allow the inspection of forms and steel. 2.00 MATERIALS: 2.01 REINFORCEMENT: A. Reinforcing Bars shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615 Grade 60. Yield Stress = 60,000 psi. All bars, except No. 2 size (1/4 inch) shall be deformed as per ASTM A305, Intermediate Grade, except to meet bend and elongation tests for structural grade. 4 ,{ B. Welded wire fabric shall conform to requirements of ASTM A185-70 using bright steel wire meeting ASTM A82. Gauges and dimensions shall be as noted on the Drawings. C. All steel for reinforcement shall be new, unrusted stock, free from mill scale and delivered without rust other than may have accumulated in prompt transportation to the Work. D. Chairs shall be standard Class B chairs as specified in the "Manual of Standard Practice" of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. E. Tie wire shall be No. 16 American Wire Gauge or heavier, black annealed. F. Supports for reinforcing bars in slabs shall be metal, or concrete, of sufficient strength to adequately support the bars, and shall be of a type approved by the Architect. Supports or spacers for bars in walls shall be such that exterior face of wall will not be marred when forms are stripped and final finish has been completed. G. Dowels from footings to walls shall be same size and spacing as wall reinforcement, unless otherwise shown, and shall project thirty (30) bar diameters into wall and thirty (30) bar diameters into footing unless detailed or noted otherwise. 11 H. Fiber reinforcing for slabs shall be collated fibrillated polypropylene (CFP) fibers. A minimum of 1.6 pounds per cubic yard shall be used. Each fiber bundle must be twisted. The minimum fiber bundle length shall be 2 1 /4". a ii 03200 - 1 3.00 EXECUTION: 3.01 PLACEMENT: A. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and securely tied at intersections with 16-gauge black annealed wire. It shall be maintained in proper position by chairs, bar supports, or other approved devices. Bars in footings shall be supported on precast concrete blocks. B. Bars shall lap 30 diameters at slices, except as otherwise indicated. Splices in adjoining horizontal bars shall -- - - - --be-staggered-at-least-six-(6)-feet.- -Where-this-is-not-.feasible,-submit-suggestions-for--the Architect's - consideration. Horizontal bars shall be hooked around corners not less than 24 diameters with a minimum of 12 inches as per details. C. Concrete protection of reinforcing shall not be less than the following: .1 3 inches where concrete is poured against ground. .2 2 inches where concrete is poured against forms but may be in contact with ground. .3 1 1 /2 inches minimum in exterior face of exterior walls (exposed to weather but not in contact with ground). .4 3/4 inch minimum in interior walls and interior face of exterior walls. D. Clear distance between bars shall be not less than 1 1/2 bar diameters, nor less than 1 1/3 times the maximum size of coarse aggregate. Wherever conduits, piping, inserts, sleeves, etc., interfere with the placing of reinforcing steel as shown or called for, the Contractor must consult with Architect and secure from him the method of procedure before pouring any concrete. The bending or field cutting of bars around openings or sleeves will not be permitted. E. Install welded wire fabric in flat sections as long as practical, lapping at least one mesh. 3.02 CLEAN-UP:. As per GENERAL CONDITIONS. END OF SECTION 03200 03200 - 2 DIVISION 3 SECTION 03300 I � CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: ' p Supply and install all cast -in -place concrete work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS: Comply with all applicable Federal, State and Local Codes, Safety Regulations, Portland Cement Association Standards and any other referred to herein. 1 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement shall meet ASTM C150-60, Type I. B. Sand Aggregate shall be clean hard natural sand, conforming to ASTM C33-59. C. Coarse Aggregate shall be hard durable, or gravel conforming to ASTM C33-61 T. Maximum size aggregate allowed is 3/4" in slabs and 1 1/2" for columns and footings except as otherwise specified. D. Mixing Water shall be potable and free from oil, acid and injurious amounts of organic matter, alkalies and other impurities. 2.02 ACCESSORIES: A. Admixtures shall be air -entrained admixture may be used in exterior concrete, exposed to freezing. Add air entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having -� air content within the following limits: .1 Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing or subjected to hydraulic pressure shall be 5% for max. 1 1/2" to 2" aggregate and 6% for 1" and smaller aggregate other admixtures shall only be used upon approval of Architect and in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. - 2.03 STANDARDS: A. Concrete shall be 3000 psi compressive strength for work below. Exterior flat slab and stair work shall be 4000 psi compressive strength. All architectural concrete work above grade shall be 3000 psi compressive strength as noted on structural drawings. B. For all concrete, proportions of cement, aggregate and water to attain required plasticity and compressive strength shall be in accordance with the American Concrete Institute Building Code, ACI 318-71 and shall meet or exceed the following: r .1 3000 psi Concrete: Minimum weight Cement per cubic yard, 480 lbs. Water/Cement Ratio, 0.58 maximum. Slump, 4" maximum. .2 4000 psi Concrete: Minimum weight Cement per cubic yard, 564 lbs. Water/Cement Ratio, .44 maximum. Slump, 3" maximum. P .3 Do not make changes in proportions without Architect's approval. Maximum slump shall be 4". 2.04 CONCRETE MIXING: A. Except as otherwise specified, concrete shall be ready -mixed and in accordance with requirements of the 03300 - 1 1 American Concrete Institute Building Code 318-71. B. Ready -mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered to the project.in accordance with ASTM Specification C94- 61. C. Produce concrete of required consistency and strength to present appearance satisfactory to Architect. D. Use only one brand of cement unless otherwise authorized by the Architect. 2,05— -MATERIAL-STORAGE* A. Store bagged material off ground and protect against the elements. B. Handle and store fine and coarse aggregates separately and in such a manner as to prevent intrusion of foreign material. C. Do not use re -mixed concrete. D. Do not use hardened cement. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 WEATHER CONDITIONS: A. Concrete when deposited shall have a temperature not below 50 degrees F. and not above 85 degrees F. In freezing weather suitable means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature not lower than 70 degrees F. for three days, or 50 degrees F for five days after placing. The methods of heating the materials and protecting the concrete shall be approved by the Architect. The maximum temperature of concrete produced with heated aggregates, heated water, or both, shall not exceed 90 degrees F. at any time during its production or transportation. B. The methods and recommended practice as described in ACI Standard 604-56 shall be followed for winter concreting and ACI Standard 605-59 shall be followed for hot weather concreting. No useof admixtures of any nature shall be used without the approval of the Architect. 3.02 COORDINATION: Place all pipe sleeves, anchors and bolts, angle frames, inserts, supports, ties, and other materials in connection with concrete construction and secure in position before concrete is placed. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: A. Make and locate generally as indicated on Drawings and so as not to impair the strength of the structure and only at locations approved by Architect. Area within construction joints shall not exceed 625 square feet for slabs and a minimum of every 25'-0" for sidewalks. Form keys in any cold joints. B. Place construction joints at the end of pours and at locations where placement operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour. C. Locate and install construction joints not shown on drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure as acceptable to the architect. D. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs and between walls and footings; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. E. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement, continue all reinforcement across construction joints. F. Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. 3.04 DEPOSITING CONCRETE: A. Preparation: Before placing concrete, all debris, water and ice shall be removed from the places to be occupied by the concrete. Wood forms shall be thoroughly wetted (except in freezing weather) or oiled and the Y 1� 03300 - 2 reinforcements, pipes, sleeves, conduits, hangers, anchors, or other insert shall be observed and approved by the Architect. B. The placing or depositing of all concrete shall be done in accordance with requirements of the American Concrete Institute Building Code 31 B-56 and a modified herein. Concrete shall be rapidly handled from mixer to forms and deposited as neatly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to flowing. Concrete shall be spaded and worked by hand and vibrated to assure close contact with all surfaces of forms and reinforcement and leveled off at proper grade to receive finish. .1 No concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign material shall be deposited in the work, nor shall retempered concrete be used. All concrete shall be placed upon clean, damp surfaces, free from water, and never upon soft mud or dry porous earth. 3.05 FINISHES: A. Trowel Finish: After floating, begin first toweling, using power driven trowel, when the surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface Consolidate concrete surface by hand troweling free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, with a surface place tolerance not exceeding 1 /8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straight edge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. B. Standard rough form finish: For formed surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or by other 1 construction. This is the surface having texture imparted by the form facing material used with defective areas ' repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. C. Standardsmooth finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a coating of material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete. This is the as cast concrete surface as obtained with form facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed. e D. Related unformed surfaces: At top walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent r to the formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown. E. Grout Cleaned Finish: Provide grout cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces which have received smooth form finish treatment. - ' .1 Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and mix with water to consistency of thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trail " patches, so that final color of dry grout will closely match adjacent surfaces. .2 Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after i. rubbing. Related Uniformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent uniformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. ` F. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring materials, and as otherwise indicated. After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10' when a 10' straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surfaces before final set with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. G. Float Finish: Apply float finish to slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and as otherwise indicated. .1 After screening, consolidating and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. 1 Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plant to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. \ 03300 - 3 .2 After floating, being first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when �_ y surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects �' 1 which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. H. Non -Slip broom Finish: Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. -- .1—Immediately after -trowel -finishing, —slightly roughen-concrete-surface-by-brooming-with- fiber -bristle -broom - --�-r- perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.06 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE: ` If any concrete is not formed as indicated and specified, or is not true to intended alignment, or is not true to the intended grades and levels or has voids or honeycombs that have been filled except under the direction of the Architect, or has any sawdust, shaving wood, debris embedded in it; or does not fully conform to the provisions of the contract, then such work shall be deemed to be defective materials and/or workmanship and the Contractor shall remove same from the site at no extra expense to the Owner or repair same as directed by Architect. 3.07 CLEAN-UP As per GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. END OF SECTION 03300 03300 - 4 I\ I� ,- DIVISION 3 SECTION 03370 CONCRETE CURING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: I I Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION: A. Start initial during curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. B. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. 2.00 MATERIALS A. Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture -retaining cover curing, by curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. B. Exterior concrete pavement shall be cured by using pavement sealers (see Section 02521 for specific area to be sealed). 3.00 EXECUTION: 3.01 PROVIDE MOISTURE CURING by following methods: A. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. B. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously set. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 3.01 PROVIDE MOISTURE -COVER CURING as follows: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material andwaterproof tape. 3.02 PROVIDE CURING COMPOUND to slab as follows: A. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall with 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. B. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete liquid floor hardener, water proofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, paint, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise indicated to Architect. 3.03 CURING FORMED SURFACES: Cure formed concrete surfaces including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. . 03370:-•1 i._h 3.04 CURING UNFORMED SURFACES: A. Cure unformed surfaces such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing F f, compound. S. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. (, END OF SECTION 03370 03370 - 2 , DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04210 Unit Masonry Brick Veneer - DIVISION 4 SECTION 04210 UNIT MASONRY BRICK VENEER CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. -� 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: 1 A. The work required under this Section consists of all Unit Masonry work and related items necessary to complete the work, both reinforced and unreinforced, indicated on Drawings and specified herein. B. Materials installed in this section but furnished by others include anchors, ties, bolts, sleeves for all piping and electrical conduits, outlet boxes, etc. shall be installed in this Section, by the plumbing contractor, heating ventilation and cooling contractor, and electrical contractor. 1 1.02 GUARANTEE: According to GENERAL CONDITIONS. J 1.03 MEASUREMENTS: Verify all measurements shown on Drawings by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of all masonry is required. 1.04 COORDINATION: i Coordinate with all other Trades whose work relates to masonry installation for placing of all required blocking, sub - framing, backing, anchors, ties, furring, etc., to insure proper location and installation. 1.05 ALLOWABLE. TOLERANCES: A. Maximum variation from plum of walls and columns: 1/4 inch in 10 feet, within 3/8 inch of correct plumb - - location at any point. B. Maximum variation from level or required elevation for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, or horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: 1/4 inch in any bar or 20 feet and 1 /2 inch in 40 feet. C. Maximum variation in thickness of walls and dimensions of columns: Not more than 1/4 inch smaller or 1/2 inch larger. D. Mortar joints shall not vary more than 1 /8 inch in adjacent courses within 2 feet of each other and not more than 1/8 inch from the specified width. E. Raked mortar joints shall be within 1 /8 inch of the rake depth specified. 1.06 FIELD CONSTRUCTED MOCKUP: ! A. Before installation of masonry work, build sample wall representative of completed masonry work required for the project with respect to qualities of appearance, materials and construction. Locate the mockup on site in locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Retain the mockup during construction as standard for judging completed masonry work. For the following types of masonry, build mockups that are 4`2 approximately 6' long by 4' high by full thickness including backup wythes, if any. When directed, demolish t, mockup and remove from the site. 4 B. Each different exterior face brick wall. I 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. All blocks shall have been thoroughly cured at plant before shipment. �aB. Deliver and store all materials in dry, protected, off ground areas. Replace any damaged material at not cost 04210 - 1 v to Owner. 1.08 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements. B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, samples of each exposed masonry unit and colored masonry mortar, if any. Include in each set of samples the full range of exposed colors and textures to be expected in _completed work.__ 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 FACE BRICK: A. Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. B. Size: Manufacturers' standard units with nominal face dimensions as manufactured within the local region. Match the following sizes as closely as possible with sizes local to the region. Split Face Veneer of standard nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 4" x 4"(15-5/8" x 3-5/8" x 3- 5/8" actual), color to be selected by Architect, see section 09010 to color. Brick Veneer of standard nominal face dimensions of "Oversized" 4" x 3" x10" 0-5/8" x 2-5/8" x 9- 5/8" actual), color to be selected by Architect, see section 09010 to color. C. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. D. Architect's approval for color and texture required. E. For sills, caps and similar applications resulting in exposure of brick surfaces that otherwise would be concealed from view, provide uncored or unfrogged units with all exposed surfaces finished to produce the same texture and colors of standard units. 2.01 MORTAR MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Match color of existing mortar. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1 /4" use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. D. Colored Mortar Aggregates: ASTM C 404, Ground marble, granite or other sound stone, as required to match Architect's sample. E. Colored Mortar Pigments: ASTM C 979, natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with records of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. F. Water: Clean and potable. 2.02 MASONRY ACCESSORIES: A. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10% with matching corners ("L") and intersecting ("T") units. Fabricate from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, into units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to position side rods for full embedment in mortar with mortar coverage of not less than 518" on joint faces exposed to exterior and not less than 1 /2" elsewhere. Provide the following type of joint reinforcing unless otherwise indicated. B. Truss type will diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. B1.Number of Side Rods: Single pair for 1, single wythe masonry and as indicated for multi-wythe masonry, or if not otherwise indicated, one side rod for 04210 - 2 l7 1-� each brick wythe and one side rod for each face shell of each concrete masonry wythe. C. Wire. Sizes: Fabricate with 9-gage side and cross rods, unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Finish: Provide manufacturers' standard mill galvanized finish except as otherwise shown. .1 For exterior walls hot -dip galvanize joint reinforcing after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 C coating (1.5 oz. per sq. ft.). v E. Individual Wire Ties for Masonry: .1 For individual wire ties, fabricate from 3/16" cold -drawn steel wire, ASTM A 82, unless otherwise indicated, of the length required for proper embedment in wythes of masonry. Masonry units laid, cells vertical, provide rectangular shaped ties. Back up joints do not align, provide either offset or adjustable 2-piece ties. For interior walls, fabricate from steel wire with a millgalvanizedfinish. .2 For exterior walls, fabricate from steel wire with 1.5 oz. hot dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153 Class B-2, or fabricate from steel wire with not less than 7-mil copper coating, ASTM B 227, Grade 30 HS. _ 2.03 ANCHORS AND TIES: A. Provide straps, bars, bolts and rods fabricated from not less than 16 ga. sheet metal or 3/8" diameter rod 16, stock, unless otherwise indicated. B. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Corrugated metal ties not less than 22 ga. and ont less than 7/8" wide and 7" long with one end crimped for attachment to substrate. Size to extend to within 3/4" of face of masonry veneer. Install metal ties at 12" O.C. vertically and 24" O.C. horizontally. C. For devices which extend into exterior wythe, fabricate from steel with hot -dip galvanized coating, ASTM A 153, Class B-2. D. Flashing for Masonry: Provide concealed flashing, shown to be built into masonry. y) N E. Provide concealed flashing as follows: Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18. F. Non -Metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Provide pre m olded, compressible, closed cell neoprene material conforming to ASTM D 1056, glass RE 74 and exceeds 50 /o compressibility. _. G. Flashing for Masonry: Provide concealed flashings, shown to be built into masonry as follows: Virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers, formed into uniform flexible sheet not less than 20-mils thick and black in color, unless otherwise indicated. 11 3.00 EXECUTION u 3.01 MORTAR: ,rl A. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti -freeze agents. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. .1 Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth, and where indicated. .2 Use Type S mortar for reinforced masonry and where indicated. .3 Use Type N mortar for exterior, above grade load bearing and on load bearing walls; for interior load bearing walls; and for other applications where another type is not indicated. r C. Colored Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredient to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment -to -cement ratio of 1-to-10, by weight. p 04210 - 3 D. Mix to Match Architect's Sample. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: l A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls (if any) '- -✓ to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. B. Cut masonry units with mortar driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting 'v --wherever-possible..-Use dry -cutting -saws to cut concrete_masonry_units. 4( C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown, or if not shown, lay in 3/4 lap running bond. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe bonded -by lapping not less than 2". Bond and interlock each ` course of each wythe at corners, unless otherwise shown. D. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less than half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. E. Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. F. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. G. Built -In Work: As the work progresses built-in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. H. Lay brick and solid concrete masonry units with completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. ,y I. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variation required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness. 1 - Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. J. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. K. Tests: Grout and mortar tests shall be made as follows: Two (2) test prisms each for mortar and grout 28 days before work is to begin and two (2) test prisms for each 5,000 square feet of wall. L. Cover block surfaces with waterproof paper, plastic sheet, or canvas when necessary to protect them from rain or from hot, dry weather. Surfaces not being worked on shall be protected. M. Clean all exposed block thoroughly, working from top downward, with fiber brushes. Remove mortar and -- mortar stains using cleaning compound and rinse thoroughly with water. All finished Work shall be unmarked _ and unmarred. 3.03 TOLERANCES: A. Vertical joints within 1/8" in 5". B. Horizontal joints within 1 /4" for length of wall. 3.04 CAVITY WALLS: A. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavity. flush. B. Provide weep holes in exterior wythe of cavity, composite and veneer walls located immediately above ledges and flashing, spaced 2'-0" o.c., unless otherwise indicated." 3.05 CLEAN-UP: 04210 - 4 As per GENERAL CONDITIONS. .`ice END OF SECTION 04210 n 04210 - 5 DIVISION 5 V METALS . t 05010 Approved Metal Fabricators 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joist J VI 05310 Metal Decks 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05500 Miscellaneous Metal and Metal Fabrications t s DIVISION 5 SECTION 05010 APPROVED METALS FABRICATORS I CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE: 4 This section is to insure quality and timely construction of sections 05120, Structural Steel; 05210, Steel Joist; .,_.7 05310, Metal Decks; and 05500, Metal Fabrications: J 1.02 SUBMITTAL: Shop drawings shall be submitted for one of the Approved Metals Fabricators listed below, showing all required information as outlined within each individual section; 05120, Structural Steel; 05210, Steel Joist; 05310, Metal -- Decks; and 05500, Metal Fabrications: 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. To ensure quality of work within sections; 05120, Structural Steel; 05210, Steel Joist; 05310, Metal Decks; and 05500, Metal Fabrications; the general contractor shall use one of the approved metals fabricators listed below. B. This list of Metals Fabricators/Suppliers are pre -approved, others may be submitted to the Architect for approval. + 2.00 MATERIALS 1.01 APPROVED FABRICATORS: i' The followin8g is a list of pre -approved Metals Fabricators/Suppliers for superstructure components complying with 05120, Structural Steel; 05210, Steel Joist; 05310, Metal Decks; and 05500, Metal Fabrications: A. AM FAB, Inc. B. Addison Steel, Inc. 100 Calle Industrial 1920 Ledo Road Bernalillo, NM 87004 Albany, GA 31706 I(505) 867-6737 (912) 883-4506 Attn: Mark Mosher Attn: Randy Couch 2 C. Utah Ornamental & Iron Co., Inc. 568 S. Redwood Road Salt Lake City, UT 84104 (801) 973-8678 Attn: Ray Bauman -- 3.00 EXECUTION: r 3.01 PROJECT COORDINATION: u + The General Contractor shall enter a contract with one of the above fabricator and shall schedule shop drawings, w delivery, off loading and erection. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all work as defined within this section and associated sections of division 5. f 3.02 ERRORS AND OMISSIONS: The General Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with Architect's drawings and actual site conditions ._� and shall notify the Fabricator and Architect of any discrepancy that may be detrimental to the work. END OF SECTION 05010 05010-1 +�I DIVISION 5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL r " CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS y 1.01 SCOPE: = A. Supply and install all Structural Steel Work as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel - required. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS: ti A. Submit per SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS. J B. Submit shop and erection drawings based on Contract Documents clearly showing each piece required for fabrication and erection. 2 r C. Approval of drawings will cover only general scheme, design, and character of details but not checking of - • dimensions, nor will such approval relieve Contractor from responsibility for executing Work in accordance with • 1 Contract Drawings. 1.03 GUARANTEE: Per GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 MEASUREMENTS: Verify all dimensions by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of all items is mandatory. 1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. Except where provisions of these Specifications are more exacting, Work of this Section shall comply with all applicable provisions of the following standards: B. Standard Specifications for the Design and Fabrication of Structural Steel for Building, of the American Institute of Steel Construction. - C. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Building and Bridges, of A.I.S.C. D. Code for Welding in Building Construction, 131.0 of the American Welding Society. E. Specifications for Structural Joints using A.S.T.M. A-325 or A-490 Bolts by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints, F. Comply with all applicable Federal, State, and City codes and regulations for performance of the Work of this -- Section including erection safety regulations. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete or masonry, r in ample time to not delay that work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion deterioration. D. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or 05120 - 1 damage to the members or the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.07 COORDINATION: Coordinate with other trades for prompt delivery of all materials needed for erection or installation. Identify all bolts or other loose materials. 1.08 SUBSURFACES: Examine all subsurfaces to receive Work and report in writing to General Contractor, with a copy to Architect, any detrimental conditions. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims to the contrary and will make this Contractor responsible for'any corrections Architect may require. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of all subsurfaces. 1.09 TEMPLATES: Furnish, together with instructions for setting of anchors, anchor belts and bearing plates. Ascertain that items are properly set during progress of the work. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL: A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36. B. Cold -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Hot -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A501. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Standard I.P.S. unless shown otherwise. E. Finish black except where indicated otherwise. 2.02 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS: A. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagonal structural bolts, heavy hexagonal nuts, and hardened washers: ASTM A325 or A490. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, non headed type unless otherwise indicated. C. Veneer Anchors: For devices which extend into exterior wythe, fabricate from steel with hot -dip galvanized coating: ASTM All 53, Class B1, B2, or B3. D. Inserts for Masonry: Unit Type: Furnish coat iron or malleable iron inserts of type and size shown hot -dip galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 oz. zinc coating: ASTM All 53, Class B2. E. Masonry Anchors: Provide steel plates as shown and embedded as shown on plans. Shield adjacent materials during welding operation to prevent scorching, pitting or other damage or masonry, concrete or other adjacent materials. Protect from rusting with approved surface coating. F. Instruct owner on correct maintenance and inspection to protect structural integrity of anchors: ASTM A36. 2.03 RELATED MATERIALS: A. Electrodes: All arc -welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM A233 for Steel Arch welding Electrodes, Electrodes shall be as recommended by their manufacturers for the position and other conditions of actual use. B. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Federal Specification TT-P-86a, Type II or SSPC-Paint 14 for steel surfaces; shop applied. C. Primer: Tnmec No. 99G, green metal primer, D. Cement Grout: Portland Cement ASTM 150, Type I and clean, uniformly graded natural sand ASTM C404, Size no. 2. Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 part sand, by volume, with only the minimum amount of water 05120 - 2 required for placement and hydration. I3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION: f¢' A. Perform shop and filed welding in every detail in accordance with all applicable provisions of above -referenced A.I.S.C. Specifications and with"Code for Welding in Building Construction: of the American Welding Society." B. Comply with all of requirements for joints which are accepted without qualification tests under the "Code for Welding in Building Construction: (AWS Designation D1.0) of American Welding Society, and in addition, to specific requirements of the Drawings. C. Make welds only be operators who have recently been qualified by tests as prescribed in the "Standard Qualification Procedure" (AWA Designation B3.0) of American Welding Society, except this provision need not apply to tack welds not later incorporated into finished welds carrying calculated stress. D. Build anchors and other connecting members required to be set into concrete as work progresses to avoid + J unnecessary cutting and drilling. E. Execute all Work using skilled metal workers only. Use only certified welders. Do only such work at the site _ as cannot reasonably be performed in the shop. Make cuts, bends, punching, and drilling accurate, neat and properly located. Grind and file smooth all parts exposed to view; leave exposed surfaces free of fabrication marks. Make members true to length to allow assembly without fillers. F. Do all welding per A.W.S. Specifications. Apply "Galvaweld" or equal to any surface welded after galvanizing. r G. Make fabrication of all structural steel shapes conform to A.I.S.C. standards. H. Furnish all necessary templates and patterns required by other trades.. Supervise and be responsible for proper location and installation of built-in concrete, or built into partitions and other locations to respective Contractors. Provide holes and connections for Work of other trades and make necessary connections. - I. When possible, fit and shop assemble, ready for erection, with shop and field connections riveted, welded, or attached with screws countersunk and finished where exposed. J. Galvanize any ferrous metal exposed unless otherwise specified. K. Standard commercial products, conforming to requirements of Drawings and Specifications may be used subject to approval of Architect. Bolt with proper size bolts. Nuts shall be drawn tight and end threads upset. Screws and bolts shall be standard and washers provided where necessary. ' 3.02 SHOP PAINTING: A. Shop coat any ungalvanzied ferrous metal with primer. B. Clean iron and metal to be primed of scale, dirt and dust by steel scrapers, wire brushes or sand -blasting. Remove oil and grease with petroleum naphtha. C. Thoroughly work paint into all joints by brush. Overall applications of brush or spray coat of red lead primer; ' to provide a minimum dry -film thickness of 2.0 mils. per Federal Specifications TT-P-86. ^r 3.03 ERECTION: A. Report any errors in shop fabrication or deformation resulting from handling and transportation that prevent proper assembly and fitting or parts immediately to Architect, and obtain approval of method of correction. Approved corrections shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Locate anchor bolts and anchors and build into connection work. Preset by use of templates or other methods as required to locate accurately. C. Provide any temporary shoring and additional bracing of steel framing necessary to adequately and safely support any or all loads imposed on structure during construction. Before proceeding with Work submit drawings for review of any proposed temporary shoring and bracing. Review of drawings shall not relieve ` Contractor of sole responsibility for safe execution of Work. 05120 - 3 D. As shown on final shop drawings. Use high -strength bolts for field connections, except as otherwise indicated. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds. �II .J E. Provisions for Other Work: Fabricate structural steel members to provide holes for securing other work and for passage of other work through steel framing as indicated. 1 Set base plates on cleaned bearing surfaces, using wedges or other adjustments as required. Solidly pack open spaces with bedding mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 3 parts sand and only enough water for packing and hydration, or use commercial non -shrink grout material at Erector's option. 2 Splice members only where shown on final shop drawings. - 3 Touch-up prime paint after erection. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply same type paint as used in shop. .4 Dovetail Slots: Coordinate Installation of dovetail slots with filler strips, where shown. Fabricated from 24 ga. galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. F. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. G. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. H. Pack Grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed .surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. I. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. J. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC Tolerances. s' 11, K. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to file welds. L. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. M. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural I framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. l 3.04 FIELD PAINTING: f A. After erection of steel, coat all exposed surfaces of bolts, nuts, and weld required for field assembly of shop painted steel. Repair abraded and damaged coating to approved condition. All exposed steel shall be painted with primer. Finished coats are as specified under Painting Section. 3.05 CLEAN-UP: v A. On completion of work, remove all excess material, equipment, debris, and cutting; dispose of away from premises. Leave work in clean condition per SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS. s END OF SECTION 05120 - S 05120 - 4 DIVISION 5 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Sections. l 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS r -I 1.01 SCOPE: v A. Furnish and install steel joists as described in Contract Documents. t B. Furnish and install steel joist bridging. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Make Certification of Compliance to reference standards available to Architect upon request. !`-J 1.03 -QUALITY ASSURANCE: j' Joists shall comply with AISC and Steel Joist Institute specifications. -_7 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING: n Follow Manufacturer's instructions and good trade practice for handling and storing steel joists. 2.00 MATERIALS cl 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS: A. Fabricated of structural steel meeting requirements of ASTM A 36-89, "Specification for Structural Steel". B. LH and K series joists, joist girders r' 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: - Follow Manufacturer's instructions and good trade practice for installing steel joists. 1 END OF SECTION 05210 y Y ' I 05210-1 1 DIVISION 5 r-y SECTION 05310 METAL DECKS ' II CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. -- 4 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE: This section includes steel deck units for floor and roof applications. See plans for extent of work. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: I 1 } A. Provide Manufacturer's product data including specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories. ' B. Provide test data for mechanical fasteners used in lieu of welding for fastening deck to supporting structures. C. Provide shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units, anchorage details, and conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing, and other accessories. 1.03 / QUALITY ASSURANCE: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise indicated: A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members". ` i B. American Welding Society (AWS), D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". C. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Design Manual for Composite Deck, Form Decks and Roof Decks". D. Welding shall be done by qualified welding operators use qualified welding processes in accordance with "Welder Qualification" procedures of AWS. E. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. Owner will bear expense of removing and replacing portions of decking for testing purposes if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and replace with new acceptable work. F. Provide metal floor deck units listed in Underwriter's Laboratories "Fire Resistance Directory", with each deck unit bearing the UL label and marking for specific system detail. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in d the work include, but are not limited to, the following: r Bowman Metal Deck Division., Cyclops Corp. Consolidated Systems, Inc. Epic Metal Corp. 1 Marlyn Steel Products, Inc, 05310 - 1 H.H. Robertson Co. Roll Formed Products, Inc. United Steel Deck, Inc. Vulcraft/Div. Nucor Corp Wheeling Corrugated Co. 2-.02 -PRODUCTS:--- - - -- - -- — — Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36 Shear Connectors:Strap type, ASTM A 570 , Grade D Hot -rolled Carbon steel Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacture's standard vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber 2.03 FABRICATION: A. Roof Deck Units shall be formed deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush, telescoped or nested 2-inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated. B. Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI "Specification and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck". C. Composite Steel Floor Deck shall be fabricated deck units with integral embossing or raised pattern to furnish mechanical bond with concrete slabs. Fabricate open -beam deck units with fluted section having interlocking side laps. D. Roof Sump Pans shall be fabricated from single piece of 0.071-inch min. (14 gauge) galvanized sheet steel with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to drain. Provide sump pans of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3-inches wide. Recess pans not less than 1-1/2"-inches below roof deck surface, unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration. Holes for drains will be cut in the field by others. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,shop drawings, and as specified herein. B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing of supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. - C. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp of deflection. E. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and in dry. F. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. G. Do not use floor deck units for storage of working platforms until permanently secured. 3.02 FASTENING DECK UNITS: A. Fasten floor deck units to steel supporting members by nominal. 5/8-inch puddle welds of elongated welds of equal strength, spaced as indicated on the drawings. 05310 - 2 B. Tack weld or use self -tapping No. 8 or larger machine screws at 4 feet o.c. for fastening end closures. ,1 C. Fasten floor deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 5/8 diameter puddle welds of elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 8 inches at every support, and at closer spacing where indicated. In addition, secure deck to each supporting member in ribs where side laps z occur. D. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. E. Use welding washers where recommended by deck manufacturer. _ F. Mechanical fasteners, either powder -actuated of pneumatically driven, may be used in lieu of welding with written permission from engineer, Locate mechanical fasteners and install in accordance with deck manufacturer's instructions. G. Uplift Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 30 lbs. psf for roof a areas. i H. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting r--i through or adjacent to the decking, as shown. i. I. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work shown. J. Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting end and changes in direction of floor deck units, except where taped joints are required. K. Roof Sump Pans: Place over openings provided in roof decking and weld to top decking surface. Space welds not more than 12 inches o.c. with at least one weld at each corner. L. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and a in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. M. Provide flexible closure strips instead of metal closures, at Contractor's option, wherever their use will ensure complete closure. Install with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. N. Touch-up painting after decking installation, wire brush, clean and paint scared areas, welds and rust i spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. All galvanized deck damaged by welding is to be repaired using materials and methods complying with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION 05310 05310 - 3 � r i I DIVISION 5 SECTION 05400 _ COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING �1 Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 TYPES OF COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING UNITS FOR PROJECT INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: Load bearing punched channel studs. C-shaped steel studs. C-shaped steel joists. Z-shaped steel purlins. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA: A. Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. ._, B. Include placing drawings for framing members that show size and gage designations, number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental bracing, splices, accessories, and details as required for proper installation. I 1.03 COMPONENT DESIGN: ! Calculate structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with ASI "Specification for the Design of Cold l� Formed Steel Structural Members." r -� 2.00 PRODUCTS ' t 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: 1. Provide cold formed metal framing produced by one of the following: �J Alabama Metal Industries Corp. Dale Industries, Inc. Dietrich Industries, Inc. iMarino Industries Corp. Steelco Superior Steel Studs, Inc. USG Industries United States Steel Wheeling Corrugating Co. 1 2.02 SYSTEM COMPONENTS: Manufacturer's standard load bearing steel studs and joists of type, size, shape, and gauge as indicated. With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, 1 shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. 2.03 MATERIALS AND FINISHES: } A. For 16 gauge and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611. B. For 18 gauge and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a -� minimum yield point of 33,000 psi: ASTM A 446, A 570. or A 611. C. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components that comply with ASTM A 525 for minimum G 60 coating. i D. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and recommendations of framing manufacturer. J 05400 - 1 E. Galvanizing Repair: Use materials and methods for repair of galvanized surfaces damaged by welding, complying with ASTM A780. kl i F. Prefabrication: Structural framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels to prevent damage or distortion. _ 1. Fabricate panels in jig templates to hold members -in proper alignment and position and to assure consistent component placement. - - -- -- a� N G. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. 1. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. H. Fabricate Tolerances: Fabricate panels to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install metal framing system in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations unless otherwise indicated. B. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work. E. Secure studs to and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. F. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaces (vertical distance) at nor more than 54 inches o.c.. Weld at each intersection. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS: A. Install level and plumb, complete with bracing and reinforcing as indicated. Provide not less than 1-1/2 inches end bearing. B. Reinforce ends with end clips, steel hangers, steel angle clips, steel stud section, or as otherwise recommended by joist manufacturer. END OF SECTION 05400 05400 - 2 DIVISION 5 SECTION 05500 MISC. METAL AND v METAL FABRICATIONS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 7Y} 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .. 1.01 SCOPE: I _ Supply and install all Miscellaneous Metal Work as shown on Drawings and as specified herein including all anchorage devices and required appurtenances. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS: Per SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, submit Shop Drawings of all work herein showing layouts, sizes, methods of construction, and installation, including sizes and types of all fastening devices. 8 , ' 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS: AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"; AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrications, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" including "Commentary"; AWS "Structural Welding Code"; comply with applicable provisions except as otherwise indicated. 1.04 GUARANTEE: Per GENERAL CONDITIONS. { I 1.05 MEASUREMENTS: Verify all dimensions by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of all items is mandatory. 1.06 COORDINATION: Coordinate with other trades for prompt delivery of all materials needed for erection or installation. Identify all bolts or other loose materials. 1.07 SUBSURFACES: 1 'I Examine all subsurfaces to receive Work and report in writing to General Contractor, with a copy to Architect, any conditions detrimental to Work. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims to the contrary and will make this Contractor responsible for any corrections Architect may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of all subsurfaces. J 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver and store materials in dry protected areas. Protect from rusting and other damage. �(� Remove any damaged items from site and replace at no cost to Owner. 1 2.00 MATERIALS A. Steel: All miscellaneous steel sections shall be standard cold -rolled sections conforming to ASTM A36. Fabricated items requiring welding shall in all cases be made from ASTM A36 steel. ,—i B. Mild Steel: ASTM A283. -� C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Standard I.P.S. unless shown otherwise. D. Steel Bars: ASTM A36. E. Anchor Bars: ASTM A307, non headed ty pe unless otherwise indicated. F. Steel Inserts for Suspended Items: All embedded items for installation of wall or ceiling equipment or fixtures i`; shall be provided to meet manufacturers suggested specifications. it 05500 - 1 ��P G. Electrodes: All arc -welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM A233 for Steel Arc -Welding Electrodes, Electrodes shall be as recommended by their manufactures for the position and other conditions of actual use. H. Primer: Federal Specification TT-P-86a, Type II for steel surfaces. 2.01 MISC. METAL AND FABRICATED ITEMS: Work required under this Section that is not described in detail below shall be constructed in accordance with the detailed drawings and/or approved Shop Drawings. A. Handrailing: Fabricate 2" standard steel pipe to shapes and sizes shown on the drawings. All connections shall be welded and ground smooth, with smooth bends and closed ends. Provide all required anchorage pieces, including anchorage devices for attachment to walls and floor and required and shown on the drawings. Where flanges are required, provide anchor bolts and attachments, where pipe sleeves are required, provide a nonshrink grout. B. Loose Steel Lintels: Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. Provide not less than 8" bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated. C. Ladders: Fabricate ladders for the locationsshown, with dimensions, spacings, details an anchorages as indicated. Comply with the requirements of ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 1 Unless otherwise shown, provide 1/2" x 2-1/2" continuous structural steel flat bar side rails with eased edges, spaced 18" apart. .2 Provide 3/4" diameter solid structural steel bar rungs, spaced 12" o.c. .3 Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. .4 Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 5'- 0" o.c. Use welded or bolted steel brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold the ladder clear of the wall surface with a minimum of 7" clearance from wall to centerline of rungs.. Extend rails.42" above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose -neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access. .5 Provide non -slip surface on the top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout. D. Procide a minimum L3 X 3 X 1/4" angle support aroun all rooftop penetrations greater that 6" in diameter and under all mechanical equipment curbs. E. Miscellaneous Metal Items: and their related components are not necessarily individually described. Miscellaneous items not described shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications and as required to complete the work. Submit complete Shop Drawings for approval of all items not listed. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION: A. Standard commercial products, conforming to requirements of Drawings and Specifications may be used subject to approval of Architect. Bolt with proper sizes bolts. Nuts shall be drawn tight and end threads upset. Screws and bolts shall be standard and washers provided where necessary. B. Build anchors and other connecting members required to be set into concrete as work progresses to avoid unnecessary cutting and drilling. C. Execute all Work using skilled metal workers only. Use only certified welders. Do only such work at the site as cannot reasonably be performed in the shop. Make cuts, bends, punching and drilling accurate, neat and properly located. Grind and file smooth all parts exposed to view; leave exposed surfaces free of fabrication marks. Make members true to length to allow assembly without fillers. 05500 - 2 D. Do all weldingper A.W.S. Specifications. Apply Galvawela" ore ual to an surfaces welded after galvanizing. P P PPY �� q Y 9 9• E. Make fabrication of all structural steel shapes conform to A.I.S.C. standards. F. Furnish all necessary templates and patterns required by other trades. Supervise and be responsible for proper _ location and installation of built-in concrete, or built into partitions and other locations to respective Contractors. Provide holes and connections for Work of other trades and make necessary connections. G. When possible, fit and shop assemble, ready for erection, with shop and filed connections riveted, welded or f" attached with screws countersunk and finished where exposed. H. Galvanize any ferrous metal exposed unless otherwise specified. 3.02 INSTALLATION: _ Install all items specified herein unless otherwise noted; all true, square, plumb, and accurately fitted. 3.03 SHOP PRIMING: I T A. Shop coat any ungalvanized ferrous metal with primer. B. Clean iron and metal to be primed of scale, dirt and dust by steel scrapers, wire brushes or sand blasting. 1 Remove oil and grease with petroleum naphtha. 1 C. Thoroughly work paint into all joints by brush. Overall applications of brush or spray coat of red lead primer; per Federal Specification TT-P-86. D. Give any painted built-in portions one field coat of primer on all abraded parts after installation. 'r 3.04 CLEAN-UP: On completion of work, remove all excess material, equipment, debris and catting; dispose of away"from premises. --, Leave work in clean condition per SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS. .°•' END OF SECTION 05500 05500 - 3 .'� DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS M06200 Finish Carpentry r- 06400 Architectural Woodwork t � DIVISION 6 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: Ir A. Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, is non-structural, and which is not specified as part of other sections. _j B. Types of finish carpentry work in this section includes; exterior running and standing trim. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage soiling and 1 deterioration. ' B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, we work grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation area. If due to unforseen circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas. C. Conditioning; Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for finish carpentry installation areas.. Do not install finish carpentry until required temperature and related humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in installed areas. D. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation areas as required to maintain moisture content of installed finish carpentry with 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation through .I remainder of construction period. The fabricator of woodwork shall determine optimum moisture. contents for required temperature and humidity conditions. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GRADE STAMPS: t)I A. Identify lumber by the grade stamp of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, or such other grade stamp as is approved in advance by the Architect. B. Identify plywood as to species, grade, and glue type by the stamp of the American Plywood Association. ■■ 2.02 MATERIALS: `ll A. Provide materials in the quantitiesneeded for the Work as shown on the Drawings, and meeting or exceeding the following standards of quality: .1 Softwood Lumber Standards comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency and the species and product indicated. .2 Plywood Standard comply with PS 1/ANSI Al99. .3 Hardware Lumber Standard comply with National Hardware Lumber Association (NHLA) rules. .4 Hardwood Plywood Standard comply with PS 51. #� .5 Woodworking Standard where indicated for a specific product comply with specified provisions of 06200 - 1 1i G. Locks: Where indicated, provide standard pin -type or disc -type (5 pins or discs) tumbler locks, keyed individually except as otherwise indicated. 2.09 SHELF SUPPORTS: Where shelving is indicated as "adjustable", to provide slitted-type standards and brackets of type needed to support shelves with uniform 40-lb per sq. ft. loading. 2.10 CLOSET BARS: Telescoping steel or brass tubing with forged end brackets; size and wall thickness as required to support full continuous hanging of clothing. 2.11 EXPOSED HARDWARE FINISH: Except where not available, provide exposed hardware with BHMA Code 613 (dark oxidized satin bronze, oil rubbed, bronze base)finish. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. B. Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including countertops); and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surface, 1 /8" maximum offsets inrevealed adjoining surfaces: B. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut.surfaces or repair.damaged finish at cuts. nn C. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. where pre -finished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nails for�exposed nailing, El countersunk and filled flush with woodwork, and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.. D. Casework: Install without distortion sc.that.doors and,drawers will fit.openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide, unencumbered, operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. Maintain veneer sequence matching (if any) of casework with transparent finish. E. Countertops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as ' lu indicated. F. Wood Storage Shelving: Complete the assembly of units and install in the areas indicated, including and ',IVI accessories as indicated. 3.03 QUALITY STANDARDS: For following types of architectural woodwork; comply with indicated standards as lC applicable: @y Plastic Laminate Casework: WIC Section 15. ,I Plastic Laminate Countertops: WIC Section 16. UUU Shelving: WIC Section II. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION:I A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork wherever possible to eliminated defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 06400 - 4 i B. Clean hardware, lubricate and make final adjustments for proper operation. - C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. D. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section, to whatever extent not completed at shop or prior to installation of woodwork. E. Protection: Installer of architectural woodwork shall advise Contractor of procedures required to protect architectural woodwork during remainder of construction period to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. . z END OF SECTION 06400 r i -s i� �1 ,_ J 06400 - 5 r q } DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION f 07112 Bituminous Waterproofing ,—, l 07150 Dampproofing 07200 Insulation 0734362ti Concrete Tile Roofing -- 07420 Composite Fascia Panels 07464 Vinyl Siding & Soffits 07500 Elastomeric Sheet Roofing 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal i 7 10_ 077 Gutter and Downspouts 07740 Exterior Insulation Finish System _t 07900 Sealants 1� k DIVISION 7 SECTION 07112 ' + BITUMINOUS I WATERPROOFING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIRMENTS 3 1.01 SCOPE: A. Provide bituminous waterproofing where shown on the Drawings, as specified, herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: ,n 1. Documents affecting work of this section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, �l Supplementary Specifications. 1 1.02 SUBMITTALS: i A. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owners's Notice to Proceed, i_ submit: .1 Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; �f .2 Manufacturer's specification and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; ?� .3 Manufacturer's recommended -installation procedures which, when ap proved pproved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or reflecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Use a subcontractor currently approved in writing by the Manufacturer of the approved waterproofing. C. Cooperate as required in performance of the specified testing and inspecting. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Deliver material to the job site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging and adequately protected against damage while temporarily stored at site. Materials designated for a specific application shall all be the products of one manufacturer. ' 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: A. Where indicated on the Drawings, and where otherwise required for proper waterproofing, provide a i_ waterproofing membrane as Manufactured by one of the following approved Manufacturers: —'� 1. "APOC Jiffy Seal" by Asphalt Products Oil Corp., 2405 South Street Long Beach, California 90805 (213) 774-8330 _l Consisting of: I a. Primer: "Jiffy Seal #80" b. Below Grade Membrane: "Jiffy Seal #140" (55 Mils)" C. Plastic Cement: "Jiffy Seal #160-H Mastic" d. Protection Board: APOC 1/8" thick Protection Panel" 07112 - 1 2. "Ram -Tough 250" by the Barrett Company, Wilmington, Delaware 1980E-6124 I800) 647-0100 consisting of: a. Surface Conditioner: "Ram Tough Primer" b. Membrane: "Ram Tough 250" C. Reinforcing Sheet: "Ram Flash 300 PG" d. Protection Sheet: "Ram Tough Protection Board" - 2.02—OTHER-MATERIALS* Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect: 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: Examine this area and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. ✓ 3.02 INSTALLATION: Except as may be modified with the advance approval of the Architect, install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 07112 07112 - 2 } _ DIVISION 7 SECTION 07150 DAMPPROOFING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: Supply and install all Liquid Bituminous Dampproofing Work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 GUARANTEE: . I Per GENERAL CONDITIONS, furnish a written guarantee, counter -signed by General Contractor, that all liquid dampproofing is unconditionally guaranteed to be watertight for a period of two years. 1.03 COORDINATION: _ Work closely with all adjacent Trades. Whenever the water -tightness of Dampproofing is dependent on other Trades, assume full responsibility for the finished installation. 1.04 SUBSURFACES: Examine all subsurfaces to receive Work and report in writing to General Contractor, with a copy to the Architect, any conditions detrimental to installation. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims to the contrary and will make Dampproofing Contractor responsible for any corrections the Architect may .� require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of all subsurfaces. 1 i 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging and adequately protect against damage while temporarily stored at site. Materials designated for a specific application shall all be the products of one -.i manufacturer. --� 2_.00 MATERIALS: I 2.01 LIQUID DAMPPROOFING: A. Manufacture: The materials herein specified are named to establish standards of quality and types of materials. Materials of other manufacturers may be used if they are equal in quality, design and serviceability and are - approved by the Architect. .1 Emulsified Asphalt, Inc. Flintkote Co. J & P Petroleum Products B. Type: .1 Asphalt Emulsion - Manufacturer's standard asphalt and water emulsion, recommended for below grade exterior to dry substrates, compounded to penetrate the substrate and build to a moisture -resistant but breathing type of firm elastic coating. .2 Provide Heavy non-fibrated type liquid emulsion where indicated. `i } C. Use fibrated trowel dampproofing ASTM D 2822-75 as indicated on the Drawings, 2 coats. 3.00 EXECUTION: 3.01 PREPARATION: _ Make all subsurfaces free from material projections, dust, loose and foreign materials and any other obstructions, i presenting a smooth plane, ready for installation. 07150 - 1 3.02 APPLICATION: A. Have all materials applied by a Contractor approved by manufacturer. B. Do Work only in dry weather and apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's written specifications or instructions. C. Do not proceed with dampproofing work until blocking, nailers, piping, conduit and other projections through -- the—substrate_have_been_installed_with_substrate_properly_patched_and_sealed_or—flashed—to_receive-the-- dampproofing. - D. When ambient temperature is 40 degrees F. or less and falling, do not proceed with dampproofing. Do not apply dampproofing materials to frozen substrate or to any substrate in a condition not complying with , manufacturer's recommendations. E. Clean the wall surface of dirt, oil, loose materials and other substances which interfere with penetration, bond / or performance of dampproofing materials. 3.03 WATER STOPPING: -' At end of each day's Work, seal all Work at edges to prevent moisture getting under material. Dampproofing operations shall not be conducted when water in any form is present on surfaces to be covered. 3.04 PROTECTION: Protect all dampproofing Work, during and after installation, from damage of any kind. 3.05 CLEAN-UP: Per GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1 END OF SECTION 07150 07150 - 2 I '-lII lS DIVISION 7 INSULATION CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: The Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment, and labor to provide complete insulation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submit, for information only, two (2) copies of manufacturer's specifications and insulation instructions for each type of insulation required. Indicate, by transmittal, that installer has received a copy of manufacturer's instructions. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Order insulation by "R" factor rather than "U" factor, rating, or thickness. B. All insulation products must be protected from deterioration. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling and storage during installation. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. C. Do not deliver plastic insulation materials to the project site ahead of installation time. Protect at all times against ignition. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of work. D. Do not overload the building structure with the storage of materials or use of installation equipment. 1.04 COORDINATION: Coordinate with other trades for piping, backing, blocking, etc., to insure proper location and installation. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS - A. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Clean the substrate of projections and substances detrimental to the work. 2.00 MATERIALS: A. Mineral/Glass Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation (M/GFB-Ins): Inorganic (non -asbestos) fibers formed into resilient flexible blankets or semi -rigid batts; ASTM C 655, manufacturer's standard lengths and widths as required to coordinate with metal or wood frames of spaces to be insulated; types as follows: 1 Provide Type I unfaced units where indicated, semi -rigid in vertical spaces and where self-support is required. 2 Provide Type II Kraft -faced units where indicated, with integral nailing flanges, barrier rating of 1.0 perms. 07200 - 1 .3 Provide Type III reflective, foil -faced vapor barrier units where indicated, with integral nailing flanges, aluminum foil barrier with rating of 0.5 perms. i .4 Approved Manufacturers: Certainteed Corp., Valley Forge, Pennsylvania Johns -Manville Fiberglass, Denver, Colorado Owens -Coming Fiberglass Corp., Toledo, Ohio Rockwool Insulation Division, Denver, CO US Gypsum "Thermafiber", Chicago, Illinois Western Fiberglass, Inc., Salt Lake City, UT B. Below -grade rigid insulation at perimeter foundation/frost walls, and in locations in possible contact " with water: Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation (EPS Bd-Ins): High Density Closed -cell, extruded polystyrene rigid boards, complying with ASTM. C578, Type IV, 25 PSI compressive strength; 0.1 % maximum water -absorption; R-value of 5.0 per -inch, water vapor permeance of .4-1.0; manufacturer's standard lengths and widths. .1 Approved Manufacturers: Styrofoam SM, Dow Chemical Co., Midland, Michigan. Foamular 250, UC Industries, Chicago, Illinois. Equals approved by the architect. i C. Rigid insulation in locations not in possible contact with water, and with protective fire -rated gypsum board cover: Expanded Polystyrene rigid boards, complying with ASTM C 578, Type 1, 10 PSI compressive 1 i strength, 4% maximum water absorption, R-value per inch = 3.85, water vapor permeance of 5.0, ' manufacturers standard lengths and widths. 3.00 EXECUTION: 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's Recommendations. B. Leave no gaps in insulation envelope. Install insulation in such places as between jambs and framing and behind plumbing and wiring. Fit ends of batts snug. against top and bottom plates. C. Provide 3 inches minimum clearance between insulation and recessed lighting fixtures with incombustible means of support. x 3.02 VAPOR BARRIER LOCATION ON WARM -SIDE: A. Vapor Barrier to be located on the interior -side of the exterior wall construction except in the areas of the SouthEast United States that are defined as Humid Climates or Fringe Humid Climates by ASHRAE as indicated in the map below, or by the criteria listed below for weather conditions _. according to the U.S. Climatilogical Data. In these areas listed by the map or criteria below as Humid and Fringe -Humid Climates, the vapor barrier to be located on the exterior -side of the exterior wall -" construction. 07200 - 2 �j�/,r / �i HUMIG LIM=TE= '—SHR=E, II FRING-E HLIMIG CLIM=TES SHR=E, G''• ��-� =BINGE CLIM=TES M=Y ExTENG EcYCNG =E'_ GEFINEG LIMITS. E /=LJ=TE cY THE CRITERI= F—ELCW F-R TEE L.S. _ CLIM-TCLCGIC;L G=T-. Fringe locations are generally identified by one or both of the following conditions: 1. A 67 degree F or higher wet -bulb temperature for 3,000 hours or more during the warmest six consecutive months of the year. 2. A 73 degree F or higher wet -bulb temperature for 1,500 hours or more during the warmest six consecutive months of the year. A humid climate can be defined as one in which one or both of the following conditions occur: 1. A 67 degree F or higher wet -bulb temperature for 3,500 hours or more during the warmest six consecutive months of the year. 2. A 73 degree F or higher wet -bulb temperature for 1,750 hours or more during the warmest six consecutive months of the year. 3.03 CLEAN-UP: Per GENERAL CONDITIONS END OF SECTION 07200 07200 - 3 �. DIVISION 7 SECTION 07322 CONCRETE ROOFING TILE CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: A. Furnish all labor, material, and equipment to install roof tiles with all related accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. ' B. It is this Contractor's responsibility for a completely weather tight and moisture proof installation. 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS: i A. Installer must examine subsurface to see if any unsatisfactory conditions exist. Do not proceed with work until such conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. � B. Do not overload structure with materials or equipment. l 1.03 BDELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver and store materials in a protected, dry area. Replace any damaged material at no cost to Owner. L 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY: i Submit executed copy of roofing manufacturer's standard "Limited Service Warranty" Agreement including flashing endorsement, signed by an authorized representative of concrete tile roofing system manufacturer. - 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 PRODUCTS: A. Concrete Tile Roofing shall be a shake style tile, submit color samples to Architect for his selection from the! manufacturer's range of currently available colors. Submit 6 copies of the installation details for Architect's review. Tile shall meet or exceed ASTM C-67-62 for freeze thaw, UBC 32-12 and ASTM C-126 24 hour 2" static head test. For permeability ASTM E108-58 and UBC 32-7 fire test and UBC 32-12 and ASTM C-67 for flexure. �l — B. 40# Asphalt - Saturated Roofing Felt: (Underlayment) shall conform to ASTM-D-2626, Type I for roofing felt. C. Fasteners: Nails shall be corrosion resistant and or of sufficient length to give proper penetration, 3/4" or through sheathing (if less than 3/4"). D. Adhesives/Sealants: Asphalt Plastic Cement: conforming to ASTM D-2822, Type 11, non -running, heavy body material composed of asphalt and other mineral ingredients (for use with felts and tile application). Cold process liquid roof coating; conforming to ASTM D-3019, Type II (for use with felt only). 2.02 Approved Manufacturers Subject to compliance with the requirements of this section, approved manufacturers include: Pioneer Concrete Roofing Tile; Fontana, CA Monier Roof Tile; Duncanville, TX Vande Hay Raleigh; Little Chute, WI 2.03 MORTAR: Materials -Portland cement: Conforming to ASTM C-150, Type I. -Masonry Mix: Conforming to ASTM C-91. -Sand: Conforming to ASTM C-144, clean and free of organic materials, uniformly graded. 07322 - 1 -Integral Coloring Compound: Oxide to match tile color. -Water: Potable. -Mixes: Conforming to ASTM C-270. 2.04 FLASHINGS: A. Valley metal shall be 26 ga. galvanized iron with two 1" ridges and a center water control channel. B. Flashings shall be of 26 ga. galvanized iron. C. Drip Metal and "T" Metal shall be 26 ga. between dissimilar materials. Kynar 500, fluoropolymer coating, color to match fascia with butyl D. Coatings: Paint, color coordinated Kynar 500, fluoropolymer coating; provided by the the manufacturer for flashing and/or accessories as required. Acrylic sealer; provided by the tile manufacturer for point -up mortar and other surfaces as required. 3.00 EXECUTION: 3.01 APPLICATION: A. Asphalt Bitumen Heating: Heat and apply bitumen in accordance with equiviscous temperature method ("EVT Method") as recommended by NRCA. Do not raise temperature above minimum normal fluid -holding temperature necessary to attain EVT (250oF or 140oC at point of application) more than one hour prior to time of application. Discard bitumen which has been held at temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature ("FBT") for a period exceeding 3 hours. B. Determine flash point, finished blowing temperature and EVT or Bitumen, either by information form bitumen producer or by suitable tests and determine maximum fire -safe handling temperature and do not exceed that temperature in heating bitumen; but in no case heat bitumen to a temperature higher than 250oF (140oC) below flash point. Keep kettle lid closed except when adding bitumen. C. Bitumen Mopping Weight: For flood coat mopping apply bitumen at the following ratwof. Asphalt: 25-Ibs._of asphalt(_ +/25% on a total job average basis) per roof square (100 sq. ft.). D. Cut -Offs: At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Provide temporary covering of 2 plies of No. 15 roofing felt set in full mopping of hot r a bitumen; remove at beginning of next day's work. Glaze -coat areas of completed organic ply sheets which cannot be flood -coated before end of each day's work. -- 3.02 CONCRETE TILE ROOF INSTALLATION: A. Vertical and Horizontal Battens: Vertical battens shall be installed prior to flood -coat of bitumen: At 16" o.c. starting 12" from eve edge and perpendicular continue to ridge board with no openings and consist of 3/6" lath. Horizontal battens shall be applied over the vertical battens and flood -coat as per tile manufacturer's installation instructions and consist of 1 x 2 redwood, cedar or pressured treated fir; to form a true cold roof system. B. Hurricane Clips shall be installed on every eave tile if required by local code or where winds will exceed 100 m.p.h. C. Broken Tiles: At completion of installation all broken tile shall be replace and job site shall be cleaned of tile debris. Owners shall receive a supply of extra tiles equaling approximately 1 /2 square at the end of the job. 3.03 CLEAN-UP: As per GENERAL CONDITIONS. - END OF SECTION 07300 07322 - 2 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07420 COMPOSITE FASCIA PANEL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: Furnish all labor, material, and equipment to install Aluminum Composite Fascia with all related accessories as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS: r` Installer must examine subsurface to see if any unsatisfactory conditions exist. Do not proceed with work until such conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver and store materials in a protected and dry area. B. Protect finish and edges in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations. C. Replace any damaged materials at no cost to the Owner. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Submit 6 copies of shop drawings indicating thickness and dimension of parts, fastening and anchoring methods, detail and location of joints and gaskets, including joints necessary to accommodate Thermal Movement. B. Submit 2 copies of'manufacturer's literature for panel material. n. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:. - Composition of two sheets of 3mm (0.118") aluminum sandwiching a core of extruded thermo-plastic formed in a continuous process. 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURER: 1. Aluco Bond Technologies Inc. 2. Alpolic 11960 Westline Industrial Drive Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc St. Louis, Missouri 63146 (800) 422-7270 2. Reynobond Reynolds Metals Co. P.O. Box 27003 Richmond, Virginia 23261 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION: _ Fabricate aluminum composite fascia panels to shapes and sizes detailed on drawings. Make surfaces free of waves 1 and buckles, with lines, rises, and angles sharp and true. Form in strict accordance with detailed drawings. No raw, exposed edges permitted. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Conform to quality, procedures and methods recommended by Manufacturer. Anchor work in place with non 07420 - 1 corrosive fasteners, (unexposed); adhesives, and other materials as recommended by Manufacturer provide for thermal expansion and building movements. Securely fasten and make watertight. B. Attach aluminum composite material to surfaces which are even, smooth, thoroughly dry and clean, free of all defects which might affect application. C. Clean all surfaces concealed after installation, carefully removing grease and oil with solvent and wiping clean with soft rags. — -- —D. WatertighttWeatherproof-performance-of-work-is-required _ 3.03 CLEAN-UP: Per GENERAL CONDITIONS. END OF SECTION 07420 07420 - 2 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07464 VINYL SIDING AND SOFFITS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE: Provide vinyl siding, soffit and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to proceed, submit: A. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section, with color samples; B. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; C. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used in the Work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: All vinyl siding and soffits shall be protected from damage while in transit and at the site. When delivered it shall immediately be placed on sills, under cover and adequately protected from weather. Neatly stack flat to prevent damage. 2.00 MATERIALS: 2.01 SOFFIT: Soffit shall be made of nominal .040" solid vinyl substrate with a kynar 500 finish. The soffit shall have 10" exposure with 7.53 square inches of ventalation area per linal foot. 2.02 SIDING: A. Siding shall be factory finished and made of nominal .125" high -density copolymer and injection molded. B. All wall receiver channels to be vinyl and match ajoining siding or soffit materials. C. All accessories designed for use with siding and soffit shall be accessories designed for use with siding and soffit having the same finish. 3.00 EXECUTION: 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: Before starting work, verify governing dimensions at building; examine clean and repair, if necessary any adjoining work on which this work is in any way dependent for its proper installation. 3.02 GENERAL: A. Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 07464 - 1 B. Special details shown on the drawing shall be included as part of installation. C. Upon completion, the contractor shall clean all work. - r 3.03 WARRANTY: Vinyl Soffits and Siding shall be covered by a lifetime, 50 year transferable, nonprorated limited warranty, which includes material and replacement labor. A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering soffit material scraps and dust. ' B. At completion of each segment ofinstallation,-sine ofbuildingand at days end, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section. END OF SECTION 07464 07464 - 2 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07500 SHEET ROOFING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: A. Furnish all labor, material, and equipment to install an animal fat resistant single ply membrane with all related accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. It is this Contractor's responsibility for a completely weather tight and moisture proof installation. -- 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Installer must examine subsurface to see if any unsatisfactory conditions exist. Do not proceed with work until such conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. B. Do not overload structure with materials or equipment. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: i Deliver and store materials in a protected, dry area. Replace any damaged material at no cost to Owner. _. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: The roofing contractor shall submit a roof drawing indicating: (1) Outline of roof and roof size. I (2) Sheet size and layout indicating all lap splices. (3) Locations and types of penetrations. (4) Perimeter and penetration details which are non-standard details. (5) Walk way location of contrasting color. (6) Any other special details. These drawings shall be approved prior to installation. 1.05 WARRANTY: Upon completion of the entire project and following the final inspection, the Roofing Manufacturer shall issue the 10 year "No Leak" Warranty, which covers the full cost of pre -approved repair or replacement necessitated by defective roofing materials or contractor workmanship, for the life of the warranty. 2.00 MATERIALS: 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements of this section. Approved manufacturers include: Bondcote Corp. - LaGrange, GA Dura Last Roofing, Inc.- Saginaw, MI Flex - Morgantown, PA JPS Elastomerics Corp/Stevens Roofing Systems Division. - Holyoke, MA Seal/Dry/USA Inc. - Pontiac, MI Mule -Hide Products Co. - Beloit, WI Firestone - Building Products Company, Carmel, IN i 2.02 SINGLE -PLY ROOF SYSTEM: 07500 - 1 A. Mechanically attached, Reinforced, CPA or Thermoplastic or Hypalon with a white exposed finish and shall be animal fat resistant. Manufactured with a thickness of .035" thick (minimum) and .039" thick (nominal) membrane. The membrane is fabricated by the Roofing Manufacturer into the largest sheets possible (20' x - 100' max) as determined by the building design, thereby eliminating up to 80% of the field seaming. The membrane sheets are fabricated to include a tab fastening system so as to avoid penetrating the surface of the membrane with mechanical fasteners at paint other than perimeters or penetrations. .1 No bonding adhesives, splicing cements or solvents shall be used for seam sealing. .2—Factory-fabrication shall -be -done -by -dielectric -welding - — — .3 All field seams shall be sealed hot air welding. B. Flashings - flashing shall be fabricated of the same membrane as in (A). Factory fabricated flashings shall be provided as ordered by the Roofing Contractor. C. Mechanical Fasteners - shall be Roofing Manufacturer's fasteners and plates. D. Caulks - shall be provided or approved in writing by the Roofing Manufacturer. E. Mastics and Sealants - shall be approved in writing by the Roofing Manufacturer. F. Termination Bar - shall be provided or approved in writing by the Roofing Manufacturer. G. Insulation - Insulation or underlayments must be approved in writing by the Roofing Manufacturer as the thickness and type. Approved insulation and/or underlayments include but are not limited to Perlite board, fiberglass, urethane/Perlite composite, full-faced polyisocyanuate insulations, EPS and extruded polystyrene. H. Wood Nailers and Curbs - shall be pressure treated lumber (creosote or asphaltic preservatives are prohibited). G I. Walkway - shall be fabricated of same material as (A) and shall be 4 feet wide around roof top units and 3 feet - wide for walks, and of contrasting color, and placed around all roof top units and walk ways between units and roof hatch. f 3.00 EXECUTION i 3.01 INSPECTION: The Roofing contractor shall inspect a new roof with the general contractor being responsible•for asuitable substrate to accept the roofing membrane. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. The substrate shall be smooth and free of debris, sharp edges, and other irregularities. Blisters or cracks greater than 1/4" in width shall be repaired. j B. Roof drain clamping rings and gravel guards shall be removed. The drain casting shall be cleaned to receive the roofing membrane. _ 3.03 INSULATION APPLICATION: , A. Plan and conduct the work so that insulation is applied only to areas that will have the roof system completed the same day. B. Insulation will be mechanically fastened to the roof in accordance with Roofing Manufacturer's detail drawings. C. Roofing Manufacturer's approved fasteners shall be used and shall be long enough to penetrate wood deck a minimum of 1 ". D. Insulation components shall be neatly cut to fit around all roof projections and penetrations. Edges of insulation components shall be checked and trimmed for proper support. Insulation at roof perimeter and drains shall be tapered, where necessary. 3.04 MEMBRANE AND FLASHING APPLICATION: 07500 - 2 A. Installation of all materials and details relating to the membrane roofing system shall be done in compliance with established Roofing Manufacturer's procedures. B. Observe all precautions listed in the Roofing Manufacturer's Literature and Detail Drawings. Unusual conditions not addressed by the Literature or Detail Drawings, shall be brought to the attention of the Roofing Manufacturer's Technical Services Department for a written recommendation. C. There shall be no deviation from the Roofing Manufacturer's Specifications or Detail Drawings without the prior written consent of the Roofing Manufacturer. D. The Roofing Manufacturer's fasteners with 3" plates for Roofing System membrane and flashing shall be installed 18" o.c. through the fabricated in tabs and end laps with 6" overlaps at all field seams. 3.05 MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTION: A. Upon completion of installation, the Roofing Contractor will forward a completed, Job Completion Statement to the Roofing Manufacturer to initiate a final inspection. B. Inspection of the completed installation shall be made by Manufacturer's representative to ascertain that the Roof System has been installed in accordance with the Roofing Manufacturer's Specifications and Drawings. C. The Roofing Manufacturer shall issue the applicable warranty upon completion of the final inspection. 3.06 CLEAN-UP: Per GENERAL CONDITIONS. END OF SECTION 07500 07500 - 3 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 1.01 SCOPE: Furnish all plant labor, equipment, appliances, and materials, and perform all operations in connection with complete sheet metal work, in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable drawings. B. Any accessories or other items essential to the completeness of the sheet metal work shall also be provided, although not definitely shown on the drawings or specified herein. Nails, bolts, screws, and other fasteners shall be of the proper size and types for the purpose intended. 1.02 STANDARDS: A. Comply with "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA, for each category of work required. Metal Flashing and Counter Flashings Gutters and Downspouts (Rain Drainage Scuppers). I B. Provide standard products conforming to profiles and sizes required. C. Sheet metal shall be made up and applied in accordance with detailed drawings and be well -framed and cleanly broke with all ragged edges either folded or ground smooth. Contractor shall make special provision to ensure that flashing is supplied as detailed on the drawings. Surfaces to which sheet metal is to be applied shall be even, smooth, sound, dry, clean, and free from any defects which might affect sheet metal application. All cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate the work of other trades shall.be performed. Intent is to provide a tight, weatherproof seal at all locations using metal flashings. D. Masonry flashings shall provide resistance to corrosion by water and the caustic alkalies present in masonry. Flashing must have the ability to form a barrier to water penetration and be easily bent or formed to the required shapes. 1.03 MEASUREMENTS: All work shall be executed from measurements taken at the site, and all measurements given of drawings shall be verified at the building before any work is executed without exception. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS: As per SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS submit detailed shop drawings of all fabricated components. 2.00 MATERIALS: 2.01 MATERAIL DESCRIPTION: A. Miscellaneous mild steel; ASTM A 283. B. Steel stiffeners; galvanized structural steel. C. Galvanized sheet steel; ASTM A93 or A446, as required. Where metal gauges are not noted, use gauge 22. Use gauge 20, minimum 1 for cups. D. Fasteners (nails, bolts, and nuts, power driven fasteners, screws, wasters, etc.), shall be hot -dipped galvanized or stainless steel. E. Flux shall be muriatic acid killed with zinc, or an approved brand of soldering flux, for galvanized steel and rosin for copper. Flux shall be thoroughly washed after soldering is completed. Approved soldering paste: Fed. Spec. 0-F-506. 07600 - 1 F. Cement; Bituminous plastic, Fed. Spec. SS-C-153. G. Paper Underlayment; 6 pound Rosin Sized. H. Building Paper; Waterproof, Fed. Spec. UU-P-147. I. Sealant; CC-50 Polyisobutylene. Include primer as required. J. Butyl sealer: Where impractical to use solder at joints, corner, etc., seal with "DAP Butyl Gutter and Lap -sealer,=or-Cushion-Lock CL-50-Butyl Sealer" K. Asphalt Primer; Fed. Spec. S-A-701. L. Coating Asphalt; Brushing Consistency, Fed. Spec. SS-R-451. M. Zinc Dust Primer; Fed. Spec. TT-E-41. N. Lead and Oil; Red Lead Primer Fed. Spec. TT-P-86a. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION: Fabricate sheet metal flashing to shapes and sizes detailed, allowing sufficient material for up -standing leg. Make - surfaces free of waves and buckles, with lines, rises, and angles sharp and true. Form in strict accordance with _ detailed Drawings. No raw, exposed edges permitted. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Conform to quality, procedures and methods recommended by National Association of Sheet Metal Contractors. Accurately form, fit snugly, have exposed edges folded under at least _ 1/2 inch and no sharp corners left exposed. Anchor work in place with noncorrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes and other materials and devices as recommended by manufacturer of .each material- -, or system. Provide for thermal expansion and building movements. Comply with recommendations of j "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA. Properly shield against galvanic action with asphalt base paint or equivalent. Securely fasten and make absolutely watertight. B. Extend (lashings four (4) inches beyond jambs of openings. Provide expansion joints at all junctions with straight runs at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. Select type best suited and least obtrusive for condition and - make watertight with sealant. C. ' Attach sheet metal to surfaces which are even, smooth,thorou hlY' ry d and clean, free of all defects which 9 might affect application. Any materials furnished hereunder to be built into Work by other shall be in conditions for final installation. Do all cutting, fitting, drilling or other operation in sheet metal required to -accommodate Work of other trades. Provide any items essential to complete the installation, though not specifically shown or specified, of the same kind, quality and type as similar items utilized elsewhere in the building. Apply all sealant and butyl tape per requirements of SEALANTS. D. Clean all surfaces before soldering. Perform soldering slowly with well heated tools to thoroughly heat the sheet and completely sweat the solder through full width of seam. All lock seam work shall be flat and true to line and sweated full of solder. All flat lock seams, and lap seams, where soldered, shall be at least 1 /2 inch and made in direction of drainage flow. Lap seams, not soldered, according to pitch but in no case less than three inches. Thoroughly wash all acid flux work after soldering. E. Wherever possible, secure metal by cleats without nailing through metal. In general, space nails, rivets or screws not more than eight inches apart and where exposed to weather use lead washers. If nailing into - concrete or masonry, use "Dryvins" and drilled holes. F. Join parts with concealed rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength or stiffness. Place sheet together before drilling. Where lap joints are used, lap sheets at least four (4) inches. G. Clean all surfaces concealed after installation, carefully removing grease and oil with solvent or gasoline and wiping with clean rags. H. Seal moving joints in metal work with elastomeric sealants, complying with FS SS-T -0027,-00239, or -1543. 07600 - 2 I. Water-tight/weatherproof performance of flashing and sheet metal work is required. J. Install all reglets in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. K. Separate aluminum from contact with cementitious and absorptive surfaces and from dissimilar metals by a 15 mil coating of bituminous mastic (FF TT-C494) or other permanent separation. 3.03 CLEAN-UP: Per GENERAL CONDITIONS. END OF SECTION 07600 t, M .- 07600 - 3 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07631 GUTTERS AND DOWN SPOUTS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: A. Provide gutter and downspouts as shown on drawings, sized and installed to remove storm waters from the sloped portions of the roof. Storm waters are to be discharged away from any foot traffic areas. Where available discharge storm waters to an underground storm sewer. B. Gutters and downspouts shall be designed to handle freezing condition without showing signs of stress. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide manufactures product data for each component. B. Provide a color sample of each exposed surface of all components. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Southern Aluminum Finish Co. "SAF" Perimeter Systems Division, 216 Hawkins Ave., Sanford, N.C. 27330. Designer Series, Batten Type DSB, Statuary Bronze. B. Other manufacturers being approved as equal of better by the Architect. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Gutter shall be any aluminum industrial type with batten style snap cover, with heavy support bracket and internal straps to resist effect of heavy snow and ice conditions. Also, with expansion joints at 40'-0" centers to absorb thermal movements. The gutter shall be designed to free float independently of the roof structure. B. Downspouts to be designed and supplied by gutter manufacturer. Gutter and downspouts shall.be sized to ' adequately handle average weather conditions in the region. 2.03 ACCESSORIES: Provide manufacturers standard accessories, including factory welded miters and end caps, downspouts, brackets, outlets, and welded downspout elbows. All accessories are to be same finish as gutters. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install gutter to positive drain, to downspout locations. Anchor as per manufacturers recommendations. B. Insure that there are no leaks. Where leaks to occur, stop them by using an approved method as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Insure that gutters, downspouts, and accessories are anchored according to manufacturers recommendations. 3.02 CLEAN-UP: Clean and remove from the site all unused potions and debris. END OF SECTION 07710 07631 - 1 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07740 EXTERIOR INSULATION CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: Provide exterior insulation finish system where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Product data to be submitted within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: A. Manufacturer's data, catalog cuts, dimensioned drawings showing locations of material changes and proposed epansion and control jointing, and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements and to enable proper preparation of the wall sufaces. B. Submit V x V color samples to the architect for approval of colors selected from manufacturer's color charts. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. 2" expanded Polystyrene (EPS Board) less than 25 flame spread, with 1.0 lbs./per cu. ft. Average density mechanically fastened or adhesive applied to substrate in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. B. Reinforcement shall be used to strengthen the surface aginst impact and shall be applied in accordace with manufacturers recommendations using required primers, hardeners and reinforcing fiber mesh. C. The finish shall be.for exterior use and shall be ready -mixed acrylic -based wall coating, color samples to be submitted to the architect for approval. 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURER: Listed below are acceptable manufacturer's for exterior insulation finish systems as specified herein. Other manufacturers will be reviewed upon submittal of product data. A. STO INDUSTRIES, INC. Quality Lane, Box 219 Rutland, Vermont 05701 (B02) 775-4117 C. DRYVIT SYSTEMS, INC. One Energy Way West Warwich, RI 02893 (800) 556-7752 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: B. UNITED STATES GYPSUM COMPANY 125South Franklin Street Chicago, IL 60680 (800) 874-4968 A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 07740 - 1 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades to interface with the work of this Section. B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the Architect, anchoring all items firmly into position for long life under hard use. END OF SECTION 07740 07740 - 2 DIVISION 7 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: Supply all Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: Per SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, submit manufacturer's literature for each material specified designating each material and its specific job application. Include data substantiating that products comply with the specification requirements. 1.03 GUARANTEE: Per GENERAL CONDITIONS, work shall be guaranteed for a period of five (5) years. 1.04 SUBSURFACES: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report in writing to General Contractor, with a copy to Architect, any detrimental conditions. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims to the contrary and will make this Contractor responsible for any corrections Architect may require. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of all subsurfaces. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials to job in original containers with unbroken seals. Store in protected location to prevent damage - or deterioration of materials. Remove damaged material from site and replace at no cost to Owner. I _ . 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Provide type, grade, class, hardness, and similar characteristics of material as indicated or, where not indicated, to comply with manufacturers recommendations relative to exposures, traffic, weather conditions, and other factors of the joint system for bet possible overall performance. B. For exposed materials provide color as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturers standard colors. For concealed materials, provide the natural color which has the best overall performance characteristics. When in doubt of color verify with Architect. C. Before purchase of each required material, confirm its compatibility with each other materials it will be exposed to in the joint system. 2.02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS: A. One -Component Polyurethane Sealant: (At pipe openings on foundation wall). Polyurethane -base one -part elastomeric sealant, complying with FS TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Sikaflex - la Sika Chemical Corporation 2.03 ONE -COMPONENT POLYSULFIDE SEALANT: A. At exterior openings use one -component polysulfide liquid polymer base rubber compound, which cures at normal temperature to a flexible firm rubber gun grade consistency, comply with FS TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class B. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 07900 - 1 Sonolatic two-part, Sonneborn-Contech LP, Thiokol Corp. I' GC-9 Synthical, Pecora Corp. DAP Flexiseal, DAP, Inc. 2.04 BUTYL -BASED COMPOUND: A. Interior applications shall be smooth -flowing single component, architectural grade, synthetic, general purpose caulking compound, composed of 80-100% solids, butyl, non -oily, non -hardening, curing to a task free surface, paintable, in gun grade consistency. B—Acceptable-Manufacturers: Butyl -flex, DAP, Inc. BC-158, Pecora Corp. 2.06 FUEL -RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS: A: To be used in areas as indicated on the drawings, which include but not limited to the Gas Islands, R.V. Islands, Fuel Farm and Diesel Islands. B. Acceptable Manufactures: 1lenlBoX, Inc S-'orIlebo-m, Sonomeric 1 one -Dart bitumen -modified polyurethane, self leveling sealant. Dow Corning Corporation, Dow Corning 888 Silicone Joint Sealant or 888-L self leveling sealant. Morton International, Morton Polymer System, Thiokol 2282 Pecora Corporation Urexpan NR-300 two-part, Self leveling modified poyurethane elastomeric sealant. 2.07 MASTIC: Where mastic is shown on Drawings, it shall be the general purpose butyl based caulking compound herein before specified, except that it shall be knife or trowel consistency. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Oakum Joint Filler: Provide untreated hemp or jute fiber roper free from, oil, tar and other compounds which might stain surfaces, contaminate walls, or not be compatible with sealants. B. Joint Primer/Sealer: Provide the type of joint primer/sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant, provide self-adhesive tape wherever applicable. C. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, . butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non -absorptive material , as recommended for compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer. 3.00 EXECUTION: 3.01 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS: i , A. Set joint filler units at proper depth or position the joint to coordinate with other work, including the installation of bond breakers backer rods and sealants. Do not leave voids or gaps between the ends of filler units. B. Install sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where shown to be omitted or recommended i to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for the application shown. C. Install bond breaker tape wherever shown and wherever required to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly. D. Employ only proven installation techniques which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets. E. Except as otherwise shown, fill sealant rabbet to a lightly concave surface. Fill horizontal joints to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. F. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean the adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. 07900 - 2 G. All caulking and sealants shall be installed as per manufacturers recommended actions. All surfaces shall be dry and clean or treated as directed by caulking manufacturer. All exterior joints, connections, fastenings, etc. subject to weather or allowing air opening into the building shall be completely sealed with sealant whether indicated or not on the drawings. Seal all interior joints a indicated on the Drawings or as required to seal to the exterior. 3.02 CLEAN-UP: Per GENERAL CONDITIONS END OF SECTION 07900 07900 - 3 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Steel Doors and Frames 08210 Wood Doors 08360 Upward Acting Sectional Doors 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08700 Builders Hardware 08823 Insulating Glass and Glazing _9 rDIVISION 8 SECTION 08100 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE: A. Extent of standard steel doors and frames is shown and scheduled on drawings. B. Builder's hardware is specified elsewhere in Division B. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) and as herein specified. 1.03 MANUFACTURER: A. Provide standard steel doors and frames by a single firm specializing in production of this type of work. B. Provide steel doors and frames by one of the following: Amweld Building Products Div. Ceco Corp. Curries Mfg. Inc. Dittco Products Div. Fenestra Corp. Masker Industries, Inc. ' Republic Builders Prod. Corp. SteelCraft Mfg. Co. L 1.04 FIRE -RATED ASSEMBLIES: ,w Provide fire -rated doors investigated and tested as fife door assemblies, complete with type of hardware to be used. Identify each fire door with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire rating of steel doors. Construct and install assemblies to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80, and as herein specified. 1.05 TEMPERATURE RISE RATING: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors which have Temperature Rise Rating of 450oF (232oC) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.06 PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and installation, including data substantiating that products comply with requirements. 1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. B. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. 1.08 LABEL CONSTRUCTION CERTIFICATION: Submit manufacturer's certification for oversize fire -rated doors and frames that each assembly has been constructed 08100 - 1 with materials and methods equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided finish items are equal in all respect to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on wood sills at least 4" high, or otherwise store on floors in manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1 /4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip of commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets of commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 56. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets of zinc coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors fabricate of not less than 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners of manufacturer's standard units except hot -dip galvanized items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied Paint to be rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non -flush units, from only cold -rolled steel. C. Fabricate frames concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold - rolled or hot -rolled steel (at fabricator's option). D. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of inverted steel channels. E. Exposed Fasteners, unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. F. Thermal -Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: 1 At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or schedule, provide doors which have been fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C236. .2 Unless otherwise indicated, max. apparent U factor for thermal -rated assemblies is 0.24 BTU/hr(ft2)oF. G. Finish Hardware Preparation: 1 Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A 115 08100 - 2 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. .2 Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied finish hardware may be done at project site. .3 Locate finish hardware as shown on final shop drawings or, if not shown, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware," published by Door and Hardware Institute. �J 2.03 STANDARD STEEL DOORS: A. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings or schedules. B. Door Louvers: 1 Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24 gauge cold rolled steel set into 20 gauge steel frame. .2 For fire -rated openings, provide tightly fitted, spring loaded, automatic closing louvers with operable blades, II equipped with fusible links, arranged so that metal overlaps metal at every joint. `.I .3 Use only louvers listed by UL or FM and factory -applied doors. 2.04 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES: A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fabricate frames with mitered corners, welded construction for interior and exterior and masonry wall applications. I! C. Form exterior frames.of hot dip galvanized steel. +�-11 D. Door Silencers: , .1 Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 2 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -swing frames. .2 Manufacturer's "stick -on" silencers will be acceptable in lieu of drilled type. ? E. Plaster Guards shall be 26 gauge steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. 3.00 EXECUTION: 3.01 INSPECTION: Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: Install standard steel doors, frames and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings and manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. * 3.03 PLACING FRAMES: A. Comply with provisions of SDI.105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel frames", unless otherwise indicated. B. Except for frames located at in place concrete or masonry and at drywall installations, place frames prior to construction at enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and 08100 - 3 spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. C. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames is specified in Division 4. D. At in place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. E. Install fire-rate2d frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80. F. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws. 3.04 DOOR INSTALLATION: A. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100. B. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. 3.05 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Prime Coat Touch -Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving, steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08100 08100 - 4 p DIVISION 8 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I1 1.01 SCOPE: A. Extent and location of each type of wood door is shown on drawings and in schedules. t B. Types of door required include the following: 1 Solid core flush wood doors with veneer faces. C. Louvers for wood doors, including furnishing and installation are specified under this section. �i I� 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: References: Comply with the applicable requirements of ANSI/SWMA I.S. 1, "Industry Standard for Wood Flush -�i Doors" published by National Woodwork manufacturers Association (NWMA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing and other pertinent data. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: ,1 Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced ANSI standards and recommendations of NWMA pamphlet "Care and Finishing of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer's instructions. 2.00 MATERIALS I� 2.01 Manufacturer: a Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Algoma Hardwoods Inc. Cal -Wood Door Div., Timberland Ind., Inc. Eggers Hardwood Products Corp. Glen -Mar Door Mfg. Co. Weyerhauser Company. 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: f II A. Provide wood doors complying with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kinds and types of doors indicated and as specified. I I B. Face Panels to be manufacturer's standard 2- or 3-ply face panels, unless otherwise indicated. C. Exposed Surfaces: Provide kind shown or scheduled and as further specified. Provide same exposed surface ,7 y material on both faces of each door, unless otherwise indicated. D. Door Louvers: Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 24 gauge cold rolled steel set into 20 gauge steel frame.Use only louvers listed by UL or FM and factory -applied doors. 08210 - 1 2.03 GENERAL FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS: A. Transom and Side Panels: Wherever transom panels or side panels of wood are shown in same framing systems as wood doors, provide panels which match quality and appearance of associated wood doors, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces and finish as specified for associated doors. B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors and panels as shown. Comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required. C. Light -Openings: —Factory -cut -openings. -Trim openings or of on Tire-rate"&ors with 20 gauge cold rolled steel frame. 2.04 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS: A. Solid doors for transparent finish shall be 3 ply plain sliced natural oak of premium grade. B. Core to be constructed of particle board with an average density of 28 to 32 pounds per cubic foot. C. Core to be constructed in manufacturer standard core construction as required to provide fire -resistance rating indicated. D. Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated edge construction for improved screw -holding capability and split resistance over edges composed of a single layer of treated lumber. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: Installer must examine door frames and verify that frames are correct type and have been installed as required for proper hanging of corresponding doors and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation of wood doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation areas prior to hanging. B. For hardware installation see Division 8 "Builders Hardware" section of these specifications C. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80. D. Job Fit Doors: Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge and machine for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machinery. Bevel non -fire rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges. E. Clearance for non -rated doors; provide clearances of 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/8" at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1 /2" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or schedules, provide 1 /4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. For fire -rated doors, provide clearances complying with NFPA 80. F. Job Site Finished Doors: See painting sections in Division 9 of these specifications for requirements for finishing wood doors. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely, as directed by Architect. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation, as directed by Architect. C. Protection and Completed Work: Advise Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage or deterioration until acceptance of work. END OF SECTION 08210 08210 - 2 DIVISION 8 SECTION 08360 UPWARD ACTING ' SECTIONAL DOOR CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and Division 1 apply to this section. „t 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: j`•�� 1.01 SCOPE: - Extent of upward acting sectional doors is shown on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Furnish each upward acting sectional door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components. B. Unless otherwise acceptable to Architect, furnish upward acting sectional door units by one manufacturer for entire project. C. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce upward acting sectional doors to withstand wind loads as specified by American National Standard Institute (ANSI) unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: 1I� Submit manufacturer's product date, roughing -in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of upward acting sectional door. Include operating instructions and maintenance information. 2.00 MATERIALS: 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Arm-R-Lite Door Manufacturing Co. Clopay Corp. Cenco/Windsor Door Co. !� Finishline Industries, Inc. General American Door Co. Kinnear Div., Harsco Corp. Poryene McKee Inc. Overhead Door Corp. Wayne Dalton Corp. J]{ 2.02 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION: tU A. Door Curtain: Fabricate upward acting sectional door curtain of interlocking slats designed to withstand required wind loading, of continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material gauge recommended by door manufacturer for size and type of door required, and as follows: G' .1 Sections shall be 2" thick 20 gauge commercial quality galvanized steel sheets to have flush exterior. End stiles shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel. Center stiles shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel. The end stiles and center stiles shall be clinch -riveted to the outside section face and shall be double spot welded for maximum rigidity at both ends. Meeting rail joint shall be tongue and groove for weather tight closure. B. Bottom Bar: Bottom section will have weather seal astragal made of PVC vinyl and fastened by an aluminum retainer. C. Finish: Exterior of door to be prefinished with a 3 coat process of a baked on top coat over an epoxy primer on a phosphate coating. 1 08360 - 1 D. Hardware: All hinges and brackets to be manufactured of hot dipped galvanized steel. 14 gauge minimum. Rollers to be full floating ball bearing in case hardened steel races mounted to fit the slope of the track. E. Tracks: Vertical tracks to be minimum of 17 gauge galvanized steel tapered and mounted for wedge type closing. Horizontal tracks to be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel reinforced with minimum 13 gauge galvanized angles as required. Two inch and three inch as required. G. Insulation: 2"" thick insulated door sections with expanded polystyrene foam to have fire retardant additive to meet UL-15=819-A. Inside-backing-material-shall-be-2-7-gauge-steel. H. Weather Seals: Provide vinyl or neoprene weatherstripping for exterior exposed doors except where otherwise noted. At door jambs, use 1 /8" thick continuous trip secured to exterior side of jamb guide. 2.03 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM: Spring Counterbalance: Door assembly to be operated by a torsion spring, helically wound and oil tempered, mounted on a steel shaft in ball bearing brackets. Cable drums to be die cast aluminum. Connect to door with galvanized aircraft quality cable with minimum 7 to 1 safety factor. 2.04 PAINTING: Shop clean and prime ferrous metal surfaces, exposed and unexposed, except faying and lubricated surfaces and galvanized metal, with door manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer. 2.05 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS: A. Provide manual operators except where electric door operators are indicated. B. Manual Push -Up Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbs. Adjust operating mechanism so that curtain can be easily stopped at any point in its travel and to remain in position until movement is reactivated. C. Provide galvanized steel lifting handle and slide bolt lock on inside bottom bar. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein. B. Upon completion of installation including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter. END OF SECTION 08360 08360 - 2 t DIVISION 8 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE: A. Extent of aluminum entrances and storefronts is shown on drawings and schedules. �i B. Types of aluminum entrances and storefronts required include the following: i Exterior entrance doors. Vestibule doors matching entrance doors. Frames for exterior doors. Storefront type framing system. ` C. Glazing: Refer to "Glass and Glazing" section of Division 8 for glazing requirements for aluminum entrances + I and storefronts, including doors specified herein to be factor reglazed. r D. Mortise lock cylinders are specified in Division 8 hardware section. 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES: A. General: Provide exterior entrance and storefront assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply II with requirements for system performance characteristics listed below as demonstrated by testing t• manufacturer's corresponding stock systems according to test methods designated. B. Thermal Movement:- Allow for expansion and contraction resulting from ambient temperature range of 120oF ' (49oC). 'w C. Wind Loading: Provide capacity to withstand loading indicated below, tested per ASTM E 330. Uniform, r ' pressure of 20 psf inward and 20 psf outward. D. Transmission Characteristics of Fixed Framing: Comply with requirements indicated below for transmission characteristics and test methods. Y. E. Air and Water Leakages: Air infiltration of not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area per ASTM E 283 and no uncontrolled water penetration per ASTM E 331 at pressure differential of 6.24 psf (excluding operable door edges). F. Condensation Resistance: Not less than 51 CRF per AAMA 1502.7. G, Thermal Transmittance: U-value of not more than 0,65 Btu/(hr x sf x oF) per AAMA 1503.1. H. Transmission Characteristics of Entrances: Provide entrance doors with jamb and head frames which comply with requirements indicated below for transmission characteristics and test methods. I. Air Leakage: Air infiltration per linear foot of perimeter crack of not more than 0.50 CFM for single doors and 1.0 CFM for pairs of doors per ASTM E 283 at pressure differential of 1.567 psf. h J. Condensation Resistance: Not less than 48 CRF per AAMA 1502.7. L. Thermal Transmittance: U-value of not more than 0.93 Btu/(hr x sf x oF) per AAMA 1503.1. -1� 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Drawings: Plans, elevations and details show spacings of members as well as profile and similar dimensional requirements of aluminum entrances and storefront work. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products when, in Architect's sole judgment, such deviations do not materially detract from design concept or intended performance. 08410 - 1 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation recommendations for components of aluminum entrances and storefronts required for project, including test reports certifying that products have been tested and comply with performance requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts, including elevations, detail sections of typical composite members, hardware mounting heights, anchorages, reinforcement, expansion provisions and glazing. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Alumiline/Aldora Amarlite/Arco Metals Co. Arcadia, Northrop Architectural Systems. Cronstroms Mfg. Inc. Howmet Aluminum Corp. Kawneer Company, Inc PPG Industries, Inc. Tubelite Div., Indal Inc. United States Aluminum Corp., International Alum. Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES: A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted' -by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components. Provide any exposed fasteners to match finish of members and hardware being fastened. C. Concealed Flashing: Dead -soft stainless steel, 26 gauge minimum, or extruded aluminum, 0.062" minimum, of an alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high -strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386. E. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386. Bituminous Coatings: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC - PS 12, compounded for 30-mil thickness per coat. G. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable stripping of either molded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric'or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide glass and glazing materials which comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section,')f thee specifications. 2.03 HARDWARE: A. General: Refer to hardware section of Division 8 for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated herein to be provided by manufacturer of aluminum entrances. Provide door manufacturer's standard heavy- { y duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required, finished to match door, unless otherwise indicated. B. Ball -Bearing Butts: 5-knuckle, 2-bearings, steel/bronze sized to comply with ANSI A156.1, grade 2 08410 - 2 A. Pi requirements; 2 butts for doors T-V or less, 3 for taller doors. C. Overhead Closures: Units complying with ANSI A 156.4, of the following type, grade, functions and features: k Overhead, exposed, modern type with cover,Grade 1, with Parallel arm mounting. D. Deadlatches: Standard mortise type with strike box. (� E. Deadlocks: Mortised maximum security type, with 1 " minimum length pivoted bolt, strike box. -r F. Lever Handles: Inside units of cast aluminum alloy. G. Thumb -Turns: Inside cylinders of cast aluminum alloy. _ H. Keyed Cylinders: Inside units, 5-pin tumbler, with cast aluminum face. I'> I. Keyed Cylinders: Outside units, 5-pin tumbler, with cast aluminum fact. J. Flushbolts: Standard edge mortised type, for inactive leaves of pairs of doors. Provide at both top and bottom , of doors. K. Push -Pull Plates: Standard aluminum units of style indicated, or as recommended by manufacturer if not indicated. L. Pull Handles: Standard aluminum units of style indicated, or as recommended by manufacturer if not indicated. } �• M. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots and floor -concealed closures, of size indicated or manufacturer's standard if not indicated. i 2.04 FABRICATION: i A. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, including profile requirements, are indicated on drawings. Any variable dimensions are indicated, together with maximum and minimum dimensions required „S to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. B. Prefabrication: To greatest extent possible, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 'I I 1. Pre -glaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible in coordination with installation and hardware requirements. J.2 Do not drill and tap for surface -mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. .3 Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work in manner which prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. For hardware, perform these operations prior to application of finishes. C. Sequence: Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, surface treatment and application of finishes. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners to ' radius of approximately 1/64". D. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations to avoid discoloration; grind exposed welds smooth and restore f mechanical finish. i' c� E. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements; separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator which will prevent corrosion. F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. _ H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops; at other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained.in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. .1 Provide EPDM/vinyl blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. 08410 - 3 2 At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. 2.05 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM: A. General: Provide inside -outside matched resilient flush -glazed system with provisions for glass replacement. Shop -fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. B. Thermal -break Construction: Fabricate aluminum storefront framing system with integrally concealed, low condu-c-ta0ceshermaLbarrier,-located-between-exterior-materials-and exposed -interior membersTin manner -which — eliminates direct metal -to -metal contact. Provide manufacturer's standard construction which has been in use for similar projects for period of not less than 3 years. 2.06 STILE AND RAIL TYPE ALUMINUM DOORS: A. Frame: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j-bolts, or fabricate with structurally welded joints, at manufacturer's option. B. Design: Provide doors 1-3/4" thick and of design indicated. C. Style: Except as otherwise shown or scheduled, provide doors 2-1 /4" thick and of indicated style, as described in AAMA publications: narrow stile (2" nominal width) D. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of door stiles and rails. Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for non -removal. E. Finishes: Anodized Aluminum Finishes: Class I Color Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A31/A44 (non-specular as fabricated mechanical finish; chemical etch, medium matte; 0.7 mil min. thick integrally or electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating). Or, as indicated elsewhere in the specifications or as indicated on plans, provide: Flouropolymer Coating: Full-strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked -on for 15 minutes at 450oF (232oC), in a dry film thickness of 1.0 miles, 30% reflective gloss (ASTM D 523), over 0.3 mil baked -on epoxy primer. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 Field Measurement: Wherever possible, take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, proceed with fabrication and coordinate installation tolerances as necessary when field measurements might delay work. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. B. Set units plumb, level and true to line without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Anchor securely in place, separating aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. C. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface -mounted hardware items, complying with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. D. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. E. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels shown to be glazed into doors and framing, and not pre -glazed by manufacturer. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: 08410 - 4 j� A. Adjust operating hardware to function property, without binding and to provide tight fit at contact points and ' weatherstripping. B. Clean completed system, inside and out, promptly after erection and installation of glass and sealants. Remove excess glazing and joint sealant, dirt, and other substances from aluminum surfaces. C. Institute protective measures and other precautions required to assure that aluminum entrances and storefronts 1. will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. _Y END OF SECTION 08410 I� 7 08410 - 5 n DIVISION SECTION 08700 BUILDERS HARDWARE I d CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: I 1.01 SCOPE: "Builders Hardware" includes items known commercially as builders hardware which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and non -matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. Type of items in this section include (but are not necessarily limited to): Hinges Lock cylinders and keys Lock and latch sets �►�i Bolts W Exit devices Push/pull units Closers Miscellaneous door control devices Door trim units Protection Plates —, Weatherstripping for exterior doors Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors -- Thresholds Security products 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: _ A. Manufacturer: Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closures, etc.) from only one �+ manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Supplier: A recognized builders hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or employs an experienced hardware consultant who is.available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: �} A. Submit manufacturers product data including the technical information for each item of hardware. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include -� instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finish. b. Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Hardware schedules are intended for coordination of work. Based on builders hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: 1 Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. f-, I' .2 Name and manufacturer of each item. .3 Fastenings and other pertinent information. .4 Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 0 .5 Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. contained in schedule. .6 Mounting locations for hardware. .7 Door and frame sizes and materials. 08700 - 1 f 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer's offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: Advanced Coating Technology AFG Industries, Inc. General_Glass_Corp. Guardian Industries Corp. Kawneer Kwick-Temp., Inc. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. PPG -Industries - - The Southwall Corporation 2.02 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS: A. Insulating Glass Standards: Provide preassembled sealed insulating glass units which comply with ASTM E 774 requirements for classification "Class A". B. Sizes: Fabricate insulating glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated. 2.03 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS FOR INSULATING GLASS: A. Tinted Float Glass: Type I, Class 2 (heat absorbing and light reducing), quality Q3 (glazing select), of tint and with performance characteristics for 1/4" thick glass listed below: B. Bronze: Manufacturer's standard tint, with visible light transmittance of 50-52% and .shading co -efficient of 0.67-0.71. 2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS: A. Provide preassembled units consisting or organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space; comply with requirements indicated for glass characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, space material, corner design and desiccant. U-values indicated are expressed in Btu/(hr x sf x degree F). Thickness of each pane: 1/4" Air space thickness: 1/8" Sealing -System: —Manufacturer's -standard Spacer Material: Manufacturer's standard metal Desiccant: Manufacturer's standard materials Corner Design: Manufacturer's standard B. Uncoated Insulating Glass Units: Provide manufacturer's standard units complying with the following requirements: Exterior Pane: Tinted Float Glass Grade: Heat strength, unless otherwise indicated. C. Interior Pane of Glass: Clear float glass. Grade: As indicated D. Spandrel Glass: Provide manufacturer's standard units with heat strengthened exterior pane matching that required for coated insulating glass units and with interior pane of spandrel glass. 08823 - 2 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS: A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. t B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility. —� C. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility. of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Edge Block: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement of glass. I 3.00 EXECUTION i 3.01 INSPECTION: Require Glazer to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and installation .. } tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners, for presence and functioning of weep system, for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances, and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazer's { written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION: Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing, Remove coating which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. 3.03 GLAZING: Comply with combined printed recommendations of insulating glass manufacturers and of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those.ofn�, referenced glazing standards. - 'c ( 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING: A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation. Remove non -permanent labels and* clean 4 surface. y B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during: construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. - -,- C. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08823 I, 08823 - 3 M DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09010 Exterior Finishes and Color Listings 09250 Gypsum Drywall 09300 Tile 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpeting 09900 Painting 09950 Wall Covering 1 p DIVISION 9 SECTION 09010 -- EXTERIOR FINISHES & J COLOR LISTING —I CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT, DIVISION 1, and the General Provisions of the Drawings apply to this Section. 1.00 SCOPE^ The intent herewith is to give the bidders a limited description of products, colors, and description of patterns to be used. Each item described herein and additional approved manufacturers and all work required therefore and _ appurtenant thereto is specified elsewhere in this Project Manual of Specifications. 2.00 DESCRIPTION OF EXTERIOR MATERIALS FINISHES AND COLORS: a--, 2.01 COUNTRY MARKET RESTAURANT: This area is limited to Restaurant area as depicted on the Floor Plan, Exterior Elevations and Roof Plan. ;i A. CONCRETE ROOF TILES: Monier, Split Shake Style, Sea Green. - B. FASCIA: Mitsubishi Kasai Corp., Alpolic - Citgo Cream, 4 Cry - g 50%. C. GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS:.032"Aluminum with Kynar 500 finish, Classic Cream. )r D. BRACKET AT ROOF OVERHANGS: Factory Finish to match Fascia color, Citgo Cream. E. STOREFRONT DOORS/SIDELIGHTS/WINDOW FRAMES, excluding wood finish door leaves: Dark Bronze Anodized Aluminum. F. STOREFRONT DOORS' GLAZING FRAMES, SIDELIGHTS' GLAZING, AND WINDOW GLAZING DIVIDER GRILLS/MUNTINS: Dark Brown to match Window Frames. G. FACE BRICK VENEER HERRINGBONE PATTERN " TYPE 1 ": Provide a tumbled texture brick to match Trinity White Split Face Block as listed below on Flying J Travel Plaza. Or, Acme Heritage Brick, Blend name BL 455 Oyster WHITE, with Tumbled Texture. H. FACE BRICK VENEER RUNNING BOND STD. HALF LAP PATTERN " TYPE 2": Provide a tumbled texture brick to Match, or equal to Interpace Industries, Inc., Queen Size, Sea Spice Color. I. SOFFITS: Match fascia color, Citgo Cream, or, provide Heartland, Almond, perforated panels. J. FISHSCALE SIDING: Wolverine Technologies, Almond. K. SHUTTERS: Georgia Pacific, Savannah Shutters, Louvered Vinyl, Hunter Green Color. L. EXTERIOR ENTRANCE SIDEWALK: Provide Stamped Concrete Slab, using Bomanite Corp., Bomacron Pattern English Sidewalk Slate. Concrete color admixture with L.M. Scofield Co., Chromix standard color - C - 15 Coachella Sand. M. MISC. METAL TRIM AND LOUVERS: Color to match fascia, cream. N. AWNINGS: SUNBRELLA, Hemlock Tweed Fancy #4751. O. MORTAR COLOR: Standard Portland Cement Gray. 2.02 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA: This area is limited to the Convenience Store and Drivers Facilities as depicted on the Floor Plan, Exterior Elevation and Roof Plan. A. CONCRETE ROOF TILES: MONIER, Split Shake Style, Barn Wood. B. FASCIA: Mitsubishi Kasai Corp., Alpolic - Statuary Bronze. f , I C. GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS:.032"Aluminum with Kynar 500 finish, Dark Bronze. 09010 - 1 D. STOREFRONT DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES: Dark Bronze Anodized Aluminum. E. UNIT MASONRY VENEER RUNNING BOND STD. HALF LAP PATTERN " TYPE 3": Provide a Split Face block 4" x 4" x 16" nominal size, Trinity White Range. F. UNIT MASONRY VENEER SOLDIER AND ROWLOCK COURSE " TYPE 3": Provide a Split Face block 4" x 4" x 16" nominal size, Trinity White Range. G. SOFFITS: Color, White, or, provide Heartland, White, perforated panels. H. INSULATED HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES: Paint to match Wendigo (Dark Brown) I. UPWARD ACTING SECTIONAL DOORS: Paint to match Wendigo (Dark Brown) M. MISC. METAL TRIM AND LOUVERS: Color to match-fasciacream. N. MORTAR COLOR: White to match Trinity White Unit Masonry. 2.03 CANOPIES AND PARKING AREAS: This area is all areas exterior of the building structures. A. CANOPY FASCIA AND COLUMNS " GAS ISLAND": Canopy fascia to match Conoco, Dark Khaki with Conoco, Charcoal column wraps. B. CANOPY FASCIA AND COLUMNS at DIESEL ISLANDS: Canopy fascia to match Mitsubishi Kasai Corp., Alpolic - Statuary Bronze. Canopy columns paint to match Wendigo (Dark Brown). C. ISLAND FORMS, BENT PIPE BOLLARDS, and P.O.S. Card Readers at GAS ISLANDS: Paint to match Conoco, Charcoal. D. ISLAND FORMS and P.O.S. PEDESTALS at RV AND DIESEL ISLANDS: Paint to match Pratt & Lambert, Wendigo (Dark Brown). E. ISLAND BOLLARDS at DIESEL ISLANDS: To remain natural -concrete color. F. PIPE BOLLARDS IN SERVICE AREA: Paint Wendigo (Dark Brown) G. PROPANE TANK BOLLARDS: Paint to match Pratt & Lambert, Wendigo (Dark Brown) H. PARKING STRIPES: On asphalt surfaces paint white, on concrete surfaces paint yellow, for handicap area use light blue, or as directed by local codes. NO -PARKING DIAGONAL STRIPES and ADJACENT FACES OF CURBS: Paint red color. I. TRUCK WEIGH SCALES WHEEL GUARD RAILING, PHONE PEDESTAL, AND LIGHT AND CAMERA POLE: Paint top rail orange and vertical supports paint to match Pratt & Lambert, Wendigo (Dark Brown). J. TRASH ENCLOSURE FENCING: Provide with black PVC coating and black vertical slats. END OF SECTION 09010 09010 - 2 DIVISION 9 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM DRYWALL 5 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE: i. Provide gypsum drywall and accessories where shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: r A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01030. j B. Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to proceed, submit: E 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used in the Work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: All Gypsum Wallboard shall be protected from the Weather while in transit and at the site. When delivered it shall immediately be placed on Sills, under cover and adequately protected from Weather. Neatly stack Gypsum Board Flat to prevent Sagging. Do Not pile more than three days in advance of installation. 2.00 MATERIALS: 2.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD: A. Provide gypsum wallboard complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D, in 48" widths and in such lengths as will result in a minimum of joints. B. Regular wallboard: Provide Type III, grade R, class 1, 5/8" thick except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawings. C. Fire -retardant wallboard: Provide type III, grade X, class 1, 5/8" thick, compling with ASTM C 36 D. Water-resistant wallboard: Provide type VII, grade W or X as required, class 2, 5/8" thick except as may be shown otherwise on the Drawings. Compling with ASTM C 630. I E. Foil -backed wallboard: Provide as shown on the Drawings. 1 F. Shaft walls: Where so indicated on the Drawings, provide gypsum wallboard system specifically designed for encasing shafts of the required fire -resistivity , and complying with Fed -Spec SS-L-30D, type R or X, class 1, in the dimensions shown or otherwise required. G. Sheathing: Where gypsum wallboard sheathing is indicated on the Drawings, provide gypsum wallboard I complying with Fed Spec SS-L-30D, TYPE II, grade W, class 2. 09250 - 1 H. Wall tile base: Where shown on plans to provide ceramic tile on walls, provide a water-resistant wall board as Specified in D above or fiber reinforced cenentuious board for specific area as indicated on plans. I. Wet areas: At all showers and mop sink and similar wet areas install water-resistant wallboard as Specified in D above. A min. of 2'-0" each side and 4'-0" above wet areas. Apply with un-cut edge at bottom of work, and 1 /4" above fixture lips. Seal ends, cut -edges and penetrations of each piece with water resistant adhesive or, where recommended by wall board manufacturer, with water resistant join compound. __2.0.2_ METAL TRIM; ---- A. Form from zinc -coated steel not lighter than 26 gage, complying with Fed Spec QQ-S-775, class d or e. B. Casing beads: 1 Provide channel -shapes with an exposing wing, and with a concealed wing not less than 7/8" wide. .2 The exposed wing may be covered with paper cemented to the metal, but shall be suitable for joint treatment. C. Corner beads: Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 7/8" wide and perforated for nailing and joint treatment, or with combination metal and paper wings bonded together, not less than 1-1 /4" wide and suitable for joint treatment. D. Edge beads for use at perimeter of ceilings: .1 Provide angle shapes with wings not less than 3/4" wide. .2 Provide concealed wing perforated for nailing and exposed wing edge folded flat. .3 Exposed wing may be factory finished in white color. 2.03 JOINTING SYSTEM: A. Provide a jointing system, including reinforced tape and compound, designed as a system to be used together as recommended for this use by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for use on this Work. B. Jointing compound may be used for finishing of so recommended by its manufacturer. 2.04 FASTENING DEVICES: A. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on metal studs and metal channels, use flat -head screws, shouldered, specially designed for use with power -driven tools, not less than 1" long with self -taping threads and self -drilling points. B. For fastening gypsum wallboard in place on wood, use 1-1/4" type E bugle -head screws, or use annular ring type nails complying with ASTM C514 and of the length required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Nailing must be pre approved by Architect. 2.05 ACCESS DOORS: A. In partitions and ceilings installed under this Sections, provide doors where required for access to mechanical installations and electrical installations. B. Types: 1 Unless otherwise required, provide 24" x 24" metal access doors with concealed hinges to metal frame, and with Allen key lock. .2 For piercing fire -rated surfaces, provide access doors having the same fire rating as the surface being pierced. .3 For tile surfaces and toilet rooms, provide stainless steel access doors and frames, with satin finish. 09250 - 2 i r .4 For other installations, provide prime -coated steel access doors and frames for finish painting to be performed at the job site under Section 09900 of these Specifications. 1 2.06 OTHER MATERIALS: Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. li 3.00 EXECUTION: ' 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: I Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. A. General: .1 Install the gypsum wallboard in accordance with the Drawings and the separate boards in moderate contact i but not forced into place. .2 At internal and external corners, conceal the cut edges of the boards by overlapping covered edges of the abutting boards. .3 Stagger the boards so that corners of all four boards will not meet at a common point except in vertical corners. B. Ceilings: .1 Install the gypsum wallboard to ceilings with the long dimension of the wallboard at right angles to the supporting members. .2 Wallboard may be installed with the long dimension parallel to supporting members that are spaced 16" on centers when attachment members are provided at end joints. C. Walls: .1 Install the gypsum wallboard to studs at right angles to the furring or framing members. 1 .2 Make end joints, where required, over framing or furring members. D. Attaching: .1 Drive the specified screws with clutch -controlled power screwdrivers, spacing the screws 12" on centers at ceilings and 16" on centers at walls. .2 Where framing members are spaced 24" apart on walls, space screws 12" on centers. .3 Attach double layers in accordance with the pertinent codes and the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect. .4 Attach to wood as required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. E. Access doors: .1 By careful coordination with the Drawings and with the trades involved, install the specified access doors where required. . _ 1 .2 Anchor firmly into position, and align properly to achieve an installation flush with the finished surface. 3.02 JOINT TREATMENT: A. General: 1 Inspect areas to be jointed treated, verifying that the gypsum wallboard fits snugly against supporting 09250 - 3 framework. .2 In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will be performed, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degrees for 24 hours prior to commencing the treatment, and until joint and finishing compounds have dried. .3 Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine or hand tool. .4 Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats, with additional drying time in poorly ventilated areas — .5 In areas to be Tile or in wet areas where water-resistant wallboard is required. Treat Fastener Heads with water-resistant joint compound. Fill tapered edges in wall board and wipe off excess compound: follow immediately with a second coat of water resistant compound. Follow process as described in 3.3.6 and 3.3.0 below. B. Embedding compounds: .1 Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and fastener heads in a thin uniform layer. .2 Spread the compound not less than 3" wide at joints, center the reinforcing tape in the joint, and embed the tape in the compound. Then spread a thin layer of compound over the tape. .3 After this treatment has dried, apply a second coat of embedding compound to joints and fastener heads, spreading in a thin uniform coat not less than 6" wide at joints, and feather edge. .4 Sandpaper between coats as required. .5 When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points. C. Finishing Compounds: 1 After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing compound to joints and fastener heads. .2 Feather the finishing compound to not less than 12" wide. .3 When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth surface, taking care not to scuff the paper surface of the wallboard. 3.03 CORNER TREATMENT: A. Internal corners: Treat as specified for joints, except fold the reinforcing tape lengthwise through the middle and fit neatly into the corner. B. External corners: 1 Install the specified corner bead, fitting neatly over the corner and securing with the same type fasteners used for installing the wallboard. .2 Space the fasteners approximately 6" on centers, and drive through the wallboard into the framing or furring member. .3 After the corner bead has been secured into position, treat the corner with joint compound and reinforcing tape as specified for joints, feathering the joint compound out from 8" to 10" on each side of the corner. 3.04 OTHER METAL TRIM: A. General: 1 The drawings do not purport to show all locations and requirements for metal trim. .2 Carefully study the Drawings and the installation, and provide all metal trim normally recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum wallboard approved for use in this Work. 09250 - 4 3.05 APPLIED TEXTURES: -� Provide textures at all area listed or shown on plans, with Manufacturers recommended compound for the purpose intended. Provide applications as listed below following Manufacturers recommendations. .1 Light Stipple: Splatter spray areas shown or listed on plan, with an even texture to achieve a 90% coverage -% min. Splatter size shall not exceed 3/16" coverage. .2 Light Dab with Knock Down: Lightly dab compound in areas shown or listed on plans to produce an even texture, allowing compound to begin to set. Lightly towel surface to knock down any rough areas and to j achieve a uniform texture. 3.06 CLEANING UP: A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary care to prevent scattering gypsum wallboard scraps and dust, and to prevent tracking gypsum and join finishing compound onto floor surfaces. ,i B. At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space, promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scrap, debris, and surplus material of this Section. END OF SECTION 09250 I 09250 - 5 Florida Tile Div., Sikes Corp. '( Dal Tile Corporation ' E. Latex Portland Cement Grout: A.B. Fuller Company Latricrete International Inc. L & M Surco Mfg. Co., Inc. The Upco Company! , Bostik Construction Products _ Custom Building Products -- P 2.02 PRODUCTS: - A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile:- Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American national Standard specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types and grades of tile indicated. B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with installation products and materials indicated. C. Colors, Textures and Patterns: 1 For tile and other products requiring selection of colors, -surface textures or other appearance characteristics, provide products to match characteristics indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 2 Provide tile trim and accessories which match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. .3 Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools, on exteriors or in wet areas, do not use back or edge -mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies that this type of mounting is suitable for these kinds of use and has been successfully used on other projects. 2.03 TILE PRODUCTS: A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory -mounted flat tile complying with the following requirements: Type: Porcelain. Wearing Surface: Slip -Resistant tile with abrasive content.,] Nominal Facial Dimensions: As indicated. f Nominal Thickness: As indicated. Face: As indicated. B. Glazed Paver Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements: d; G Type: Natural clay. Nominal Facial Dimensions: As indicated. Nominal Thickness: As indicated. Face: As indicated. C. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following: Nominal Facial Dimensions: As indicated. Nominal Thickness: As indicated. Face: As indicated. Mounting: Factory back -mounted. D. Trim -Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements: Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile, where applicable. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes. E. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved. F. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose Cap. , 09300 - 2 G. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above. H. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape with a radius of not less than 3/4" unless otherwise indicated. I. Internal Corners: Field -butted square corners, except use internal cove and cap angle pieces designed to I member with stretcher shapes. J. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior use and abrasion resistance for uses subject to heavy foot traffic. See floor covering plan for location. Provide white, bonded marble complying with MIA Group "A" requirements for soundness. K. Precast Terrazzo Shower Receptor (Alt CT-2): Local manufacturer to submit shop drawings and color selections. One piece concrete terrazzo shower receptor, size as shown on drawings, with flanges for receiving i ceramic wall tile and integral drain with strainer and clamping collar. /.l L. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials to comply with ANSI A108.1 as required for installation method designated, unless otherwise indicated. Use self -furring lath over sold subsurfaces. 2.04 LATEX-PORTLAND CEMENT GROUT: A. Proprietary pre -blended compound of Portland cement, selected and graded aggregates, color pigments and - chemical additives gaged with latex additive to comply with manufacturer's directions. 'r B. Use latex additive in grout which is compatible with latex additive in latex-portland cement mortar. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Tile Cleaner, produce specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation, 112 North Alfred St., Alexandria, VA 22134 or Ceramic Tile Institute, 700 N. Virgil Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90029. B. Grout Sealer, Penetrating Sealer and Grout release to seal porous tile prior to grouting to prevent grout staining and to seal grout joints after installation as manufactured by Custom Building Product, 6511 Salt Lake Avenue, Bell, California, 90201. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: Examine surfaces to receive tile work and conditions under which tile will be installed. Do not proceed with tile work until surfaces and conditions comply with requirements indicated in referenced tile installation standard. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. TCA Installation Guidelines: B. TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely. to electrical outlets, piping fixture and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. --i 3.03 JOINTING PATTERN: A. Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall ! area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. L) 09300 - 3 B. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. 3.04 EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including control, contraction and isolation joints, where indicated or if not indicated, at spacings and locations recommended in TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", and approved by Architect. iA B. Grout Tile to comply with referenced installation standards using grout materials indicated. ' C. Mix and install proprietary components to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 3.05 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS: A. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: -Install-tile fo comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types. .1 Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1 .2 Bond Coat: Thin -set portland cement mortar on cured bed, ANSI A108.5. .3 Shower Receptors: TCA B414. .4 Grout: Latex-portland cement. B. Paver Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed method, TCA installation method related to types of subfloor construction and grout types: .1 Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1. .2 Bond Coat: Thin -set portland cement mortar on cured bed. ANSI A108.5. .3 Concrete Subfloor Interior: TCA F111 (cleavage membrane). .4 Grout: Latex-portland cement. .5 Thin -Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5. .6 Concrete subfloor, Interior: TCA F113. , .7 Grout: Latex portland cement, unless otherwise indicated. .8 Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meeting carpet, wood or other flooring which finishes flush with top of tile. 3.06 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS: A. Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall conditions and grout types: 1 Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1. .2 Solid Backing, Interior: TCA W221 (membrane, lath and scratch coat). .3 Shower, Receptors, Metal or Wood Studs: TCA B414. .4 Grout: Latex-portland cement. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solution only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, (but no sooner than 14 days after installation). Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous 09300 - 4 - plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded or otherwise defective tile work. C. Protection: When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaning to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage and wear. 1 Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. i .2 Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaning from tile surfaces. 3.08 GROUT SEALING: A. When using a contrasting colored grout with a porous or unglazed tile, apply the sealer prior to grouting. After the is installed, wait 24 hours prior to sealing tile. Using a short nap roller, paint brush or sprayer, apply one I+ thin, uniform coat to surface of tile. Prevent excess sealer from getting into grout joints. Within 3 to 5 minutes, wipe off all excess sealer from surface. Allow to dry for 24 hours prior to grouting. Always wear protective gloves and eye wear. -` B. As a grout sealer: Tile grout should be allowed to cure for 7 days prior to being sealed. (IMPORTANT!) Test a small area prior to general application and allow a 24-hour cure to determine best method of application and -, desired results. Sealer may be applied with a short nap roller, paint brush or sponge. Apply sealer in one thin application and allow to penetrate into grout joints for 3 to 5 minutes. Apply a second thin application and - allow a 3 to 5 minute soak time then remove all excess sealer from grout joints and tiles, Use clean, dry towels or paper toweling to remove excess sealer. Excess sealer must be wiped off tile and grout before it dries. Allow a 24-hour dry time before use of sealed surface. Always wear protective gloves and eye wear. + END OF SECTION 09300 09300 - 5 DIVISION 9 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown and scheduled on drawings. B. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following: Acoustical panel ceilings, exposed suspension. -� 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: ( A. Installer Qualifications shall be a firm with not less than three years of successful experience in installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units, as shown by current written statement from manufacturer. � B. Fire Performance Characteristics: _j Provide acoustical ceiling components that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance i, characteristics, according to ASTM test method indicated by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate marking of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM.E 84. Flame Spread: 25 or less. { Smoke Developed: 50 or less. 2. Fire -Resistance Ratings as indicated by reference to design designation in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or "FM Approval Guide" for floor, roof or beam assemblies in which acoustical ceilings function as a fire protective membrane; tested per ASTM E 119. Provide protection materials for lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for rated assembly. C. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other work support by or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system components (if any) and partition system (if any). 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required, and for each suspension system, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with these specifications. 2. Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing acoustical units, including precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and acoustical performances. --] 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: i. A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes. IJ B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. .4' 09510-1 J 1 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings completed, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be �- continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 2.00 PRODUCTS _2.01. ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS —GENERAL• A. Provide manufacturer's standard units of configuration indicated which are prepared for mounting method designated and which comply with FS SS-S-118 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, form, pattern, grade (NRC or NIC's as applicable), light reflectance coefficient (LR), edge detail and joint detail (if any). B. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC No. 7 (mechanically mounted on special metal support), FS SS-S-11 S; or Type E-400 mounting as per ASTM E 795. C. Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors, surface textures, and patterns available for acoustical ceiling units and exposed metal suspension system members of quality designated. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL PANELS: A. Acceptable manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Non -Fire -Resistance Rated Panels: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Celotex Corp. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Fire -Resistance Rated Panels: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Celotex Corp. United States Gypsum Co. 2.03 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: A. Provide metal suspension systems of type, structural classification and finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Provide manufacturer's standard finish for type of system indicated, unless otherwise required. For exposed suspension members and accessories with painted finish, provide color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. C. Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung. D. Hanger Wires to be galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, prestretched, Class 1 coating, sized so that stress at 3-times hanger design loan (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 gage. E. Edge Moldings and Trim to be metal or extruded plastic of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, provide manufacturer's standard molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling which fits with type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. 2.04 AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering suspension systems which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Same as acoustical unit manufacturer. 09510 - 2 i Chicago Metallic Corp. Donn Corp. National Rolling Mills, Inc. Roper Eastern. 2.05 EXPOSED METAL DIRECT -HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: Non -Fire -Rated Single Web Steel Suspension System. Provide fire rated where indicated. Provide with a structural classification of intermediate duty. Finish to be painted white unless indicated otherwise. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by other trades for support of acoustical ceilings. Furnish concrete inserts, steel deck hanger clips and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work. C. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges r of each ceiling. Avoid use of less -than -half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible. 3.02 INSTALLATION: I A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated, and industry standards applicable to work. B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally -patterned units (if any in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans). C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6" from each end and spaced 4'-0" along each carrying channel or direct -hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1 /8" in 12'-0". D. Secure wire hanger by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye -screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. E. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Apply hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying or other equally effective means. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. G. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 3.04 EXTRA STOCK: A. Deliver stock of maintenance material to Owner. Furnish maintenance material matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. B. Acoustical Ceiling Units: v I 1. Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of amount installed in manufacturers unopened packing. 09510 - 3 END OF SECTION 09510 09510 - 4 r DIVISION 9 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1 r 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: r Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and in schedules. 1.02 QUALITY OF ASSURANCE: A. Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. d B. Wherever possible, provide required resilient flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65oF (18oC) in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55oF (13oC) in areas where work is completed. B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 2.00 PRODUCTS r I 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: l A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries. Kentile Floors, Inc. B. Wall Base: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Azrock Floor Products Flexco Div., Textile Rubber Co., Inc. Kentile Floors, Inc. Roppe Rubber Corporation C. Resilient Stair Treads, Risers, and Skirting: Afco Rubber Corp. Flexco Div., Textile Rubber Co. Inc. } Johnson Rubber Co., Flooring Accessories Div. Roppe Rubber Corporation } Jason Rubber Flooring Division, Jason Industrial Inc. —) 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Colors and Patterns: As shown or scheduled, or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 09650 - 1 B. Vinyl Composition Tile: .1 Type IV; 12" x 12", unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: .2 Composition 1 - asbestos -free. Gage: 1 /8" C. Raised Design Rubber Tile: 19_-1_ll16x 1.9_11116,_raised-ciricular-design,-standard-profile-gagear-profile-14 /64".— - - D. Wall Base: Provide vinyl base complying with FS SS-W-40, Type Il, with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units, and as follows: - - Height: 4" Thickness: 0.080" gage. Style: Standard toe base at carpet areas Butt toe base at vinyl composition tile areas Butt toe base at rubber tile areas Finish: High gloss E. Resilient Stair Treads: .1 Provide treads where shown, consisting of single -piece units for width of stair treads, or equal -length units if tread width exceeds available manufactured lengths. .2 Provide rubber stair tread units complying with FS RR-T-650C, composition A, Class 2, sanded backs, style as indicated, with thickness not less than 3/16" nominal and 1/4" at nosing. F. Resilient Risers: .1 Provide single piece riser for height and width of stair risers or equal -sized units if riser width exceeds available manufactured lengths. .2 Provide rubber risers for stairs where indicated. G. Resilient Stringers: Provide single piece riser 10" high, or equalized units if length exceeds available manufactured length. H. Leveling Compound: Latex type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation indicates acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. B. Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors. C. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine that concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured, dried,and ready to receive flooring. D. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Extend 09650 - 2 flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. B. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non -permanent marking device. C. Tightly cement flooring to sub -base without open cracks voids raisin and puckering at joins telegraphing 9 Y 9 P 9 P 9 joints, of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand roll flooring at perimeter of each covered area - I to assure adhesion. D. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite i edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 112 tile at room - perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. E. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged j if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tiles are not acceptable. i ? I F. Lay file in "checkerboard" fashion with grain reversed in adjacent tiles. G. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. - H. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated. from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. _ I. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: i I A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaning as recommended by j _ { flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring with heavy Kraft paper or other covering. - I B. After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. i _l I—� END OF SECTION 09650 _J i Li I l iJ 09650 - 3 I N DIVISION 9 SECTION 09680 CARPETING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section.%r 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE: A. Extent of each type of carpeting is indicated on drawings, finish schedule and by specifications, and is defined to include carpet, cushion and accessories. B. Each type of required carpet is specified in the finish schedule of the contract documents. -� 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer qualifications shall be a firm with not less than 5 years of experience in installation of commercial carpeting of type, quantity and installation methods similar to work of this section. r � B. Manufacturer qualifications shall be a firm (carpet mill) with not less than 5 years of production experience with '--) carpet similar to types specified in this section; and whose published product literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section. 1.03 FLAME/SMOKE RESISTANCE STANDARDS: _ Where ratings are indicated for carpet or for carpet -plus -pad installations, provide materials complying with ratings i as indicated for the following test standards. A. Test for flammability; ASTM D 2859 OR DOC FF-1-70. B. Floor Radiant Panel Test: Test for burning under varying radiant energy levels; ASTM E 648, with minimum { ( average radiant flux rating not less than the following: — C. FRPT Rating: 0.22 watts/sq.cm. D. Smoke Density Test: Test in radiant heat chamber, with and without flame, for density of smoke generated; ASTM E 662, or NFPA No. 258, also known as NBS Smoke Density Chamber Test. I E. Static Resistance: Provide yarn or yarn blend as indicated in carpet construction, and include provisions to �1 comply with static known to be effective or by inclusion of small percentages of special anti -static yarn known to be effective in achieving indicated static resistance. Where rating is not otherwise indicated, provide 3.5 - KV resistance for 20% R.H. at 70oF (21 oC), AATCC 134. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Produce Data: Submit manufacturer's complete technical product data for each type of carpet, cushion and accessory item required. B. Samples: Submit 18" x 27" samples of each carpet required 6" long samples of each type exposed edge tripping and 6" square samples of separate cushions. C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's printed maintenance recommendations, including methods and 1 frequency recommended for maintaining carpet in optimum conditions under anticipated traffic and use conditions. 1.05 EXTRA STOCK: Where carpet is supplied from custom run at mill, produce and deliver to project at least 5% overrun on calculated yardage. Provide required overrun exclusive of carpet needed for proper installation, waste and usable scraps. (Applies to restaurant carpet only). 09680 - 1 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE: j Deliver carpeting materials in original mill protective wrapping with mill registered numbers and tags attached. Store inside, in well ventilated area, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. 1.07 WARRANTY: Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer (Carpet Mill), agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship of carpeting work during 2-year warranty_perigdfollowing-substantial —� -__completion. Also -include -a 10-yearface-fiberwear warranty. attach copies of product warranties. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL CARPET CONSTRUCTION: A. Fabricate carpet by the construction method indicated on data sheets, as recognized in the carpet industry, using manufacturer's (mill's) standard process. B. If not otherwise indicated, fabricate by one of the following methods (Contractor's option if more than one indicated). 1 Provide tufted construction carpet. (General areas) 2 Provide velvet weave carpet. (Restaurant) 2.02 MANUFACTURER: Provide carpet from only those manufacturer's listed on the finish schedule. Provide only those product lines and colors which are listed on the finish schedule. In the event a product has been discontinued contact the Architect for futher direction. 2.03 CARPET ACCESSORIES: A. Carpet Edge Guard, Non-metallic: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard of size and profile indicated and with minimum 2" wide anchorage flange; colors selected by Architect from among standard colors available within the industry (any manufacturer). B. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant, non -staining type as recommended by carpet or cushion manufacturer, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet. C. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams. D. Carpet Protection: Scotchguard. E. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet, cushions and other carpeting products; and selected by Installer to meet project circumstance and requirements. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PRE -INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: A. Examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions or rough areas using material recommended by carpet or adhesive manufacturer. Notify Contractor in writing of major conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive carpeting; vacuum clean immediately,before installation. Check concrete surfaces to ensure no "dusting" through installed carpet; apply sealer where required to prevent dusting. C. Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period. 3.02 INSTALLATION: 09680 - 2 i A. Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorways. B. Extend carpet under open -bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. C. Provide cut-outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. D. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. 3.03 EXPANSION JOINTS: Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting, provide for movement. 3.04 GLUE -DOWN INSTALLATION: I A. Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butter cuts with seaming cement. B. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Roll entire carpet area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensureuniform bond. Remove adhesive promptly from face of carpet. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: - A. Remove and dispose of debris and usable scraps. B. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. Remove any protruding face yarn using sharp scissors. C. Scotchguard carpet immediately after cleaning. j D. Advise Contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. 3.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: A. Deliver specified overrun (if any) and usable scraps of carpet to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged (paper wrapped) and identified. Usable scraps are defined -to include roll ends of less than 9'-0" length, and pieces of more than 3 sq. ft. area and more than B" wide. Dispose of smaller pieces as "construction waste". END OF SECTION 09680 09680 - 3 DIVISION 9 SECTION 09900 PAINTING CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: ) - 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of painting work is shown on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. - B. The work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout project, except as otherwise indicated. C. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work. D. Paint asused herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. r--, E. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules", except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Architect will select these from standard colors available for materials systems specified. 1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED: - A. Following categories of work are not included as part of field -applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications. .1 Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items. Also, for fabricated components such as architectural woodwork, wood casework, and shop -fabricated or factory -built j mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories. .2 Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paining of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Division 15 and 16, respectively. .3 Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas, and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: Name or title of material. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacturer. ' Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Apply water base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding airtemperatures are between 50o F (10oC) and 90oF (35oC) unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. —% B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45oF (70oC) and 95oF (35oC), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed - instructions. 09900 - 1 I I C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85% or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. - 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 COLORS AND FINISHES: A. Paint colors, surface treatments and finishes are indicated in "schedules" of the contract documents. B. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. C. Final acceptance of -colors -will -be -from samples applied on the job. - - 2.02 COLOR PIGMENTS: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. 2.03 PAINT COORDINATION: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. 2.04 MATERIAL QUALITY: A. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-gradeproduct will not be acceptable. B. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products of named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. C. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by.paint: - -I manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 2.05 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (EPS): { Provide following paint systems for various substrates, as indicated: A. General Painted Metal: EPS - 1: 1 st coat - Rust penetrating primer (TT-C-530b) 2nd coat - Exterior Alkyd semi -gloss (TT-P-102e) 3rd coat - Exterior Alkyd semi -gloss (TT-P-102e) B. Painted Galvanized Metal: EPS -2 1 st coat - Galvanized metal primer (TT-P-641 g) 2nd coat - Exterior Alkyd semi -gloss (TT-P-102e) 3rd coat - Exterior Alkyd semi -gloss (TT-P-102e) —. 2.06 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (IPS): Provide following paint systems for various substrates, as indicated: A. Concrete: 09900 - 2 1 ISP-1: 1 at coat - Interior latex emulsion (TT-P-29). 2nd coat - Polyester epoxy (TT-C-545). - 3rd coat - Polyester epoxy (TT-C-545). Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness. B. Gypsum Drywall Systems: IPS-2: 1st coat - Interior latex emulsion (TT-P-29). ` 2nd coat - Interior latex emulsion (TT-P-29). IPS-3: 1 st coat - Interior latex emulsion (TT-P-29). 2nd coat - Enamel undercoat (TT-E-543). - 3rd coat - Semi Gloss enamel (TT-E-506). Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. C. Painted Woodwork and Hardboard: -� IPS-4: 1 st coat - Enamel undercoat (TT-E-543). 2nd coat - Glass enamel (TT-E-506). D. Stained Woodwork: IPS-5: 1 st coat - Interior oil stain (TT-S-71 1). 2nd coat - Bleached shellac (TT-S-300). 3rd coat - Rubbing varnish (TT-V-86). 4th coat - Rubbing varnish (TT-V-86). Fill open grained wood with filler complying with TT-F-336 and wipe before first varnish coat. E. Hollow Metal Framing: ' j ( IPS•6: 1 at coat - Rust Penetrating primer (TT-C-520b) ' 2nd coat - Interior Alkyd Urethane gloss enamel (TT-E-505a) _ 3rd coat -Anterior -exterior Alkyd urethane gloss enamel (TT-E-505a) ( 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Applicator must examine areas ad conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Applicator. B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. i C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scalae,-grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. i 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION: - A. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. B. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surface, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place _ and not to be finish -painted, or provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items. C. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly -painted surfaces. D. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement plaster and cement -asbestos board to be ' painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove i`..� glaze. 09900 - 3 E. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. F. Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with scraper, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill' holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or - - plastic wood -filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. 3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION: A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3.04 APPLICATION: A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corner, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first -coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre-treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer. D. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others._ Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction posts or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. E. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. G. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.5 CLEAN-UP: A. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day. , Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION: 09900 - 4 A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly -painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. - C. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 09900 09900 - 5 DIVISION 9 SECTION 09950 - - WALLCOVERINGS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL - 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections„ apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of wall coverings required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of wall covering required include the following: _ Vinyl -coated fabric wall covering (VWC). C. Carpeting used for wall covering is specified in the Carpeting section on Division 9. I ! D. Plastic laminate used on wall surfaces is specified in Architectural Woodwork section of Division 6. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.04 MANUFACTURER: iProvide each type of wall covering as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, I and sealants. 1.05 INSTALLER: A firm specializing in wall covering work with not less than three years of experience in installing wall coverings similar to those required for this project. 1.06 FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION: A. Provide materials bearing UL label and marking, indicating fire hazard classification of wall covering, as determined by ASTM E 84. B. Provide materials with the following fire hazard classifications: Flame spread not more than 25. t Smoke developed not more than 25. 1.07 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of wall covering and installation materials. k B. Submit full width samples of each type of wall covering, illustrating range of color and pattern. variation; submit sets of sample moldings. C. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials furnished comply with requirement specified. D. Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including precautions for use of cleaning materials which could damage wall covering. 1.08 REPLACEMENT MATERIALS: After completion of work, deliver to project site not less than 6 linear yards of each type, color and pattern of wall covering installed. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as materials installed. 09950 - 1 1.09 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer and as herein specified. B. Deliver Materials to project site in original packages or containers clearly labeled to identify manufacturer, brand name, quality or trade, and fire hazard classifications. C. Store materials in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not store rolled goods in upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40oF (4oC). 1.10 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Maintain constant minimum temperature of 60oF (16oC) areas of installation for at least 72 hours before and 48 hours after application of materials. B. Illuminate areas of installation using building's permanent lighting system; temporary lighting alone will not be acceptable. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 VINYL WALL COVERING (VWC): Comply with FS CC-W-408 for types required and comply with requirements specified herein. Provide vinyl wall covering material with suitable backing which has been treated with mildew and germicidal additives. 2.02 LIGHT DUTY (VWC-LD): Type I; total weight not less than 7 oz. per sq. yd.; "vinyl coating not less than 5 oz. per sq. yd. 2.03 MEDIUM DUTY (VWC-MD): Type II; total weight not less than 13 oz. per sq. yd.; vinyl coating not less than 7 oz. per sq. yd. 2.04 HEAVY DUTY (VWC-HD): Type III; total weight not less than 22 oz. per sq. yd.; vinyl coating not less than 12 oz. per sq. yd. 2.05 COLOR/PATTERNITEXTURE: - As shown on drawings. 2.06 MANUFACTURER: Provide wallcoverings from only those manufacturer's listed on the finish schedule. Provide only those product lines and patterns which are listed on the finish schedule. In the event a product line or pattern has been discontinued contact the Architect for futher direction. 2.07 ADHESIVES: Provide manufacturer's recommended adhesive, primer, and sealer, produced expressly for use with selected wall covering on substrate as shown on drawings. Provide materials which are mildew -resistant and nonstaining to wall covering. 2.08 RELEASE COAT: Oil base sealer or enamel undercoater for drywall substrates. 2.09 METAL MOLDING: Provide molding manufactured expressly for use with wall coverings, of 6063 aluminum alloy, with fine satin mechanical finish and clear anodic coating complying with AA-M21A31; provide one-piece cap strip type with wall flange tapering to feather edge. 09950 - 2 2.10 ADHESIVE FOR MOLDING: Provide contact adhesive recommended by molding manufacturer. 3.00 EXECUTION - 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing from packaging in area of installation not less than 24 hours before application. B. Remove switchplates, wall plates, and surface mounted fixtures in areas where wall covering is to be applied. C. Prime and seal substrates in accordance with wall covering manufacturer's recommendations for type of substrate. Apply surface sealer to gypsum drywall which will permit subsequent removal of wall covering without damage to paper facing. -� 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Metal Moldings: 1 Furnish metal moldings for wainscot cap and perimeter edging where shown on drawings. - .2 Install metal molding in longest practicable lengths, by nailing and cementing to substrates in accordance with molding manufacturer's instructions. Tightly butt end joints and miter corner joints. B. Vinyl Wall Covering: _ .1 Place wall covering panels consecutively in order cut from rolls, including filling of spaces above or below openings. Hang by reversing alternate strips except on match patterns. .2 Apply adhesive to back of wall covering and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install seams plumb, andat least 6" away from corners. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Overlap seams and -_ double -cut to assure tight closure. Roller, brush, or use board knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. Cut wall covering evenly to edges of outlet boxes or support. .3 Trim salvages as required to assure color uniformity and pattern match. .4 Remove excess adhesive along finished seams while it is still wet using warm water and clean sponge, and wipe dry. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Replace removed plates and fixtures; verify cut edges of wall covering are completely concealed. B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wall covering installation upon completion of work, and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION 09950 09950 - 3 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10440 SIGNAGE 10520 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES DIVISION 10 SECTION 10440 SIGNAGE CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: To provide all required permits, materials and labor for a complete installation of interior and exterior, illuminated, non -illuminated, post and panel, wall graphic, and directional signage. The extent of the signage is shown on the drawings and this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards as applicable to the manufacture, fabrication and installation of the work of this section: A. UL Standards: For electrical components and assemblies provide either UL labeled products or, where no labeling service is available, "recognized markings" to indicate listing in the UL "Recognized Component Index". B. National Electrical Code: Comply with NFPA Volume 5 for electrical wiring and devices included with. signage, ANSI C2 and C73, and applicable NEMA and NECA standards. C. Fabrication of manufactured products: Provide standard or custom manufactured products to comply with requirements; otherwise, shop fabricate the work to the greatest extent possible, in shops which are skilled and experienced with a minimum of 3 years experience in the production of illuminated signage. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's or shop fabricator's product information and installation instructions for each sign and graphic panels. For illuminated signs include data on performance and operating characteristics, rough -in dimensions and sizes, and similar information. B. Provide maintenance manuals, operating instructions, spare parts lists, precautions against hazards, manufacturer's warranties and similar formation. Distribute one additional copy of installation and start-up instructions to the Installer. Mark each data sheet or brochure with the applicable sign item number(s). C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layouts, elevations, sections and details of custom -fabricated work (work not shown by manufacturer's standard product data sheets). Show plan layouts as required. D. Samples: Submit 3 samples of each exposed finish on shop -fabricated signage. Submit 12" squares of sheet materials and 24" lengths of linear materials. Samples will be reviewed by Architect for color,pattern, and texture only; compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING: I Protect metal finishes from damage during shipping, storage,handling, installation and construction of other work in the same spaces. Wrap and crate each sign as needed for protection from damage. Cover exposed plastic surfaces with self-adhesive protective paper, of a type recommended by the manufacturer; and do not remove until work is installed and ready for cleaning and start-up. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: The following is a list of approved manufacturers and may not be substituted without prior written consent from the Owner. FEDERAL SIGN YOUNG ELECTRIC SIGN COMPANY 3015 Avenue E. East 416 East 41 st Street Arlington, Texas 76011 Boise, Idaho 83714 10440 - 1 (817) 640-7511 (208) 345-2982 ZIMMERMAN SIGN COMPANY 8140 Walnut Hill Lane, Suite #320 Dallas, Texas 75231 (214) 691-3937 3.00 EXECUTION 3_01 INSPECSLONAND PREPARATION: A. The installer must examine the rough -in of electrical services by others, and the installation of floors, walls, columns and ceilings by others, and. the conditions under which the work is to be done; and must verify - dimensions of the services and substrates before fabricating the work. Notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions -for the -proper -installation. — - B. Do not proceed with the fabrication and installation until unsatisfactory dimensions and conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. I 3.02 INSTALLATION: Locate signs where indicated, using mounting metheds describe. Install level, plumb and at height indicated, with surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. Assemble electrical components of equipment in accordance with applicable "Standards of Installation" by the National Electrical Contractors Association and - compling with all National and Local Codes. 3.03 TESTING, START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS: A. Test each item of to demonstrate that it is operating properly, and that controls and safety devices are functioning. Repair or replace items which are found to be defective in its operation, including units which are below capacity or operating with excessive noise or vibration. B. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance procedures for each item. END OF SECTION 10440 10440 - 2 I DIVISION 10 SECTION 10520 AND CABINETS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE: Provide and install 7 (seven) 10 lb class A, B, and C fire extinguishers (3) with wall hooks (4) with cabinets and 2 (two) 5 lb class A, B, & C fire extinguisher with cabinets located as directed by the Fire Marshal, and as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Product data: Within 35 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to proceed, submit: A. Provide a Drawing showing all locations and mounting details; B. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; C. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; D. Dimensioned drawings as needed to depict the space required for these items, and their interface with the work of other trades. E. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect; will become the basis, for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer's offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Potter -Roemer Inc. B. J.L. Industries C. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. D. Muckle Manufacturing, Division of Technico, Inc. 2.02 CABINETS: As directed the Fire Marshal, provide Potter -Roemer, Inc. "Alta Series 7022-B-12-VR" factory prefinished steel cabinets, finish to match interior door frames, or equal products of other manufacturers approved in advance by the Owner. , 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER: A. At each fire extinguisher cabinet, provide one multipurpose chemical fire extinguisher with UL Rating of 2A:10B:C or 4A:60B:C, Potter -Roemer, Inc. "3005 or 3010" or equal approved. B. Service, charge, and tag each fire extinguisher not more than five calendar days prior to the Date of 10520 - 1 I -- Substantial Completion of the Work as that Date is established by the Owner. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: A. Examine the areas and conditions which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. ` 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provisions in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as approved. by the Owner, anchoring all components firmly into , - position for long life under hard use. C. Locate bracket -mounted extinguisher where directed by the Owner and the Fire Department Official. END OF SECTION 10520 10520 - 2 DIVISION 10 SECTION 10800 -- TOILET AND BATH CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section — 1.00 .GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE: ` Supply and install all Toilet and Bath accessory items as shown on the Drawings and as Specified herein. • 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS: Per SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, submit brochures and Shop Drawings of all items showing sizes of members, methods of construction, and mounting techniques. 1.03 MEASUREMENTS: Verify all dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of all parts is required. 1.04 COORDINATION: Coordinate with all other trades whose work relates to items specified herein for placing of all required backing and furring to insure proper locations. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver and store all items specified herein in dry protected areas. Keep free of corrosion or other damage. Replace any damaged items at no cost to the Owner. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: A. The following manufacturers meet the requirements of this specification: Bobrick Bradley Others as approved by Architect. B. For the purpose of clearly identifying each accessory, the Bobrick numbers and descriptions have been used. A. Dual Toilet Tissue Dispenser (Surface Mounted) B-288 B. Sanitary Napkin Disposal (Surface Mounted) B-270 C. Towel Dispenser/waste Receptacle (Flush Mount) B-3960 - D. Towel Dispenser/waste Receptacle (Semi -recessed) B-3966 E. Towel Dispenser (Semi -recessed) B-3866 F. Grab Bar (Toilet stall, Long Side 42") B-5806x42 G. Grab Bar (Toilet stall,back 36") B-5806x36 H. Grab Bar (Toilet stall,back 24") B-5806x24 J. Grab Bar (Shower stall 18" x 30") B-5861 X. Robe Hook (Door) B-670 L. Robe Hook (Wall 3 Hook) B-232 24" M Robe Hook (Wall 4 Hook) B-232 36" N. 36" Shower Rod (Verify Lengths) (ADA Shower) B-6047 36" P. 60" Shower Rod (Verify Lengths) B-6047 60" - Q. Handicapped Shower Seat B-5171 or B-5181 R. Shower Soap Dish (Tile in Place, by Tile Supplier) S. 30"w X 36"h Mirror B-290, 3036 T. 36"w X 36"h Mirror B-290, 3636 10800 - 1 U. 42"w X 36"h Mirror B-290, 4236 _ V. 72"w X 36"h Mirror B-290, 7236 W. 60"w X 42"h Mirror B-290, 6042 X. 30"w X 36"h Mirror with Shelf B-292, 3036 Y. Ash Urn B-278 Z. Stainless Steel Shelf B-508 Aa. 24" Mop and Broom Holder B-223x24" i Ab. Laundry Shelf 48" (Manufactured by Rigid Rak #4.14 4' W/Hooks) Ac. Uniform Shelfs 36" (Manufactured by Rigid Rak #463 Af. Recessed Towel Dispenser B-369 Ag. Touchless Hand Dryer (Pinnacle Dryer Corp Model ADC-10) 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: �1 Install all items per respective manufacturer's published instructions and approved installation drawings. Adhesive installations not permitted. 3.02 CLEANUP: 1 Clean accessories on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Lubricate and make final adjustments for proper operation. 3.03 PROTECTION: i Installer of accessories shall advise Contractor of procedures required to protect accessories during remainder —I of construction period to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 10800 10800 - 2 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11140 UNDERGROUND FUEL STORAGE TANKS 11301 OIL/WATER SEPARATOR 11400 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT i DIVISION 13 SECTION 11140 UNDERGROUND FUEL STORAGE TANKS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Governing Standards 1. ASTM specification D4021-86, Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester Underground Petroleum Storage Tanks. 2. UL 1316, Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Underground Storage Tanks for Petroleum Products. 3. NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Cods; NFPA 30A, Automotive and Marine Service Station Code; and NFPA 31, Standard for installation of Oil Burning Equipment. 4. National Sanitation Foundation, Standard 14. 5. Military Specification No. MIL-T-52777 B. Tank installation shall be performed by a contractor licensed by tank manufacturer and all necessary local authorities. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Contractor shall submit, if applicable, 6 copies of shop drawings for each tank. Drawings shall show all locations of all fittings, accessories and critical dimensions. B. Contractor shall submit 6 copies of manufacturer's literature to include 8 copies of manufacturer's current installation instructions. 1.03 LOADING CONDITIONS: A. Internal Load: Tanks shall withstand 5 psi air pressure test with 5 to 1 safety factor. Contractor shall individually test tanks prior to installation to test for leakage. Maximum test pressure is 5 psi. B. Vacuum Test: Every tank shall be mercury vacuum tested by the tank manufacturer to verify structural integrity. Tank shall be tested to 11.5 inches mercury vacuum. C. Surface Loads: Tank shall withstand surface H-20 axle loads when properly installed according to current manufacturer's installation instructions. D. External Hydrostatic Pressure: Buried in ground with 7' of overburden over the top of the tanks, the hole fully flooded and a safety factor of 5:1 against general buckling. E. Tank shall support accessory equipment such as heating coils, drop tubes, submersible pumps, and ladders when installed according to tank manufacturer's recommendations and limitations. 1.04 PRODUCT STORAGE: A. All primary tanks must be vented. Tanks are designed for operation at atmospheric pressure only, except for use with vapor recovery systems at a pressure or vacuum not to exceed 1 psi. B. Tanks shall be capable of storing liquids with specific gravity up to 1.1. C. Tanks shall be chemically inert to petroleum products. D. Tanks shall be capable of storing gasoline or gasohol (10% ethanol and 90% gasoline mixture), 90.5% gasoline and 9.5% Oxinal-50 (4.75% methanol and 4.75% GTBA mixture); Dupont EPA waiver (gasoline, with 5% methanol and a minimum of 2.5% solvent - the blend bay contain a maximum concentration of up to 3.7 weight percent oxygen in the final fuel); MTBE (methyl tertiary butyl ether) - gasoline with up to 11140- 1 20% volume, of MTBE; gasoline/water/ethanol or methanol blend motor fuels including neat or near neat methanol or ethanol fuels at ambient temperatures; jet fuel; av-gas; kerosene; diesel fuel; new or used motor oil; or potable water at ambient underground temperatures; or used for fuel oil at temperatures not to exceed 15OF. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 UNDERGROUND FUEL STORAGE TANKS: A. Tanks shall be manufactured with 100% resin and glass fiber reinforcement_with-no-sand-fillers. B. Tanks shall have a nominal length, nominal diameter and nominal capacity as shown on the drawing. C. Tank shall have a space between the primary and secondary shell walls to allow for the free flow and containment of all leaked product from the primary tank. -Space also allows the insertion of a monitoring device through a monitorig fitting. The space shall be filled with a factory provided brine solution. D. Provide FRP anchor straps as supplied by tank manufacturer. Number and location of straps shall be specified as in current literature by tank manufacturer. Each strap shall be capable of withstanding the buoyancy load for tank diameter as shown. 4' dia. -4,200 lbs. 8' dia.-25.000 lbs. 6' dia.-18,000 lbs. 10' dia.-25,000 lbs. 2.02 MANWAYS: A. All manways to be flanged and 22" I.D. complete with UL listed gaskets, plated bolts and covers. B. Location as shown on drawings. C. Optional manway extension tubes shall be FRP and 24" long. Longer extensions are available in one foot increments. D. Each steel manway shall have manufacturer's standard 4" NPT fittings welded in place. 2.03 GAUGE PLATES: Shall be installed under each service fitting and manway cover. 2.04 NPT THREADED FITTINGS: A. All threaded fittings shall be a material of construction consistent with the requirements of the UL label. B. All standard threaded fittings shall be half couplings and shall be 4" in diameter. Diesel tank shall have one 6" diameter as indicated. Reducers are to be used for smaller sizes where shown and provided by contractor. C. Strength - NPT fittings shall withstand a minimum of 150 ft. pounds torque and 1,000 ft. pounds of bending, both with a 2:1 safety factor. 2.05 MONITOR FITTINGS: A. Eabh monitor fitting shall consist of a 4" NPT fitting on the secondary tank. B. Tanks with a capacity o 3,000 gallons or greater shall have two monitor fittings, one near each end of the tank. Tanks less than 3,000 gallon capacity shall have one monitor fitting. 2.06 MANWAY RISERS: Provide fiberglass manway risers (not attached to manway) to permit access to manway. (Street box at grade to be furnished by others.) 2.07 ATTACHED MANWAY RISERS: 11140- 2 h' Provide fiberglass attached manway risers. Riser may be attached to manway with provided hardware or ordered with a fiberglass collar to which riser body is field bonded be contractor. -1 k 2.08 TESTING: Tanks shall be tested according to the recommendations in section 13401-14 and current Double Wall testing instructions provided with tank. 3.00 EXECUTION ►}� 3.01 HANDLING: Tanks shall not be dropped, rolled or impacted. Chock the tanks until ready for installation. Tie down tanks if high winds are expected with minimum 3/4" diameter nylon or hemp rope over each tank anchored to stakes to prevent tanks from being moved. Use all installation lugs to lift tanks. Guide the tanks with guidelines. Do not use chains or cables around tanks. If tanks have to be moved, set on smooth ground free of rocks and sharp objects and re -chock. Verify capacity of lifting equipment before lifting tank. 3.02 TESTING: A. Double Wall tanks are shipped to the jobsite with a vacuum on the tank cavity. The vacuum should be left on the tank until the tank is ready to be air tested by the contractor. In the unlikely event of shipping i damage, this temporary vacuum serves as an early warning device. The vacuum can detect relatively "large" leaks in the inner or outer tank. But it cannot detect "small" leaks therefore prior to installation, all tanks must also be air tested and soaped using the following procedure: ` .1 Release the vacuum in the tank cavity. Before setting the tank in the excavation, plug and tighten all fittings. Pressure test tanks to 5 psi as follows: B. Outer wall test: .1 Caution: Pressurizing the tank cavity over 5 psi may damage the tank. For all tests, install an air gauge at the fitting where the air pressure hose is connected to the tank and a second gauge at the other j+ monitoring fitting. Use an air gauge with 1 /4 or 1 /2 lb. increments so that changes in pressure can be c easily observed. .2 Using the OCF supplied manifold system connected to the inner tank and the cavity between the inner and outer tanks. Pressurize the tank cavity using air pressure from the inner tank. Step #1: .i With the manifold valve to the cavity closed, first pressurize the inner tank to 5 psi maximum for n 60 minutes. Step #2: Close the air supply valve to the inner tank and then disconnect the air supply. Step #3: Pressurize the cavity between the inner and outer tank to 5 psi maximum by opening the manifold valve thereby transferring pressure from the inner tank. �- Do not connect the air supply directly to the monitoring fitting or allow the manifold valve to be open during step #1. Typical air compressors can over pressurize lover 5 psi) the tank cavity between the inner tank and outer wall in less than 2 seconds. Step #4: Monitor the pressure on both the inner tank and cavity between the inner and outer tank for at least 30 minutes. Soap the outer tank and check for leaks as indicated by bubbles. An outer wall I_ leak, detected before backfilling is simple to repair. Do not backf ill a tank with a known or suspected leak in the outer wall. 3.03 BED AND BACKFILL MATERIAL: Use a naturally rounded aggregate, clean and free flowing with particle size not less than 1 /8" or more than 3/4" �k diameter. This material is commonly called "washed pea gravel'. As in alternate in areas where gravel is not available, stone crushings with angular particle size not less than 1 /8" or not more than 1 /2" diameter, washed 11140- 3 i and free flowing are acceptable provided they meet ASTM C-33 paragraph 9.1 requirements for quality and soundness. The backfill should not have more than 3% passing the #8 sieve. The dry density must be a - minimum of 90 pcf. In winter conditions backfill must be dry and free of ice. No other material in acceptable - without written approval from tank manufacturer and Architect. Request a sieve analysis from supplier. 3.04 HOLE SIZE: A. Hole depth must be equal to the aggregate sum of the surface paving plus backfill, plus tank diameter, plus 12" bed and plus depth of anchoring slab if one is called for in the drawings. Length and width of hole shall be the aggregate sum of all tank diameters plus two feet spacing between -tanks -and -two -feet between out oar tan and edge of excavation, and between tank bulkhead and edge of excavation. In areas of poor soil, hole walls must be benched and sloped at 1:2 slope between benches or shored as required to retain the earth. In this case a wider excavation will be required. B. In areas subject to traffic, provide -a minimum-6' of concrete and 30 inches of backfill over tanks. In areas not subject to traffic loads, provide three feet of backfill or 4" of reinforced concrete and 32" of backfill ! ;1 over tanks. The concrete slab over tanks must extend one foot on all sides beyond the tank's outline. C. Do not place more than seven feet of backfill over the tanks. A� 3.05 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE - DRY HOLE: Set tank on the 12" gravel bed. Tank must not rest on concrete (wet or dry), rocks, timbers or other objects. Once tank is setting on the gravel bed verify that the entire length of the tank is in direct contact with it and push gravel into any open spaces under tank. Start backfill on perimeter of tank in 12" lifts making sure that gravel flows under ribs and bulkheads. Use a wooden tamper to push gravel into hard to get places. Do not use concrete vibrator or water tamping (puddling). Once backfill reaches top of tanks, they can be filled with product or water to provide ballast. Do not fill tank before backfill has been placed. Backf ill shall be 100% " gravel to bottom of tank slab. Approved barricades shall be placed on the perimeter of the excavation and maintained there until backfill has been completed. In traffic areas, lighted barricades shall be provided. 3.06 TANK INSTALLATION - WET HOLE: - In areas where a water table is present, the tank hole shall be pumped dry by installation of well points in 1 sufficient number to maintain the water level below the tank bed. Make sure that the tanks are set level and that the spacing between tanks is maintained. Provide Trevira #S-1125 geotextile fabric as shown in tank " details. 12" lap min. The object is to prevent migration of the pea gravel. Entire hole surfaces not covered with concrete shall receive the fabric. 3.07 ANCHORING: Use fiberglass anchor straps on top of all ribs marked (< >). The anchor points must be equal to the tank 1° 1 diameter, plus one foot on each side of the tank. The steel anchors must line up with the rib +/- 1". Do not use cables or straps between ribs. All straps shall be tightened with turnbuckles to give "tight" fit of strap to tank. The tanks shall be anchored to a reinforced concrete slab as shown on the drawings utilizing steel anchors of size and dimensions shown in the drawings. Alternate: use steel wire cable with tumbuckles on one side and three clamps on the other side. Sizes as shown in the drawings. Minimum sizes for 6 ft. and 10 ft. diameter °— tanks: Wire rope 6x19 plow steel 112" diameter with 20,000 # tensile strength Turnbuckle - Diameter Hook type 1 1 /2" Eye type 1 Anchor bolts Hook type 1 1/2" �C Eye type 1 3.08 CERTIFICATION: Tank installer shall certify in writing that tanks were installed in full compliance with manufacturer's instructions and shall provide to the owner a sieve analysis of the material used as backfill. 11140- 4 1 + DIVISION 11 SECTION 11301 OIL/WATER SEPARATOR CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1APPLY TO THIS SECTION. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.01 SCOPE: To provide an oil/water separator at location(s) shown on plans complete with oil skimmer and piping to waste oil tank. The oil/water separator shall remove hydrocarbons from the storm water runoff from the fuel farm, diesel islands, gas islands and R.V. islands. 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Furnish each oil/water separator as a complete unit provided by one supplier, including skimmer and oil level sensor. B. Design of the oil/water separator shall be provided by the supplier and shall be based upon the following design criteria. Effluent to be limited to less than 15 parts per million based upon a 30 micron mean oil droplet size during a 10 year storm for a 2 hour duration as show below. Access to the interior shall be by mechanical latch or less than 5 mechanical fasteners at each access location. The vault shall be constructed of material suitable for underground storage of fuels and oils, and must meet all federal, state and local codes. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's or shop fabricator's product information and installation instructions for each component. For operating equipment include data on performance and operating characteristics, power consumption, dimensions and sizes, and locations of inlets and outlets based on site grades. B. Submit shop drawings showing layout, elevations, sections and details of all aspects of all components used to assemble the oil/water separator. C. Submit maintenance manuals, operation manual and instructions, precautions against hazards, manufacturer's warranties and similar information. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING: Protect the oil/water separator from damage during shipping, storage at site and installation. Inspect the oil/water separator for visual damage before off loading. Notify the manufacturer and Owners representative in the event of damage. Follow all manufacturer's recommendations on product handling and storage. 2.00 MATERIALS: 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S: Listed below are acceptable manufacturer's for the oil/water separator as specified herein. Other manufacturers will be reviewed upon submittal of product data and shop drawings. Industrial Distributors 10515 E. 40th Ave., Suite 113 Denver, Co. 80239 (303) 375-9070 Oldcastle 4478 Greer Circle Stone Mountain, GA 30083 _� j (404) 493-5420 1 2.02 VAULT: North West Power 2366 East Lake E., #234 Seattle, WA 98102 (800) 395-6880 11301 - 1 c The vault shall be constructed of pre -cast concrete and shall be one piece from 1'0" above flow line to bottom and shall be coated with epoxy coating on the interior to prevent the passing of stored hydrocarbons to surrounding soils and or ground waters. The vault shall htiie operable galvanized steel accesses which can withstand a H-20 wheel loading and shall placed in fully reinforced precast concrete. The access shall be sized to allow for easy removal of coalescing plates and pumping and maintenance of all components. The lids shall be design to shed storm waters, and keep them from infiltrating the oil/water separator. 2.03 SKIMMER: -- - - Tlie skimmer sTiall-be a motor driven belt system with tail pulley as manufactured by Abanaki Corporation and shall be sized to handle the storms as describe above. The waste oil shall be discharged to a waste oil tank provided under a separate contract. The motor shall be interconnected to a level sensor. 2.04 LEVEL SENSOR: The level sensor shall be a liquid level float switch as manufactured by Pneumercator Liquid Level Control Systems. The level sensor shall be set to normally open and shall close upon detection of .25" level increase. The level sensor shall be set to maintain .125" film of oil on top of the water to reduce evaporation. 2.04 COALESCING PLATES: The coalescing plates shall be made of calcium carbonate -filled polypropylene stacked and bound into packs as manufactured by Facet International "M-Pak". The coalescing plates shall be sized to handle the storm waters as listed above and provide the efficiencies as indicated. 2.05 OUTLET SECTION: The outlet section shall be equipped with a weir arrangement that causes the water to flow under the first weir and over the second, allowing any oils remaining to be trapped at the first weir. The out fall pipe shall have a sanitary tee configuration and shall draw the water off of the bottom 1 /3 of the vault but not less than 8" from bottom and shall be sized for the flows indicated above. 2.06 INLET SECTION: The inlet section shall be equipped with a weir that causes any solids to settle to the bottom before the flow enters the coalescing area. The inlet pipe shall turn down into the first section and shall be sized to handle the flows as described above, without causing excess turbulence. 3.00 EXECUTION: 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. The oil water separator shall be install by a qualified person(s) experienced in installation of oil/water separators. The bil/water separator shall be place in accordance with manufacture recommendations on bedding, depth of bury and fill materials. B. The inverts on the inlet and the outlet shall be located as provided by the civil documents herewith. The inlet and outlet shall be size by the oil/water separator manufacturer. 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: All electrical apparatuses and connections shall be done in accordance with NEC for hazardous areas and shall be made by a qualified electrician. 3.03 STARTUP: Upon completion of installation the oil/water separator shall be accepted by the Owner's Representative then filled with water up to the flow line. All motors shall be started with use of the level sensor to insure proper installation and motor rotation. All startup procedures shall be coordinated with Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 11301 11301 - 2 �I DIVISION 11 SECTION 11400 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT -� CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: �-i 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of foodservice equipment is shown on the drawings and by schedules and equipment lists. B. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 sections, respectively, for mechanical and electrical services and connections for individual items of foodservice equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: _ A. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards as applicable to the manufacture, fabrication and installation of the work of this section: d (i .1 NSF Standards: Comply with National Sanitation Foundation standards and criteria, and provide NSF "Seal of Approval" on each manufactured item and on major items of custom -fabricated work. .2 UL Standards: For electrical components and assemblies provide either UL labeled products or, where no labeling service is available, "recognized markings" to indicate listing in the UL "Recognized Component Index". .3 ANSI Standards: For gas -burning equipment, comply with ANSI 21-Series standards and provide labels indicting name of testing agency. Comply with ANSI B57.1 for compressed gas cylinder connections, and with applicable standards of the Compressed Gas Association for compressed gas piping. Comply with ANSI A40.4 and A40.6 for water connection air gaps and vacuum breakers. .4 NFPA Standards: Comply with NFPA No. 96 for exhaust systems. ASME Code: Comply with ASME Boiler Code requirements for steam generating and stem heated equipment; provide ASME inspection, stamp and _ registration with National Board. .5 National Electrical Code: Comply with NFPA Volume 5 for electrical wiring and devices included with foodservice equipment, ANSI C2 and C73, and applicable NEMA and NECA standards. B. Manufactured Products; Fabrication: Provide standard or custom manufactured products to comply with ,.� requirements; otherwise, shop fabricate the work to the greatest extent possible, in shops which are skilled and experienced with a minimum of 3 years experience in the production of foodservice equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's or shop fabricator's product information and installation instructions for each item of foodservice equipment. For operating equipment include data on performance and operating characteristics, power/fuel consumption, rough -in dimensions and sizes, drainage requirements and similar '= information. B. Provide maintenance manuals, operating instructions, spare parts lists, precautions against hazards, manufacturer's warranties and similar formation. Distribute one additional copy of installation and start-up instructions to the Installer. Mark each data sheet or brochure with the applicable project equipment item number(s). jl C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layouts, elevations, sections and details of custom -fabricated work (work not shown by manufacturer's standard product data sheets). Show plan layouts at 1 /4" scale, elevations at 3/4" scale, details at 1-1 /2" or larger scale, as required. ry�F D. Samples: Submit 3 samples of each exposed finish on shop -fabricated and field -fabricated foodservice equipment. Submit 12" squares of sheet materials and 24" lengths of linear materials. Samples will be reviewed by Architect for color, pattern, and texture only; compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 11400 - 1 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING: Protect metal finishes from damage during shipping, storage,handling, installation and construction of other work in the same spaces. Wrap and crate each item of equipment as needed for protection from damage. Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with self-adhesive protective paper, of a type recommended by the metal manufacturer; and do not remove until work is installed and ready for cleaning and start-up. 2.00 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel (S/S): AISI Type 302/304, hardest workable temper, No. 4 directional polish. B. Galvanized. Steel Sheet (G.I.): ASTM A526, except ASTM A527 for extensive forming; ASTM A525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment. 1 Where painted finish is indicated, provide mill phosphatized treatment in lieu of chemical treatment. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A569 hot -rolled carbon steel. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASTM A120, welded or seamless, schedule 40, galvanized. D. Steel Structure Members: Hot rolled or cold formed, carbon steel unless stainless steel is indicated. 1 Galvanized Finish (G.I.): ASTM A 123 hot -dipped zinc coating applied after fabrication. E. Aluminum: ASTM B209/B221 sheet, plate and extrusions (as indicated); alloy, temper and finish as determined by manufacturer/fabricator, except 0.40-mil natural anodized finish on exposed work unless another finish is indicated. 2.02 PLASTIC LAMINATE: NEMA LD3, Type 2, 0.051" thick, except Type 3, 0.042" for post -forming smooth (non -textured) white unless another texture and color is indicated or selected by Architect. Comply with NSF No. 35 where applicable. 2.03 HARDWOOD WORK SURFACES: Laminate edge -grained hard maple (Acer saccharum), NHLA First Grade with knots, holes and other blemishes culled out, kiln dried at 8% or less moisture, waterproof glue, machined, sanded and finished with NSF approved oil -sealer. 2.04 INSULATION:- - A. Cooled -Component Insulation: Rigid, closed -cell polyurethane foam; either heat -aged slab stock for adhesive lamination with face sheets, or foamed in place using Freon 11 as expanding agent; k-value of 0.15; not less than 1.7 lbs. per cu. ft. density. B. Heated -Component Insulation: Rigid board, semi -rigid blanket or adhesively applied blanket of glass fiber or other mineral fiber insulation, certified by manufacturer to withstand long-term exposure to heat (temperature rating of each insulated equipment item) without deterioration; k-value of not more than 0.30; density of not less than 1.5 lbs. per cu. ft. 2.05 JOINT MATERIALS: A. Sealants: 1-part or 2-part, polyurethane or silicone based, liquid elastomeric sealant, non -solvent release type, Shore A hardness of 30 except 45 if subject to traffic. B. Backer Rod:, Polyurethane rod stock, larger than joint width. C. Gaskets: Solid or hollow (but not cellular) neoprene or polyvinyl chloride; light grey, minimum of 40 Shore A hardness, self-adhesive or prepared for either adhesive application or mechanical anchorage. 2.06 PAINT AND COATINGS: Provide the types of paining and coating materials which, after drying or curing are suitable for use in conjunction 11400 - 2 jl with foodservice and which are durable, non -toxic, non -dusting, non -flaking, mildew resistant and comply with governing regulations for foodservice. 2.07 SOUND DEADENING: V A. Heavy -bodied resinous coating, filled with granulated cork or other resilient material, compounded for 9 permanent, non -flaking adhesion to metal in a 1 /8" thick coating. B. Galvanized Repair Paint: MIL-P-21035. C. Pretreatment: SSPC-PT2 or PT3, or FT C490. Primer Coating for Metal: FS TT-P-86, type suitable for baking where indicated. D. Enamel for Metal: Synthetic type, FS TT-P-491, type suitable for baking where indicated. 2.08 FABRICATED PRODUCTS: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than ANSI 145.9 Type 2 (Institutional), satin finish stainless steel or dull chrome finish on brass, bronze or steel. 2.09 HARDWARE: A. Cabinet Catches: Heavy-duty magnetic type, except as otherwise indicated. B. Drawer Slides: Ball -bearing type, side -mounting, self -closing, 25 lb. capacity. C. Sliding Door Hardware: Overhead track with tandem nylon wheel hangers for door leaves over 5 sq. ft. area; rollerless sanitary slides for smaller doors (comply with NSF standards). 2.10 CASTERS: Type and size as recommended by caster manufacturer, NSF approved, for the type and weight of equipment supported; but not less than 4" diameter with 15/16" tread width, with sealed self-lubricating ball bearings, cadmium -plated steel disc -wheels and solid light -grey synthetic rubber tires. Provide stainless steel horns and accessories. Unless otherwise indicated, equip each item with 2 swivel -type casters and 2 fixed casters, and provide foot brakes on 2 casters on opposite corner of equipment. .1 Caster Bumpers: Unless equipment item is equipped with another form of all-around protective bumper provide circular rotating bumper above each caster, 5" diameter tire of light grey synthetic rubber (hollow or closed -cell) on cadmium -plated disc. 2.11 PLUMBING FITTINGS, TRIM AND ACCESSORIES: Where exposed or semi -exposed, provide bright chrome -plated brass or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed. {l ._ 2.12 WATER OUTLETS: At sinks and at other locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic or remote control), provide commercial quality faucets, valves, dispensers or fill devices, of the type and size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated. .1 Vacuum Breakers: Provide with foodservice equipment where specified/required. .2 Waste Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide 2" remote -lever waste valves, and 3.5" strainer basket. Integrate unit for direct connection with waste grinder where indicated. .3 P-traps: Include removable P-traps where drains are indicated for direct connection to drainage system. ,—i 2.13 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS: I� �,. General: Provide standard materials, devices and components as recommended by the manufacturer fabricator, selected and installed in accordance with NEMA standards and recommendations; and as required for safe and efficient use and operation of the foodservice equipment, without objectionable noise, vibration and sanitation problems. 11400 - 3 � P 1 1 1 Controls and Signals: Provide recognized commercial grade signals, "on -off" push button or switches, and other speed and temperature controls as required for operation, complete with pilot lights and permanent signs and graphics to assist the user of each item. Provide stainless steel cover plates at control and signal electrical boxes. .2 Connections: Equip each item requiring electrical power with either a terminal box for permanent connection or cord -and -plug for interruptable connection as indicated. Provide standard grounded -type- _— -plugs,—matchm�lets(specified- Win Division 15), light grey (plug and cord). .3 Motors: Totally enclosed type, except drip -proof type where not exposed to a dust or moisture condition; ball bearings, except sleeve bearings on small timing motors; wingings impregnated to resist moisture; horse -power and duty -cycle ratings as required for the service indicated. .4 Power Characteristics: Refer to Division 16 specifications for project power characteristics. Also, refer to individual equipment requirements for loads and ratings. 2.14. FABRICATION OF METALWORK: General Fabrication Requirements: Remove burrs from sheared edges of metalwork, ease the corners and smooth to eliminate cutting hazard. Bend sheets of metal at not less than the minimum radius required to avoid grain - separation in the metal. Maintain flat, smooth surfaces without damage to finish. 1 Reinforce metal at locations of hardware, anchorages and accessory attachments, wherever metal is less than 14 gage or requires mortised application. Conceal reinforcements to the greatest extent possible. Weld in place on concealed faces. 2 Where fasteners are permitted, provide Phillips head, flat or oval head machine screws. Cap threads with acorn nuts unless fully concealed in inaccessible construction, and provide nuts and lock washers unless metal for tapping is at least 12 gage. Match fastener head finish with finish of metal fastened. .3 Where components of fabricated metal work are indicated to be galvanized, and involve welding or machining of metal heavier than 16 gage, complete the fabrication and provide hot -dip galvanizing of each component after fabrication, to the greatest extent possible (depending upon available dip -tank sizes). Comply with ASTM A123. .4 Where vents are required for enclosed spaces, or for cabinet enclosures, provide removable stainless steel insect screens of 18 x 18 mesh. Locate vents to avoid moisture penetration during cleaning of equipment.. .5 Provide removable panels for access to mechanical and electrical service connections which are concealed behind or within foodservice equipment, but only where access is not possible and not indicated through other work. 2.15 METAL AND GAGES: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate exposed metalwork of stainless steel; fabricate the following components from the gage of metal indicated, and other components from not less than 20 gage metal: Table tops, Countertops, Sinks, Drainboards: 14 gage. Shelves: 16 gage, 18 gage if less than 12" wide. Front Drawer/Door Panels: 18 gage (double -pan type). Single -Pan Doors and Drawer Fronts: 16 gage. Enclosed Base Cabinets: 18 gage. Enclosed Wall Cabinets: 18 gage. Exhaust Hoods: 18 gage. Pan Type Insets and Trays: 16 gage. Removable Covers, Panels: 18 gage. Skirts and Enclosure Panels: 18 gage. Closure and Trim Strips over 4" wide: 18 gage. Hardware Reinforcement: 12 gage. Gusset Plates: 10 gage. 2.16 WORK SURFACE FABRICATION: 11400 - 4 Fabricate metal work -surfaces by forming and welding to provide seamless construction, using welding rods matching sheet metal, grinding and polishing. Where necessary for disassembly, provide waterproof gasketed draw -type joints with concealed bolting. .1 Reinforce work -surfaces 30" o.c. both ways with galvanized or stainless concealed structural members, reinforce edges which are not self -reinforced by formed edges. a .2 South deaden underside of metal work -surfaces, including sinks and similar units, with a coating of sound deadening material. Hold coating back 3" from sanitary edges which are open for cleaning. ' 2.17 STRUCTURAL FRAMING: ' )r A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide framing of minimum 1" pipe -size round pipe or tube members, with r1 mitered and welded joints and gusset plates, ground smooth. Provide 14 gage stainless steel tube for exposed r framing and galvanized steel pipe for concealed framing. B. Where indicated, flange rear and end edges up to form splashes integrally with top, with vertical and horizontal corners coved on not less than 1/4" radius, die formed. Turn back splashes 1" to wall across top and ends with rounded edge on break unless otherwise specified. C. For die -crimped edges, use inverted '1 .1 /2" deep inside and 2" deep on outside, unless otherwise shown. For straight down flanges, make 1-3/4" deep on outside. For bullnose edges, roll down 1-3/4". D. Edges: Die -formed, integral with top. For rounded corners, form to 1 " radius, weld, polish to original finish. 2.18 FIELD JOINTS: For any field joint required because of size of fixture, butt -joint, reinforce on underside with angles of same material, bolt together with non -corrosive bolts and nuts, field weld, grind and polish. 2.19 PIPE BASES: A. Construct pipe bases of 1-5/8" diameter 18 gage stainless steel tubing. Fit legs with polished stainless steel sanitary adjustable bullet feet to provide for adjustment of approximately 1-1/2" without exposing threads. B. Space legs to provide ample support for tops, preclude any possibility of buckling or sagging, and in o case more than 6'-0" centers. 2.20 SHELVES: Construction solid shelves under pipe base tables of 16 gage stainless steel, with 1-1/2" turned down and under edges, and 2" turn up at rear, against walls, welded to pipe legs. 2.21 SINKS: A. Construct sinks of 14 gage stainless steel No. 4 finish inside and outside. B. Form back, bottom, front, of one piece with ends, partitions, welded into place. Partitions: double thickness, f 1 " minimum space between walls. C. Cove interior vertical and horizontal corners of each tub not less than 14" radius, die formed. Outside ends of _ drainboards to have roll rim risers not less than 2-1/2" high. r� I D. Drill faucet holes in splashes 2-1/2' below top edge of 8" centers. E. Weld sinks set into drainboards by 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 14 gage stainless steel angle brackets, securely welded to sinks and galvanized cross angles spot welded to underside of drainboards. F. Sink Drains: Install in center of bottom of each sink bowel 1-1/2" I.P.S. quick opening pop-up lever type drain approximately 4" high, with a 1-1/2" flange with lugs, and fit with 3-1/8" stainless steel strainer plate. G. Lever Handle: Of sufficient length to extend to front edge of sink, threaded at one end and fitted with tension spring. No riveting, screws or soldering permitted to fit drains to sinks, with all parts of drains easily removable for servicing and replacement. 11400 - 5 Slope bottom of sink's bowels toward outlet. Include chrome plated tail piece and trap. 2.22 WORKMANSHIP: A. Best quality in the trade. Field verify dimensions, check measurements before fabricating; conform all items to dimensions of building; neatly fit around pipes, offsets, other obstructions. B—Fabricate only m accordance with approved shop drawings, showing all pipes, obstructions to be built around f and location of utilities and services. , , C. After General Contractor has approved Shop Drawings, he is responsible for preventing additional obstructions — being placed in way of kitchen equipment. .1 Where equipment is exposed to customer view, provide enclosure of service lines, operating components '``I and mechanical and electrical devices. 2.23 ENCLOSURES: Provide enclosures, including panels, housings and skirts for service lines, operating components and mechanical and r electrical devices associated with the foodservice equipment, except as specifically indicated to be "open". 2.24 CASEWORK: A. At fabricator's option, and unless otherwise indicated, provide either box -type face framing or open -channel - type (complying with NSF requirements in either case). B. Enclosure: Except as otherwise indicated, provide each unit of casework (base, wall, overhead and free- standing) with a complete enclosure metal cabinet, including fronts, backs, tops, bottoms and sides. , C. Door and Drawer Fronts: Except where single -pan construction is indicated provide double -pan type, not less than 6/8" thick, with seams on inside face. Weld hardware -reinforcement insider -of inner pan. Sound deaden by either coating both pans on concealed face, or by inserting mineral wool insulation between pans. D. Shelves: Except as otherwise indicated, provide adjustable standards for positioning and support of shelves � . in casework. Turn back -edge of shelf units up 2" and hem. Turn other edges down to form open channel. Reinforce shelf units to support 40 lbs. per sq. ft. loading, plus 100% impact loading. _ E. Drawer Bodies: Except as otherwise indicated, draw -form drawer bodies from a single piece of metal to provide seamless construction. Flange top edge to protect slides from spillage. �! F. Closed Base: Where casework is indicated to be located on a raised -floor base, prepare casework for support without legs, and for anchorage and sealant application, as required for a completely enclosed and concealed base. G. Support form Floor: Equip floor -supported mobile units with casters and equip items indicated as "roll -out" units with manufacturer's standard one -directional rollers. Otherwise, and except for closed -base units, provide pipe }� 4 or tube legs, with adjustable bullet -design feet for floor -supported items of fabricated metalwork. Provide 1- 1/2" adjustment of feet (concealed threading). 2.25 EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION: P A. Comply with NFPA No. 96, including Appendix A. B. Grease Removal: Provide type indicated (removable filters if not otherwise indicated), with drip -channel gutters, drains and collection basins. C. Light Fixtures: Fluorescent fixtures, UL listed for hoods with sealed safety lenses flush with inside of hood; stainless steel conduit for wiring/or UL listed for hoods, incandescent fixtures with sealed safety lenses surface 1, mount. D. Exhaust Duct: Galvanized steel, except stainless steel where exposed to view inside the building. ^' 11400 - 6 i r. I' E. Exhaust Fan: Manufacturer's standard type (complying with section 5 of NFPA No. 96). j F. Fire Extinguishing System: Dry Chemical system complying with NFPA No. 17 and 96. I J 2.26 SHOP PAINTING: -- A. Clean and prepare metal surfaces to be painted; remove rust and dirt. Apply treatment to zinc -coated surfaces which have not been mill-phosphatized. Coat welded and abraded areas of zinc -coated surfaces with galvanized �) repair paint. i B. Apply 1.5 mil (dry film thickness) metal primer coating, followed by 2, 1.0 mil (dry film thickness) metal, enamel _ finish coatings. Bake primer and finish coatings in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions for a baked enamel finish. 2.04 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT: A. Provide either single or multiple compressor units, as recommended by the manufacturer for the sizes and iR variations between connected evaporator loads as indicated. B. Provide units of the capacities indicated, arranged to respond t multiple -evaporator thermostats and defrosting timers. Include coils, receivers, compressors, motors, motor starters, mounting bases, vibration isolation units, fans, dryers, valves, piping, insulation, gages, winter control equipment and complete automatic control system. C. Refrigerant: Pre -charge units with type or types recommended by manufacturer for services indicated, with I• quick -disconnect type connections where specified, ready to receive refrigerant piping runs to evaporators and 't (where remote) to condensers. D. Provide air-cooled condensers, located with the compressors, complete with refrigerant piping installed at the factory. Locate exterior units as shown with weather housings and protective enclosures. E. The minimum outdoor operating ambient temperature for design of units is -10 F. F. The maximum ambient condition (indoor) for operation of compressor units is 95 F with 75% relative humidity in basically still air. 2.28 CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) EQUIPMENT: -- General: Where equipment requires connection with compressor CO2 cylinder for operation, provide 2-cylinder - . manifold and control system (integral with equipment) with proper connectors for Department of Transportation (DOT) approved type cylinders, and complete with cylinder safety devices and supports. Comply with ANSI B57.1 "Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections", and comply with applicable standards of the Compressed Gas Association. 2.29 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND FABRICATION: A. Nameplate: Where possible, locate nameplates and labels on manufactured items in accessible position, but not within customer's normal view. Do not apply nameplates or labels on customer -fabricated work, except ii as required for compliance with governing regulations, insurance requirements or operator performance. B. Manufactured Equipment Items: Furnish items as scheduled or herein specified. Verify dimensions, spaces, ' rough -in and service requirements, electrical characteristics before ordering. Provide all trim, accessories, f miscellaneous items for complete installation. Following are item numbers corresponding to drawings. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION: A. The installer of foodservice equipment must examine the rough -in of mechanical and electrical services by others, and the installation of floors, walls, columns and ceilings by others, and the conditions under which the work is to be done; and must verify dimensions of the services and substrates before fabricating the work. Notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions for the proper installation of food service equipment. 11400 - 7 B. Do not proceed with the fabrication and installation until unsatisfactory dimensions and conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Water Connections: Install water connections and outlets t each item of equipment, with air gaps, vacuum breakers and similar provisions to comply with governing regulations, but not less than compliance with ANSI Standards A40.4 and A40.6. I; B. Gas Burners: Install gas -burning appliances, including gas vents if necessary,_ to comply with-NFPA.No_54_ C. Electrical Work: Assemble electrical components of equipment in accordance with applicable "Standards of � Installation" by the National Electrical Contractors Association. D. Service Lines and Equipment Connections: -Refer to Division 15 sections for piping connections and piping systems. Refer to Division 16 sections for electrical work including equipment connections. E. Coordinate for the installation of approved dry pendant sprinkler head in each cooler and freezer. An additional typical sprinkler head shall be installed above each cooler/freezer assembly. 3.03 JOINTING AND ANCHORING: A. Set each item of non -mobile and non -portable equipment securely in place, leveled and adjusted to correct height. Anchor to supporting substrate where indicated and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. Adjust counter tops and other work surfaces to a level tolerance of 1 /6" (maximum offset, and plus -or -minus on dimensions, and maximum variation in 2'-0" run from level or indicated slope). B. Complete field assembly joints in the work (joints which cannot be completed in the shop) by welding, bolting- and-gasketing, or similar methods as indicated. Grind welds smooth and restore finish. Set or trim flush, except for "T" gaskets as indicated. C. Treat enclosed spaces (inaccessible after equipment installation) by covering horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at a rate of 4 oz. per sq. ft. D. Install closure plates and strips where required, with joints coordinated with units of equipment. E. Install sealants and gaskets all around each unit to make joints air -tight, waterproof, vermin -proof and sanitary for cleaning purposes. F. In general, make sealed joints not less than 1 /8" wide and stuff with backer rod to shape sealant bead properly, at 1 /4" depth. G. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave, with edges flush with faces of material at joint. H. At internal -corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cover, of not less than 3/8" radius. Provide sealant -filled or gasketed joints up to 3/8" joint width; metal closure strips for wider joints, with sealant application each side of strips. Anchor gaskets mechanically or with adhesives to prevent displacement. 3.04 CLEANING, RESTORING FINISHES: A. After completion of installation, and completion of other major work in foodservice areas, remove protective coverings, if any, and clean foodservice equipment, internally and externally. B. Restore exposed and semi -exposed finishes to remove abrasions and other damages; polish exposed -metal surfaces to touch-up painted surfaces. Replace work which cannot be successfully restored. 3.05 TESTING, START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS: A. Delay the start-up of equipment until service lines have been tested, balanced, and adjusted for pressure, voltage and similar consideration; and until water and steam lines have been cleaned and treated for sanitation. B. Test each item of operational equipment to demonstrate that it is operating properly, and that controls and safety devices are functioning. Repair or replace equipment which is found to be defective in its operation, 11400 - 8 v , including units which are below capacity or operating with excessive noise or vibration. •-:� C. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance procedures for each item of operational equipment. I' D. Final Cleaning: After testing and start-up, clean and sanitize the foodservice equipment, and leave in a condition ready for use in foodservice. E. Approved Contractors: The Foodservice Equipment Subcontractor is one the following approved Vendors: � tr Bintz Distributing Co. 1855 South 300 West ` Salt Lake City, Utah 84115 Attn: Brad Garner 801-463-1515 —a r�i I I y 11400 - 9 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 3.5 ITEMIZED LIST OF EOUIPMENT: Item #001 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Quantity: (1) lot Manufacturer: Cold Zone-Filco' Model #: Air Miser #ET14N-2. As per manufacturer's specifications for maintaining the specified system requirements. Dimensions: 62"W x 96"D x 54"II, 17951bs. See manufacturer's shop drawing. Utilities: A) 208-230/60/3, 90 amps w , B) Refrigeration lines as specified (Verify all requirements with manufacturer.) Accessories: A) Includes: Pre piped Tecumseh hermetic compressors with dryers, sight glasses and head pressure controls; pre -wired electrical panel with compressor breakers, contactors, defrost clock, pressure controls and crankcase heaters. (Verify all requirements with manufacturer). Installation Notes: A) Mount on roof as per details. (Optional location on ground pad to be determined by the architect). B) Set refrigeration equipment on platform, mount evaporator coils in cooler/freezer box, provide and install expansion coils, T-Stat, solenoid valves and drain line heaters for freezer. C) Provide and install refrigeration piping, insulation, fittings, u hangers, supports and hook-ups. \ D) Charge each system with the refrigerant as specified in the refrigerant schedule. E) Check, test, start up and final adjustments are to be provided. F) Provide and install drain lines for walk-in box. G) Provide 90 day service warranty. (Verify all requirements with manufacturer). M General Contractor to provide defrost interconnect to freezer t_ units. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 Page #10 c -- FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida i( y FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT n SECTION 11400 Item #002 ICE MAKER AND BIN Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Hoshizaki `- Model #: #KM-1200SRB with #13-900 sc. (bin). Remote refrigeration. y Dimensions: 52-7/8"W x 31-1/2'D x 75"H A) '/2" cold water. B) 1" indirect drain to floor sink. C) 25/64" indirect drain to floor sink D) 1" indirect drain to floor sink. E) '/2" suction, 3/8" liquid refrigeration lines to item #001. --° F) 115-230/60/1, 16.25 amp. Accessories: A) Stainless steel finish, bin and legs. B) Provide filter for incoming water. (2 each) Installation Notes: A) Water is to be pre -filtered as required, (by mechanical contractor). Water pressure to be 7-113 PSIG. d B) Set and level as per plan. To be interconnected with refrigeration system item #001 as required. Item #003 STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: (1) lot Manufacturer: Inter Metro Model #: Super Erecta, Metroseal II Dimensions: (4) 72"W x 24'D x 867H (3) 60"W x 24'D x 86"H (4) 42"W x 24'D x 86"H Utilities: None Accessories: A) Lot to include: (20) 92472NK shelves (15) #2460NK shelves (15) #2442NK shelves " (22) #86PK posts (90) #9995Z `S' clips Installation Notes: A) Assemble, set and level as per plan. (Verify actual field dimensions for compliance.) L15-208-RIL-02 SECTION 11400 Page #11 1WHI T1 FLYING 7 TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #004 CAN RACK Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Storage Unlimited Model #: #NA-310 Dimensions: 27'/z"W x 38"D x 84'/2"H Utilities: None Accessories: - Installation Notes: A) Assemble, set and level as per plan. Item #005 SYRUP RACK Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Provided by vendor. Model #: Verify with vendor. Dimensions: 4' W x 2'D; Verify with vendor. Utilities: 120/60/1, verify AMP (Future). Accessories: Verify with vendor. Installation Notes: Verify with vendor. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #12 �j ,4 -- FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA Iz } St. Lucie, Florida ` FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 �i Item #006 WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER BOX Quantity: (1) lot Manufacturer. Kolpack Model #: #NS (Nominal Size) Dimensions: Freezer: 9'-7' z"W x I I'-T� x 8'-4 31. Cooler: 9'-7'/z"W x 17'-4"D x 8'-47H. Utilities: A) 115/60/1, 2.8 amp at door. Interconnect with extra �._ light. (1 in Freezer, 2 in Cooler). B) 115/60/1, .08 amp heated air vent. (2 each) Accessories: A) Provide 34" door unit; stainless steel finish. (At each box). B) Provide additional vapor proof light (1) each in freezer box, and (2) each in cooler. r C) Provide vacuum relief heated air vent at each door. ' D) Provide side trim to walls. _ E) Common center wall between cooler and freezer. F) Provide additional door hinge to each door. - G) Stainless steel finish on exterior exposed face of box. Galvalume finish on all other surfaces. H) Provide `Thermo Curtain' at each door. Installation Notes: A General Contractor to provide insulated floor as p per details. B) Door threshold to be installed as per details with rile and grout. Floor and base to be provided by General Contractor. C) Assemble and set in place as per plans to rough floor with PVC floor screeds. Tile floor with base to be applied after box a installation. Door height to compensate for floor file dimension. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #13 r FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #007 WALK-iN ROX-SHELVING Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: Item #007A Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: (1) lot Inter Metro -SuperErecta,Metroseal H (4) 72"W x 24"D x 74"H (2) 60"W x 24"D x 74"H (5) 48"W x 24"D x 74"H (1) 30"W x 24"D x 74"H None A) Lot to include: (16) #2472NK shelves (8) #2460NK shelves (20) #2448NK shelves ( 4) #2430NK shelves (28) #74PK posts (80) #9995Z `S' clips A) Assemble, set and level as per plan. (Verify actual field dimensions for compliance.) PORTABLE RACK (2) each Inter Metro #RE-3 20-3/8"W x 26-1/4"D x 69-5/16"H None A) Provide comer bumpers. B) Provide with casters. (2) with locks. A) Assemble, set and level as per plan. (Verify actual field dimensions for compliance for fit. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #14 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #008 COOLER COIL UNIT Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: McQuay (Provided by ColdZone-Filco) Model #: Low profile Unit. To be sized by supplier to maintain +35 degrees within box. _ Dimensions: See refrigeration package shop drawings. Utilities: A) 1" indirect drain to floor sink. B) 7/8" suction, 3/8" liquid refrigeration lines from refrigeration system item #001. (Verify requirements with supplier.) C) 120/60/1, 5.7 amp Accessories: i A) Provide complete system as required to maintain system requirements. Installation Notes: A) Install as per manufacturers requirements into item #006 and ' interconnect to remote refrigeration system item #001. Item #009 FREEZER COIL UNIT 1 ' Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: McQuay (ColdZone by ACL-Filco) Model #: Low Profile Unit. To be sized to maintain +0 degrees within box. Dimensions: See refrigeration package shop drawings. Utilities: A) 1" indirect drain to floor sink. B) 7/8" suction, 3/8" liquid refrigeration lines from refrigeration system item #001. (Verify requirements with supplier). ' C) 208/60/3, 13.3 amp (includes heat tape) Accessories: A) Provide complete system as required to maintain system requirements. ' Installation Notes: A) Install as per manufacturers requirements into item #006 and interconnect to remote refrigeration system item #001. B) General Contractor to provide interconnection to defrost cycle with remote ref system #001. —� L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #15 .J FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #010 DISHROOM SHELVING Quantity: (1) lot Manufacturer. Inter Metro Model #: Super Erecta; Stainless Steel. Dimensions: (1) 72"W x 18'D x 86"H (1) 60"W x 18'D x 86"H (2) 36"W x 18'D x 86"H Utilities: None Accessories: A) Lot to include: ( 5) #1872NS shelves ( 5) #1860NS shelves (10) # 1848NS shelves (14) #86PS posts (10) #99957 "S" Clips. Installation Notes: A) Assemble, set and level as per plan. Item #011 DUNNAGE RACK Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Inter Metro Model #: #2430 DRK Dimensions: (1) 30"W x 24'D x 18"H Utilities: None Accessories: (1) #2430 DRK Dunnage Shelves Installation Notes: A) Assemble, set and level as per plan. (Verify actual field dimensions for compliance). Item #012 POT RACK/STAINLESS STEEL WALL GUARD Quantity:. (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 8'-0'W x 4'-0"H. Utilities: None Accessories: A) S/S wall flashing to be trimmed with S/S `S' and `U' clips as required for a smooth installation. Extend to end wall. Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall as per plan. Wall flashing to begin at +36" a_f f to +84" a.ff.. Pot rack to be mounted at +72" a.ff.. B) General Contractor to provide blocking in wall as required. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #16 - C FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA „ St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #013 STAINLESS STEEL DIRTY DISH TABLE Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated y Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: (6'-0"W x Y-071)) x (9'-0"W x 2'-6"D) x (8'-0"W x 2'-6"D) "U" x 34"H. 1 Utilities: None Accessories: A) Built in pre -rinse sink. B) 8" backsplash. C) 6'-0"W rack shelf mounted over dish drop extension. D) Built in drain trough. E) Provide Undershelf as per plan. ,,--) Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans. Clip and seal backsplash to wall. B) Verify entry requirements of dishmachine to gently slope table back to machine. Item #014 SPARE NUMBER Item #015 SPARE NUMBER Item #016 PRE -RINSE SPRAY ' Quantity: (1) each _ Manufacturer: T & S Brass Model #: #B-163 Dimensions: 33"H x 15"D - l Utilities: A) 1/2" hot and cold water. Accessories: A) Provide wall bracket. ' Installation Notes: A) Mount to dirty dish table item #013 as per plan. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE # 17 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 —Item-#017 DISHWASHER Quantity: Manufacturer. Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: Item #018 Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: (1) each Hobart #CRS-66A 65 ''/2"W x 30"D x 66 %" H. A) 3/4" Common Hot Water Connection. 180 Degrees F. Minimum. 15 to 25 PSI required. From Booster Heater 923. B) 1/8" Inletto be provided for detergent dispenser as required. C) 2" indirect drain to extra deep floor sink D) 208-240/60/3, 14.5 amp (motor). E) 208/60/3, 44.9 amp (tank heat). A) Electric tank heat. B) Verify direction of operation with plan. C) Stainless steel finish. D) Table limit switch. E) Vent hold. A) Set and level as per plan_ Attach dishtables as required. B) Provide unit with low -temp conversion option. STAINLESS STEEL VENT DUCT (1) lot Custom Fabricated See Mechanical Section for Specification Verify (To ceiling). See Mechanical Section See Mechanical Section A) See Mechanical Section B) To be supplied and installed by Foodservice Equipment Contractor. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #18 ry FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #019 Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: Item #020 ` Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: Item #021 Item #022 I� L15-208-R/L-02 STAINLESS STEEL CLEAN DISH TABLEfFHRFE COMP SINK (1) each Custom Metal Fabricated Custom, as per plans and details. (7'0" x 9'T' x 10'6") `U' x 2'6'D x 34"H A) %:" hot and cold water, 2 connections. B) 1 '/z" indirect drain to floor sink A) 8" backsplash. B) Provide mounting brackets for future booster heater. C) (3) lever handle drains. D) (2) 12" swing faucet. E) (3) sink compartments. . F) Provide Undershelf as per plan. G) Auto shut -off -switch for dishwasher. A) Set and level as per plans. Clip and seal backsplash to wall. B) Verify entry requirements of dishwasher. Gently slope table back to dishmachine. STAINLESS STEEL WALL SHELF (1) each Custom Metal Fabricated Custom, as per plans and details_ 9'-T'W x 1'2'D None A) Provide with (4) wall brackets. A) Mount to wall as per plan at +60" a.ff. B) General contractor to provide blocking in wall as required. jU wl SPARE NUMBER SECTION 11400 PAGE #19 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #023 Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: Item #024 Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: Item #025 Quantity: Manufacturer. Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: BOOSTER HEATER (1) each Hatco #CC-27 18"W x 24"D x 12"H A) '/4" hot water. Interconnect to dishwasher final rinse fill. B) '/4" indirect drain to floor sink (Relief valve only). C) 208/60/3, 27 KW A) Castone tank. A) Mount to underside of clean dish table item #019. B) Mechanical system to provide hot water to booster heater no greater than 160 degrees F. and no less than 150 degrees F. SOUP WARMER (2) each Wells #MOD-100-TD 13%"Wx21'/4"Dx9"H A) 'h" indirect drain to floor sink B) '/2" Hot Water C) 120/60/1, 10 amp. A) Auto fill B) Soup insert top. C) Thermostat control. A) Build into item #72, and #120 as per plan. STAINLESS STEEL SHELF (1) each Custom Metal Fabricated Custom, as per plans and details. 5'W x 1'-2"D None A) Provide with mounting supports and brackets to table. A) Mount to work tables #33 as per plans at +60" a.ff. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #20 t� FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #026 STAINLESS STEEL WALL SHELF Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 8'0"W x 1'2"D Utilities: None Accessories: A) Provide with (3) mounting brackets. Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall at +60" a ff. as per plan. B) General Contractor to provide blocking as required. Item #027 STAINLESS STEEL TWO COMPARTMENT SINK/WORK TABLE Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: ry Item #028 Quantity: Manufacturer: _-. Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: L15-208-R/L-02 (1) each Custom Metal Fabricated Custom, as per plans and details. 8'0"W x 2'6"D x 3'0"H A) 'h" hot and cold water. B) 1 '/:" indirect drain to floor sink A) (1) 12" swing arm faucet. B) (2) lever handle drain. C) (2) drawer. D) 8" backsplash and Marine edge_ E) (2) sink compartments and (2) drainboards. A) Set in place as per plans. Clip and seal backsplash to wall. B) General contractor to provide blocking in wall as required. FOOD PROCESSOR (1) each Hobart #FP-100 8-13/16"W x 16-11/16"D x 19'/z" H- A) 120/60/1, 3.5 amp A) Verify optional cutting plates required with owner. A) Set in place as per plans. SECTION 11400 PAGE #21 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item 4029 STAINLESS STEEL WORK TABLE v Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 6'0" W x 3'0'D x 3'0"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, convenience outlet Accessories: A) Open base to accommodate item #030. B) (2) drawers C) Overshelf to be 6'0"W x I'2'D x 24"H Installation Notes: A) Set in place and level as per plan. Item #030 INGREDIENT BINS Quantity: (2) each Manufacturer: Rubbermaid Model #: #3603 Dimensions: 18"W x 29'/<" D x 28"H Utilities: None Accessories: A) Sliding lid and caster Installation Notes: A) Set in place as per plans. Item #030A INGREDIENT BIN Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Rubbermaid Model #: #3600 Dimensions: 13-7/8"W x 29'/dD x 28"H Utilities: None Accessories: A) Sliding Lid & Caster Installation Notes: A) Set in place as per plans. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #22 FLYING J TRAVEL. PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 i< Item #031 SLICER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer Hobart Model #: #1612E Dimensions: 22"W x 26'V4"D x 21-9/16"H Utilities: A) 115160/1, 1/3 HP {J Accessories: A) - Installation Notes: A) Set in place as per plans. r Item #032 30 QUART MIXER r Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Hobart Model #: #13-300 Dimensions: 21"W x 23-5/8"D x 45'/4" H Utilities: A) 208/60/3, % HP Accessories: A) Bowl truck. B) Hub attachment & grater attachment. Installation Notes: A) Set in place and level as per plan. - Item #033 STAINLESS STEEL WORK COUNTER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details Dimensions: 5'-0"W x Y-0"D x 3'-0"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, convenience outlet Accessories: A) Enclosed side panels B) 8" backsplash C) Pan file in base for sheet pans D) Mount shelf item #025 to back splash. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plan- Clip and seal backsplash to wall. r' L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #23 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #034 STAINLESS STEEL WORK TABLE Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans_and details. Dimensions: 8'0' V x 3'0"D x 3'0"14 Utilities: A) 120/60/1, convenience outlet Accessories: A) Undershelf. d, B) (2) drawers. . Installation Notes: A) Set in place and level as per play ;It Item #035 SPARE NUMBER 1 k fi Item #036 STAINLESS STEEL WALL FLASHING Quantity: Y (1) lot Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. j Dimensions: 24'L x 4'0'TI each side. Utilities: None Accessories: A) Provide with 6" vertical channel quilt. B) Trim sides and sheet joints with S/S `S' and `U' trim- C) Sheets to run horizontally. D) Provide S/S `U' end caps at each wall end and wall top. To cover both sides of wall. E) Provide filers at make-up air ducts to close off gaps. (6) locations. Installation Notes: A) Flashing to be installed before tile base. Tile base to be applied over flashing at bottom. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #24 I! -' FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT - SECTION 11400 Item 4037 STAINLESS STEEL WORK COUNTER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated _ Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. 1 Dimensions: 3'0"W x 3'0"D x 3'0"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, convenience outlet a� Accessories: A) Enclosed side panels. B) (2) drawers. C) 8" backsplash. D) Mount shelf item 4038 to backsplash • Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plan. Clip and seal backsplash to wall. ' Item #038 STAINLESS STEEL SHELF Quantity: (1) each ' Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 3'-0"W x 1'-2"D Utilities: None Accessories: A) Provide with mounting supports and brackets to table. Installation Notes: A) Mount to work tables #37 as per plans ant +60" a.ff. Item #039 STAINLESS STEEL HOOD WITH MAKE UP AIR PLENUM Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Marshall Air Model #: See Mechanical Section for Specifications Dimensions: 24'-0"W x 5'-0"D x 2'3"H Utilities: See Mechanical and Electrical Plans Accessories: See Mechanical Section. r Installation Notes: A) See Mechanical Section. B) To be provided and installed by the Foodservice Equipment Contractor. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #25 FLYING 7 TRAVEL PLAZA-� St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #040 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM - Quantity: (1) lot �' ) Manufacturer: Ansul Model #: #R402 Dimensions: Utilities: - Accessories: A) Provide gas shut off valve and electrical shut off contactors as required for protected equipment, for installation by mechanical and electrical contractors. Installation Notes: A) Provide a complete self-contained and certified system B) To protect hood item #039. Tanks to be located on wail close to hood. �i a Item #041 PRESSURE FRYER Quantity: (1) each 1 Manufacturer. Henny Penny Model #: #600 Dimensions: 18"W x 40'WD x 48'Y2"H Utilities: A) '/:" natural gas*, 80,000 btu/hr B) 120/60/1, 10 amp Accessories: A) Casters, 2 with locks. B) Filter hose attachment. C) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection. D) Electrical cord and plug. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plan. B) Rough -in connection to be quick disconnect. C) Verify gas type, i.e.-natural or propane D) Provide pressure regulator as required E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #26 I IJ FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #042 FOUR BURNER RANGE WITH CONVECTION OVEN Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Wolf Model #: #KFS4-27 Dimensions: 36"W x 28"D x 36"H (54'/d'H with back riser shelf) Utilities: A) 1 '/4" natural gas, 110,000 btu/hr Accessories: A) Single deck hi -shelf. B) Casters, 2 with locks. C) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection. D) Rear gas connection_ E) Stainless Steel finish. F) Convection Oven Base G) (4) burners Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans. B) Rough -in connection to be quick disconnect. C) Verify gas type, i.e.-natural or propane. D) Provide pressure regulator as required. E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 PAGE #27 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #043 STEAMER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Cleveland Model #: #24-CGM-200 Dimensions: 24"W x 3TD x 62"H Utilities: A) ''/4" cold water. 35 PSI Min. / 60 PSI max. B) 1 ''/2" indirect drain to floor sink. C) %" natural gas*, 220,000 btu/hr D) 11516011, 100 watts. Accessories: A) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection_ B) Electrical cord and plug. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans. B) Water to be minimum requirements of :Total dissolved solids of no greater than 60 parts per million; pH no greater than 7.5; silica less than 13 parts per million; alkalinity less than 20 parts per million. Water requirements to be met by mechanical system. C) Verify gas type, i.e.-natural or propane. D) Provide pressure regulator as required E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required. Item #044 TILT KETTLE Quantity: (2) each Manufacturer. Cleveland Model #: #KET-12-T Dimensions: 2T'W x 20"D x 24'/4" H Utilities: A) 208/60/3, 27.3 amp B) %" hot and cold water. Accessories: A) Provide cover. B) Provide tilt handle to outside of stand to allow clear access of fill faucet. Installation Notes: A) Mount to kettle stand item #046 as per plans L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #28 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item 4045 SPARE NUMBER Item #046 STAINLESS STEEL KETTLE STAND/TABLE p Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated - Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: '5'0"W x 3'0"D x 20"H (44"H to top of backsplash) Utilities: A) '/z" hot and cold water `) B) 1" flexible indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: A) Provide swing faucet to reach item #044 & #045. B) Provide pull out catch pan with perforated insert and flexible drain hoses. ` C) Provide drainage in top. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plan. Mount items #044 to top of unit as per plan. Item #047 STACKED CONVECTION OVEN Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Hobart (approved equal: Wolf) Model #: #HGC-402 Dimensions: 38"W x 36"D x 65'/2"H Utilities: A) '/2" natural gas*, 80,000 btu/hr B) 115/60/1, 9 amp (2 each/item) Accessories: A) Stainless steel finish including top and ends. B) Casters, (2) w/locks. C) Cabinet doors top and bottom. D) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection. E) Provide with cord and plug. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plan. B) Rough -in connection to be quick disconnect. C) Verify gas type, i.e.-natural or propane D) Provide pressure regulator as required. E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required. 'J L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #29 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item 4048 SPARE NUMBER �a Item #049 FLAT GRILL Quantity: (1) each - — -- Manufacturer. Wolf, (approved equal: Hobart) Model #: #RSA-60C Dimensions: 60"W x 31 '/2" D x 13"H Utilities: A) '/4" natural gas*, 137,000 btu/hr. B) 120/60/1, 5 amp. Electric ignition. Accessories: A) Stainless Steel finish B) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection. Installation Notes: A) Set on stand item #055 and level as per plan- B) Rough in connection to be quick disconnect. C) Verify Gas type, i.e.-natural or propane D) Provide pressure regulator as required E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required. Item #050 STAINLESS STEEL -HOOD W/MAKE-UP AIR PLENUM Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Marshall Air Model #: See Mechanical Section for Specification Dimensions: 24'0"W x 5'0"D x 2'3"H Utilities: See Mechanical and Electrical Plans. Accessories: See Mechanical Section Installation Notes: A) See Mechanical Section B) To be provided and installed by Foodservice Equipment Contractor. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #30 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #051 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM Quantity: (1) lot I, f Manufacturer. Ansul Model #: #R-102 Dimensions: - -e Utilities: - Accessories: A) Provide gas shut-off valve and electrical shut-off contactors i as required for protected equipment, to be installed by plumbing and electrical contractors. - _ histallation Notes: A) Provide a complete self contained and certified system to } protect hood item #050. Item #052 FRY STATION Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Pitco, (Approved Equal: Wells) Model #: #PR14 Dimensions: 48'/z"W x 31-5/8"D x 34"H (46"H to top of flue) Utilities: A) '/2" natural gas', 122,000 btu/hr (2 each) B) 115/60/1,'/2 HP, filter system (1 each) C) 115/60/1, 4.8 amp, heat lamp (I each) ' Accessories: A) `Flex-O-Fry multiple units with (2) fryer units at each side and (1) landing/filter station in center. B) Built in filter system. C) Casters, 2 with brakes. D) Twin baskets. E) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection. - F) Heat lamp #PFW-1. G) Stainless steel finish and pot. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans. B) Rough -in connection to be quick disconnect. C) Verify gas type, i.e.-natural or propane. D) Provide pressure regulator as required. -- E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required '—� L15-208=R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #31 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #053 GROOVED GRILL WITH STAND Quantity: (1) cac_ h_ Manufacturer: Wolf Model #: #RSAGG-24F Dimensions: 24"W x 31 '/'D x 12 '/2"H Utilities: A) '/4" natural gas*, 60,000 btu/hr B) 120/60/1, 5 amp. Electrical Ignition Accessories: A) Leg set. B) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection. C) Provide with stainless steel stand with castors. Installation Notes: A) Set on stand and level as per plan. B) Rough -in connection to be quick disconnect. C) Verify gas type, i.e.-natural or propane D) Provide pressure regulator as required. E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required Item #054 FLAT GRILL WITH STAND Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Wolf, (Approved Equal: Hobart) Model #: #RSA-36F Dimensions: 36"W x 31 '/2"D x 13"H Utilities: A) '/4" natural gas*, 62,000 btu/hr B) 120/60/1, samp. Electric ignition. Accessories: A) Stainless steel finish. B) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection. C) Provide with S/S stand with casters. Installation Notes: A) Set on stand and level as per plan. B) Rough -in connection to be quick disconnect. C) Verify gas type, i.e.-natural or propane. D) Provide pressure regulator as required E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #32 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #055 STAINLESS STEEL GRILL STAND Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 7'-0"W x 3'-0'D x 24 ''/z"H Utilities: None Accessories: A) Removable workboard. B) Casters, 2 with locks C) Build item #056 into bas as/plan. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans_ To have items #049, and #057 set on top of unit. Item 9056 REFRIGERATED GRILL STAND BASE CABINET Quantity. (1) each Manufacturer: Hobart Model #: #LIBS-2 Dimensions: 72-1/8"W x 33-5/16'D x 19"H Utilities: A) 115/60/1, 4.8 amp Accessories: A) Stainless steel finish. (top not included) B) Condensate evaporator. C) Electrical cord and plug. Installation Notes: A) Build into grill stand item #055 as per plans. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 PAGE #33 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #057 FOUR BURNER STEP UP HOT PLATE Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Wolf Model #: #RHP4-24 Dimensions: 24"W x 30 3/4"D x 10'W (15"H to top back bumers) Utilities: A) 3/4" natural gas*, 80,000 btu/hr Accessories: A) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection B) Stainless steel finish. C) Step up back bumer. Installation Notes: A) Set and level on stand item #55 as per plans_ B) Rough -in connection to be quick disconnect. C) Verify gas type, i.e. natural or propane. D) Provide pressure regulator as required. E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required. Item #058 FRY STATION Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Pitco, (Approved Equal: Wells) Model #: # 147SUFM Dimensions: 26-5/16"W x 33-5/16'D x 35"H (4T H to top of flue) Utilities: A) ''/2" natural gas*, 110,'000 btu/hr and 55,000 btu/hr. B) 11516011, 5 amp basket Iift. C) 115/60/1, 5 amp basket lift. Accessories: A) Casters, 2 with brakes. B) Twin baskets/Single basket C) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection. D) Basket lifts E) Stainless steel finish and pot. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans. B) Rough -in connection to be quick disconnect. C) Verify gas type, i.e. natural or propane. D) Provide pressure regulator as required. E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE 934 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT - - SECTION 11400 Item #059 REFRIGERATED SANDWICH COUNTER Quantity- (1) each Manufacturer: True Model #: #TSSU-27-8 Dimensions: 27'/z"W x 30'D x 437H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, 3.9 amp Accessories: A) Finished side panels. B) Casters, (2) with brakes. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plan_ Item #060 FREEZER BASE CABINET Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Hobart Model #: #USF-2 Dimensions: 62"W x 33-9/32"D x 28"H Utilities: A) 5/8" suction 3/8" liquid refrigeration lines from item #001. B) 115/60/1, 4.8 amp. Accessories: A) Stainless steel finish. (top not included) B) Remote refrigeration Installation Notes: A) Build into item #062. B) Interconnect with refrigeration system item #001 and defrost . cycle by General Contractor. Item #061 STAINLESS STEEL PASS SHELF AND PLATE SHELF Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details Dimensions: 12'-0"W x 1'6"D Utilities: None Accessories: A) Stainless Steel trim at opening of pass-thru window top as per details. B) (2) tier S/S plate shelves 12'-0"W x 1'-6"D with supports to header as/plans. Installation Notes: A) Attach to S/S riser backsplash of items #062 and #072 at +48 a.ff.. I- L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #35 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT ' \ SECTION 11400 Item 4062 STAINLESS STEEL CHEF'S COUNTER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as -per plans and details Dimensions: 20'-0"W x 3'-0'D x 3'-O"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, Convenience Outlet B) %:" hot and cold water C) Indirect drain to floor sink. Accessories: A) Provide openings in base to build in items #060, #063, and #065. B) Provide cut out in tip and build in items #064 and #065. C) Provide work board approximately 19'-6"L. D) Provide 8" back splash / riser to support pass shelf item #61 and create utility chase in conjunction with item #72. E) Mount service call board item #118 in backsplash. F) Provide cut outs and mount electrical boxes in backsplash under pass shelf as required. G) Provide built-in sink with faucet and drain. H) Provide trash chute compartment. I) Provide plate shelf at hot food warmer #064. J) Provide with (2) finished ends. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plan. Clip and seal backsplash to wall. B) To become integrated with items #072 to support pass shelf item #061 and create utility chase between units. Item #063 ROLL WARMER Quantity. (1) each Manufacturer: Alto Sham Model #: #500-3D Dimensions: 24 'h"W x 24-3/8"D x 26-5/16"H Utilities: A) 125/60/1, 8.0 amp Accessories: A) Built-in trim kit. Installation Notes: A) Build into item #062. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #36 ' - FLYING J TRAVEL. PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT -, SECTION 11400 i_ r Item #064 FOOD WARMER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Wells Model #: #MOD400-TDM. Dimensions: 57'/<"W x 23 ''/z'D x 9 3/4"H Utilities: A) I" indirect drain to floor sink B) 1/z" hot water C) 208/60/3, 11.2 amp (interconnect switch) Accessories: A) Manifold drain. B) Auto fill C) Thermostat control Installation Notes: A) Drop and build into cut out in item #062 as per plans. ' Mount controls at plate shelf. Item #065 REFRIGERATED BASE CABINET i, Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Hobart Model #: #USR-2 Dimensions: 62"W x 33-9/32"D x 28"H Utilities: A) 5/8" suction 3/8" liquid refrigeration lines from item #001. B) 115/60/1, .4 amp. Accessories: A) Stainless steel finish. (top not included) B) Remote refrigeration. Installation Notes: A) Build into item #062. To include cut out in top to accept pan inserts. Modify blower coils to accept insert pans. B) Interconnect with refrigeration system item #001. L15-208-R/L.02 SECTION 11400 PAGE #37 10/10/96 FLYING 7 TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 - - --Item- #066 REACW-II-REFRIGERAT(AR Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Hobart _ Model #: #QSR-1 Dimensions: 27-3/8"W x 33-5/8"D x 82-5/8"H Utilities: A) '/2" suction 3/8" liquid refrigeration lines from item #001. B) 11516011, 2.4 amp Accessories: A) Stainless steel finish. B) Remote refrigeration Installation Notes: A) Set and level as/plan. B) Interconnect with refrigeration system item #001. Item #067 TOASTER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Hobart Model #: #ET-274 Dimensions: 12 '/z"W x 13 '/<'D x 7 3/,'TI Utilities: A) 120-208/60/1, 11.7 (23.3) amp. Accessories: A) Provide with cord and plug. Installation Notes: A) Set as per plans. Item #068 HEAT LAMP Quantity. (1) each Manufacturer: Hatco Model #: #GRAH-72 Dimensions: 72"W x 6'D x 2 '/s"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, 1800 watts. Accessories: A) Mount to underside of plate shelf #061. B) Provide with built in infinite control switch. Installation Notes: A) Mount above pass shelf item #061, to underside of plate shelf. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #38 [1 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #069 MICROWAVE OVEN Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Amana Model #: #RC-16SE Dimensions: 18 ''/d'W x 23"D x 17-5/8"H Utilities: A) 208/60/1, 1400 watt, 20 amp Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Set on shelfitem #071 as per plan_ Item #070 CHEESE MELTER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Vulcan Hart Model #: #1036W Dimensions: 36 ''/z"W x 17'/x"D x 15 ''/<"H Utilities: A) 208/60/1, 18.8 amp Accessories: A) Wall mount kit. Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall as per plans. Item #071 STAINLESS STEEL MICROWAVE SHELF Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 4'-6"W x 23"/14" D Utilities: None Accessories: A) Provide (3) mounting brackets. B) Extend depth to hold microwave as required - Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall at approximately +60" a ff. as/plans. B) General Contractor to provide blocking in wall as iequired. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 PAGE #39 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA _ St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 1 Item4072 STAINLESS-&TEEL-SERVICE C-0UNTER - — Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 22'L x 2'-8'D x 3'-0"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, convenience outlet Accessories: A) Provide openings in base to build in items #074, #076 and #077. B) Provide cut outs in top and build in tiems #024, #077, and #108. C) Provide 8" back splash with S/S riser to support pass shelf item #61 and create utility chase in conjunction with item #62. D) Provide cut outs and mount electrical boxes as required in riser. E) Provide shelf openings with self closing sliding doors as per details. F) Provide with finished ends. G) Provide cut back top at item #075. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans. Clip and seal backsplash to wall. B) To become integrated with item #62, to support pass shelf item #61 and create utility chase between counters. L15-208-R/L.02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #40 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #073 STAINLESS STEEL SERVICE COUNTER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details Dimensions: 20'-0"L x 2'-87D x 3'-0"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, Convenience outlet. B) '/2" Hot and Cold Water. C) 1 ''/2" Indirect drain to floor sink. Accessories: A) Provide openings in base and build in Item #075. B) Provide cut outs in tip and build in Items #082, and #083. C) Provide 8" back and (1) side splash. D) Provide sink with faucet and drain. E) Provide trash chute compartment. F) Provide cut back to at Item #075 G) Provide with (1) finished end_ H) Provide shelf openings with self closing doors as per details. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans. Clip and seal backsplash to wall. B) Verify requirements of Item #075 to insure proper fit and utilizations of glass/cup racks. Item 9074 BUS TUB RACK GLIDES Quantity. (4) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 3" x 3" angle x 2T'D (each angle glide) Utilities: None Accessories: A) Each unit to consist of (3) pairs of angles. B) Rack holder to be constructed of angle to hold bus tub. Verify bus tub size. Installation Notes: A) Install as per plans into counter bases. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 PAGE #41 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #075 GLASS/CUP RACK GLIDES Quantity: (9) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom -as -per, plans and details. Dimensions: 21" x 21" x 2"H (each pull out glide) Utilities: None Accessories: A) Each unit to consist of (4) pull out racks each. B) Rack holder to be constructed of angle to hold either (1) 20" x 20" or (2) 10" x 20" racks. C) Rack holders are to be provided with heavy duty roller glides that allow 2/3 extension of rack from cabinet. Installation Notes: A) Install as per plans into counter bases. Item #076 ROLL WARMER } Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Alto Sham Model #: #500-3D Dimensions: 24 ''/:"W x 24-3/8"D x 26-5/16"H Utilities: A) 125/60/1, 8.0 amp Accessories: A) Built in trim kit. Installation Notes: A) Build into item #072. Item #077 REFRIGERATED BASE WITH SALAD PAN CUT OUT Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: True Model #: #TSSU-27-8 Dimensions: 27'/2"W x 30"D x 43"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, 6.6 amp Accessories: A) Stainless Steel finish Installation Notes: A) Build into item #072, provide for proper ventilation of unit from bottom B) Provide cut out in top to integrate with counter cut out in item #072. L15-208-RA,02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #42 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #078 TOASTER Quantity: (3) each Manufacturer Hobart Model #: #ET-27-4 Dimensions: 12 ''/:"W x 13 3/<"D x 7'/."H Utilities: A) 120-208/60/1, 11.7 (23.3) amp Accessories: A) Provide with cord and plug. Installation Notes: A) Set as per plans. Item 9079 COFFEE GROUNDS DISPENSER Quantity. (1) each Manufacturer. AI -Len Model #: #A Dimensions: Verify w/supplier Utilities: None Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Set as per plan Item #080 COFFEE BREWER/DISPENSER Quantity: (2) each Manufacturer. Bunn-O-Matic Model #: #RL-35 Dimensions: 24"W x 18'/2"D x 21 '/2"H Utilities: A) 3/8" cold water (each) B) 120-208/60/1, 4065 watts Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Set as per plan. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #43 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #080A COFFEE BREWER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Bunn-O-Matic Model #: #STS-F-35 Dimensions: 7'/2"W x 18"D x 20-'/."H Utilities: A) '/d' Cold Water B) 120-208/60/1, 3900 watts Accessories: None Installation Notes: Set as per plans. Item #081 HOT CHOCOLATE DISPENSER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Jet Spray Model#: #HCL-30CF Dimensions: 8 '/:"W x 18 5/8"D x 20'/<"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, 14 amps B) '/d' Cold Water C) '/2" Indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Set as per plan. Item #082 SODA DISPENSER/ICE BIN/CARBONATOR Quantity: (2) each Manufacturer. Cornelius Model #: #CB-2123-AK6 Sealed Dimensions: 25"W x 23'D x 36-7/8"H (14" below counter, 22-7/8" above counter) Utilities: A) '/2" cold water B) 1" indirect drain to floor sink C) 115/6011, 8 amp Accessories: A) Sealed in cold plate B) Provide Carbonator. C) Verify regulators required for carbonated and non -carbonated valves, with owner. Installation Notes: A) Set into counter cut out as per plan. Interconnect soda lines from soda chase. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #44 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #083 WATER FILLER Quantity: (4) each Manufacturer. Delfield Model #: #307 Dimensions: 12"W x 12"D x 9 Y:"H Utilities: A) '/2" cold water B) '/2" indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: A) Provide with pitcher high filler Installation Notes: A) Set into counter cut out as per plans_ Item #084 COLD BEVERAGE DISPENSER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Bunn-O-Matic Model #: #TD-4T Dimensions: 9'W x 15'/s"D x 17'/2"H Utilities: A) None Accessories: A) None Installation Notes: A) Set as per plans Item #085 ICE TEA DISPENSER Quantity: (3) each Manufacturer. Bunn-O-Matic Model #: #TU-3 Dimensions: 10-1/8"W x 20'D x 34 %"H. Utilities: A) ''/e" cold water B) 11516011, 15 amp . Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Set as per plans. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #45 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #086 JUICE DISPENSER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer Provided by Owner (Vendor) Model #: Verify with vendor Dimensions: Verify with vendor Utilities: A) ''/s" indirect drain to floor sink B) 115/6011, 8.9 amp (Verify utility requirements with vendor). Accessories: A) Verify with vendor Installation Notes: A) Set as per plans. Verify additional requirements with vendor. Item #087 REFRIGERATED BASE Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: True Model #: #TSSU-27 Dimensions: 27 '/2"W x 30'D x 30"H Utilities: A) 115/60/1, 6.6 amp. Accessories: A) Stainless Steel finish. Installation Notes: A) Build into item #091. Provide for proper ventilation of unit from bottom. Item #088 REFRIGERATED WALL MOUNT DISPLAY CASE Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Delfield Model #: #9048 Dimensions: 48"W x 22 ''/,"D x 20 1/8"H Utilities: A) 115/60/1, 5.5 amp Accessories: A) Include all wall mounting brackets. Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall at +60" aff. to bottom of unit as per plans. B) General contractor to provide blocking in wall as required L15-208-R/Ir02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #46 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #089A DROP -IN ICE PAN Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Delfield Model #: #8045-3 Dimensions: 45 5/8"W x 26"D x 9 '/:"H Utilities: A) 1" indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Build into item # 120 as per plans. Item #089B DROP -IN ICE PAN Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Delfield Model #: 8031-2 Dimensions: 31'/."W x 26"D x 9'h"H Utilities: A) 1" indirect drain to floor sink. Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Build into item #120 as per plans. Item 9089C DROP -IN ICE PAN Quantity: (2) each Manufacturer. Delfield Model #: #80594 Dimensions: 59 VT W x 26"D x 9 '/2"H Utilities: A) 1" Indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Build into item 9120 as per plans. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #47 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #090A FOOD WARMER Quantity. (2) each Manufacturer. Wells Model #: #MOD-300-TDM Dimensions: 43 '/z"W z 23-V2"D x 9 3/a"H Utilities: A) 1" indirect drain to floor sink B) 'W' Hot water C) 208/60/1, 13.5 amp Accessories: A) Drain manifold B) Auto fill C) Thermostat Controls Installation Notes: A) Build into item # 120 as per plans_ Controls to be mounted in face of counter. Item #090B FOOD WARMER S Quantity: (3) each Manufacturer. Wells Model #: #MOD-200-TDM Dimensions: 29 'h"W x 23 Y2"D x 9 3/4"H Utilities: A) 1" indirect drain to floor sink. B) ''/:" Hot water C) 208/60/1, 9.2 amp Accessories: A) Drain manifold. B) Auto fill - C) Thermostat Control Installation Notes: A) Build into item #120 as per plans. Controls to be mounted in face of counter. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #48 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #091 STAINLESS STEEL SERVICE COUNTER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated. Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 23'0" x 2'8"D x 3'0"H Utilities: A) '/I" hot and cold water B) 1 '/2" indirect drain to floor sink C) 120/6011, convenience outlet Accessories: A) Provide openings in base and build in items #074, #075 and #087. B) Provide cut outs in top and build in items #082, #083, #094, #095, and #096. C) Provide sink with faucet and drain. D) Provide trash chute and container. E) 8" backsplash and (2) end splash. F) Provide cut back top at item #075. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans. Clip and seal backsplash to wall. B) Verify requirements of item #075 to insure proper fit and utilization of glass/cup racks. Item #092 STAINLESS STEEL WALL SHELF Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details Dimensions: 4'-6"W x 1'2'D Utilities: None Accessories: A) Provide (3) mounting brackets Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall as per plans at approximately +60" a ff.. Verify clearance with counter equipment. B) General contractor to provide blocking in wall as required. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #49 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item 4093 DROP -IN DISH LOWERATORS Quantity: (4) each Manufacturer. Servo -lift Model #: #AT-1 (Verify plate size). Dimensions: Approximately 9"W Utilities: None Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Verify dish to be used and size unit accordingly for proper fit Item #094 DROP IN ICE CREAM FREEZER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Delfield Model #: #225 Dimensions: 27-7/8"W x 16-9/16"D x 28'/d'D Utilities: A) 115/60/1, 3.3 amp B) '/2" indirect drain to floor sink. Accessories: A) Include S/S louvre to be mounted in face of item #091. Installation Notes: A) Build into item #091 as per plans. Item #095 DIPPER WELL Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Kenco Model #: #FW510 Dimensions: 6" diameter Utilities: A) ''/e" cold water B) ''/:" indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: A) Include faucet and continuous water run off drain Installation Notes: A) Build into item #091 as per plans. L15-208-RlL02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #50 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #096 FLAVOR RAIL Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Fabricated Model ##: Custom Dimensions: 36"W Utilities: ''/s" indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: A) Include 5 jars (2) with pumps Installation Notes: A) Build into counter item #091. Item #097 SPARE NUMBER Item #098 MALT MAR Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Waring Model #: #DMC-200 Dimensions: 13-11/16"W x 7-5/16"D x 19-7/16"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, 3 amp Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Set on item #091. Item #099 MICROWAVE OVEN Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Amana Model #: #RFS-11B Dimensions: 21-5/8"W x 19-13/16"D x 14'/."H. Utilities: A) 120/60/1, 1100 watt. Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Set onto microwave shelf item 9100. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #51 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item4100-eT-AINLESS4STEEL-MICROW-AVE-SHELF Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: A) 6'-0" W x 20"D at microwave, 1'-2"D at rest of shelf. Utilities: None Accessories: A) Provide (3) mounting brackets. Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall at approximately +60" a ff. as per plan. Verify clearance with counter equipment B) General contractor to provide blocking in wall as required. 1 Item #101 PLATE LOWERATOR Quantity: (6) each Manufacturer: Serve-O-Lift Model #: #AT-6 (Verify plate size). Dimensions: Approximately 12-3/8" diameter Utilities: None Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Verify plate to be used and size unit accordingly for proper fit B) Build into item # 120 as per plans. Item #102 SPARE NUMBER Item 9103 COFFEE WARMERS Quantity: (3) each Manufacturer. Bunn-O-Matic Model #: #WX-2 Dimensions: 8 %s"W x 16 Y:"D x 5"H Utilities: 120/60/1, 260 watts (each). Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Set as per plan. Item # 104 SPARE NUMBER L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #52 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item # 105 FLAVOR RAIL Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Fabricated Model #: Custom Dimensions: 1'-6"W Utilities: '/2" indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: A) Include 3 jars with pumps Installation Notes: A) Build onto counter item # 120. Item # 106 COUNTER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Provided by Owner (Millwork) Model #: - Dimensions: See millwork details Utilities: - Accessories: - Installation Notes: Verify with owner requirements for equipment to be installed into counter. Item #107 STAINLESS STEEL WALL SBELF Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details Dimensions: T-0"W x 1'2"D Utilities: None Accessories: A) Provide (3) mounting brackets Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall at approximately +60" a.£f as per plan Verify clearance with counter equipment. B) General contractor to provide blocking in wall as required. L15-208-RIL-02 SECTION 11400 PAGE #53 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item-#108 FOOD�✓ARMER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Wells Model #: #MOD 100 TD Dimensions: 13 %"W x 21 '/d'D x 9"H ` Utilities: A) '/2" indirect drain to floor sink B) '/2" hot water C) 120/60/1, 10 amp Accessories: A) Auto fill B) Thermostat Control Installation Notes: Build into Item #072 as per plan_ Item #109 ICE BIN Quantity: (2) each Manufactures Delfield Model #: #305 Dimensions: 15 '/d'W x 21 '/<'D x 13"H below cou ter. Utilities: A) 1" indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: A) None Installation Notes: A) Build into item # 112 as per plan. Item #110 SINK Quantity: (2) each Manufacturer. Advance Model #: #DI-1-5 Dimensions: 13"W x 19"D Utilities: A) '/2" hot and cold water B) 1 '/z" indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: A) Include #K-52 faucet and drain. Installation Notes: A) Build into item # 112 as per plans. L15-208-RIL-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #54 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item # 111 TRASH CHUTE COLLAR Quantity: (2) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details Dimensions: 6"W x 6 D x 12"H Utilities: None Accessories; None Installation Notes: A) Build into item 9112 as per plan. Item #112 SERVICE STATION COUNTER Quantity: (3) each Manufacturer Provided by Owner (Millwork) Model #: - Dimensions: See millwork details Utilities: - Accessories: - Installation Notes: A) Verify with owner the requirements of equipment to be installed in counter. Item #113 HAND SINK Quantity. (2) each Manufacturer Provided by Plumber. Model #: Dimensions: - Utilities: A) '/2" hot and cold water B) 1 '/2" direct drain (Verify utility requirements with contractor). Accessories: A) Includes soap dispenser and towel dispenser. Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall as per plan. L15-208-R/L,02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #55 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Provided by Plumber Model #: - Dimensions: - Utilities: A) '/2" hot and cold water B) 1 '/2" direct drain (Verify utility requirements with contractor) Accessories: A) Includes mop rack and detergent/soap wall cabinet Installation Notes: A) Mount as per plan. Item #115 LOCKERS Quantity: (4) each Manufacturer. Vogel Peterson Model #: #TR6N, color Putty (verify with architect). Dimensions: 12"W x 12"D x 72"H Utilities: - Accessories: A) 6"Legs Installation Notes: A) Locate as per plan Item # 116 CASHIER COUNTER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Provided by Owner (Millwork) Model #: - Dimensions: See millwork details Utilities: See mechanical and electrical plans. Accessories: A) Verify Installation Notes: A) Set as per plan. Verify with owner requirements of equipment to be installed into unit L15-208-R/Ir02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #56 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 •- - Item # 117A CASH REGISTER Quantity: Manufacturer. Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: Item #117B Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: Item #117C Quantity: Manufacturer Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: (1) each Provided by Owner (Positron System) A) Verify with supplier A) Verify with supplier A) Verify requirements with supplier. PRE -CHECK REGISTER (3) each Provided by Owner (Positron System) A) Verify with supplier A) Verify with supplier A) Verify requirements with supplier. IJ'�t,_ zlya � (4) each Provided by Owner (Positron System) A) Verify with supplier A) Verify with supplier A) Verify requirements with supplier. Printer should be able to be located at any point along chef s counter. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #57 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #118 SERVICE CALL SYSTEM Quantity: (1) lot Manufacturer. TOPPO Model #: #S2008 Dimensions: Verify with manufacturer Utilities: A) 110/60/1, output voltage for transformer 12 VAC 3.3-4.6 A. Class two wiring. Accessories: A) (2) each one sided ceiling display finished in Formica (to be specified by Interior designer). Installation Notes: A) Verify with manufacturer_ Item #119 COOK AND HOLD OVEN Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Alto Sham Model #: #1000-TH-IIBD Dimensions: 22'/:"W x 30'/e"D x 76'/:"H Utilities: A) 208/60/1, 28.8 amp Accessories: A) Bumper guards Installation Notes: A) Set as per plans. Item # 120 FOOD BAR COUNTER Quantity: Lot of (4) Manufacturer: Provided by Owner (Millwork) Model #: - Dimensions: See milhvork details. Utilities: A) See millwork details Accessories: A) Verify Installation Notes: A) Set as per plan by millwork fabricator. Verify with owner requirements of equipment to be installed into unit. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 PAGE #58 10/10/96 i I FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item # 121 Quantity: Manufacturer. Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: Item #122 Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: Item #123 0 ;, Quantity: Manufacturer. Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: 1,15-208-R/102 SNEEZE GUARD Lot of (4) Provided by Owner (Millwork) See millwork details. A) See mechanical and electrical plans. A) Verify A) Set as per plan by millwork fabricator. Verify with owner requirements of equipment to be protected by this unit. WAFFLE IRON (2) each Provided by Owner (Vendor) Verify with vendor. Verify with vendor. A) Verify with vendor. B) 120/60/1, verify load A) Verify with vendor. A) Set in place as per plans. I %ccl Ll I lIFAzI (3) each_ Custom Fabricated. Custom Verify w/pre-check supplier. None None A) Set as per plan. Verify with owner requirements of equipment to be installed onto unit. SECTION 11400 PAGE #59 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item # 124 PROOF BOX Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Inter -metro Model #: #C175-P8N Dimensions: 25 3/16"W x 32 1/16"D x 69'/a"H Utilities: 120/60/1, 10 amp Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Set in place as per plan Item #125 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS Quantity: (10) each (Verify) Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom Dimensions: 4" x 4" x 9'H (to ceiling). Utilities: None Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Attach to wall as required Item #126 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS Quantity: (7) each (Verify) Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: custom Dimensions: 4" x 4" x 48"H (from top of base up) Utilities: None Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Attach to wall as required. Item # 127 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS Quantity: (1) lot (Verify) Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom Dimensions: 4" x 4" x 40"H (to chair rail) Utilities: None Accessories: None Installation Notes: A) Attach to wall as required L15-208-R/L 02 SECTION 11400 PAGE #60 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #128 HOT FOOD PASS-THRU HOLDING CABINET Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Hobart Model #: #QSDH-1 Dimensions: 27 3/8"W x 39"D x 82 5/8"H. Utilities: A) 120/60/1, 7.5 amps Accessories: A) Stainless steel exterior and interior. B) 6" legs. C) Windows in back doors. D) Doors front and back to be set of half doors. E) Wire shelves. (Verify configuration with owner). Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plan. Item #129 REFRIGERATED PASS-THRU HOLDING CABINET Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Hobart Model #: #QSDR-1 Dimensions: 27 3/8"W x 39"D x 82 5/8"R Utilities: A) 120/60/1, 2.4 amp. B) Y:" suction, 3/8" liquid refrigeration lines, from item #001. Accessories: A) Stainless steel finish, interior and exterior. B) 6" legs. C) Windows in back and front doors. D) Doors front and back to be half doors. E) Wire Shelves (verify configuration with owner). F) Remote refrigeration. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans. B) Interconnect with refrigeration system item #001. IItF-S411:ls:7/MI N SECTION 11400 PAGE #61 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 _Item-#_130 STAINLESS-STEEL—PASS-THRUTRIM Quantity: (2) each `I Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated. Model #: Custom Dimensions: 7'H x 2'-6"W Utilities: None Accessories:. A) Side and top "U" trim at jamp and header of pass-thru openings. Installation Notes: A) Install at top and side of pass-thru openings as per plans. Item # 131 HOT FUDGE DISPENSER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Server Products Model #: #LFSP-81300 Dimensions: 8-9/16"W x 11-9/16"D x 15-3/16"R Utilities: A) 120/60/1, 520 watt Accessories: A) Pump Lever B) Stainless steel finish — C) Hot Fudge face label j Installation Notes: A) Set in place as per plan on item #120. Item # 132 DROP -IN CONDIMENT PAN Quantity: (2) each Manufacturer. Custom Fabricated Model #: Custom Dimensions: A) One to fit (6) 6'b size hotel pans. B) One to fit (3) 6's size hotel pans. Utilities: None Accessories: A) Stainless steel edge trim at cabinet cut out. B) (9) 6'" size hotel pans. Installation Notes: A) Set in place at cut out provided in item # 120 by millwork fabricator. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #62 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #133 . SOFT ICE CREAM MACHINE Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Taylor Model #: #168 Dimensions: 21"W x 24"D x 54"H Utilities: A) 208/60/1, 34 amps left _. B) '/2" indirect drain to floor sink C) '/2" cold water. ' Accessories: A) Casters t� B) Water Cooled C) Single power cord D) Stainless steel finish - E) Electronic mix low and mix out light. F) Separate hopper refrigeration. Installation Notes: A) Set in place as per plan. Item # 134 CONE DISPENSER Quantity: Manufacturer: (1) each Provided by owner (vendor). Model #: Verify with vendor. Dimensions: Verify with vendor. Utilities: None (Verify with vendor). Accessories: Verify with vendor. Installation Notes: A) Set in place as per plans. Item #135 SPARE NUMBER - L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 PAGE #63 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item # 136 BOWL TRAY INSERT Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Provided by owner (Millwork) Model #: - Dimensions: See millwork details Utilities: None Accessories: Verify Installation Notes: A) To be built into item #120 as per plans to hold stacks of trays of soup bowls. (Verify size with owner). s Item #137 SPOON INSERTS Quantity: (4) each Manufacturer. Provided by owner (Millwork) Model #: - Dimensions: See millwork details Utilities: None Accessories: A) Spoon dispenser inserts. Installation Notes: A) Cut outs in item # 120 for spoon dispenser inserts as per plan. (Verify size with owner). h, r L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #64 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 FAST FOOD EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE: Item #FF-1 REFRIGERATED PIZZA PREP TABLE Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. True Model #: #T-PP-67 Dimensions: 6T'W x 35 '/+"D x 41 '/:"H Utilities: A) 115/60/1, 1/3 HP Accessories: A) Finished sides and back. B) Door Base Installation Notes: A) Set in place as per plan. Item #FF-2 STACKED CONVEYOR PIZZA OVEN Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Lincoln Model #: Impinger H Series Dimensions: 56"W x 38-7/8"D x 59 V2"H Utilities: A) 1/4" gas, 40,000 BTU/Section, (2) each/item B) 120/60/1, 7 Amp, (2) each/item Accessories: A) Stand with casters, (2) with locks. B) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection. C) Left to right operation D) Provide with (2) stacked ovens Installation Notes: A) Set in place as plan- B) Rough -in connection to be quick disconnect. C) Verify gas type, i.e.-natural or propane. D) Provide pressure regulator as required E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #65 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item-#FF3 STAINLESS-sTEEL -HOOD — Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Marshall Air Model #: See Mechanical Section for Specifications Dimensions: I I'-W W x 4'6"D x 2'3"H Utilities: See Mechanical and Electrical Plans. Accessories: See Mechanical Section Installation Notes: A) See Mechanical Section. B) To be provided and installed by the Food Service Equipment Contractor. Item #FF-3A FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM Quantity: (1) lot Manufacturer. Ansul Model #: 911-102 Dimensions: - Utilities: - Accessories: A) Provide gas shut off valve and electrical shut off contactors as required for protected equipment, for installation by mechanical and electrical contractors. Installation Notes: A) Provide a complete self-contained and certified system. B) To protect hood item #FF 3. Tanks to be located on wall close to hood - Item #FF4 SPARE NUMBER r-, L15-208-RIL-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #66 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #FF-5 30 QUART PIZZA MDG R Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Hobart Model #: #D-330 Dimensions: 23'/4"W x 30'/4'D x 50-7/8"H Utilities: A) 208/60/3, 1 %4 HP Accessories: A) Hub attachment & grater attachment. B) Tray support Installation Notes: A) Set in place and level as per plan. Item #FF-6 STAINLESS STEEL WALL SHELF Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 5'-6"W x 1'2"D Utilities: None Accessories: A) Provide with (2) mounting brackets. Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall at +60" a.ff. as per plan. B) General Contractor to provide blocking as required Item #FF-7 SPARE NUMBER Item #FF-8 Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: Accessories: Installation Notes: L15-208-R/L-02 HAND SINK (1) each Provided by Plumber A) '/2" hot and cold water B) 1 'h" direct dram. (Verify utility requirements with supplier). A) Includes soap dispenser and towel dispenser. A) Mount to wall as per plan - SECTION 11400 PAGE #67 10/10/96 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #FF-9 THERMAL SHELF Quantity: (2) each Manufacturer. Merco Model #: #TS-60B Dimensions: 62"W x 19"D x 3"H Utilities: A) 120/60/1, 4.2 Amp Accessories: - Installation Notes: A) Build into counter, item #FF-26 as per plan. Item #FF-10 CUP DISPENSERS Quantity, (4) each Manufacturer: Provided by Owner (Vender) Model #: Verify with vender. Dimensions: Verify with vender. Utilities: None Accessories: A) Verify with Vender. Installation Notes: A) Install in counter base, Item #116 as per plans. Item #FF-11 POS Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Provided by Owner (Positron System) Model #: _ Dimensions: - Utilities: A) Verify with supplier Accessories: A) Verify with supplier Installation Notes: A) Verify requirements with supplier. L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #68 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #FF-12 SNEEZE GUARD/SERVING SHELF Quantity: (1) lot Manufacturer. Provided by Owner (Millwork) Model #: - ` Dimensions: See millwork details. ` Utilities: A) See mechanical and electrical plans. Accessories: A) Verify Installation Notes: A) Set as per plan by millwork fabricator. Verify with owner, requirements of equipment to be protected by this unit Item #FF-13 STAINLESS STEEL WORKTABLE Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 4'6" W x 1'6"D x 3'0"H Utilities: None Accessories: A) Casters, (2) with locks. B) Stainless steel under shelf. Installation Notes: A) Set in place and level as per plan. _ Item #FF-14 STAINLESS STEEL THREE COMPARTMENT SINK Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 7'6"W x 2'3"D x 3'0"H Utilities: A) ''/z" hot and cold water. B) 1 ''/:" indirect drain to floor sink Accessories: A) (2) 12" swing arm faucet B) (3) lever handle drain. C) 8" back splash. D) (3) sink compartments and (2) drain boards_ Installation Notes: A) Set in place as per plans. Clip and seal back splash to wall. -_i L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #69 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #FF-15 STAINLESS STEEL WALL SHELF Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 7'-6"W x 1'2"D Utilities: None Accessories: A) Provide with (3) mounting brackets. Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall at +60" off. as per plan. B) General Contractor to provide blocking as required_ Item #FF-16 HOT FOOD WARMER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Wells Model #: #MOD-100-TD Dimensions: 13 %"W x 21 '/1D x 9"H Utilities: A) '/2" indirect drain to floor sink B) ''/:" Hot Water C) 120/60/1, 10 amp. Accessories: A) Auto fill B) Thermostat control. Installation Notes: A) Build into item #FF-26 as per plan. Item #FF-17 REFRIGERATED PIZZA PREP TABLE Quantity: (1)1 each Manufacturer: True Model #: #T-PP-67 Dimensions: 67"W x 35-1/4"D x 41-1/2"H Utilities: A) 115/60/1, 1/3 HP Accessories: A) Finished sides and back. B) Drawer Base Installation Notes: A) Set in place as per plan. L15-208-RIL-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #70 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #FF-18 CIIINESE RANGE (WOK) Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer Town Food Service Equipment Co. Model #: #YR-200-R Dimensions: 58"W x 45"D x 3l"H Utilities: A) 1/2" hot and cold water. B) I 'h" indirect drain to floor sink. C) 1-1/4" gas*, 160,000 btu/hr Accessories: A) Quick disconnect flexible hose gas connection. B) Internal sink with faucet and drain C) Two chambers. Installation Notes: A) Set and level as per plans. C) Verify gas type, i.e.-natural or propane. D) Provide pressure regulator as required. E) Adjust for local altitude and environmental conditions as required. Item #FF-19 STAINLESS STEEL WORK COUNTER Quantity_ (1) each Manufacturer. Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: , Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 4'0" W x 2'6'D x 3'0"H with clip corner. Utilities: A) 120/60/1, convenience outlet Accessories: A) Base to accommodate freezer cabinet, item #FF-20. B) Finished all sides. C) Flat top. Installation Notes: A) Set in place and level as per plan. Item #FF-20 i Quantity: Manufacturer: Model #: Dimensions: Utilities: �) Accessories: Installation Notes: FREEZER BASE (1) each True #TSUF-27 2'3"W x 2'5-5/8'D x 3'0"H A) 120/6011, 3.9 amp A) Build into work counter, item #FF-19. A) Set in place in base of counter, item #FF-19. L15-208-RAL-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #71 k, FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #FF-21 SPARE NUMBER Item #FF-22 STAINLESS STEEL WALL SHELF Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer: Custom Metal Fabricated Model #: Custom, as per plans and details. Dimensions: 5'-6"W x 1'2"D Utilities: None Accessories: A) Provide with (2) mounting brackets. Installation Notes: A) Mount to wall at +60" a.f f. as per plan. B) General Contractor to provide blocking as required. Item #FF-23 FOOD WARMER Quantity: (2) each Manufacturer. Wells Model #: # MOD.400-TDM Dimensions: 57 %"W x 23 ''/:'D x 9 3/4"H Utilities: A) 1" indirect drain to floor sink. B) 'h" Hot water C) 208/6011, 18.4 amp Accessories: A) Drain manifold B) Auto fill C) Thermostat Control Installation Notes: A) Build into counter, item #FF-26 as per plans. Controls to be mounted in apron on back side of counter. L15-208-RdA2 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #72 FLYING J TRAVEL PLAZA St. Lucie, Florida FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SECTION 11400 Item #FF-24 WALL SHELVING Quantity: (1) lot Manufacturer: Inter Metro Model #: Super Erecta; Stainless Steel. Dimensions: As per plan. Approximately 26'L x 1'6'D Utilities: None Accessories: A) To include shelf supports, shelf units, posts from bottom of soffit to ceiling and all necessary hardware. Installation Notes: A) Assemble, mount to wall and level as per plan_ Verify requirements and fit on site. B) General Contractor to provide blocking in wall as required. Item #FF-25 SPARE NUMBER Item #FF-26 COUNTER Quantity: (1) each Manufacturer. Provided by Owner (Millwork) Model #: - Dimensions: See millwork details Utilities: See mechanical and electrical plans. Accessories: A) Verify Installation Notes: A) Set as per plan_ Verify with owner requirements of equipment to be installed into unit. END SECTION 11400 L15-208-R/L-02 SECTION 11400 10/10/96 PAGE #73 DIVISION 13 FUELS 13000 Service Station Equipment, General Requirements -- - i8419----MCtrrgM-ah F 61'StorageTanks 13420 Fuel Pipe and Pipe Fittings DIVISION 13 SECTION 13000 SERVICE STATION EQUIPMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT AND DIVISION 1 apply to this section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: A. This work consists of, but is not limited to, the furnishing of all plant, labor, equipment (except equipment called out on drawings to be supplied by owner). appliances, and materials and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the fueling work complete in strict accordance with the specifications and drawings. The contract shall include all work indicated or specified on the drawings and as more fully written hereafter. B. All work shall be performed by a qualified licensed fuel installation contractor. Evidence of such qualification shall be furnished to Owner's Representative. 1.02 CODES, FEES, AND PERMITS: A. The fueling work shall be performed in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of Federal, State and local codes and ordinances, or adoptions in effect on the date of invitations for bids; all materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations and ordinances shall be provided. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate materials or constructions in excess of code requirements, the drawings and/or specifications shall govern. The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner free and harmless from liability of any nature or kind arising from his failure to comply with codes and ordinances. B. All permits and fees necessary for the execution of the work under this contract shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor and shall be included in the contract price. Obtain all approvals, inspections, etc. required by code and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish\ a certificate of approval to the Owner's Representative from the inspection authority at the completion of the work. C. Reference Standards: 1. NFPA 30 "Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code". 2. NFPA 30A "Automotive and Marine Service Station Code". 3. OSHA "Safety and Health Standards" (29 CFR 1926/1910). 4. Uniform Fire Code. 5. EPA 40 CFR part 280 Underground Storage Tanks. 1.03 DRAWINGS: A. The fuel drawings show the general arrangements of all piping, equipment, etc., and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades will permit. The Architectural and Structural documents shall be considered as a part of the work insofar as these drawings furnish the Contractor with information relating to design and construction of the building. B. The Contractor shall verify the dimensions governing the fueling work. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. He shall examine adjoining work, on which fueling work is dependent for perfect efficiency, and shall report any work which must be corrected. No waiver of responsibility for defective work shall be claimed or allowed due to failure to report unfavorable conditions affecting the fueling work. C. Upon completion of the installation, furnish a set of prints (Record) to the Architect clearly marked with the changes authorized during construction. Recorded drawings shall be prepared by a licensed engineer prior to trench backfilling. 13000 - 1 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. The equipment specified carries brand names and catalog numbers and shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality. Substitutions will be considered if a written application is at the office of the Engineer eight (8) working days prior to the day of bidding. The application shall include the following: - - 1) A statement declaring the equipment proposed is equal to that specified by having the same physical characteristics and dimensions and meet the drawing layout and structural conditions as well as load requirements; 2) The specified and submittal catalog numbers of the equipment under consideration; 3) A pictorial and specifications brochure. B. Any conflict arising from the use of substituted equipment shall be the responsibility of the supplier, through the Contractor, who shall bear all costs required to make the equipment comply with the intent of the plans and specifications. C. At the option of the Architect, -samples may -be -required for non-standard -orsubstituted items before installation during construction. D. No materials or apparatus shall be substituted after the bid opening except where the equipment manufacturer has been discontinued or delivery becomes a problem, then written approval of the Architect is required. E. Bidding: Only equipment specified in the contract documents and/or approved by an addendum will be used in the bid. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. As soon as possible after the Contractor is awarded the Contractor shall submit to the Architect six (6) copies of a list of all equipment furnished. Complete data must be furnished with the General Conditions, showing performance, quality and dimensions, pictures and any other information to clearly identify the equipment. B. The Fueling Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications prior to the submission of shop drawings, and check the equipment arrangement and installation for ensuing problems. A written statement shall accompany the shop drawings, stating the conditions found including any variances in the characteristics, operation, dimensions, etc. The Contractor shall bear all costs accrued in making it adaptabletothe system or systems of which it is a part. If in checking the shop drawings it is determined the submitted equipment will not adapt to the system, the scheduled equipment shall be used at no cost to the Owner. Written approval of the owner's Representative must be obtained before purchasing any equipment. Submittal data shall be furnished for each item of equipment as specified herein. D. The Contractor shall submit complete detailed shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions of this specification of the equipment arrangement for the Owner's Representative's approval for equipment specified. These drawings must show all pertinent information necessary for proper installation. Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance, etc. E. The approval of the Owner's Representative on equipment shall not relieve the Contractor's responsibility for errors, as said approval is only general and is not intended to serve a s check and does not relieve the Contractor from furnishing materials and performing the work as required by the Contract Documents. F. Upon completion, the Contractor shall bind, numerically index four complete sets of all shop drawings and submit to the Owner's Representative for his approval and transmittal to the owner. The binder (sized to the material) shall be a 2" slide lock unit (Wilson -Jones B3-367-44) or 3" ring split -prong unit (Wilson -Jones 133- 367-49). The cover shall be engraved with the title in 1/2" high letters and the name and address of the Contractor and engineer in 1 /4" high letters, on the side and 118" letters on the spine. Each unit type shall have its own individual sheet provided for each unit specified. The manual shall be numerically indexed with an index - sheet explaining the contents of each section. G. Upon project completion, the Contractor shall provide a plastic laminated copy of each piping schematic (record drawing copy). The Contractor shall hang schematic on wall in mechanical room at location specified by owner. 1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: Thirty -days before final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner four (4) complete sets of printed and illustrated operation and maintenance instructions covering all units of mechanical equipment herein specified, together with parts lists. Four (4) sets of all literature shall be furnished and suitably bound in book form. The manual shall be numerically indexed with an index sheet explaining the contents of each section. 13000 - 2 1.07 GUARANTEE: A. The following guarantee is a part of this specification and shall be binding on the part of the Contractor. B. "The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative any part of this installation which may fail within a period on one year after final acceptance, provided that such failure is due to defects in the materials or workmanship or due to failure to follow the specifications and drawings". See also the General Conditions. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 FUEL EQUIPMENT: Extent of equipment and manufacturer's model number are indicated on the drawings. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT FINALIZATION AND START-UP: A. Upon completion of the entire fueling system each component and system shall be checked and tested. B. All testingshall be performed in accordance with plans and specifications. Then, at the time of final inspection, each "Factory Representative" shall give personal instructions on the operation and maintenance of the equipment to the Owner's Representative and explain that section of the, shop drawing manual and how and where parts can be obtained. To prove acceptance of operation and instruction by the owner's Representative, the Fueling Contractor shall prepare a written statement for his signature. The statement might read as follows: "I, the Contractor, associated factory representative and subcontractors, have started each system and the total system; and have proved their normal operation to the Owner's Representative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof. The complete fueling installation complies with all requirements of existing. applicable laws." __ Owner's Representative Contractor D. A second and third instruction meeting between the Owner's Personnel and the Contractor and his Associates shall be held at an appointed three and twelve month period after acceptance. A signed report of each meeting shall be sent to the engineer at the conclusion of each meeting. E. Fueling Contractor shall have a representative on site opening day for the entire day and be available to troubleshoot and repair operational problems. END OF SECTION 13000 13000 - 3 DIVISION 13 SECTION 13420 FUEL PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT and DIVISION 1 apply to this Section. 1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: - The work covered by these specifications consists of furnish ail labor, material and equipment necessary to connect all the underground storage tanks and mechanical equipment as shown in the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. All pipe and fittings shall be new and clean. All pipe stored at the site shall be properly stacked in factory cartons. All pipe points shall be capped until ready for installation. B. Upon receipt at the jobsite, and before starting installation, fully inspect the pipe for damage. Locate, cut out, repair or replace damaged pipe. C. All piping shall be completed in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendation, by, or supervised by, a Factory Certified Technician. D. For all cutting and tapering, the pipe must be held securely. Always wrap the pipe with protective material as recommended by the pipe manufacturer before clamping to prevent damage to the pipe. Do not damage or over deflect the pipe while clamping. 2.00 MATERIALS 2.01 FIBERGLASS PIPE AND FITTINGS: Pipe shall be manufactured by a filament winding process using a thermosetting epoxy resin to impregnate strands of continuous glass filaments which are wound around a mandrel at a prescribed helix angle and under controlled tension. All pipe shall be supplied with a matching tapered integral bell and tapered spigot or tapered coupling and a matching tapered spigot. A. Working Limits: Minimum continuous steady pressure rating 225 psig at 210 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with ASTM D2992-procedure B. B. Construction: Pipe shall be a continuous glass fiber filament wound at a 35.25 degree angle in a matrix of epoxy resin. Pipe shall meet all dimensional and performance requirements, mechanical properties and shall be marked with designation code RTRP-1 1 AE-31 11 and the Underwriter's Laboratory label. Pipe shall be prooftested at 675 psig. C. Fittings: Fittings shall be compression molded using an epoxy molding compound. The molding compound shall be reinforced with a minimum 60% chopped fiberglass fiber. Inline fittings shall be filament wound. D. Adhesive: All adhesive and curing agents shall be epoxy. Type and application shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. E. Approved Manufacturer: All fiberglass pipes, fitting, epoxy adhesives shall be from one of the following approved manufacturers: Dualy 3000/1 by - Ameron, Fiber Glass Pipe Division Red Thread,ll-A by - Fiberglass Product, Inc. 2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS: All steel pipe shall be seamless standard pipe conforming to ASTM A120 if 2 inch diameter or smaller and to ASTM A53 if 3 inch diameter if larger. Use schedule 40 pipe. All underground pipe and fittings shall be wrapped as called for below under pipe wrap. Pipe fittings shall be 150# screwed malleable iron. All fuel piping in contact with the soil shall be cathodically protected with sacrificed anodes. 13420 - 1 2.03 DOUBLE WALL SECONDARY CONTAINMENT PIPING: Double Wall Secondary Containment Piping shall be from the same manufacturer as primary piping and one pipe - size larger than primary piping. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PRIMARY FIBERGLASS PIPING: A. Shall be installed following strict accordance with manufacturers-installation_guidelines,-by-a-person-(s)-who— are certified by the pipe manufacturer, and shall be installed to maintain a positive slope from the dispenser to the fuel storage tank at a min. of 1 /8" per foot. B. Piping shall be installed in such a manner that no foreign matter or contaminates are allowed in the interior of the pipe. C. Joint shall be made using epoxy adhesive kits provided by the pipe manufacturer using matching tapered threaded coupling and spigot. Field taper shall be made using an appropriate tapering kit as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Joint adhesive shall cure a minimum of 5 hours at 75 F. Where ambient temperatures differs cure as recommended by manufacturers installations. Where ambient temperatures is blow 60 F. use of external heat is required. 3.02 STEEL PIPING: A. Screwed Connections: All screwed connections shall be made-up with virgin teflon pipe compound and shall be kept to a minimum. All threads shall be machine made and of adequate depth for the pipe size. B. Pipe Handling: All pipe shall be cleaned internally prior to installation. 2 inch diameter and smaller pipe shall be blown clean with compressed air. All fittings shall be thoroughly inspected for defects prior to assembly. C. Pipewrap: All underground steel pipe and fittings shall be wrapped up to a point 6 inches above grade in the following manner: .1 The surface to be wrapped shall be free of shot or grit blasting, mill scale, lacquer, rust, dust, oil, grease and any other foreign matter. .2 Apply Scotchwrap pipe insulation putty at all high irregular surfaces such as fittings so as to provide a uniform surfaces for the prime coat and tape wrap. .3 Apply scotchwrap pipe primer at an average rate of 350 sq. ft. per gallon. .4 Apply scotchwrap #51 tape (20 miles) with width and overlap as follows: Pine dia. (in) Tape width (in) Overlap (in) 1 1/2 2 3/8 2 2 3/8 3&4 4 1/2 The above shall be applied in strict conformance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 FIBERGLASS SECONDARY CONTAINMENT PIPING: A. Secondary piping shall be dry fitted prior to final fit up of primary piping, any secondary piping which is miss cut shall be corrected to achieve the factory recommended insertion depth. B. Factory spigots and couplings shall be cut off as needed to allow for scarfing at each end. Scarfing shall be made by using a manufacturerS recommended scarfing tool. C. Adhesive shall be epoxy adhesive with a thickener additive brided by the piping manufacturer for use of adhering two-piece containment fittings. 3.04 TESTING OF PIPE: 13420 - 2 Primary pipe testing shall be completed prior to backfilling or fit up and completion of secondary containment piping. All piping shall be tested pneumatically at 25% over operating pressure. All joints and welds shall be soaped to insure no leaks. The air test shall hold for 30 minutes without leaks. The Contractor shall maintain and monitor air pressure on the fuel line, until such time that all backfill, pavement, construction staking and any other activity in progress or not completed, which could adversely affect the integrity of the fuel piping. Should the test reveal any leaks, the contractor shall eliminate them at no cost to the owner. The contractor shall supply all labor and equipment for the test and shall notify the owner of the time and date the test will be conducted. Pneumatic test is hazardous. Make sure the fiberglass pipe is properly secured with sand bags prior to the test. END OF SECTION 13420 13420 - 3 SECTION 15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. B. Related Sections: Refer to "Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment" Section 15030 in Division 15 for basic electrical requirements for all mechanical equipment. Special and specific electrical requirements are specified within each respective equipment specification section. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK - GENERAL A. This section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 15. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1. B. The work covered by the Mechanical Sections of the Specifications shall include the furnishing of all materials, labor, transportation, tools, permits, fees, inspections, utilities and incidentals necessary for the complete installation of all mechanical work required in the Contract Drawings. C. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every respect. In the event that additional details or special construction is required for work indicated or specified under this section of work or work specified in other sections, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all material and equipment which is usually furnished with such systems in order to complete the installation, whether mentioned or not. D. The Contractor shall review all Contract Drawings and Specifications and include in his bid any work specifically as being performed in the mechanical section. The Contractor shall be responsible for all work performed by his subcontractors. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install complete and ready for intended use." B. "Indicated" shall mean "indicated on drawings". C. "Concealed' shall mean "hidden from sight as in trenches, chases, furred spaces or hung ceilings. D. "Exposed' shall mean "not concealed', as defined above. E. "Noted" shall mean "noted on drawings or in specifications". F. "Contractor" also referred to as "this Contractor" or "the Contractor", shall mean "the Mechanical Contractor". GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 1 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All mechanical work shall be in strict accordance with the most current edition of the Uniform Building Code (UBC), Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC), Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Uniform Fire Code (UFC), National Electrical Code (NEC), and all applicable state and local codes, laws and ordinances. 1.05 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required permits and fees necessary to fully complete all work included in the Contract -Drawings and Specifications. 1.06 INTENT AND INTERPRETATION A. The Drawings and Specifications are intended to supplement each other and any details contained in one and not the other shall be included as if contained in both. Items not specifically mentioned in the specifications or noted on the drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation shall be included. B. The drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not necessarily show the exact location of all new piping and existing utilities, unless specifically dimensioned. C. Riser and other diagrams are schematic only and do not necessarily show the physical arrangement of the equipment. They shall not be used for obtaining quantities or lineal runs of piping. D. All grilles, fixtures or other pieces of equipment shall be centered on windows, wall spaces, or other items, unless specifically dimensioned otherwise. E. The location of the piping and ductwork shall be checked to determine that it clears all openings and structural members; that it may be properly concealed; and that it clears cabinets, lights and equipment having fixed locations. F. Mechanical drawings shall serve as the working drawings for this portion of the work but the Contractor shall refer to the Architectural, Structural and Electrical drawings for additional detail affecting the installation of his work. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over the Mechanical drawings if any dimensional discrepancies exist. G. The approximate location of each item is indicated on the drawings. These drawings are not intended to give complete and exact details in regard to location. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the approval of the Architect and he reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost. 1.07 SUBMITTAL OF EQUIPMENT FOR APPROVAL A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and Division 1 General Requirements for submittal definitions, requirements and.procedures. GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 2 1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Contractor shall record differences between mechanical work as installed and as shown in Contract Documents on a set of prints of mechanical drawings to be furnished by Architect. Return these prints to Architect at completion of project. Notations made on drawings shall be neat and legible. Comply with Division 1 General Requirements. ? 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAIS A. Contractor shall prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for mechanical systems provided under this Contract. Comply with Division 1 requirements for procedures and requirements J for preparation and submittal of manuals. B. Manual binder shall have permanent lettering of a contrasting color. Information to be included on the binder is as follows: C. The front cover shall be lettered as follows: r, MECHANICAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (PROJECT NAME) (CITY AND STATE) (YEAR) i r OWNER: (NAME) ARCHITEC 7- (NAME) MECHANICAL ENGINEER: Nielson Engineering Inc. GENERAL CONTRACTOR: (NAME) MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR: (NAME) The spine shall be lettered as follows: r MECHANICAL O & M MANUAL (Year) (Project Name) D. Provide a master index at beginning of Manual showing items included Use plastic tab indexes for sections of Manual. E. Cover section shall consist of name, address, and phone number of Project Architect, General Contractor, Mechanical Engineer, Mechanical Contractor and all Mechanical Sub -Contractors. F. Provide a separate section for each section of the specifications. Provide index for each section listing equipment included. Include all items specified in Sections 15050 through 15900. Provide a list of equipment suppliers with address and phone number. G. Include descriptive literature (manufacturer's catalog data) of each manufactured item. Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data underlined. Data sheets shall be original. Copies are not acceptable. GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 3 I H. One (1) copy of the manual shall he submitted for review and approval by the Engineer. After approval, submit three (3) copies of manual to the Owner for approval unless otherwise directed by Division 1 requirements. Information to be included in manual: 1. Description of function,.normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves,_engweering_data_and tests, and_complete nomenclature and commercial numbers_ of all replaceable parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping shut -down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting, disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 5. Schematic control diagrams (as built -status) for each automatic control system. Mark correct operating setting for each control instrument on these diagrams. A second complete set of control diagrams encased in clear plastic laminate shall be furnished. 6. Valve schedule indicating the valve symbol (tag number), valve location by room number and description, valve purpose and system served, and valve size. Provide one corresponding set of full size mechanical prints (as-builts status) showing these valve locations for cross-reference. A second complete set of valve schedules (8-1/2 in. x 11 in.) encased in clear plastic laminate and fitted in an aluminum holding frame shall be furnished to the Owner. 7. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report. 8. Test records and certifications. 9. Instruction period checklist. 10. Warranty information. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING A. The Contractor shall instruct the Owner's Representative(s) in the Operation and Maintenance procedures described in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Comply with Division 1 requirements. B. Individuals present shall include Contractors, Subcontractors, and equipment factory representatives. These individuals shall assist in instruction and start-up. C. Minimum instruction time shall be eight (8) hours unless otherwise specifically noted. D. All mechanical systems shall be properly functioning prior to instruction period. GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT'S 15010 - 4 'C E Contractor shall prepare a checklist of all equipment and systems requiring instruction and maintenance for verification by the Owner's Representative of satisfactory start-up and instruction. A copy of this checklist shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.11 GUARANTEE A. Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of all material and equipment installed under Division 15 and shall repair or replace to the satisfaction of the Owner or Architect, any defective materials, equipment, or workmanship which may show itself within one year from the date of acceptance. I. 1.12 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or I rubbish. B. At completion of the job, the Contractor shall remove all tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. All materials, in general, shall conform to the requirements of all agencies or publications specified and described in Division 1 of the Contract Specifications. B. Materials and equipment to be provided shall be the standard catalog products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of products conforming to these specifications, and shall essentially duplicate materials and equipment that have been in satisfactory use at least two years. 2.02 LISTED EQUIPMENT A. The Idaho State Electrical Code requires that all materials, devices, appliances, and equipment, shall be of a type that conforms to applicable standards or be indicated as acceptable by the established standards of the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. or other electrical product testing laboratories which are accredited by the department. B. This statement is being interpreted by the State Electrical Inspector as follows: It is understood that many specialty items such as cast iron boilers, certain items of air handling equipment and other building components are not available with a UL label covering the entire piece of equipment. The State will impose no requirement that an item of equipment be UL labeled unless it is available as a UL labeled items from at least two manufacturers. Electrical components of unlabeled equipment, such as motors, shall be labeled if they are available from at least two manufacturers. C. If any building component is available with a UL label from at least two manufacturers, an identical or similar unlabeled component shall not be acceptable for installation in the State of Idaho. Should any such component be installed in the State of Idaho, it shall either be inspected and labeled by a UL representative or other authority approved by the State or it shall be replaced GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 5 l with a UL labeled component, before the building will be accepted by the State Electrical Inspector. D. Consequently, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor (through project suppliers and equipment manufacturers) to purchase and install only equipment bearing the UL label whenever that equipment so labeled is available. The Contractor, (should any equipment be installed without the proper UL label) shall bear the entire cost of correction to the satisfaction the - Idaho State Electrical Inspector. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions of equipment or materials shall be made only with the written prior approval of the Architect. Prior approval requests must be received by the Architect or Engineer at least ten (10) days prior to bid date unless otherwise instructed. Refer to Division 1 General Requirements for procedures in selecting products and requesting substitutions. B. Throughout these specifications, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc., are specified by manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number. Such designation is to establish standards of desired quality and construction and shall be the basis of the bid. Substitution approval is for manufacturer's only, not specific catalog number or designation unless specifically stated otherwise. C. Where two or more designations are listed, choice will be optional with the Contractor except that where more than one manufacturer is listed, and only one manufacturers catalog number is indicated, that standard of quality and construction must be maintained by materials supplied by the other manufacturer(s). D. The Contractor shall assume the cost of any redesign, in the form of changes to the drawings, and the work of any other trade due to substitution of material and shall provide additional materials as required to properly install any equipment substitutions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Each Contractor shall at all times cooperate with other trades on the job to avoid friction and delay to the progress of work. All points in dispute shall be referred to the Architect. 3.02 SUPERVISION A. This Contractor shall have in charge of the work at all times a thoroughly competent superintendent. Comply with Division 1 requirements. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. The work under the mechanical contract shall be performed by workers skilled in the particular trade and include all work necessary to properly complete the installation in a professional manner so as to present a neat and finished appearance. GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 6 3.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. The Contractor shall visit the site of the proposed work and become familiar with the conditions affecting the work. Contractor shall verify all measurements at the budding before beginning work. 3.05 SITE UTII..TTY SERVICES A. Where applicable, the Contractor shall make connections to existing permanent cold water service immediately so as to provide the use of this service by other trades. Comply with Division 1 requirements. 3.06 EXISTING UTILITIES AND PIPING _ A. The locations of existing concealed lines and connection points have been indicated as closely as possible from available information. The Contractor shall assume that such connection points are with in a 10-foot (10) radius of the indicated locations. Where connection points are not within this radius, the Contractor shall contact the Architect for a decision before proceeding or may proceed at his own expense. y 3.07 LAYING OUT WORK A. Locations of equipment and devices, as shown on the drawings, are approximate unless dimensioned. Exact locations of such items shall be determined by the Architect's representative and/or secured from special details and drawings. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of mechanical equipment to fit the available space and promptly notify the Architect/Engineer prior to roughing -in if conflicts appear. Coordination of equipment to the available space and to the access routes through the construction shall be the Contractors responsibility. 3.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING ". A. All cutting and patching of new or existing construction required for installation of mechanical systems and equipment specified in Division 15 shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical �} Contractor unless otherwise noted. Comply with Division 1 for general requirements for cutting !7l and patching. B. All cutting shall be performed with masonry saws, core drills.or similar equipment to provide neat and uniform openings. C. All patching shall match adjacent surfaces in materials and finish. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching. D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of mechanical installations. E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is necessitated �) by ill-timed, defective, or non -conforming installations. F. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 7 2. Remove and replace defective work. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. G. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed work. H. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new work. I. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed L Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.09 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Contractor shall provide all necessary excavation, shoring, and backElling required for proper installation of mechanical work inside and outside the budding.. During excavation, material satisfactory for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner at a distance from the banks of the trench equal to 1/2 the depth of the excavation, but in no instance closer than 2 feet. Excavated material not required or not satisfactory for backfill shall be removed from the site and shall be disposed of in designated areas approved for surplus material storage. Grading shall be done as necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into the excavation, and any water accumulating therein shall be removed so that the stability of the bottom and sides of the excavation is maintained. B. Trenches shall be excavated to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of piping or conduit on undisturbed soil. Trenches shall be of uniform width, sufficient to provide ample working room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit. C. The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Bell holes shall be excavated to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing. Stones of 3 inches or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, shall be removed to avoid point bearing. Where unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such material shall be removed 6 inches below the required grade and replaced with materials described below for bedding. D. Excavation for manholes, catch basins, inlets, or similar structures shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear between the outer structure surfaces and the face of the excavation or support members. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, special care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. Excavation to the final grade level shall not be made until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed. GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 8 E. Bedding material shall be clean, sand -gravel mixture free from organic matter and conforming to the following gradation when tested in accordance with ASTM D 422. j! I U.S. Percent Passing Standard Sieve Size 1-Inch 100 No. 4 25-80 No. 200 0-10 F. Bedding material shall be placed to a depth of 6 inches (6") over the top of piping. The bedding shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. lG. Backfrll for the remainder of the trench shall be satisfactory soil materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP. H. Backfill sod materials shall be free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. I. Backfrll to the required grade shall be placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches loose thickness for compaction, by hand operated machine compactors, and 8 inches loose thickness for other than hand operated machines otherwise specified. Each layer shall be compacted to density as specified in Section 02200. iL No underground lines shall be covered until the installation has been approved by the inspector having jurisdiction and the Owner's Representative. K Provide 4 inch thick concrete base slab support for piping less than 2' - 6" below surface of roadways. After installation and testing of piping, provide minimum 4 inch thick encasements (sides and top) of concrete prior to backfrlling or placement of roadway subbase. 1_ Bracing and shoring shall be provided where depth of excavation or character of ground render it necessary for personnel protection. Shoring shall be constructed of heavy timber planking with timber supports and shall conform with local and state safety laws and regulations. M. Removal of bracing and shoring materials shall be done before backfitling except where necessary to insure against caving; in which case, it shall be withdrawn while backfilling is being done. N. Provide barricades around all excavation. Barricades to be securely constructed. O. The,Contractor shall exercise extreme care while excavating in the area of utilities, carefully check for location of all possible utilities, whether shown on the drawings or not, and establish the location of all cutoff valves for ready shut-off of service in case of emergency. The Contractor shall be completely responsible for all damage to any utilities caused in excavating as well as damage to personnel and property caused by said damaged utilities whether shown on the drawings or not. 3.10 REPLACEMENT OF PAVING AND CONCRETE A. All existing or new sidewalks, concrete paving, curbs, or asphalt paving removed or damaged by this Contractor during the period of the installation or as a result thereof, shall be replaced with GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 9 like material in a manner as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. Comply with Division 2 General Requirements. 3.11 OPENINGS IN PIPES AND DUCTS A. All temporary openings in pipes and duds shall be capped or sealed during construction. Caps shall be removed for final connections. 3.12 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall be held responsible for any and all materials and equipment to be installed under this contract and will be required to make good at his own cost any injury or damage which materials or equipment may sustain from any source or cause whatsoever before final acceptance. Comply with Division 1 requirements. 3.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off -site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. 3.14 ACCESSIBILITY A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. B. Access doors or hatches required for servicing of mechanical equipment shall be furnished and installed as speed in the other Divisions of the Specifications. 3.15 PAINTING A. Contractor shall touch-up scratched or damaged factory finishes of mechanical equipment. Comply with Division 1 requirements. B. Unless otherwise noted, all other painting of mechanically related items shall be according to Division 9, Section 09900 "PAINTING". 3.16 LUBRICATION A. Contractor shall properly lubricate all pieces of equipment before turning the building over to the Owner. Comply with Division 1 requirements. GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 10 �a 3.17 FINAL CLEANING A, Refer to Division 1 for general requirements for final cleaning. 1` P B. At time of final cleanup, all fistures and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and left in condition for use. 3.18 FIRE PENETRATION SEALS A. All penetrations through fire rated floors and walls shall be sealed to prevent the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration either before, during or after a fire. The fire rating of the penetration seal shall be at least that of the floor to wall into which it is installed so f } that the original fire rating of the floor or wall is maintained. B. The sealant shall remain soft and pliable to allow for the removal and/or addition of piping without the necessity of drilling holes. It shall adhere to itself to allow any and all repairs to be made with the same material. It shall permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of piping and duds going through the penetration without the seal cracking or crumbling. p C. When damming materials are to be left in place after the seal is complete, all such materials shall '1 be non-flammable. D. When sealant is injected into a penetration, the foam shall expand to surround all items within the penetration and maintain pressure against the walls of the penetration. The foam shall care within five minutes and be fire resistant at that time. No heat shall be required to further expand the foam to block the passage of fire and smoke or water. I? All wall or floor penetration openings shall be as small as possible. F. The foam sealant shall meet all of the fire test and hose stream test requirements of ASTM E119- i 73 and shall be UL classified as a Wall Opening Protective Device. the sealant shall be CHASE — t FOAM, CTC PR-855 Fire Resistant Foam Sealant from Chase Technology Corporation, Huntington Station, New York 11746 or 3M Brand Fire Barrier caulk CP25, putty 303, wrap/strip FS 195 or sheet CS 195 from 3M Products Divisions, 224-4N 3M Center, St. Paul, MN 55144- 1000. 3.19 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. The air distribution systems shall be balanced by a Balancing or Engineering Firm hired by the owner experienced in HVAC design and balancing. The report shall be stamped by a licensed engineer and certified by NEBB. The Balancing firm shall furnish the necessary instruments for making tests and performing work. { B. Balancing work shall not be started until such time as the following conditions are completely q fulfilled: 1. All systems shall be completely installed and shall have been successfully test run, and fully i, operational. 2. All outlets, dampers, balancing devices, and accessories shall be completely installed GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 11 3. Filters and strainers shall be clean. 4. All wiring shall be completed, including all interlocks and heaters. _ 5. Control system shall be completely installed, tested, and all instruments shall be cal➢ wated. 6 Proper fan rotation shall tie veritied. C. The Mechanical Ccontractor shall furnish all ladders, scaffolding, and tools required for access and adjustment. High scaffolding will -be- required in areas with ceiling over 12 ft. L" D. The Balancing Contractor shall furnish and install all required exchanges of adjustable sheaves and V-belt drives necessary for proper balance of the system to obtain the desired air balancing of systems. E. The Automatic Controls Subcontractor shall furnish a man, available upon request, to make necessary adjustments in the control system during the balancing. y' F. The balancing agency shall submit in quadruplicate on neat and legible forms the full report of systems operation, initial and final readings. G. All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. The Mechanical Engineer has the right to request instrument recalibration, or the use of other instruments, where accuracy of readings is It questionable. W I. L Furnish in the report a written guarantee to be effective for one year from the date of acceptance, to make any and all adjustments required to maintain comfort in all rooms and areas. Air balancing shall include the following: 1.. Set supply and exhaust fans at design speeds and record average amperage readings on all motor phases, static pressures and CFM of air flow in each system. 2. Read air flows at registers, grilles, and diffusers with a velometer or equal air measuring device. Adjust dampers as required. Outlets shall be adjusted to design CFM plus or minus 10%. 3. Adjust minimum outside air dampers to design CFM or 10% of supply air total CFM. 4. Adjust fans as required to meet design. Check for drafts, noise and vibration. 5. After balancing is complete, mark final position of balancing dampers. 6. Report any discrepancies immediately to the Mechanical Design Engineer. Upon completion of testing, adjusting and balancing of the air and/or water systems, prepare a complete and legible draft report. Submit two (2) copies of the draft report to the Mechanical Design Engineer for review. GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 12 K Upon verification and approval of the draft reports, prepare final reports. Four (4) typewritten, organized and formatted copies of the final report are required. Furnish one (1) copy to the Mechanical Design Engineer for his record, and the remaining three (3) copies are to be included in the Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manuals. L. The Balancing Contractor shall famish the project mechanical a list of corrections and shall make all equipment adjustments as required. END OF SECTION 15010 1 lf, GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 13 1 _.1 1� SECTION 15030 - ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF MECHANICAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect switches famished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. B. Specific electrical requirements.(Le. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment are specified within the individual equipment specifications or scheduled on the drawings. C. All magnetic motor starters and disconnect switches not furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment shall be provided under Division 15 - Mechanical. D. Wiring from motors of mechanical equipment to disconnect switches or junction boxes, including pushbuttons, pilot lights, interlocks, speed controllers, and similar devices shall be the ice! responsibility of this Contractor under Division 15 where not specifically indicated under Division 16. E. Wiring of field -mounted float control switches, flow control switches, and similar (' Y mechanical/electrical devices provided for mechanical systems, to equipment control panels shall I' I be the responsibility of this Contractor under Division 15 where not specifically indicated un er Division 16. i� F. Wiring required for Automatic Controls Section 15900 shall be the responsibility of this Contractor under Division 15. 1.03 REFERENCES _v A. NEMA Standard MG 1: Motors and Generators. Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. B. NEMA Standard ICS 2: =n C. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. "I D. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). ELECTRICAL PROVISION OF MECHANICAL WORK a 15030 - 1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves as required by the individual equipment specification sections. 1.05 QUALITY A. All electrical components and materials shall be labeled by an approved testing agency (UI., EfL, CSA, etc.). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications. 1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads. 2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range. 3. Two -speed motors shall have two separate windings on poly -phase motors. 4. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40'C environment with maximum 50'C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A insulation). Service Factor: 1.15 for poly -phase motors and 1.35 -for single phase motors. B. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design "B", except "C" where required for high starting torque. C. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; use driven equipment manufacturers standards to suit specific application. D. Bearings: Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals; regreaseable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance; designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor, for fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted. E. Enclosure Type: Open drip -proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation; guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employee or building occupants; weather -protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed. F. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter. G. Noise Rating: "Quiet" rating on motors located in occupied spaces of building. ELECTRICAL PROVISION OF MECHANICAL WORK 15030 - 2 s. r� H. Efficiency: "Energy efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method "B". If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher p°p efficiency than "average standard industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test I' method "B". y I. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features, and similar information. 11 I 2.02 STARTERS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, AND WIRING A. Motor Starter Characteristics: Enclosures NEMA, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet location shall be NEMA 3R with conduit hubs. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and startup condition. B. Manual switches shall have pilot lights and extra positions for multi -speed motors. Overload protection shall be melting alloy type thermal overload relays. C. Magnetic starters shall have maintained contact pushbuttons and pilot lights, properly arranged for single speed or multi -speed operation as indicated; trip -fee thermal overload relays each phase, interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with control requirements of Division 15 Controls sections, built-in 120 volt control circuit transformer, fused from line side, where service exceeds 240 volts; externally operated manual reset, under -voltage release or protection. D. Motor connections shall have flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically indicated. 2.03 CAPACITORS A. Features shall include individual unit cells, all welded steel housing, each capacitor internally fused, non-flammable synthetic liquid impregnated, craft tissue insulation and aluminum foil electrodes. B. KVAR size shall be as required to correct motor power factor to 90 percent or better and shall be installed on all motors 1 horsepower or larger, that have an uncorrected power factor of less than 85 percent at rated load. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). END OF SECTION 15030 f1 ELECTRICAL PROVISION OF MECHANICAL WORK 15030 - 3 b' SECTION 15060 - PIPE & PIPE FTTTINGS PART 1 — GENERAL E 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 4 1. General piping installation procedures for all piping systems. a B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. 1 - 2. Type of pipe and fittings specified under each piping system. r� 10.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE i A. Manufacture - n 1. Use domestic made pipe and pipe fittings on Project. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVES A. Valves of same type shall be of same manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE HANGERS A. Adjustable, malleable iron clevis type of a diameter adequate to support pipe size. 4 B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. B-Line Systems Fig. B3100 2. Grinnell No. 260 ' 3. Kin -Line 455 4. Superstrut CL-710 2.03 INSULATING COUPLINGS A. Suitable for at least 175 PSIG WP at 250 deg F. B. Approved Manufacturers - r 1. Central Plastics Co ,I PIPE AND PIPE FTITINGS 15060 - 1 1 P i t 2. Victualic Cc 3. Watts Regulator Co 2.04 SLEEVES A Sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized iroi metal two sizes larger than pipe or insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely \ l control entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every respect. } B. Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and +1 1•, anchorage. 1. Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site and work into place without springing or forcing. 2. Do not use pipe hooks, chains, or perforated metal for pipe support. 3. Remove burr and cutting slag from pipes. All pipe and tube shall be reamed to the I' full inside diameter of the pipe and tube. 4. Make changes in direction with proper fittings. 5. Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping by means of at least two layers of Scotch 33 plastic tape. 6. Support piping at 8 feet on center maximum for pipe 1-1/4 inches or larger and 6 feet on center maximum for pipe one inch or less. Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required 7. Suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls using Unistrut and clamps (except underground pipe). Laying of piping on any budding member is not allowed ` C. Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment, duds, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings. Provide accessible, ground joint unions in piping at connections to equipment. D. Make connections of dissimilar metals with insulating couplings. I? Provide sleeves around pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, or structural members. A PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060 - 2 i C 4 b 1. Seal sleeves with plastic or other acceptable material. 2. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or roof drain lines passing through concrete floors on grade. F. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or similar materials. i G. Install piping systems so they may be easily drained. c I- Grade soil and waste lines within building perimeter 1/4 inch fall per ft in direction of flow or as noted on the plans. I. Insulate water piping buried within building perimeter. I. Do not use reducing bushings, street elbows, or close nipples. �? i G K Bury water piping 6 inches minimum below bottom of slab and encase in 2 inches minimum of sand and PVC or plastic sleeve. 1� END OF SECTION 15060 1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060 - 3 I SECTION 15170 - MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Quality of motors three horsepower or larger furnished and installed by Division 15. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS: A. Motor shall be quiet in operation and speed not exceed 1800 rpm. 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Allis Chalmers B. General Electric C. Gould/Century D. Lincoln E. Marathon F. Reliance G. Toshiba H. U S END OF SECTION 15170 MOTORS 15170-1 B. Stencilling - 1. Locate identifying legends and directional arrows at following points on each piping system a. Adjacent to each item of equipment and special fitting. b. At point of entry and exit where piping goes through wall. C. On each riser and junction. d. Every 50 feet on long continuous limes. 2. Domestic Hot & Cold Water Piping Identification - a. Identify domestic hot and cold water piping above and below ceilings with stenciled letters "HW" and "CW" respectively. b. Letters shall be one inch high. Provide "Direction of Flow" arrow at each stencil. C. Paint color shall be as specified below. 3. Steam Pipe, Hot Water Heating, Chilled Water, Gas, & Valve Identification - a. Identify specific pipe contents by stenciling pipe with written legend and placing of arrows to indicate direction of flow. C. Painting - 1. All pipe painting shall be provided for by the installing contractor ie: Fire sprinkling by the Fire Sprinkler contractor, plumbing by the Plumbing Contractor. 2. Paint Specification - IJ�� All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared in accordance with the detailed painting specifications in the Painting Section 09900. Surfaces that are not subjected to temperatures higher than 212 deg. F shall be painted as specified for the area in which they are located. Pipes, valves or other equipment subjected to temperature above 212 deg. F, shall be painted with heat resisting black enamel or heat resisting aluminum paint as specified below. The r „� Owner's Representative shall designate surfaces to be painted aluminum painted at least three coats. Colors shall be selected by Owner's Representative. 3. Identification shall comply with, but not limited to the following. i PIPE PAINTING AND LABELING LEGEND SERVICE & LABEL LABEL COLOR • PIPE COLOR" SYMBOL BACKGROUND LETTER DOMESTIC COLD WATER DCW GREEN WHITE DARK ROYAL BLUE DOMESTIC HOT WATER DHW YELLOW BLACK MAGENTA MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 - 2 0 DOM. HOT WATER RETURN DHWR YELLOW BLACK MAGENTA SOFT COLD WATER DSW GREEN WHITE DARK ROYAL BLUE RAIN WATER RW GREEN WHITE BROWN SANITARY SEWER SAN GREEN WHITE BROWN FIRE SPRINKLING F RED WHITE RED GRAVITY CONDENSATE GCOND YELLOW BLACK LIGHT PURPLE NATURAL GAS G YELLOW BLACK DARK GREEN ' Ref. ANSI codes 13.1 (1981). See Specs. •' Exposed piping in mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, etc., shall be painted color indicated on chart. SIZE OF LHI TFRS AND LENGTH OF FIELD OD OF PIPE SIZE OF LENGTH OF OR COVERING LETTERS COLOR FIELD 3/4 TO 1-12" 12" 8" 1-1/2" TO 2" 3/4" 8" 2-12 TO 6" 1-1/4" 12" 8 TO 10" 2-12" 2 ' OVER 10" 3-12" 32" END OF SECTION 15190 MECHANICAL IDEN 15190 - 3 SECTION 15261 - CULINARY WATER PIPE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY `-i A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install insulation on above ground hot and cold water lines, fittings, valves, and l accessories as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION A. One inch thick snap -on glass fiber closed cell polyolefn or elastomeric pipe insulation- B. Heavy density pipe insulation with factory vapor jacket equal to Fiberglas ASJ may be used. C. Approved Manufacturers - { 1. Manville 2. Owens-Corning 3. Knauf 4. IMCOA "ImcoLock" 5. Armstrong "Armafl& 2.02 PVC FTITING, VALVE, & ACCESSORY COVERS A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Knauf 2. Zeston !l PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Piping - CULINARY WATER PIPE INSULATION 15261 - 1 1. Apply insulation to clean, dry piping with joints tightly butted. 2. Adhere "factory applied vapor barrier jacket lap" smoothly and securely at longitudinal laps with a white vapor barrier adhesive. , r 3—Adhere_3Anch wide self-sealing butt joint strips over end joints. B. Fittings, Valves, & Accessories - 1. Insulate with same type and thickness of insulation as pipe, with ends of insulation tucked snugly into throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe insulation tufted and tucked in. 2. Cover insulationwith one piece fitting cover secured by stapling or taping ends to adjacent pipe covering. 3. Alternate Method - a. Insulate fittings, valves, and accessories with one inch of insulating cement and vapor seal with two 118 inch wet coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric extending 2 inches onto adjacent insulation. C. Pipe Hangers - 1. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers. 2. Provide 16 ga x 6 inch long galvanized shields at each pipe hanger to protect pipe insulation from crushing by clevis hanger. D. No insulation shall be applied until piping has been pressure tested and approved. E. In all cold attic situations where the building insulation is located at the ceiling, all piping installed in the ceiling to roof space shall be insulated as specified herein. In addition, install at 6" thick by 30" wide fiberglass blanket with vapor barrier (vapor barrier towards warm side of cavity) over the pipe to tent and allow heat loss through the ceding to prevent the pipe from freezing. The insulation blanket shall be held in place by rolling it to a wood lathe and nailed to the joist. The budding insulation shall then be applied over this pipe protection layer. F. In room installations where excess moisture or humidity will be present, only the polyolefin or elastomeric insulation shall be used. G. Condensate drain lines in the walk-in freezer and cooler shall be insulated with 1/27 Armaflex or IMCOA insulation. END OF SECTION 15261 CULINARY WATER PIPE INSULATION 15261- 2 SECTION 15262 - UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install insulation on underground hot and cold water pipes within confines of building as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. l PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Insulation - 1. 112 inch thick Armaflex Standard Pipe Insulation 2. Equal by Rubatex or IMCOA "ImcoL.ock". B. Joint Sealant- 1. Armstrong 520 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Slip underground pipe insulation onto pipe and seal butt joints. B. Where slip-on technique is not possible, slit insulation, apply to pipe, and seal seams and joints. END OF SECTION 15262 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION 15262-1 �_ _ f - �- - s _.. _ -. - i� �_ -A -._.� S _ .. a —. � � _ _ " __ � r SECTION 15263 - REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY �~r A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install insulation on above ground refrigerant suction piping and fittings, including r thermal bulb, from thermal expansion valve as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCT'S 2.01 FLEXIBLE FOAMED PIPE INSULATION A. Thickness - 1. 12 inch for one inch outside diameter and smaller pipe. 2. 3/4 inch for 1-1/8 through 2 inch outside diameter pipe. 3. One inch for 2-1/8 inches outside diameter and larger pipe (two layers of 12 inch). 4. One inch sheet for fittings as recommended by Manufacturer. 4 ; B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Armaflex 2. RubateX 3. CSG "Uhrafoam" 4. Halstead "Insul-tube" e 5. Therma-Cel E 6. IMCOA "Imcolock" 2.02 JOINT SEALER I v' A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Armaflex 520 `J REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION 15263 - 1 2. BIG Construction Adhesive #105 3. Therma-Cel950. P-ART-3---EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in snug contact with pipe and in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Stagger joints on layered insulation. C. Slip insulation on tubing before tubing sections and fittings are assembled keeping slitting of insulation to a minimum. D. Seal joints in insulation. Use black nylon 1" wide tie straps every two feet. E. Insulate flexible pipe connectors. F. Insulate thermal expansion valves with insulating tape. G. Insulation exposed outside budding shall have "slit" joint seams placed on bottom of pipe. H. Insulate fittings with sheet insulation and as recommended by Manufacturer. I. Paint exterior exposed insulation with two coats of white or gray finish recommended by Insulation Manufacturer, except on Therma-Cel insulation. END OF SECTION 15263 REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION 15263 - 2 SECTION 15264 - ROOF DRAIN PIPE INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install insulation on above ground roof drain and overflow drain lines, fittings, and accessories as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION A. One inch thick snap -on glass fiber pipe insulation. B. Heavy density pipe insulation with factory vapor jacket equal to Fiberglas ASJ may be used. C. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Manville 2. Owens -Coming 3. Knauf 4. IMCOA "ImcoLock" 2.02 PVC FITTING, VALVE, & ACCESSORY COVERS A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Knauf 2. Zeston PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Piping - 1. Apply insulation to clean, dry piping with joints tightly butted. ROOF DRAIN PIPE INSULATION 15264 - 1 C. Q 2. Adhere "factory applied vapor barrier jacket lap" smoothly and securely at longitudinal laps with a white vapor barrier adhesive. 3. Adhere 3 inch wide self-sealing butt joint strips over end joints. 1. Insulate with same type and thickness of insulation as pipe, with ends of insulation tucked snugly into throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe insulation tufted and tucked in. 2. Cover insulation with one piece fitting cover secured by stapling or taping ends to adjacent pipe covering. 3. Alternate Method - i � a. Insulate fittings and accessories with one inch of insulating cement and vapor seal with two 1/8 inch wet coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric extending 2 inches onto adjacent insulation. Pipe Hangers - 1. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers. 2. Provide 16 ga x 6 inch long galvanized shields at each pipe hanger to protect pipe insulation from crushing by clevis hanger. , 'No insulation shall be applied until piping has been pressure tested and approved.. n J END OF SECTION 15264 ROOF DRAIN PIPE INSULATION 15264 - 2 I l= SECTION 15280 - EQUIPMENT INSULATION GENERAL - PART I 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install insulation on following items as described in Contract Documents - a. Hot water compression tanks. b. Air separation tanks. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION A. 1-1/2 inch thick fiberglass, 6 lb/cu ft minimum density. B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Owens -Coming type 707 2. Equal by - a. Manville Corp b. Certainteed St Gobain. 2.02 FINISH SYSTEM ELEMENTS A. Hydraulic -setting insulating cement B. 6 oz canvas C. Arabol PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Where necessary, cut or miter insulation to fit shape and contour of equipment. Band in place with 1/2" a 0.020" galvanized steel bands 18 inches on centers. EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15280 - 1 B. Install suitable metal lath over fiberglass, lacing edges. C. Apply 1/2 inch coat of hydraulic setting insulation over lath. D. After cement is dry, apply one layer canvas with adhesive and apply layer of Arabol over entire surface.— — — - -- END OF SECTION 15280 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15280 - 2 SECTION 15290 - DUCTWORK INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install insulation on air ducts outside building insulation envelope as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install insulation on supply, return fresh air ducts and combustion air duds within a� budding insulation envelope. 3. Furnish and install insulation on other air duds where indicated on Drawings. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. 2. Section 15 896 - Acoustical insulation inside air ducts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION A. 2 inch thick fiberglass with aluminum foil scrim kraft facing and have a density of one lb/cu ft. B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Manville Microlite FSK 2. CSG Type IV standard dud insulation 3. Owens -Coming FRK 4. Knauf (Dud Wrap FSK) I' PART 3 - EXECUTION i 3.01INSTALLATION A. Install duct wrap in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations (overlap insulation 4-inches). B. Do not compress insulation except in areas of structural interference. C. Completely seal joints. 1 1 END OF SECTION 15290 DUCTWORK INSULATION � 15290-1 SECTION 15335 - DRY -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install complete fire sprinkler system as described in Contract Documents. -' 2. Provide working drawings and calculations for fire sprinkler system. 3. Perform necessary excavation and backfiRing. B. Related Sections - 1! 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Sections 15010, 15060 and 15190 apply to this Section. 2. Division 02 - Criteria for excavation and backfilling. 'r 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Working Drawing Submittal Procedure - + 1. Submit seven sets of working drawings to Architect and two sets to local Fire Prevention Bureau before submission to underwriters checking agency. 2. After integrating Architect's and local Fire Prevention Bureau comments into drawings, submit drawings to underwriters checking agency and local Fire Prevention Bureau for approval and stamping. 3. After approval, submit four copies of approved, stamped drawings, with calculations, to Architect. 4. Architect retains right to add or relocate heads. B. Test Reports - 1. Furnish Architect with copies of certificates required by testing agencies. 1 � 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications - 1. Installer performing work of this Section shall be licensed in accordance with local requirements. DRY -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15335 -1 B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies - 1. layout and system shall conform to NFPA #13, requirements of local Fire and Water Departments, and applicable rules, regulations, laws, and ordinances of local authorities. —2. Upon_completion of work of this Section and prior to acceptance, subject system to tests required by underwriter's checking agency and City with representatives of Fire Department present. 3. Test systems including yard piping at 200 psi for two hours with no visible leakage in above ground piping. Make tests at low point in system or zone being tested. 4. Test blanks shall have red painted lugs protruding beyond flange to clearly indicate their presence and be numbered to assure their removal when testing is completed. 5. Install underground piping as recommended by NFPA Pamphlet #24. 6. Examine contract documents (including architectural) carefully, to locate and identify all voids, concealed spaces and other budding characteristics. Make provisions for fire sprinkling these areas, as required by NFPA 13 and other NFPA Sections. 1.04 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials - 1. Furnish twelve spare heads of each type and temperature rating used, properly boxed with sprinkler head wrench. PART 2 - PRODUCT'S 2.01 PIPE A. Above Ground- 1. Pipe and Fittings: Pipes and fittings 21/2" and larger shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. Standard #13. Piping 2" and smaller shall be standard wall schedule 40 black steel pipe. Fittings shall be class 150 malleable -iron threaded. 2. Victaulic couplings, valves fittings and specialty items may be used in lieu of welded, flanged or threaded connections. Grade "E" gaskets shall be used up to a maximum operating temperature of 230°F. Where victaulic system is used, victaulic S/700, S/703, S/704 butterfly valves and S//15 check valve may be used where accepted by local authorities, insurance underwriters and NFPA standards. 3. Pipe Hangers: All hangers shall be a type approved by the local fire department. B. Below Grade - 1. All Areas - DRY -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15335 -2 l a. Bell and spigot cast iron, AW WA Standard, Class 150 with fittings to match. 2. Outside Building Area - ' a. Transite Class. 150 Industrial Pressure Pipe with Ring-Tite couplings, AWWA -� C400-53T. Fittings shall be cast iron pressure fittings with Ring -Tito bells, AW WA C100-55. b. If local codes permit, Manville's "Blue Brut" UL labeled PVC pipe and fittings may _ be used. 2.02 VALVES A. Valves used with below grade pipe shall be cast iron pressure type. B. Post Indicator Valves (where required) - L 1. AW WA and UL listed, with standard indicator post flange and post similar and equal to Kennedy #5412 series with post extensions as required. r�I 2. Approved Manufacturer; - a. Kennedy b. Grinnell r} C. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. See Architectural Section. C. Gate Valve -Butterfly or OS&Y D. Check Valve - Swing or wafer type. E. Provide USC listed backflow preventer if required by local water district. F. Dry Pipe Valve - Air actuated. Compressed air by Plant Air Compressor. + 2.03 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Install recessed heads, or equal, as approved by architect prior to bid, in occupied areas. Pendant type may be installed in storage rooms, custodial rooms, and in concealed areas. e_ B. Install wire guards where required for protection. C. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Star 2. Grinnell 3. Viking t_, DRY -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15335 - 3 _s 4. 5. 6. Reliable Central Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. See Architectural Section. 2.04 TRIM - - - A. Electric, chrome plated alarm gong, 10 inch diameter. B. Pressure gauge C. Testing bypass D. Escutcheon Plates - 1. Chrome or nickel plated and installed on pipes through finished wall, floors, or ceilings. 2. Approved Manufacturers - a. B&C #10 b. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. 2.05 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. 4" x 2-IX, polished brass standpipe mount type with turn down siamese connection and built in check valve. 2.06 UNDERGROUND VALVE BOXES A. Concrete box with traffic weight cast iron lid marked for service. B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Christy 2. Brooks 3. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. 2.07 FLOW SWITCH A. Provide with built-in retard, retarding chamber, and dual set of contacts. B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Notifier #NVR 2. Potter DRY -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15335 - 4 V 3. Viking - 4. Equal as approved by Architect prior to bidding. r 2.08 DRAINS i A. Angle type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Do not use couplings except where distance between fittings exceeds 20V- i B. Use flanged fittings in control valve and drain assembly at base of risers. Where sprinkler system' passes through a partition, a flanged fitting may be provided within the partition. C. Drains - 1. Run drains outside building under sidewalk to spill onto paving area at finish grade level. ' 2. Install main drains on main risers and auxiliafy drains at low points in system. 3. Install inspector's test drains as near outer end of system as possible where 1-1/4" branch line is available. 4. Five or fewer heads on a riser will not require a drain valve but may be drained through a plugged fitting. - D. Alarm Flow Switch - 1. Install on supply connection. Connect one set of contacts to alarm bell and other set to remote alarm. 2. Switch shall give signal upon operation of any single sprinkler head. E. Install sprinklers in overhang where applicable. Exterior Hues shall have accessible shut-off valve with separate branch line and freeze protection as required. F. Install sprinkler lines concealed. G. Avoid locating sprinklers on ceiling grid lines. Heads shall be located no less than 6" from ce�7ing grids. H. Locate connection to water service, Fire Department connection detector check valve, and concrete valve pit in landscape area or as indicated on the plans in accordance with Water and Fire Department's requirements. Protect this area with at least four, 6 inch diameter x 7 foot long steel, concrete filled pipes installed 3'6" into ground. �J DRY -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM 15335 - 5 I. Before connection to sprinkler system, flush underground mains and lead-in connections. Flow shall be 750 gpm minimum for 6 inch pipe, 1000 gpm for 8 inch pipe, 1500 gpm for 10 inch pipe, and 2000 gpm for 12 inch pipe. Flow for deluge or hydraulically designed systems shall be at least water demand rate determined by system design. Continue flow until water is clear. L Install branch lipes and mains with proper slope to main or auxiliary drains in accordance with NFPA- 13. I{ Make connection to house air compressor in the mechanical room. L After sprinkler installation has been completed, tested and approved, remove all oil grease, eta from piping, heads, fittings, eta and leave the system in a neat, clean and workmanlike manner. M. After installation, remove all waste materials, debris, extra piping, eta, resulting from system installation. Dispose of debris legally. N. Instruct the owner and/or his representative in the proper maintenance and operation of the five sprinkler system using NFPA 25 as a guide. O. Provide a.written warranty for workmanship and materials for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the installation. Repair and replacement of items shall be made without cost to the owner during the warranty period- P. As the work progresses, record all changes on a set of drawings kept at the job site. At the completion of the work, furnish one corrected set of reproducible drawings to the engineer as record drawings. END OF SECTION 15335 DRY -PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINFLER SYSTEM 15335 - 6 - u SECTION 15411 - CULINARY WATER PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install culinary water piping complete with necessary valves, connections, and accessories inside budding and connect with outside utility limes 5 feet from budding perimeter. 2. Perform excavating and backfilling required by work of this Section. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Sections 15010, 15060 and 15190 apply to this Section. 2. Division 02 - Culinary water piping from 5 feet from budding to main. 3. Division 02 - Criteria for performance of excavation and backfill. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control - 1. Submit written report of sterilization test to Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE A. Type K copper for piping underground or beneath concrete slab. 3/4 inch minimum under slabs. B. Type L hard drawn copper for above ground applications. 2.02 Fn-hNGS A. Wrought copper. 2.03 CONNECTIONS A. Sweat copper type with 95/5 or 96/4 Tin -Antimony solder. B. Joints under slabs, if allowed by local codes, shall be brazed. 2.04 BALL VALVES A. Use ball valves exclusively unless otherwise specified. Ball valves shall be by single manufacturer from approved list below. Valves shall be for 150 PSI SWP. CULINARY WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 15411 - 1 B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Nbco-Scott T595 or S595 or equal by 2. ConBraCo(Apollo) 3. Crane 4. Hammond 5. Jenkins 6. Stockham 7. Watts 2.05 STOP & WASTE VALVES A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Mark H Oriseal stop & waste valve H15134 by Mueller 2. Buffalo screw type curb box H-10350 complete with lid and H-10349 enlarged base by Mueller. 2.06 BACKFLOW PROTECTIONS A. Approved Manufacturers- 1. Watts No. 909 - R.P. Backilow Preventer. 2. FEBCO Model No. 825 - R.P. Backflow Preventer. 3. Wilkins Model No. 550 - R.P. Backflow Preventer. 4. Conbraco 2.07 COMBINATION PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE/STRAINER A. Integral stainless steel strainer, or separate 'T strainer installed upstream of pressure reducing valve. B. Built-in thermal expansion bypass check valve. C. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Watts U513 or equal by 2. Cash Valve 3. Clayton Valve CULINARY WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 15411 - 2 } 4. Spencer r 5. Thrush ' 6. Wilkins PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install piping under slabs without joints where possible. B. Locate cold water lines a minimum of 6 inches from hot water lime. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL _ A. Before pipes are covered, test systems in presence of Architect at 100 psi hydrostatic pressure for two hours and show no leaks. B. Sterilize domestic water system with solution containing 250 parts per million minimum ofavailable chlorine. Introduce chlorinating materials into system in manner approved by Architect. Allow sterilization solution to remain for 24 hours and open and close valves and faucets several times during that time. C. After sterilization, flush solution from system with clean water until residual chlorine content is less I than 0.2 parts per million. P D. Water system will not be accepted until negative bacteriological test is made on water taken from system. Repeat dosing as necessary until such negative test is accomplished. ' END OF SECTION 15411 i �J CULINARY WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 15411 - 3 1) SECTION 15412 - SOIL WASTE & VENT PIPING SYSTEMS r PART 1 -GENERAL E 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install sod, waste, and vent piping systems within budding and conned with outside utility lines 5 feet out from budding where applicable. 2. Perform excavation and backfill required by work of this Section. f� { B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section - 1. Galvanized steel roof jacks. C. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Sections 15010, 15060 and 15190 apply to this Section. 2. Division 02 - Criteria for performance of excavation and backftll. 3. Division 02 - Sewage piping from 5 feet out from budding to main. 4. Division 02 - Storm sewer piping. I -5. Division 07 -Installing of galvanized steel roof jacks. 6. Division 07 - Furnishing and installing of lead roof jacks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BURIED LINES A: Service weight, single -hub type cast iron sod pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM A 74-87, "Specification for Cast Iron Sod Pipe & Fittings". B. Plastic pipe conforming to IAPMO and ASTM specifications will be acceptable where permitted by local code. C. Joint Material - 1. 50% oakum and 50%n lead, well calked. 2. Rubber gaskets meeting requirements of ASTM C 564-88, "Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Sod Pipe and Fittings". SOIL, WASTE, & VENT PIPING SYSTEMS 15412 - 1 U 2.02 ABOVE GRADE PIPING & VENT LINES A. Same as specified for buried lines except no -hub pipe may be used B. Vent lines 2-1/2 inches or smaller may be Schedule 40 galvanized steel. C. Plastic pipe conforming to IAPMO and ASTM specifications will be acceptable where permitted by local codes. D. Joint Material - 1. Bell & Spigot Pipe - 50% oakum and 50% lead, well calked, or rubber gaskets meeting requirements of ASTM C 564-88, "Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings". 2. No -Hub Pipe - Neoprene gaskets with stainless steel cinch bands. 3. Galvanized Pipe - Screwed Durham tarred drainage fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Do not calk threaded work. B. Slope horizontal pipe at 1/4 in/ft. C. Place cleanouts as follows - 1. Where shown on Drawings and near bottom of each stack and riser. 2. At every 90 degree change of direction for horizontal lines. 3. Every 100 feet of horizontal ran. 4. Extend cleanout to accessible surface. Do not place cleanouts in carpeted floors. In such locations, use wall type cleanouts. D. Each fixture and appliance dischargingwater into sanitary sewer or building sewer lines shall have seal trap in connection with complete venting system so gasses pass freely to atmosphere with no pressure or syphon condition on water seal. E. Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Discharge 10 inches above roof. Join lines together in fewest practicable number before projecting above roof. Set back vent lines so they will not pierce roof near edge or valley. F. Use torque wrench to obtain proper tension in cinch bands when using hubless cast iron pipe. Butt ends of pipe against centering flange of coupling. SOIL, WASTE, & VENT PIPING SYSTEMS 15412 - 2 •" Roof systems other than concrete roof the `•• G. Flash pipes passing through roof with 16 oz sheet copper flashing fitted snugly around pipes and calk between flashing and pipe with flexible waterproof compound. Flashing base shall be at least 24 inches square. 1. Flashing may be 4 lb per sq ft lead flashing fitted around pipes and turned down into pipe If2 inch with turned edge hammered against pipe wall. 2. Consult roofing contractor for exact method of flashing, coordinate with engineer. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Before piping is covered, conduct tests for leaks and defective work. Notify Architect prior to testing. Correct leaks and defective work. Fill waste and vent system to roof level with water, 10 feet minimum, and show no leaks for two hours. END OF SECTION 15412 SOIL, WASTE, & VENT PIPING SYSTEMS 15412 - 3 II u SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install items specified in this Section and/or described in Contract Documents. 1 B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Sections 15010, 15060 and 15190 apply to this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOW CONTROL FITTINGS: A. Vandal proof type and fit faucet spout of fixture used. Flow shall be controlled as required by local codes. 2.02 CONDENSATE DRAINS A. Provide Type M copper for condensate drains from air handling units, fan coil units, and furnace cods. Support piping and protect from damage. I B. Provide schedule 40 PVC for condensate drains from high tech furnaces and walk-in 000lers/freezers. C. Install 3 inch deep seal, vented water trap adjacent to coil connection. 2.03 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Cast aluminum case B. Chrome plated ring C. Clear glass window D. Phosphor bronze alloy steel bourdon tube E. 1/2 percent scale range accuracy F. 4-1/2 inch diameter dial face G. Range 0 to 100 psig. H. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Trerice 500 or equal PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 1 2. Crosby -Ashton 3. Marsh 2.04 BRASS GAUGE COCKS: A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Ashcroft 2. Ernst 3. Trerice 4. Wahvorth 2.05 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS: A. Provide and install a water hammer arrestor at each hot and cold water connection and battery of fixtures. B. Water hammer arrestors shall be sized in accordance with PDI W11-201, precharged, suitable for operation in temperature range 100 to 300 degrees F, and maximum 250 psig working pressure. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Josant 2 PPP, Inc. (Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.) i 3. Sioux Chief 4. Wade 5. Zum A ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Connect gauges to pipe with 1/4 inch connections utilizing cocks. END OF SECTION 15430y PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 2 SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - -- 1. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 and 15 060 apply to this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - f 2.01 GENERAL A. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixture trim shall be chrome plated. 2.02 WATER CLOSETS A. Standard Fixture - 1. Approved Manufacturers - a. American Standard b. Crane C. F1jer d. Kohler B. Handicap Fixture - 1. 18 inch rim height. 2. Approved Manufacturers a. American Standard b. Crane C. Eljer d. Kohler I� PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 1 i U' C. Seat - 1. Provide split front type with check hinge. 2. Approved Manufacturers for Standard & Handicapped Fixtures - a. Church b. Beneke Corporation C. Bemis d. Kohler e. Olsonite D. Flush Valve 1. Approved Manufacturers a. Sloan b. Zurn 2.03 URINALS A. Fixture - Blowout type 1. Approved Manufacturers a. American Standard ' b. Crane C. Kohler d. E1jer B. Flush Valve - 1. Approved Manufacturers a. Sloan b. Zurn 2.04 LAVATORIES A. Self Supporting Fixture - 1. Approved Manufacturers PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 2 a. American Standard b. Crane C. Kohler d. Eljer B. Counter Top Fixture - 1. Approved Manufacturers a. Kohler C. Fittings - 1. Faucet and Drain - a. Provide now control fitting on each spout in place of aerator. b. Approved Manufacturers- 1) American Standard 2) Crane 3) Chicago 4) Eljer 5) Delta 6) Kohler 2. Supply pipes with stops - a. Provide stuffmg box and chrome plating. b. Approved Manufacturers- 1. Eastman 2. Brass Craft 3. Dearborn 3. Trap - a. 17 ga tube "P" trap, chrome plated PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 3 b. Approved Manufacturers - 1) Brass -Craft 2) Dearborn 4) Keeney Manufacturing D. All handicap accessible lavatories shall have traps and -homed —cold water supplies insulated with flexible vinyl insulation manufactured by Truebro, Inc. Handi Iav-Guard Model No. 12OG or No. 105W (no equals accepted). 2.05 SERVICE SINK A. Fixture - 1. Floor Type. 2. Approved Manufacturers - a. American Standard b. Eljer Ifi a Fiat Products Inc d. Graning C. Kohler E Stem -Williams B. Fittings - 1. Supply - Faucet a. Mounting height as indicated on architectural interior elevations. b. Provide 48 inch hose and clamp unless spout is threaded. C. Approved Manufacturers - 1) American Standard 2) Chicago 3) Crane 4) Eljer PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 4 5) Fiat Products Inc 6) Grohe 7) Kohler 8) T&S Brass 2. Dram and Strainer - a. Approved Manufacturers - 1) American Standard 2) Eljer 3) Kohler 3. Trap - a. Cast iron 2.06 STAINLESS STEEL SINKS A. Fixture - 1. Self rimming, 18 gauge stainless steel, satin finish. 2. Approved Manufacturers - a. One, two or three Compartment - 1) Elkay 2) Just B. Fittings - 1. Supply - a. One. two or three compartment sinks b. Approved Manufacturers 1) American Standard 2) Crane 3) Eljer 4) Elkay PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 5 5) Kohler 3. Waste - a. Approved Manufacturers- 1) Crane 2) Eljer 3) - Ell ay - - - 4) Kohler 4. Supply pipes with stops - a. Provide stuffing box and chrome plating. b. Approved Manufacturers - 1) Brass Craft 2) Dearborn 3) Eastman 5. Trap - a. 17 gauge tube "P" trap, chrome plated b. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Brass -Craft 2. Dearborn 3. Frost 4. Keeney Manufacturing 2.07 FLOOR DRAINS - A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Josam 2. Smith 3. Wade 4. Zurn PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 6 2.08 HYDRANTS A. Provide with integral anti -siphon device. B. Approved Manufacturers (Exterior Frost Free) 1. Zum _I 2. Wade 3. Smith 4. Josam 5. Woodford C. Approved Manufactures (Interior) 1. Acum 2. Chicago Faucet 3. Woodford 2.09 CLEANOUTS: A. Approved Manufacturers- 1. Finish Floors - a. Zum b. Smith C. Wade d. Josam 2. Resilient Flooring - a. Zum b. Smith C. Wade d. Josam 3. Finished Wall - a. Zum PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 7 b. Smith C. Wade d. Josam 4. Exposed Drain Lines - a. Zum b. Smith C. Wade d. Josam 5. General Purpose - a. Zum b. Smith C. Wade d. Josam 2.10 FLOOR SINK A. 8 inch square top, medium receptor cast iron bodywith flanged receptor, acid resistant coated interior, and acid resistant coated half grate. Aluminum sediment bucket and 2 inch caulked regular outlet connection. B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. J R Smith 2. Josam 3. Wade 4. Zum 2.11 SHOWERS A. Shower valves approved manufacturers. 1. Acordn 2. Bradley 3. Moen PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 8 B. Drain - See Floor Drains. 2.12 WASHING MACHINE OU`= BOX A. 16 ga. steel with corrosion resistant epoxy finish. B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Guy Gray Manufacturing, Co., Inc. 2. Symmons Industries, Inc. 2.13 ROOF/OVERFLOW DRAINS A. Cast iron body, cast iron mushroom dome. B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Josam Co. 2. Jay R. Smith Co. 3. Wade 4. Zum PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures including traps and accessories with accessible stop or control valve in each hot and cold water branch supply line. B. For mounting heights refer to architectural interior elevations. C. Make fixture floor connections with approved brand of cast iron floor flange, soldered or caulked securely to waste pipe. D. Make joints between fixtures and floor flanges tight with approved fixture setting compound or gaskets. E. Calk between fixtures and wall and floor with white butyl rubber non -absorbent caulking compound. Point edges. 3.02 ADJUSTING, CLEANING A. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project. B. Clean all aerators. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 9 C. Adjust flush valve operation for maarimum flush efficiency. END OF SECPION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 -10 - SECTION 15459 - GAS FIRED STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install water heater as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - — 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010, 15060 and 15190 apply to this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS i 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNTI'S A. Glass lined storage tank, pressure tested and rated for 150 psi wp complete with thermostat, high limit control, gas valve, gas pressure regulator, 100% safety shut-off, and draft diverter. AGA approved Water heaters having heat input greater than 200,000 btu/hr shall be ASME certified. B. With hand hole cleanout and non -prorated three year tank warranty. C. Approved Manufacturers - a. A O Smith b. Bradford -White C. Lochinvar d. Mor.Flo/American e. Rheem f. Ruud GL g. State Industries 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. In seismic zones 3 and/or 4 (UBC Figure 23-2) provide and install anchoring components: 1. 1" x 18 ga. galvanized steel straps. 2. #10 x 2-1/2 inch screws. B. Anchor to wall to resist horizontal displacement due to earthquake motion. GAS FIRED STORAGE TYPE WATER BEATERS 15459 - 1 C. Provide and install as indicated on the plans, an in line circulating pump for recirculating domestic hot water. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Grundfos 3. Bell & Gossett D. Provide and install with circulating pump a 120V aquastat to control pump operation, aquastat shall be Honeywell No. T-675-A-1441 surface mounted. E. Water heaters having check valves or back flow preventers in the incoming cold water line shall have installed on the cold water supply line a thermal expansion tank. Tank shall be of drawn steel construction with a Butyl rubber diagram, plastic lined, and pre -charged with 40 psi air. Maximum working pressure - 150 psi maximum temperature - 200T. Tank shall be sized as noted on the drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. State Industries 2. Amtrol, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Water heaters shall each have temperature -pressure relief valve sized to match heat input and set to relieve at 120 psi. B. Install temperature -pressure relief valve on water heater and pipe discharge to directly above funnel of floor drain. END OF SECTION 15459 GAS FIRED STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS 15459 - 2 SECTION 15481 - COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM to IT A. Pipe And Pipe Fittings B. Reciprocating air compressor. . C. Air receiver and accessories. D. Aftercooler. E. Refrigerated air dryer. F. Pressure reducing station. 1.02 REIATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions Division 01 and Section 15010, 15060 and 15190. 1.03 SUBMTITAIS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate piping system schematic with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature with capacity, weight, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hoisting and setting requirements, starting procedures. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Record actual locations of equipment and components. Modify shop drawings to indicate final locations. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Operation Data: Submit for air compressor, air receiver and accessories, after cooler, refrigerated air dryer, and pressure reducing station. ISED AIR SYSTEM 15481 - 1 C. Maintenance Data: Submit for air compressor, air receiver and accessories, after cooler, refrigerated air dryer, and pressure reducing station. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for installation of pressure vessels. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of air receiver. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified -and -indicated - 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. B. Accept air compressors, refrigerated air dryer on site in factory fabricated containers with shipping skids and plastic pipe end protectors in place. Inspect for damage. C. Protect piping and equipment from weather and construction traffic. 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provision of 15010. B. Provide two quart containers of compressor oil. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS _ A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.9 or ASME Sec. 1. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.26, cast bronze. 2. Joints: Flared. D. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2153, SDR 115. ;SED AIR SYSTEM 15481 - 2 _ 1. Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513 socket type. 2. Joints: Fusion welded. 3. Confirm use of polyethylene pipe. 2.02 VALVES A. Ball Valves r 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Applool b. Nbco C. Hammond d. Watts B. Swing Check Valves 1. Approved Manufacturers; a. Nbco b. Hammond C. Stockham d. Watts C. Air Outlets 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Amflow 2. Quick Connectors: brass, snap on connector with self closing valve. ' 2.03 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS A. Unions 1. Ferrous Pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper Tube and Pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 15481 - 3 C. Flexible Connector: Neoprene with brass threaded connectors. 2.04 COMPRESSOR A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Ingersoll-Rand 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: a. Champion b. Campbell-Hausfeld B. Type: Simplex compressor unit as stated on the plans consisting of air cooled compressor, air receiver, after cooler, pressure reducing station, spring isolators, and operating controls. C. Compressor: Cast iron housing and head, heat treated forged steel or ductile iron shaft, aluminum alloy connecting rods, aluminum pistons with non -lubricated carbon rings, high -strength alloy suction and discharge valves. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts. D. Base: One piece ribbed cast iron or welded steel base for motor and compressor with provision for V-belt adjustment. E. Capacity as specified on the drawings. F. Electrical Characteristics as speed on the drawings. G. Motor: As specified on the drawings. See also Section 15030. H. Controls: 1. Pressure Switch: Line voltage contactor to break at 100 psi with minimum differential of 200 pSL I. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductors quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. I Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment under provisions of Division 16. 2.05 AFTERCOOLER A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Ingersoil-Rand 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Amflow b. Wilkerson SED AIR SYSTEM 15481 - 4 B. Construction: Removable tube nests of non-ferrous metal tubes and corrosion resistant tube plates, safety valves, pressure gage, moisture separator, moisture drain valve, water inlet pipingwith automatic water valve, automatic condensate trap and overflow piping with open funnel. C. Working Pressure: 135 psig. D. Discharge: Cool air to within 12 degrees F (7 degrees C) of ambient air temperature at specified flow capacity. 2.06 AIR DRYER A. Type: Membranae or desiccant Sher type capable of removing moisture in compressed air to a pressure dew point of 32°F with a maximum pressure drop of 5 psig. B. Approved Manufacturers- 1. Amflow 2. Baston 3. Ingersoll Rand 4. Wilkerson 2.07 AIR RECEIVER A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Ingersoll-Rand 2. Other acceptable• manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Champion b. Campbell-Hausfeld B. Receiver: Vertical, built to ASME regulations for working pressure of 125 psi (862kPa). Flange or d screw inlet and outlet connections. C. Fittings: Adjustable pressure regulator, safety valve, pressure gage, drain cock, and automatic float actuated condensate trap. D. Tank Finish: Shop vinyl. E. Size as specified on the drawings. 2.08 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Ingersoll-Rand COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 15481 - 5 A� 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Amflow f, b. Wilkerson B. Pressure Reducing Station: Consisting of automatic reducing valve and bypass, and low pressure side relief and gage. Provide oil separator where indicated C. Valve Capacity: Reduce pressure from 200 psi to 30 psi, adjustable upwards from reduced pressure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install compressor unit on 4" concrete housekeeping pad with 45 degrees chamfered edges. C. Install compressor unit on vibration isolators. Level and bolt in place. D. Make air cock and drain connection on horizontal casing. E. Install line size ball valve and check valve on compressor discharge. F. Install replaceable cartridge type filter silencer of adequate capacity for each compressor. G. Pipe drain to floor drain. H. Connect condensate drains to nearest floor drain. I. Install valved bypass around air dryer. Factory insulate inlet and outlet connections. J. Install valved drip connection at low points of piping system. I{. Install take offs to outlets from top of main, with shut off valve after take off. Slope take off piping to outlets. L. Install compressed air couplings, female quick connectors, and pressure gages where outlets are indicated. M. Install tees instead of elbows at changes in direction of piping. Fit open end of each tee with plug. N. Identify piping system and components. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compressed Air Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressed air piping in accordance with ANSI B31.1. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 15481 - 6 I / B. Repair or replace compressed air piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate compliance. C. Cap (seal) ends of piping when not connected to mechanical equipment. END OF SECTION 15481 Its I I COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 15481 - 7 i SECTION 15489 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS !� PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1 1. Furnish and install gas piping and fittings within building including connection to meter. =- B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Sections 15010, 15060 and 15190 apply to this Section. i 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE �i A. Qualifications - 1. Welders shall be certified and bear evidence of certification 30 days prior to commencing work ' on project. If there is doubt as to proficiency of welder, Owner's Representative may require welder to take another test. This shall be done at no cost to Owner. Certification shall be by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratories or other approved authority. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE A. Meet requirements of ASTM A 53-89a, "Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black & Hot -Dipped Zino -Coated Welded & Seamless'. B. Carbon steel, butt welded, Schedule 40 black steel pipe. 2.02 FITTINGS A. Black Pipe - 1. Welded forged steel fittings meeting requirements of AST'M A 234-89a, "Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures", or standard weight malleable iron screwed. I' 2.03 VALVES q A. 125 psi bronze body ball valve, UL listed B. Approved Manufacturers & Models - 1. ConBraCo - "Apollo" series 80-100 2. Jenkins - FIG-30-A NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS ,r 15489 - 1 i r^ ;_ 3. Jomar - Model T-204 4. McDonald - 3410 5. PGL Corp - "Red Cap" gas ball valve 2.04 EARTHQUAKE ACTUATED GAS SHUT-OFF VALVES (For Seismic Zones 3 and 4) (UBC Fig. No. 23-2). A. Aluminum Body Valve. B. Stainless Steel Ball Shut-off. C. Manual reset. D. V.L., IAPMO, and A.6A listed. E. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Safe-T-Quake. 2. Koso 3. Quakemaster. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Pipe installed underground, through air plenums, in walls, and pipes 2-1/2 inches and larger shall have welded fittings and joints. Other pipe may have screwed or welded fittings. B. Wrap and lay underground pipe in accordance with local gas utility company regulations and specifications. C. Install gas cocks on limes serving boilers, furnaces, dud heaters, and water heaters adjacent to boiler, furnace, or heater on outside of boiler, furnace, or heater cabinet and easily accessible. D. Do not use flexible pipe connections to boilers, furnaces, dud heaters, or hot water heaters. E. Install dirt leg with pipe cap, 6 inches long minimum, on each vertical gas drop to heating equipment. F. Use fittings for changes of direction in pipe and for branch runouts. G. Protection Coatings: All underground steel pipes shall be wrapped with "Scotchrap" NP. 50 tape to give not less than two complete layers on the entire underground piping system. Factory wrapped pipe NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 15489 - 2 4� I in accordance with American Water Works Standard, or X-tra-Coast Plastic coated pipe will be _ acceptable. 7 11 Paint main gas valve red and label "Main Gas Shut-off' with a permanent label. Install earthquake activated gas shut-off valve downstream of meter before entering building with gas �j line (for seismic zones 3 and 4). END OF SECTION 15489 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 15489 - 3 A ^P I :Y I A 7 SECTION 15530. REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install piping for refrigeration systems as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 - check all sections,15060 and 15190 apply to this Section. 2. Section 15 263 - Refrigerant piping Insulation 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications - 1. Refrigerant piping shall be installed by a refrigeration contractor licensed by State. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Meet requirements ofASTM B 280-88, "Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Field Service", hard drawn straight lengths. B. Do not use pre -charged refrigerant lines. 2.02 REFRIGERANT FTTTINGS A. Wrought copper with long radius elbows. B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Mueller Streamline 2. Nbco Inc 3. Grinnell 4. Elkhart Products Corp 2.03 SUCTION LINE TRAPS A. Manufactured standard one-piece traps. REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS 15530 - 1 2.04 CONNECTION MATERIAL A. Brazing Rods - 1. Copper to Copper Connections - a. AWS Classification BCuP-4 Copper Phosphorus (6% silver). b. AWS Classification BCuP-5 Copper Phosphorus (15% silver). 2. Copper to Brass or Copper to Steel Connections - a. AWS Classification BAg-5 Silver (45% silver). 3. Do not use rods containing Cadmium. 2.05 FLUX A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. "Stay-Silv white brazing flux" by J W Harris Co 2. High quality silver solder flux by Handy & Harmon PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Do not install refrigerant piping underground or in tunnels- B. Slope suction lines down toward compressor one inch/10 feet. Locate traps at vertical rises against flow in suction lines. C. Refrigeration system connections shall be copper -to -copper, copper-to-bmss, or copper -to -steel type properly cleaned and brazed with specified rods. Use flux only where necessary. 1. No soft solder (tin, lead, antimony) connections will be allowed in system. D. Braze valve, sight glass, and flexible connections. E. Circulate dry nitrogen through tubes being brazed to eliminate formation of copper oxide during brazing operation. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Make evacuation and leak tests in presence of Owner's Representative, Architect's and Engineer after completing refrigeration piping systems. Positive pressure test will not suffice for procedure outlined below. REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS 15530 - 2 1. Draw vacuum on each entire system with vacuum pump to 200 microns using vacuum gauge calibrated in microns. Do not use cooling compressor to evacuate system nor operate it while system is under high vacuum. Isolate compressor from system piping using shut-off valves prior to pulling vacuum. 2. Break vacuum with freon to be used and re-establish vacuum test. Vacuum shall hold for 24 hours at 200 microns without compressor running. 3. Conduct tests at 70 deg F ambient temperature minimum. .f 4. Do not run systems until above tests have been made and systems started up as specified. Inform Owner's Representative of status of systems at time of final inspection and schedule start-up and testing if prevented by outdoor conditions before this time. 5. After testing, fully charge system with refrigerant and conduct test with Halide Leak Detector. END OF SECTION 15530 ff REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS 15530 - 3 s �� SECTION 15535 - REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL ` 1.01 SUMMARY I�6 A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install refrigeration specialties as described in Contract Documents except for 7 ti expansion valves on 2 through 5 ton condensing units. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Sections 15010, 15060 and 15190 apply to this Section. z 2. Section 15 530 - Refrigeration piping d l `f PART 2 - PRODUCTS `-j 2.01 EXPANSION VALVES: A Forpressure type distnbutors, externally equalizedwith stainless steel diaphragm, and same refrigerant in thermostatic elements as in system. B. Size valves to provide full rated capacity of cooling coilserved. Coordinate selection with evaporator coif and condensing unit. C. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Alco 2. Henry 1 3. Mueller 4. Singer 5. Sporlan 'i 2.02 FILTER -DRIER A. On lines 3/4 inch outside diameter and larger, filter -drier shall be replaceable core type with non-ferrous casing and Schraeder type valve. F• B. On lines smaller than 3/4 inch outside diameter, filter -drier shall be sealed type using flared copper fittings. C. Size shall be full line size. 1� ~ REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES 15535 - 1 li D. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Alco 2. Mueller 3. Sporlan 4. Virginia 2.03 SIGHT GLASS A. Combination moisture and liquid indicator with protection cap. B. Sight glass shall be full line size. C. Sight glass connections shall be solid copper or brass, no copper -coated steel sight glasses allowed D. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Alco 2. Asco 3. Mueller 4. Sporlan 2.04 MANUAL REFRIGERANT SHUT-OFF VALVE A. Ball valves designed for refrigeration service and full line size. B. Valve shall have cap seals. C. Valves with hand wheels are not acceptable. D. Provide service valve on each liquid and suction line at compressor. E. If service valves come as integral part of condensing unit, additional service valves shall not be required. F. Approved Manufacturers - 1. ConBraCo (Apollo) 2. Henry 3. Mueller 4. Superior REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES 15535 - 2 5. Virginia ^i 2.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Provide in each liquid line and suction line at both condensing unit and evaporator on systems larger _ than five tons. B. Anchor pipe near each flexible connector. C. Connectors shall be for refrigerant service with bronze seamless corrugated hose and bronze braiding. D. Approved Manufacturers - A. 1. Packless Vibration Absorbers Model VAF 2. Style "BF" Spring -flex freon connectors by Vibration Mountings. `4 3. Anaconda "Vibration Eliminators" by Anamet. PART 3 - EXECUTION - 3.01INSTALI-ATION A. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations. Install refrigeration distributors and suction outlet at same end of coil. =j END OF SECTION 15535 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES 15535 - 3 I� I -_, - - - _ � -� �: -- � - � �= i - � -� ,� �, � r _ _ __ SECTION 15625 - MAKE-UP AIR UNITS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnished and install make-up units as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Section - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. 2. Section 15886 — Filters PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 SUMMARY A. Make-up Air Units 1. Cabinets - a. Constructedbygalvanizedsteelwithprotective enamel onzinccoatedf-mish,adequately braced and reinforced, and of sectionalized construction. b. Panels shall be removable for easy access to interior of unit. C. With interior mounted motors, hinged access doors with cam locks. d. Cabinet panels shall be internally insulated with one inch thick, 3/4 lb density, vinyl coated glass fiber insulation. e. Seal joints with permanent type flexible mastic. 2. Provide insulated drain pan with condensate connections at each end. Extend drain pan under coil headers and refrigerant distributor;. Plug unused ends. 3. Fans - a. Double inlet, double width, forwardly curved centrifugal type designed for Class I operation. b. Base fan ratings on tests conducted in accordance with AMCA Code #210. C. Construct fan housings with streamline inlet and side sheets. d. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested. Maximum rated fan RPMs shall be well below first critical fan shaft speed. MAKE-UP AIR UNTI'S 15625 - 1 4. Fan Shaft - Solid high carbon steel. 5. Bearing - a. Self -aligning, grade lubricated, ball type, and sized minimum service factor of 4. L b. Provide lubrication fittings. Permanently lubricated eaanngs are not acceptable. C. Provide extended lubrication lines to accessible side of unit. 6. Rate V-belt drives at 150%of motor rating. - — a. Motor sheaves shall be of adjustable pitch type giving 30% speed variation. b. Fabricate belt guards from 16 gauge galvanized steel rigidly supported C. Provide 1-1/2 inch diameter tachometer holes for both fan and motor shafts. 7. Motors - a. As described in Contract Documents and mounted on rubber isolated base incorporating a device for belt tightening, or internal to unit with fan, motor, and drive assembly internally isolated. 8. Burner & Heat Exchanger - a. Heat Exchanger: 409 Stainless steel welded construction. b. Gas Fumer- Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply, combination gas valve and pressure regulator incorporate manual shut-off, automatic 100 percent shut- off and thermo-couple pilot safety device, and electronic pilot ignition. C. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Thermo -couple sensor prevents opening of solenoid gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure. d. Duct Thermostat: Cycles burner to maintain discharge air temperature setting. e. High Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de -energized bumer on high bonnet temperature and re -energizes when temperature drops to lower value. f. Duct Thermostat: Shall be low voltage, to control burner operation, heater modulates to maintain temperature setting. 9. Coils - a. Direct expansion type with plate type aluminum fins and copper tubes, ARI certified. b. Arrange cooling cod vertically in coil section. C. Completely enclose coil headers and refrigerant distributors in insulated casing with only connections extended through cabinet. MAKE-UP AIR UNITS 15625 - 2 d. Liquid and suction connections shall be on same end of coil. e. Circuit coils as shown or as required for capacity reduction. 10. Filter - a. Provide with hinged access doors and quick release locking handles. b. Provide end fillers as necessary to prevent by-passing of air. C. Provide one inch wide 16 gauge galvanized steel filter removal strap with one end bent up on inch to form hook. 11. Approved Manufacturers - a. Trane 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Roof - a. Curb shall be fully welded END OF SECTION 15625 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS 15625 - 3 SECTION 15640 - FLUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY a ` A. Includes But Not Limited To - r 1. Furnish and install flues as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. i 2. Division 09 - Painting PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUES A. Doublewall, prefabricated sectional type'B', of aluminum construction designedto handle combustion products of fuel being used. Provide with inspection cap as required by local code, roof flashing, and clean -out. 1. Height of flue above roof shall be as shown on Drawings unless local code requires it be I higher. 2. Size and install flues from furnaces according to local codes except as follows - a. No vertical flue shall have an area of less than 12-12 sq inches (4 inches round). b. In no case shall vent connector from furnace be smaller than outlet collar provided by Manufacturer. 3. Every portion of flue connector shall have rise of one inch per ft minimum from appliance to vertical flue. 4. Length of horizontal flues or flue connectors shall not be longer than 75% of height of vertical flue between point at which horizontal flue enters vertical flue to top of vertical flue. In no case shall horizontal run exceed 15 feet. ' 5. When two or more flue connections enter common vertical flue, smaller flue connector shall enter at a higher level. Do not enter flue connectors in same horizontal plane. 6. Horizontal flue connectors shall be double wall. m 7. Fittings shall be pre -fabricated double wall. 8. Every gas appliance flue shall have a "backdraft preventer" installed at top of flue. FLUES 15640 - 1 B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Ameri-Vent 2. Dura-Vent 3. Metalbestos 2.02 VENT CAPS A. Non-backdraft type for installation on top of flue, aluminum construction. B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Ameri-cap 2. Breidert Type L 3. Triangle AFL 4. Acme Mastervent Type MVR. 5. Dura-Vent END OF SECTION 15640 FLUES 15640 - 2 ' t SECTION 15671 - AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY s j A. Includes But Not Limited To - r-z 1. Furnish and install condensing units as described in Contract Documents. r I B. Related Sections - '� 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. t 2. Division 03 - Concrete slab ,-t { 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Warranty - a! t _ 1. Submit copy of specified warranty. Include warranty inOperations & Maintenance Manual See Section 15010. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies - 1. Each unit shall be UL labeled 1.04 WARRANTY r A. Five-year warranty on compressors. 1. Warranty time frame shall be five years from date of "start-up". "Start-up" date shall be recorded on warranty certificate for each unit. " PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 7-1/2 TON & LARGER UNITS A. Condenser coil shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. 1. Units having side inlets shall have coil guards. 2. Coil shall be circuited for sub -cooling. B. Fans shall be direct driven propeller upflow type. AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS I- 15671 - 1 1. Fan motors shall have inherent overload protection, be permanently lubricated, and resiliently mounted 2. Each fan shall have a safety guard. 3. Cycle fans or use solid state fan speed control for low ambient operation. C. Units shall be operable down to 0 deg F outdoor temperature. D. Compressors - 1. Hermetic or semi -hermetic design with the following features - a. Spring isolators. b. Crankcase heater. c Compressor motor overload protection. d. Ring, reed or disc type valves. e. Service valves, back -seating type with Schraeder charging valves. 2. Semi -hermetic type shall also have - f a. Automatically reversible oil pump. b. Oil sight glass. C. OR pressure switch. Y 3. Condensing units ten tons or smaller shall have only one compressor. Condensing units larger than ten tons shall have two compressors minimum, each serving separate cooling circuit and coils. E. Controls - 1. Factory wired and located in separate enclosure. 2. Safety devices shall consist of high and low pressure cutouts, and internal or plug type relief valves. 3. Unit shall be complete with magnetic starters. 4. Unit shall have anti -cycle timers to prevent units from starting up again for five minutes after any power interruption. F. Casing - 1. Fully weatherproof for outdoor installation. Finish shall be weather resistant. AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 15671 - 2 2. Panels shall be removable for servicing. 3. Provide openings for power and refrigerant connections. I i G. Condensing units shall use R-22 refrigerant. Make one liquid line, one suction line, and one power connection to each unit for each compressor in condensing unit. Provide charging valves. I-L EER rating as defined by ARI shall be not less than 10.0. ` I. Set units on neoprene type vibration isolation pads located at each corner, 4"x4"x3/4" minimum. ` 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Trane } PART 3 - EXECUTION ai 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set condensing units on enviro-therm curb. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service - 1. Condensing units shall be started up, checked out, and adjusted by Condensing Unit Manufacturer's authorized factory trained service mechanic. 2. Mechanic shall use check-out sheet provided by Manufacturer, complete and sign all items on sheet, and submit to Architect. END OF SECTION 15671 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 15671— 3 i J SECTION 15780 ROOFTOP GAS HEATING/ AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - -, 1. Furnish and install packaged air conditioning units as described in Contract Documents. -- B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Section. 1.02 SUBMITTAIS A. Warranty - 1. Submit copy of specified warranty. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements - ` 1. Air -Cooled Condensing Unit Section shall be UL approved and rated according to ARI Standards. 2. Air deliveryof units certifiedm accordancewith standard test code for centrifugal fans adopted by AMCA. 3. Furnace sections shall be AGA approved. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING A. Ship units with lifting angles and fully charged with refrigerant R-22. 1.05 SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of specified accessories with Section 15 900. E 1.06 WARRANTY A. 5 year warranty on compressors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS I A. Units shall he completely factory assembled and tested. L ROOFTOP GAS HEATING/ AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15780 - 1 0 C. I� E. F. 1. Units shall include following - a. Condenser coils b. Condenser fans and motors C. Interconnected wiring d. Prewired control panel e. Filter section £ Factory installed 100% modulating economizer cycle including motorized dampers and controls. g. Corrosion resistant all-weather cabinet h. Roof curb. Air -Cooled Condensing Unit Section - 1. Unit shall contain a strainer -dryer. 2. Famish unit with time delay or cycle protection to prevent short cycling. Condenser Coil - 1. W inch outside diameter copper tube with aluminum fins. Compressor - 1. Hermetic or semi -hermetic type mounted on vibration isolators. 2. Equip with crankcase heater. Condenser Fan - 1. Axial flow type propeller fan. Refrigerant lines shall have - 1. Flexible connections 2. Suction and liquid line service valves 3. Charging valves 4. Receiver valve ROOFTOP GAS HEATING/ AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15780 - 2 G. Controls - 1. Low ambient and dual pressure. Pre -wired. H. Furnace Sections - 1. Aluminized or chromrced heat exchanger. ' 2. Built-in draft diverter. 3. Gas shut-off valve. 4. High limit switches. r -1 S. Fan switch safety pilot and control transformer. 6. Automatic electric ignition. I. Fan Section - 1. Centrifugal Fan - One or more. a. Double inlet. b. Double width forward curved Class I. C. Constructed and tested in accordance with AMCA requirements. 2. Furnish with flexible connections with weather protection on supply and return air take -offs. J. Refrigerant Coils - 1. Constructed of copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum plate fins. 2. 1" filter rack with locking hinged door. K Cabinets - 1. Galvanized, weather-proof, and coated inside and outside with corrosion -resistant paint. L. Roof Curb M. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Trane a ROOFTOP GAS HEATING/ AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15780 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Set units on manufactur fully welded curbs. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service - 1. Equipment Manufacturer to provide start-up service. END OF SECTION 15780 ROOFTOP GAS HEATING/ AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15780 - 4 SECTION 15869 - EXHAUST FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install exhaust fans as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCES A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies - 1. Bear AMCA seal and UL label. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS A. Acoustically insulated housings. B. Include chatterproof integral back -draft damper with no metal to metal contact. C. True centrifugal wheels. D. Entire fan, motor, and wheel assembly shall be easily removable without disturbing housing. I? Suitably ground motors and mount on rubber -in shear vibration isolators. F. Provide wall or roof rep, as required G. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Greenheck Sp 2.02 ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS A. Direct drive or have adjustable pitch V-belt as noted on.Drawings. B. Wheels shall be backward curved and housing shall be removable or hinged aluminum. C. Isolate motor with vibration dampeners. EXHAUST FANS 15869 - 1 D. Provide motorized type back -draft dampers and interlocked with fan motors. Damper shall have 5% leakage. E. Insulated, pre -fabricated metal roof curb shall be for flat or sloped roof as shown on Drawings. F. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Fans - a. Greenheck, GB - only b. Marshall Grease Extractor 2. Standard curbs - a. Greenheck PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Anchor fan units securely to structure or curb. END OF SECTION 15869 EXHAUST FANS 15869 - 2 SECTION 15887 - DISPOSABLE FILTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install filters used in air handling units. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Section. 2. Filters other than in air handling units specified in Sections specifying equipment in which filters are installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR HANDLING UNIT FILTERS A. 2 inch thick, medium efficiency, disposable type pre -formed pleated design, having at least 4.5 sq ft of filtering media per sq ft of face area. B. Media shall be reinforced non woven cotton fabric, treated with adhesive similar to "Vyclad B" and continuously laminated to supporting steel wire grid conforming to configuration of pleats. i C. Media pack shall be sealed in a chipboard frame or beverage board. i D. Filters shall have rated average efficiency of 25 to 30% on ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76 and be capable of operating with variable face velocities up to 500 FPM without impairing efficiency. I- Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.30 inches w.g. at 500 FPM or 0.14 inch w.g. at 300 FPM. Filter shall be listed Class 2 by UL F. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Type 30/30 by Farr Cc 2. Mark 80 by Seiv-Aire 3. HC Type 40 by Envopleat 4. DP2-40 by Air Guard END OF SECTION 15887 DISPOSABLE FILTERS 15887-1 i SECTION 15891 - DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install above -grade ductwork and related items as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. 2. Section 15010 - Smoke testing PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTS A. Fabricate of zinc -coated lockforming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A 527-85, "Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality", with G 60 coating. n B. Use of aluminum, non-metallic, or round ducts is permitted only when shown on plans -- C. Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork shall he fabricated in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Dud i Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and NFPA 96. a. Construct of 16 gage, carbon steel or 18 gage stainless steel, using continuous external welded joints. 7-02 DUCT JOINTS A. Duds with sides up to and including 36 inches shall be fabricated using SMACNA _joints. B. Dud sizes over 36 inches shall be fabricated using SMACNA T-24 flange joints or pre -fabricated systems as follows - 1. Duds with sides over 36 inches to 48 inches - a. Transverse dud joint system by Ductmate/25, Nexus, or WDCI (Lite) (SMACNA "E" or "G" Type connection). b. Approved Manufacturers - DUCTWORK 15891 - 1 1) Ductmate Industries Inc,10760 Bay Meadows Drive, Sandy, UT 84092 (801) 571-5308 Stockton, CA (800) 344-3270 Pittsburgh, PA (800) 245-3188 2) Nexus, Exanno Corp, P O Box 729, Buffalo, NY 14206 (716) 849-0545 3) VVDCI, P 0 Box tts ur _,PA_15236—(800)-248-2355 2. Duds 48 inches & larger - a. Dudmate/35,Nexus; or WDCI (Heavy) (SMACNA "P" Type connection). b. Approved Manufacturers - 1) Ductmate Industries Inc, 10760 Bay Meadows Drive, Sandy, UT 84092 (801) 571-5308 Stockton, CA (800) 344-3270 Pittsburgh, PA (800) 245-3188 2) Nexus, Exanno Corp, P O Box 729, Buffalo, NY 14206 (716) 849-0545 3) WDCI, P O Box 10868, Pittsburgh, PA 15236 (800) 248-2355. 2.03 ACCESS DOORS IN CEILINGS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. This Section includes access doors for installation in the following types of construction: 1. Gypsum drywall- C. Provide fire -rated access doors. D. Submittals: 1. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. a. Product data in form of manufacturers technical data and installation instructions for each type of access door assembly, including setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage, devices. 1. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, finishes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. I? Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire project from one source from a single manufacturer. DUCTWORK 15891 - 2 F. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Wherever a fire -resistance classification is indicated, provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.'s "Building Materials Directory" for rating shown. 1. Provide UL label on each fire -rated access door. G. Size Variations: Obtain Engineers acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary slightly from sized indicated. Figure 24 x 24 during bid, if not size is given. I-L Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be built into other work for installation of access doors. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. I. Verification: Examine the plans for all fire and fire/smoke dampers and concealed equipment. Provide the sizes for required access doors and concealed equipment. The contractor is responsible for providing fire rated or non rated as need requires. J. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide access doors by one of the following: 1. J.L Industries 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Milcor, Inc. 4. Nystrom, Inc. 5. The Williams Brothers Corp. K General: Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts, and ready for installation. L Steel Access Doors and Frames: Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction unless otherwise indicated. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of support shown. M. Frames: Fabricate from 16-gage steel. 1. Fabricate frame with exposed flange nominal 1-inch wide around perimeter of frame for units installed in the following construction: a. Drywall finish. 2. For gypsum drywall, furnish perforated frames with drywall bead. N. Flush Panel Doors: Fabricate from not less than 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees. Finish with manufacturer's factory -applied prime paint. 1. For fire -rated units, provide manufacturees standard insulated flush panel/doors, with continuous piano hinge and self -closing mechanism. DUCTWORK 15891 - 3 O. Locking Devices: Furnish flush, screwdriver -operated ram locks of number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. Provide one cylinder lock per access door. Furnish 2 keys per lock. Key all locks alike, unless otherwise scheduled. P. Comply with m fa-ctu-reA—untradiong-for-fim llatian of acges�doors Q. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. R. Adjust hardware and panels -after -installation -for proper operation. S. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. 2.04 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. 30 oz closely woven UL approved glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. B. Fire retardant,waterproof, air -tight, resistant to acids and grease, andwithstand constant temperatures of 250 deg F. C. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Cain - N-100 2. Duro Dyne - MFN 3. Ventfabriks - Ventglas 2.05 CONCEALED CEILING DAMPER REGULATORS A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Cain 2. Duro Dyne 3. Metco Inc 4. Vent -Lock - #666 5. Young - #303 2.06 VOLUME DAMPERS A. In Main Ducts - 1. 16 gauge galvanized steel, opposed blade type with 3/8 inch pins and end bearings. Blades shall have 1/8 inch clearance all around. DUCTWORK 15891 - 4 2. Damper shall operate within acoustical dud liner. 3. Provide channel spacer equal to thickness of dud leer. 4. Approved Manufacturers - a. Air Balance - Model AC-2 b. Air Control Products - CD-OB C. American Warming - VC-2-AA d. Greenheck - VCD-1100 e. Vent Products - 5100 B. In Sheet Metal Branch Duds - 1. Extruded aluminum, opposed blade type. When in open position, shall not extend beyond damper frame. 2. Maximum blade length 12 inches. 3. Damper Regulator shall be concealed type with operation from bottom or with 90 degrees miter gear assembly from side. 4. Approved Manufacturers - a. Air Control Products - TCD-OB b. Air Guide - OB a Arrow - OBDAF-207 d. Reliable Metals - OBD-RO C. Tuttle & Barley - A7RDDM i Young - 820-AC C. Dampers above removable ceiling and in Mechanical Rooms shall have locking quadrant on bottom or side of duct. Otherwise, provide concealed ceiling damper regulator and cover plate. 2.07 BACKDRAFT DAMPER A. Backdraft blades shall he nonmetallic and shall be neoprene coated fiberglass. B. Stop shall be galvanized steel screen or expanded metal, lf2 inch mesh. C. Frame shall be galvanized steel or extruded aluminum alloy. DUCTWORK 15891 - 5 D. Approved Models & Manufacturers - 1. Air Control Products - FBD 2. American Warming - BD-15 - — 3. Ruskin-----NMS2 - — - -- 2.08 DUCT HANGERS A. 1" x 18 gauge galvanized steel straps or steel rods shall comply with UMC and SMACNA or on Drawings and detailed, and spaced not more than 8 feet apart. Do not use wire hangers. B. Attaching screws to wood trusses shall be 1-1/2 inch No. 10 round head wood screws. Nails not allowed. C. Attaching to steel structures shall be beam, strap or cup hangers. 2.09 DUCT SEALER A. Cain - Duct Butter or Butter Tak B. Design Polymerics - DP 1010 C. DSC - Stretch Coat D. Duro Dyne ,- S2 E. Hardcast - #601 Iron -Grip or Peel-N-Seal Tape F. Kingco - 15-325 G. Mon-Eco - 44-41 H. Trans -Continental Equipment Co - Multipurpose Duct Sealant I. United - Sheet Metal duct -sealer PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Ducts - 1. Straight and smooth on inside with joints neatly finished unless otherwise directed. 2. Duct panels through 48 inch dimension having acoustic duct liner need not be crossbroken or beaded. DUCTWORK 15891- 6 3. Crossbreak unlined duds and dud panels larger than 48 inch or bead 12 inches on center. 4. Securely anchor duds to building structure with specified dud hangers attached with screws or C-clamps. 5. Brace and install duds so they shall be free of vibration under all conditions of operation. 6. Duds shall not bear on top of structural members. 7. Make dud take -offs to branches, registers, grilles, and diffusers as detailed on Drawings. 8. Ducts shall be large enough to accommodate inside acoustic dud liner. Dimensions shown on Drawings are net clear inside dimensions after dud liner has been installed ' I 9. Properly flash where duds protrude above roof. 10. Install internal ends of slip joints in direction of flow. Make joints air tight using specified dud sealer. 11. Cover horizontal and longitudinal joints on exterior duds with two layers of Hardcast tape installed with Hardcast HC-20 adhesive according to Manufacturer's recommendations. 12. Paint ductwork visible through registers, grilles, and diffusers flat black. B. Each access door shall have a label with letters no less than 1J2 inch in height reading "Fire Damper". C. Install flexible inlet and outlet duct connections to each furnace, fan, fan coil unit, and air handling unit. C. Install concealed ceiling damper regulators. 1. Paint cover plates to match ceding tile. 2. Damper regulators will not be required for dampers located directly above removable ceilings or in Mechanical Rooms. D. Provide each take -off with an adjustable volume damper to balance that branch. 1. Anchor dampers securely to dud. 2. Install dampers in main duds within insulation. 3. Dampers in branch duds shall fit against sheet metal walls, bottom and top of dud, and be securely fastened Cut dud liner to allow damper to fit against sheet metal. 4. Where concealed ceiling damper regulators are installed, provide a cover plate. E Install grilles, registers, and diffusers. Level floor registers and anchor securely into floor. F. Air Turns - �I DUCTWORK 15891 - 7 1. Permanently installed, consisting of single thickness curved metal blades or vanes arranged to permit air to make abrupt turn without appreciable turbulence, in 90 degree elbows of above ground supply and return ductwork. 2. 4-1/2 inch wide minimum vane rail. Do not use junior vane rails. 30. Quiet —and cc from vwbratiau when syste-is-fiFoperatia G. Dirty Filter Manometer or Magnehelic Gauge - 1. Install on each air -handling -unit housing adjacent to filters. 2. Provide pressure sensing tips with connecting tubing on each side of filter. 3. Provide required oil for manometer. R Install motorized dampers. I. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust duds at base of vertical risers with provisions of dean out. Use stainless steel for ductwork exposed to view and stainless steel or carbon steel for duds where concealed. END OF SECTION 15891 DUCTWORK 15891 - 8 SECTION 15892 - NON METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install supply air branch duct runouts to diffusers as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. 2. Section 15 891 - Volume dampers and sheet metal duds PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTS A. Formable, flexible, circular duct which shall retain its cross-section, shape, rigidity, and shall not restrict air flow after bending. B. Nominal 1-1/2 inches thick, 3/4 lb/cu ft density fiberglass insulation (R = 4.2) with air -tight, polyethylene or polyester core, sheathed in metaled seamless foil vapor barrier jacket factory installed over flexible assembly, and have a permiable rating of .08 min. C. Assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet Class I requirement of NFPA 90A and be UL 181 rated, with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or under. 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. ANCO-FLEX B. Flex -Aire - PF/UPC C. Flexible Air Movers Inc D. Thermaflex E. Codywest - Type NIL-M F. Flex Master - Type 8M PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install dud in fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using six foot maximum lengths. NON METAL DUCTWORK 15892 - 1 B. Make duct connections by coating exterior of dud collar for 3 inches with dud sealer and securing dud in place over sheet metal collar with 112 inch wide metal cinch bands and sheet metal screws. END OF SECTION 15892 NON METAL DUCTWORK 15892 - 2 SECTION 15896 - DUCT LINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install, as described in Contract Documents, acoustical lining of - a. Above ground metal ductwork including, supply air, and return air. Combustion air duds are not included. b. Elbows, fittings, and diffuser drops. 2. Furnish and install lining in concrete underfloor boxes. B. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. 2. Section 15 290 - External thermal dud insulation. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Dud dimensions shown on Drawings are for free area inside insulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT LINER A. One inch thick, 1-1R lb density fiberglass. B. Approved Manufacturers - 1. CSG - Ultralite 2. Knauf - Type M 3. Manville - Lina-Coustic 4. Owen Coming Fiberglas - Aeroflex 2.02 ADHESIVE A. Water Base Type - 1. Cain - Hydrotak :I U DUCT LINING 15896 - 1 ;i �1J iI 2. Duro Dyne - WSA 3. Kingoo - 10-568 4. Miracle - PF-101 S. Mon-Eco - =:-6 - - -- — - 6. Techno Adhesive - 133 B. Solvent Base (non-flammable) Type - 1. Cain - Safetak 2. Duro Dyne - FPG 3. Kingoo - 15-137 4. Mirada - PF-91 5. Mon-Eco - 22-24 6. Techno Adhesive - 'Non-Flam' 106 C. Solvent Base (flammable) Type - 1. Cain - HV200 2. Duro Dyne - MPG 3. Kingoo - 15-146 4. Miracle - PF-96 5. Mon-Eco - 22-22 6. TechnoAdhesive - 'Flammable' 106 2.03 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A Approved Manufacturers - 1. AGM Industries Inc - "DynaPoint" Series DD-9 pin 2. Cain , 3. Duro Dyne 4. Omark dished head "Insul-Pins" DUCT LINING 15896 - 2 5. Grip nails may be used if each nail is installed by "Grip Nail Air Hammer" or by "Automatic Fastener Equipment" in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in supply and return ductwork the first ten feet to reduce fan sound noise. A. Install mat finish surface on air stream side. Secure insulation to cleaned sheet metal dud with continuous 100% coat of adhesive and with 3/4 inch long mechanical fasteners 12 inches on center maximum unless detailed otherwise on Drawings. Pin all dud liner. B. Accurately cut liner and thoroughly coat ends with adhesive. Butt joints tightly. Top and bottom sections of insulation shall overlap sides. If liner is all one piece, folded corners shall be tight against metal. Ends shall butt tightly together. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. If insulation is installed without longitudinal and end joints butted together, installation will be rejected and work removed and replaced with work that conforms to this Specification. 3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING A. Keep dud liner dean and free from dust. At completion of project, vacuum dud liner if it is dirty or dusty. END OF SECTION 15896 DUCT LINING 15896 - 3 SECTION 15911 - FIRE AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Furnish and install fire dampers at penetrations of fire rated walls, floors, & ceilings, at duds, registers, grilles, or louvers as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. Dampers shall conform to UL and NFPA requirements and bear UL label. 2. Dampers shall be approved by State Fire Authorities where so required. 3. Fire damper installation shall conform to details shown in SMACNA Fire Damper Guide and as required by local codes. 1.03 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials 1. Leave six fusible links of each rating type used on Project with Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Fire Dampers 1. At Walls & Floors - Type "B" with 165 deg F link unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Ceilings - a. Radiation type ceiling fire damper with 165 deg F link unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. Approved Manufacturers - 1) Air Balance Inc FIRE AND 15911 - 1 DAMPERS 2) Cesco 3) Pottorff 4) Safe Air Inc 5) IIltra a e B. Combination Smoke & Fire Dampers - One at wall, 2 ceding. - a. Folding blade type. b. Motorized damper to operate at 115V and draw 0.2 amps maximum. C. Damper shall close on - 1) Signal from smoke detectors 2) Power failure 3) Failure of fusible link. d. Minimum of 10 ga galvanized steel sleeve with 18 ga closure and damper blades. Blades shall fold into compact package completely out of air stream. C. Furnish 165 deg F UL listed fusible link. L Damper serviceable from access door located on either side of damper. g. Approved Manufacturers - 1) Ruskin 2) Equal by Prefco or Pottorff 2.02 ACCESS DOORS IN CEILINGS A Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and - Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. This Section includes access doors for installation in the following types of construction: 1. Gypsum drywall. ' C. Provide fire -rated access doors. FIRE AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS 15911 - 2 D. Submittals: 1. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. a. Product data in form of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of access door assembly, including setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage, devices. 1. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details, finishes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. Ii Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire project from one source from a single manufacturer. F. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Wherever a fire -resistance classification is indicated, provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in Underwriters Laboratories, Ines "Building Materials Directory" for rating shown. 1. Provide UL label on each fire -rated access door. G. Size Variations: Obtain Engineer's acceptance of manufacturers standard size units, which may vary slightly from sized indicated. Figure 24 a 24 during bid, if not size is given. H. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be built into otherwork for installation of access doors. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. I. Verification: Examine the plans for all fire and fire/smoke dampers and concealed equipment. Provide the sizes for required access doors and concealed equipment. Ile contractor is responsible for providing fire rated or non rated as need requires. J. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide access doors by one of the following- 1. J.L Industries 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Milcor, Inc. 4. Nystrom, Inc. 5. The Williams Brothers Corp. K. General: Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts, and ready for installation. L Steel Access Doors and Frames: Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction unless otherwise indicated Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of support shown. FIRE AND FIREISMOKE DAMPERS 15911 - 3 M. Frames: Fabricate from 16-gaga steel. 1. Fabricate frame with exposed flange nominal 1-inch wide around perimeter of frame for units installed in the following construction: a. Drywall finish. 2. For gypsum drywall, famish perforated frames with drywall bead. N. Flush Panel Doors: Fabricate from not less than 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge iet to open 175 degrees Finish with manufacturer's factory -applied prime paint. 1. For fire -rated units, provide manufacturers standard insulated flush panel/doom with continuous piano hinge and self -closing mechanism. O. Locking Devices: Famish flush, screwdriver -operated cam locks of number required to hold door in Bush, smooth plane when closed 1. Provide one cylinder lock per access door. Famish 2 keys per lock. Key all locks alike, unless otherwise scheduled P. Comply with manufacturefs instructions for installation of access doors. Q. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. R. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. - I S. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged _ END OF SECTION 15911 FIRE AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS 15911 - 4 1 SECTION 15940 - AIR OUTLETS & INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install wall supply registers, transfer grilles, return air grilles, soffit grilles, caffimg diffusers, louvers connected to ductwork, and registers as described in Contract Documents. 2. Quality of grilles installed in metal doors. B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section - 1. Door grffies for wood doors. C. Related Sections - 1. General Conditions, Division 01, and Section 15010 apply to this Section. 2. Division 06 - Installation of door grilles for wood doors. 3. Division 08 - Furnishing and installing of grilles in metal doors. 1.02 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials - 1. Leave tool for removing core of each different type of grille for building custodian. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPLY GRILLES & REGISTERS A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Metalaire - only 2.02 CEILING RETURN & TRANSFER GRILLES A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Metalaire - only 2.03 HIGH SIDE WALL RETURN GRILLES A. Approved Manufacturers - AIR INLETS & OUTLETS 15940 - 1 1. Metalaire - only 2.04 SOFFIT GRILLES A. Approved Manufacturers - Z. AVAW, Uv - uwy 2.05 CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Approved Manufacturers - 1. Metalaire - only PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Anchor securely into openings. END OF SECTION 15940 AIR INLETS & OUTLETS 15940 - 2 SECTION 15970 - CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To - 1. Furnish and install temperature control system as described in the Contract Documents M4 and M-5. 1.02 SUMBITTAIS A. Shop Drawings - 1. Provide eight (8) copies of shop drawing submittal data for review. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Contact Trane National accounts (800) 872-6330 - John Hofmann, for complete control system equipment package. END OF SECTION 15970 CONTROL SYSTEMS 15970-1 I INDEX PAGE SECTION 16001 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS .............................. 1 PART 1- GENERAL....................................................... 1 .. RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................ 1 SCOPE OF WORK .................................................. 1 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ............ 2 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ............... 2 LAW AND REGULATION .............. 2 OFFICLAI, AGENT AND EMPLOYEES OF THE OWNER, NOT PERSONALLY LIABLE ........................................ 2 SUBLETTING AND SUBCONTRACTING ............................... 2 EQUIPMENT UNIT COST SUBMISSION .........' ....................... 2 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ................................... 3 DEMOLITION, PATCH AND REPAIR .................................. 3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFIL.L...................................... 4 PROGRESS AND COORDINATION OF WORK .......................... 4 COORDINATION WITH CEILING AND MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTORS .......................................... 5 WIRING DIAGRAMS ................................................ 5 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS .................................. 6 SUBMTTTAIS...................................................... 6 RECORD DRAWINGS ............................................... 8 CLEAN -UP ........................................................ 9 POWER OUTAGE .................................................. 9 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS ................ . ... . . . . . 9 CONCRETE BASES ................................................. 9 CONCRETE AND ASPHALT .......................................... 9 ELECTRICAL -MECHANICAL COORDINATION ........................ 10 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM ............................... 10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS ................................................... 10 GENERAL....................................................... 10 SUBSTITUTIONS AND BIDDING ..................................... 11 INCENTIVE BIDS AND UNIT PRICES ................................. 11 SPARE PARTS.........................................12 PART 3 - EXECUTION .................................................... 12 COMPLETION OF WORK AND TESTING .............................. 13 FINAL REVIEW ................................................... 13 PROJECT FINALIZATION AND START-UP ............................ 14 SECTION 16051 - ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION REPORT ............................. 1 SECTION 16070 - EL.ECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT ....................... 1 PART 1 - GENERAL........................................................ 1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK....................I ........................ EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS I QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... 2 ELECTRICAL SERVICE SYSTEM ..................................... 2 SERVICE CONNECTIONS ............................................ 2 Ij MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ................................. 2 tJ `I i+ SECTION 16110 - CONDUIT RACEWAYS ............................................ PART 1 - GENERAL........................................................ DESCRIPTION OF WORK .................. ...................... . QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. - SUBMITTALS...................................................... PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... `+ METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING ..................................... NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS ............................... PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS ......................... U i NORMAL INSTALLATIONS .......................................... FIRE PENETRATION SEALS ......................................... EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL....................................... 7 � ROOF FLASHING .................................................. PATCHING AND REPAIR ........................................... �I SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ...................................... PART 1- GENERAL....................................................... DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................ ti QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. SUBMITTALS...................................................... PART 2 - PRODUCTS ........................... . COPPER CONDUCTORS (600V AND LESS) ............................ . '+ CONNECTING BLOCKS ............................................. PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... INSTALLATION.................................................... SECTION 16135 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS ............................... PART 1- GENERAL....................................................... DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................. QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. SUBMITTALS...................................................... PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... FABRICATED MATERIALS .......................................... PART 3 - EXECUTION ................................................. . INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS ................ SECTION 16136 - SUPPORTING DEVICES & RACEWAYS .............................. PART 1 - GENERAL....................................................... DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................ QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES & RACEWAYS ............... PART 3 - EXECUTION...................................................... INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES & RACEWAYS ............... BURIED CONDUIT ................................................. SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES ............................................... PART 1 -GENERAL ..................................................... . DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................ 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. C SUBMITTALS...................................................... PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES ..................................... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 .0 k CORDS CAPS AND CONNECTORS .................................... MOTION DETECTORS .............................................. INCANDESCENT LAMP DIMMERS .................................... FLUORESCENT LAMP DIMMERS ..................................... WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES ...................................... PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... lm PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES ................... + N GROUNDING...................................................... TESTING.......................................................... a' SECTION 16155 - MOTOR STARTERS .............................................. PART 1 - GENERAL....................................................... DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................ ......................... QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. SUBMITTALS...................................................... PART 2 — PRODUCT'S...................................................... !t MOTOR STARTERS ................................................ UU PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS ............................... r „ ADJUST AND CLEAN ............................................... FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ......................................... SECTION 16170 - MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS .............................. PART 1 — GENERAL ..................... . . DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................ QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. SUBMITTALS ...................................................... PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .................................... FABRICATED SWITCHES ............................................ PART 3 — EXECUTION .................. ....... .... . INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES ..... . SECTION 16181 — TRANSFORMERS ................................................ PART 1 - GENERAL....................................................... DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................ QUALITY ASSURANCE ........... ' Il SUBMITTALS...................................................... ' PART 2 — PRODUCTS....................................................... POWER/DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS ............................. ' + PART 3 — EXECUTION . INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS ................................. SECTION 16426 — ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS ........., PART 1 — GENERAL....................................................... DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................. QUALITY ASSURANCE...................................................... SUBMITTALS PART 2 —PRODUCTS...................................................... MAIN DISCONNECT AND SWITCHBOARD ............................. PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... IDENTIFICATION.................................................. 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 I I I SECTION 16452 - GROUNDING ................................................... 1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................. 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. 1 SUBMITTALS...................................................... 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... 2 GROUNDING...................................................... 2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS ..................................... 2 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING CONDUCTORS ............................ 2 GROUND RODS ................................................... 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... 2 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING SYSTEMS ............................ 2 SECTION 16470 - ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS..................................... PART 1 - GENERAL....................................................... DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................ QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. SUBMITTALS...................................................... PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................. . PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES ............................ PART 1 - GENERAL....................................................... DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................ QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. SUBMITTALS...................................................... PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ................................. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER ..................................... CIRCUIT BREAKERS ............................................... FUSIBLE SWITCHES ................................................ ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER ..................................... FUSES............................................................ PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES ............. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ......................................... . SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING .................... PART 1- GENERAL....................................................... DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................ QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. SUBMITTALS...................................................... PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .................................... FLUORESCENT AND HID BALLASTS .................................. INCANDESCENT AND FLUORESCENT LAMPS .......................... HIDLAMPS ........................................................ INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES ...................... PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES ............................. SITE LIGHTING .................................................... FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ......................................... SECTION 16660 - SEISMIC BRACING ............................................... PART 1- GENERAL ....................................................... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 5 `b SCOPE OF WORK .................................................. 1 CODES - REGULATIONS ............................................ 1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ................................... 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. 2 GUARANTEE...................................................... 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... 2 ISOLATED EQUIPMENT ............................................ 2 NON -ISOLATED EQUIPMENT, RACEWAYS, ETC . ....................... 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... 3 —f SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS ........................................... 3 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL AND REVIEW ........................... 3 SECTION 16700 - 16800 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS ....................................... 1 ij , PART 1 - GENERAL....................................................... 1 SECTION 16721 - AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS ............... 1 PART 1 - GENERAL....................................................... 1 ` SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE SYSTEM ............................................ 1 -• PART 1 - GENERAL....................................................... 1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ............................................ 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... 1 TELEPHONE LINE PROTECTOR ..................................... 1 r PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... 1 INSTALLATION OF TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM ................... 1 SECTION 16741 - TELEVISION ANTENNA SYSTEMS - ROOF ANTENNA ................. 1 PART 1 - GENERAL....................................................... 1 SCOPE............................................................ 1 RELATED WORK .................................................. 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................. 1 CODES AND STANDARDS ..........................................: 1 SUBMITTALS...................................................... 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATE .............................. 2 PRODUCT, DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING ...................... 2 PROJECT SITE CONDITION ......................................... 2 CABLE........................................................... 2 GUARANTEE...................................................... 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... 2 EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE ........................................ 2 APPROVED EQUIPMENT ............................................ 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION..................................................... 3 INSTALLATION.................................................... 3 TESTS............................................................ 4 -> SECTION 16775 - SOUND SYSTEM .................................................. 1 PART1-GENERAL 1 SCOPE............................................................ 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS...................................................... 1 6 AMPLIFIER....................................................... 1 BACKBOX AND SUPPORT BRIDGE ................................... 1 �(, FUEL CENTERS................................................................ 1 0 �1. 2 SECTION 16001 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1-GENERAL 5 RELATED DOCUMENTS 6 7 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 8 Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 9 10 This is Division 16 and each division recorded hereafter makes reference to the electrical systems, 11 equipment, materials, connections, eta, and apply to all the work making reference and/or titled 12 electrical. ray 13 v14 Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and other applicable documents are considered a part of the 15 electrical documents insofar as they apply as if referred to in full. 16 17 SCOPE OF WORK 18 19 The scope of this project is to construct a complete electrical system for this structure. Each area 20 shall be developed electrically to give proper illumination, power utilization, auxiliary networks, eta 21 so that when the project is complete all systems integrate into a total electrical network making the 22 building a usable facility. 23 24 The auxiliary systems: Fire Alarm, Television, Sound System, Security, etc., cover the entire indicated 25 facility and must function as a unit to meet the needs of the occupants. Thence, the equipment 26 supplier, the installer, and the constructor shall work toward that end: Anything short of this objective ' 27 will not meet the intent of the project, Le., each system shall be complete and effectively perform the 28 function for which it was designed. 29 30 Extent of electrical work is indicated on drawings and/or specified in Division 16 sections of the i 31 specification. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, supervision and service necessary for a complete ' 32 electrical system. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following items: _ 33 34 ITEM SECTION r 35 Electrical Connections for Equipment 16070 Panelboards 16470 36 Conduit Raceways 16110 Overcurrent Protective Devices 16475 37 Raceway Systems 16111 Interior and Exterior Building ' 38 Conductors and Cables 16120Lighting 16510 39 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 16135 Seismic Bracing 16660 40 Supporting Devices 16136 ! u 41 Wiring Devices 16140 AUXILIARY SYSTEM SECTION 42 Motor Starters 16155 Auxiliary Systems 1670MM 43 Motor and Circuit Disconnects 16170 Telephone 16740 f 44 Transformers 16181 Television Antenna Systems 16780 45 Power Switchboards 16426 Sound System 16770 46 Grounding 16452 47 48 Use of standard industry symbols together with the special symbols, notes, and instructions indicated 49 on the drawings describe the work, materials, apparatus and systems required as a portion of 50 this work. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 1 EXAMINATION OF THE SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2 3 Each bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint himself with the conditions 4 relating to the construction and labor so that he understands the facilities, difficulties, and restriction 5 attending the execution of the work under the contract. Bidders shall thoroughly examine and be 6 familiar-mith_thu-specifications. The falure or omissio"fany_bidder-to�receive-or_examineany r-, 7 contract documents, form, instrument, addendum or other document or to visit the site and acquaint 8 himself with conditions there existing shall in no way relieve any bidder from obligations with respect 9 to his bid or to the contract. The submission of a bid shall be taken as prima facie evidence of 10 compliance with this section. 11 12 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 13 14 Any person contemplating submitting a bid shall familiarize himself with the drawings, specifications 15 and project site. If for any reason, the bidder of the proposed contract, is in doubt as to the true 16 meaning of any part of the drawings, specifications, or other contract documents, or finds 17 discrepancies in, or omissions from, the drawings and specifications he shall submit a written request 18 for an interpretation, correction and/or clarification to Architect/Engineer. The person submitting the 19 request shall be responsible for its prompt delivery. Any interpretation or correction of the contract 20 documents shall be made only by addenda duly issued. No oral interpretation of any provision in the 21 contract documents will be made to any bidder. 22 23 After acceptance of the contract, the Contractor shall meet the intent, purpose and function of the 24 contract documents. Any costs of materials, labor and equipment arising therefrom, to make each 25 system complete and operable, is the responsibility of the Contractor. 26 27 LAW AND REGULATION 28 29 The bidder's attention is directed to the fact of all applicable laws, ordinances and rules and 30 regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to contract 31 throughout, and they shall be deemed to be included in the contract of the same as through here 32 written out in full. 33 34 OFFICIAL. AGENT AND EMPLOYEES OF THE OWNER NOT PERSONALLY LIABLE 35 36 It is agreed, by and between the parties hereto that in no event shall any official, officer, employee, 37 or agent of the Owner in any way be personally liable or responsible for any covenant or agreement 38 herein contained whether expressed or implied, nor for any statement, representation or warranty 39 made herein or in any connection with this agreement. 40 41 SUBLETTING AND SUBCONTRACTING 42 43 This Bidder is responsible for the work of this Contract and, as such, shall abide by the Subletting and 44 Subcontracting Fair Practices Act as set forth and outlined in the General Conditions, Designation 45 of Subcontractors. 46 47 EQUIPMENT UNIT COST SUBMISSION 48 49 The successful Contractor (Electrical) shall within 72-hrs after the bid, deliver by telecopy to the 50 Architect and Engineer the unit price to add or delete any or all of the major electrical components ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 2 7• 1 used in this project. Namely, light futures, light poles, main and branch panels, motor starters, 2 devices, auxiliary systems, etc. Failure to comply with this request may disqualify all products, except y 3 the first named manufacturer in schedules and/or spec and empower the Engineer to determine the 4 fair value for the fixture or equipment and installation changes, without further input from the 5 contractor or installer. 7 QUALITY ASSURANCE t 8 9 Comply with the requirements of State and Local Ordinances. If a conflict occurs between these 10 requirements and the contract documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. The ' 11 contractor accepts this responsibility upon submitting his bid, and no extra charge will be allowed after 12 the contract is awarded. This shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with l 13 any requirements of the contract documents which may be in excess of the aforementioned 14 requirements, and not contrary to same. 4` 15 16 Obtain all permits, inspections, etc. required by authority having jurisdiction. Include all fees in bid. 17 Furnish a certificate of approval to the Owner's Representative from the Inspection Authority at 18 completion of the work. 19 1 }, 20 Employ only qualified craftsmen with at least three years of experience (in power equipment, conduit 21 work, high voltage equipment, etc.). Workmanship shall he neat, have a good mechanical appearance 22 and conform to best electrical construction practices. Provide a competent superintendent to direct 23 the work at all times. Any person found incompetent shall be discharged from the project and 24 replaced by satisfactory personnel. 25 26 Contractor shall have a current state contracting license applicable to type of work to be performed =9 27 under this contract. 28 ' 29 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 30 f 31 All materials and equipment furnished and installed shall be fast quality, new and meet the standards 32 of NEMA, IPCEA, IS, UL, NFPA, UBC, OSHA, NEC, and shall bear their label wherever standards 33 have been established and label service is available. Where materials and equipment are speed by s 34 manufacturer's name, the type and quality- required is thereby denoted. The Architect shall be 35 afforded every facility deemed necessary to inspect and examine the materials and apparatus being 36 installed to prove their quality, skill and competency of workmanship. 37 38 DEMOLITION, PATCH AND REPAIR - 39 40 The Contractor is responsible for all block -outs, demolition, patching and repair of all finished interior 41 surfaces pertaining to the installation of this particular phase of work. All surfaces shall be finished 42 (painted, etc) to match the adjacent materials, finished and color. 43 44 When conduit passes through a ceiling and/or floor, block -out as required and/or core -drill do not 45 break out with a hammer of any type. The hole shall not be larger than one-half (1/2") inch more 46 than the diameter of the conduit. 47 48 When conduit is indicated to be installed below an existing concrete stab, cot the slab with a diamond 49 saw and/oncutting tool. Do not just rip up the surface unless the entire section is removed. 50 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS r ` 16001 - 3 1 When conduit is to be installed below an asphalt, concrete, lawn, etc The surface shall be cut, not 2 ripped up, with a back -hoe or other equipment, but shall be mechanically cut then removed. 3 4 Seal around all electrical equipment penetrating outside walls, roofs, unheated spaced, air plenums, 5 cold boxes, etc., with Dow Coming Silicone RTV foam. 6 _ 7 The method of patching and repair should follow good construction practices and all finished surfaces 8 shall match materials, and finish (surface texture and finish - paint, etc) wherein the demolition 9 occurred. 10 11 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 12 13 Division 16 and the Electrical Contractor is responsible for all excavation and backfill related to the 14 installation of the electrical system. All work shall comply with the conditions stated herein and those 15 noted in the Architectural Section under Earthwork. 16 17 When conduit is indicated to be installed below an existing concrete slab, cut the slab with a diamond 18 saw and/or cutting tool. Do not just rip up the surface unless the entire section is removed. 19 20 When conduit is to be installed below an asphalt, concrete, lawn, etc. the surface shall be cut, not 21 ripped up, with a back -hoe or other equipment, but shall be mechanically cut then removed. 22 23 Backfill: The Contractor shall backfill the excavated areas with the material removed provide it does 24 not contain rocks larger than OS -inch in diameter. If the excavated material is larger than indicated 25 the excavated area shall be filled with sand. 26 27 Backfill materials shall be put in place in 4-inch lifts and compacted to 98% of the maximum dry - 28 density of ASTM 698 over the entire area of the fill. 29 30 After the backfill is complete the finished surface shall match the adjacent surfaces, depth, quality 31 finish, etc. (asphalt, concrete, grass, etc.). 32 33 PROGRESS AND COORDINATION OF WORK 34 35 The electrical work shall be laid out in advance of construction to eliminate unnecessary cutting, 36 dulling, channeling, etc Where such cutting and dulling, or channeling becomes necessary for proper 37 installation perform with care, use skilled mechanics of the trades involved, repair damage to budding 38 and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. Cutting work of other trades shall be done only 39 with the consent to the General Contractor. Cutting of structural members shall be done only with 40 the approval of the Architect. 41 42 Cooperate with other trades to coordinate locations of electrical outlets and apparatus. 43 44 Perform for other trades, the electrical wiring and connections for all devices or apparatus where not 45 specified herein or indicated on the drawings. Consult the Architectural and Mechanical drawings to 46 avoid the location of switches, outlets and other equipment from being hidden behind doors, cabinets, 47 counters, heating equipment, etc Buried electrical devices and/or connections shall be relocated as 48 directed, at no additional cost to the Owner. 49 50 Where conduit, outlets or apparatus is to be cast in concrete or encased, it must be located and 51 secured by a journeyman or foreman present at the point of installation. He shall check the locations ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 4 r� I 2 3 4 5 6 7 of the electrical items before and after the concrete and masonry installation and shall relocate displaced items. No changes shall be made in the design or location of apparatus unless specifically approved in writing. COORDINATION WITH CEILING AND MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTORS 8 _ 9 Meet at least twice with the Ceding Contractor. The first meeting shall accomplish coordination of 10 all ceiling types with the specified light fixtures. The second meeting shall be held at the project site 11 prior to installing the ceiling to coordinate the fixture layout in each area, and to determine if the 12 depth will 13 allow the installation of the Fixture. If a conflict occurs with the layout or depth, the Engineer shall ! 14 be contacted immediately so the conditions can be adjusted. A letter confirming the second meeting 15 shall be sent to the Engineer with a copy to the Architect. 16 17 Mee• at least once with the Mechanical Contractor prior to fabrication and installation of the 18 ductwork to coordinate the depth and location of light fixtures and ductwork in all areas. All conflicts 19 must be resolved before light fixtures are released for shipment. A letter confirming this meeting shall 20 be sent to the Engineer with a copy to the Architect. n 21 22 WIRING DIAGRAMS 23 ` 24 As soon as possible after the contract to proceed is signed, one print of the control diagrams shown 25 on the contract drawings shall be developed (utilize the information on the contract documents) and 26 Control Subcontractors, showing all necessary connections required for the equipment and devices ' 27 proposed for installation. These prints shall be reviewed and appro ed by the Mechanical; Electrical, 28 and Controls Subcontractor, and then submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. The prints `' 29 shall indicate all components that are to be wired into the control power circuit by the Electrical N 30 Subcontractor, with all terminals for external connections of the components identified and labeled 31 to correspond to the manufacturer's designations. Internal or factory installed wiring or package -type 32 components need not be shown. The shop drawings for the Control System to by installed by the ` 33 Controls Subcontractor shall be prepared as a separate and complete submittal and need not be 34 entirely repeated on the indicated prints except for the related electric connections. Color coding 35 designations shall be indicated the control power circuit wiring to be installed in the field by the 36 Electrical Subcontractor. - 37 38 Revised Drawin¢s: After the Architect has approved the submitted copy of the control diagrams, the 39 contract drawings will be revised and the Contractor will be issued ten revised prints. The revised 40 control diagrams shall be certified in writing as being acceptable to the Mechanical Design Engineer, 41 Electrical Design Engineer, Mechanical Contractor, Electrical Contractor, and the Controls 42 Contractor. The contract drawings will be revised by one of the two following procedures: 43 I44 1. If the revisions to the controls diagrams shown on the contract drawings are minor in the 45 opinion of the Architect, the contract drawings will be revised and re -issued by and at the 46 expense of the Architect. 47 48 2. If the revisions to the control diagrams shown on the contract drawings are ruled major in 49 the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, the Prime Contractor shall prepare and submit a 50 complete set of reproducible drawings of the control diagrams proposed for installation. 1 j 51 These drawings shall be prepared on the same size sheets as the contract drawings and shall { ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS C 16001 - 5 ,ti 1 follow the same general format and quality of drafting as the contract drawings. After these 2 reproducible drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineers and 3 certified, the revised prints will be re -issued to the Contractor at the expense of the Design 4 Engineers. y 5 6 Changes During Construction: The complete resnonsb ty andmsts-fozchanges-to_the-approved 7 control diagrams during construction and the resultant changes to the installation requirements not 8 covered by contract change orders, shall be assigned to the respective section of these specifications 9 under which the equipment is furnished. 10 11 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 12 13 Labeling and Engineering: 14 15 Any and all electrical control equipment shall be labeled with an engraved black Micarta with white 16 core labels, 1/16" thick shall be bolted on the interior and the exterior of branch panels (panel name 17 and voltage) and the exterior of disconnect switches, motor controls, major J-boxes (power and 18 auxiliary), push buttons, thermal switches, time switches and similar equipment. The labels shall have t 19 1/4" high engraved letters, such as 1-1/2 I-TP FAN, PANEL - A. All main panel circuits shall be 20 identified with Micarta labels. (RED MICARTA LABELS shall be used on emergency powered 21 equipment ) 22 23 The phase of each feeder conductor shall be color coded at each end in panels and junction boxes. 24 25 Engraved Micarta labels (same as paragraph one) for the main panel and each breaker in the 26 distribution panel. 27 p 28 Conduit shall be installed as diagramed on the plan. Any deviation shall be authorized in writing 29 prior to rough -in. 30 A plastic label, as noted above with the name and address of the Engineer - the profession indicated - 31 shall be bolted to the front of the Main Power Panel. The engraved letters in the name and address 32 shall be 1/2" and 1/4" high, respectively. 33 34 Write with a felt tip pen that contains permanent ink, on the inside of each device box and on the 35 back of every plate, the circuit to which the device is connected. Example: Circuit "A-1". 36 37 Three power riser diagrams sealed in plexiglass and trimmed with a metal frame shall be provided and 38 installed at Main Panel M in the switch gear room (locate as directed) and at Panels MM and MB. 39 40 Engraving device plates - see WIRING DEVICES. 41 42 All switch banks shall have each switch identified as to its function with micarta engraved adhesive 43 backed plate. 44 `> 45 SUBMITTALS 46 47 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA: After the contract is awarded, but prior to 48 manufacture or installation of any equipment, prepare complete Shop Drawings and Brochures for 49 materials and equipment as required by each section of this specification. Submit complete, bound 50 submittal in a looseleaf binder large enough for all items (8 copies) to Architect. Prior to submission _ 51 of the Shop Drawings and Project Data, review and certify that they are in compliance with the ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 6 1 Contract Documents. Verify all dimensional information to insure proper clearance for installation 2 of equipment. Check all materials and equipment after arrival on the job site and verify compliance 3 with the Contract Documents. i F 4 5 A minimum period of two weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required each time a Shop 6 Drawing and/or Brochure is submitted or resubmitted for review. This period shall be considered by 7 the Contractor when scheduling submittal data. 8 9 Review of Shop Drawings and Brochures shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for 10 dimensions and/or errors that may be contained therein, or deviations from the Contract Document's 11 requirements. It shall be clearly understood that the noting of some errors but overlooking others 12 does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information 13 contained in the Shop Drawings and Brochures, the requirements of the Contract Documents shall 7' 14 govern and are not waived, or superceded in any way by the review of the Shop Drawings an +,k 15 Brochures. 16 17 Certifications shall be written or in the form of rubber stamp impressions as follows: a G 18 19 I hereby certify that this Shop Drawing and/or Brochure has been checked prior to submittal and that 4, 20 it complies in all respects with the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Specifications for this 21 Project. - 22 '23 (Name of Electrical Subcontractor) 24 25 Signed 26 `9 27 Position Date r 28 29 Observe the following rules when submitting Shop Drawings and Brochures. ` 30 31 1. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in the lower right hand corner, and each Brochure shall 32 indicate on the front cover the following: Title of the sheet or brochure, name and location 33 of the building, names of the Architect and Electrical Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, 34 Manufacturer, Supplier/Vendor, etc., date of submittal, and the date of correction. and 35 revision. Unless the above information is included, the submittal will be returned for 36 resubmittal. - e 37 J A 38 2. Shop Drawings shall be done in an easily legible scale and shall contain sufficient plans, 39 elevations, sections, and isometrics to clearly describe the equipment or apparatus, and its 40 location. Drawings shall be prepared by an Engineer/Draftsman skilled in this type of work. 41 Shop Drawings shall be drawn to at least 1/4"-1-0" scale. 42 43 3. Brochures to be submitted shall be published by the Manufacturers and shall contain 44 complete and detailed engineering and dimensional information. Brochures submitted shall 45 contain only information relevant to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished. - 46 The Contractor shall not submit catalogs which describe several different items in addition 47 to those items to be used, unless all irrelevant information is marked out, or unless relevant d 48 information is clearly marked. Brochures from each manufacturer shall be identified and 49 submitted separately. 50 y ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS �C 16001 - 7 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: Provide operating instructions and maintenance 2 data books for all equipment and materials furnished under this Division. 3 4 Submit four copies of operating and maintenance data books for review at least four weeks before 5 final review of the project. Assemble all data in a completely indexed volume or volumes and identify 6 the size, model, and features indicated for each item. 7 8 The binder (sized to the material) shall be a 2" slide lock unit (Wilson -Jones 133-367-44). The cover 9 shall be engraved with the job title in 1/2" high letters and the name and address of the Contractor 10 in 1/4" high letters. Provide the same information in 1/8" letters on the spine. 11 12 Include complete cleaning and servicing data compiled in clearly and easily understandable form. 13 Show serial numbers of each piece of equipment, complete list of replacement parts, motor ratings, 14 eta Each unit shall have its own individual sheet. (Example: If two items of equipment A and D 15 appear on the same sheet, an individual sheet shall be provided for each unit speed.) 16 17 Include the following information where applicable: 18 19 1. Identifying name and mark number. 20 2. Certified outline Drawings and Shop Drawings. 21 3. Parts lists. 22 4. Performance curves and data. 23 5. Wiring diagrams. 24 6. Manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions. 25 7. Vendor's name and address for each item. 26 27 RECORD DRAWINGS 28 29 Maintain at the job site, on a daily basis, at the job site, a complete set of "Record Drawings", 30 reflecting an accurate dimensional record of all buried or concealed work. Mark "Record Drawings" 31 to show the precise location of concealed work and equipment, including concealed or embedded 32 conduit and junction boxes and all changes and deviations in the work from that shown on the 33 Contract Documents. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor 34 to make changes in the layout or work without definite authorization for such changes. The "Record 35 Drawings" for daily recording shall consist of a set of blue line prints of the Contract Drawings. 36 37 Record dimensions clearly and accurately, delineating the work as installed; identify locations by at 38 least two dimensions to permanent reference points. 39 40 Certify the "Record Drawings" for correctness by placing and signing the following certifications on 41 the first sheet: 42 43 "CERTIFIED CORRECT (3/8" high letters) 44 , 45 By Date 46 (Name of General Contractor) 47 48 By Date 49 (Name of Electrical Contractor) - 50 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 8 ' 1 GUARAA`—EE: Ensure that electrical system installed under this contract is in proper working order 2 and in compliance with drawings, specifications and/or authorized changes. Without additional charge, 3 replace any work or materials which develop defects, except from ordinary wear and tear, within one 9 4 year from the date of substantial completion. Exception: Incandescent and fluorescent lamps shall 5 be guaranteed for a period of two months from the date of substantial completion. 6 7 CLEAN-UP 8 9 Clean up all equipment, conduit, fittings, packing cartons and other debris that is a direct result of 10 the installation of the work of this Division. 11 12 Clean fixtures, interiors and exteriors of all equipment, and raceways. Replace all filters in electrical 13 equipment upon request for Substantial Completion. 14 J 15 POWER OUTAGE 16 17 All power outages required for execution of this work shall occur during non-standard working hours 18 and/or at the convenience of the Owner. Include all costs or overtime work in the base bid. 19 -- 20 Submit written request at least 7 days in advance of scheduled outage and proceed with outage only 21 after receiving authorization from the Owner's Representative. 22 23 Keep all outages to an absolute minimum. 24 25 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS 26 27 Provide storage space for storage of materials and apparatus and assume complete responsibility for 28 all losses due to any cause whatsoever. In no case shall storage interfere with traffic conditions in any 29 public thoroughfare or constitute a hazard to persons in the vicinity. Protect completed work, work 30 underway, and apparatus against loss or damage. ` 31 32 CONCRETE BASES 33 ' 34 Unless otherwise noted, provide a 4" high concrete base for all main panels, motor control centers, 35 transformers, motor generators, etc. Extend base 4" beyond equipment or mounting rails on all sides 36 or as shown on the drawings. Coordinate the pad dimension with the equipment to be located 37 thereon. 38 39 Concrete bases shall be provided under Division-16. Coordinate size and location of all bases and 40 furnish all required anchor bolts, sleeves and templates as required to obtain a proper installation. 41 42 All concrete used on this project shall be 5-bag mix and/or as specified in the concrete section of the 43 Architectural Section. 44 45 CONCRETE AND ASPHALT 46 47 The Electrical Contractor shall provide the concrete and/or asphalt except as noted in the contract f 48 documents, to replace that removed through demolition. It shall match the existing as to type, quality _. 49 and thickness. 50 51 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 9 ELECTRICAL -MECHANICAL COORDINATION 3 General - All disconnect means, motor controllers, and all electrical controls, protective, and signal 4 devices for mechanical equipment as noted in Division 15 of these specifications shall be famished, 5 installed, wired, and connected under Division. 16 with the following exceptions. Pressure switches, 6 thermostats, solenoid valves, damper motors, and similar equipment will be supplied and installed 7 under the Mechanical Division for connection under this Divis+on. Connection diagrams will be 8 supplied as hereafter explained. 9 10 When the equipment supplied under Division 15 results in a change to the contract documents and/or 11 installation costs, the supp ter of at equipment shall reimburse the Division 16 contractor for that 12 expense. 13 14 If the substitution of equipment in Division 15 result in a change to the contract documents and/or 15 changes to the installation requirements (not covered by the contract change orders) the complete 16 responsibility for costs shall be assigned to the section of these specifications under which the 17 equipment is famished. 18 19 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM 20 21 Submittal data for each individual electrically operated or electrically controlled item of equipment 22 or device furnished under Division 15 and/or 16 of the contract documents shall include complete 23 electrical wiring diagrams and elementary control diagrams (ladder form) showing all internal and- 24 external wiring connections and services. The submittal data shall itemize all electrical characteristics 25 that are of a special nature or critical to the electrical installation or control system. Such equipment 26 and devices will not be considered for approval until these requirements are met. 27 28 PART 2 - PRODUCT'S 29 30 GENERAL 31 32 Products are specified by Manufacturer name, description, and/or catalog number. 33 34 Discrepancies between equipment speed and the intended function of equipment shall be brought 35 to the attention of the Architect/ Engineer in writing prior to bidding. Failure to report any conflict, 36 including catalog numbers, discontinued products, etc., does not relieve the Contractor from meeting 37 the intent of the contract documents, nor shall it change the contract cost. If the Contractor is unable 38 to interpret any part of the plans and/or specifications, or should he find discrepancies therein, he 39 shall bring this to the attention of the Architect/Engineer, who.will issue interpretation and/or 40 additional instructions to Bidders before the project is bid. 41 42 MANUFACTURERS: Provide products of manufacturers specified (or equivalent products of other 43 manufacturers). Manufacturer's catalog numbers and descriptions establish the quality of product 44 required. Substitutions will be considered if a duplicate written application (2-copies) is at the office 45 of the Architect/Engineer eight (8) working days prior to the day of bidding. The application shall 46 include the following: 1) A statement certifying that the equipment proposed is equal to that 47 specified; that it has the same electrical and physical characteristics, compatible dimensions, and meets 48 the functional intent of the contract documents; 2) The specified and submittal catalog numbers of 49 the equipment under consideration; 3) A pictorial and specification brochure. 50 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 10 1 Any conflict arising from the use of substituted equipment shall be the responsibility of the contractor, 2 who shall bear all costs required to make the equipment comply with the intent of the contract 3 documents. y 4 5 Samples maybe required fornon-standard orsubstituted itemsbefore installation during construction. 6 Provide all samples as required. .� 7 8 No materials or apparatus may be substituted after the bid opening except where the equipment 9 specified has been discontinued. This substitution must be made ky a change order. — 10 11 Provide only equipment specified in the contract documents or approved by addendum. " 12 _ 13 SUBSTITUTIONS AND BIDDING 14 ! .y 15 The equipment specified carries brand names and catalog numbers and shall be interpreted as 16 establishing a standard of quality. Substitutions will be considered if a duplicate written application ¢ 17 (two copies) is at the office of the engineer ten (10) working days prior to the day of biding. The 18 application shall include the following: 1) A statement declaring the equipment proposed is equal 19 to that specified by having the same physical characteristics and dimensions and meet the drawings 20 layout and structural conditions as well as load requirements; 2) The specified and submittal catalog 21 numbers of the equipment under consideration; 3) A pictorial and specification brochure. 22 23 Any conflict arising from the use of substituted equipment shall be the responsibility of the supplier, 24 who shall bear all costs required to make the equipment comply with the intent of the plans and `• 25 specifications. 26 27 At the option of the Architect, samples may be required for non-standard or substituted items before 28 installation during construction. 29 30 No materials or apparatus shall be substituted after the bid opening except where the equipment ' 6 31 manufacturer has been discontinued or delivery becomes a problem, then written approval if the 32 Architect is required. 33 ' 34 Bidding -- Only equipment specified in the contract documents and/or approved by an addendum will 35 be used in the base bid. ' 36 37 INCENTIVE BIDS AND UNIT PRICES 38 • 39 Suppliers of materials, equipment, and systems are encouraged to submit incentive bids by grouping • 40 several products under one bid. However, the successful contractor within 72 hours after the bid, shall 41 submit by telephone to the Architect and Engineer, the manufacture of the switch (including .1 42 transformers when specified), the unit price for add or delete changes for each light fixture type shown 43 in the fixture schedule. The sub -contractors and manufacturers of equipment being supplied. Failure ' 44 to comply with this request may disqualify the products and empower the Engineer to determine ►he 45 fair value for the fixture and installation changes, without further input from the contractor or 46 installer. 47 l 48 See EQUIPMENT UNIT COST SUBMISSION page 16001-3. '-` 49 50 i� ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 11 SPARE PARTS Provide spare parts (fuses, overload heaters, diffusers, lamps, etc.) as specified. Transmit all spare parts to Owner's Representative in writing prior to substantial completion. Submit copy of transmittal letter to Engineer. 7 Fuses: Provide one spare set of fuses for each size used and one spare set of each additional group 8 of Eve (this includes fuses for bolted pressure and HV units). 9 10 Diffusers: Provide a spare set of diffusers and/or glass for each fixture type and one for each 11 additional 10 fixtures of each type; not to exceed 10 spares for any single Fixture type. 12 13 Lamns: Provide replacement lamps amounting to 15% (not less than one lamp) of each type and size 14 used. The quantity of any one single lamp type should not exceed 48. 15 16 Thermal Overloads: Provide one spare set of thermal overload heaters of each type used in the 17 magnetic starters. 18 19 Auxiliary Systems: One spare heat and smoke detector shall be provided for the system. 20 21 PART 3 - EXECUTION 22 23 INSTALLATION: Lay out electrical work in advance of construction to eliminate unnecessary 24 cutting, dulling, channeling, etc Where such cutting, dulling, or channeling becomes necessary for 25 proper installation; perform with care. Use skilled mechanics of the trades involved. Repair damage 26 to building and equipment at no additional cost to the contract. Cutting work of other Contractors 27 shall be done only with the consent of that Contractor. Cutting structural members shall not be 28 permitted. 29 30 Since the drawings of floor, wall, and ceiling installation are made at small scale, outlets, devices, 31 equipment, etc, are indicated only in their approximate location unless dimensioned. Locate outlets 32 and apparatus symmetrically on floors, walls and ceilings where not dimensioned, and coordinate such 33 locations with work of other trades to prevent interferences. Verify all dimensions on the job. Do 34 not scale the electrical drawings, but refer to the architectural and mechanical shop drawings and 35 project drawings for dimensions as applicable. 36 37 Perform for other trades, the electrical wiring and connection for all devices, equipment or apparatus. 38 Consult, Architectural, Mechanical, and other applicable drawings, and all applicable shop drawings 39 to avoid switches, outlets, and other equipment from being hidden behind doors, cabinets, counters, 40 heating equipment, etc Relocate buried electrical devices and/or connection as directed at no 41 additional cost. 42 43 Where conduit, outlets or apparatus are to be encased in concrete, it must be located and secured by 44 a journeyman or foreman present at the point of installation. Check locations of the electrical items 45 before and after concrete and/or masonry installation and relocate displaced items. 46 47 Provide block -outs, sleeves, demolition work, excavation, etc, required for installation of work 48 specified in this Division. 49 50 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 12 1 COMPLETION OF WORK AND TESTING 2 3 Before energizing any circuits, make meager ground tests on conductors, bus duct and fused 4 disconnects with the distribution breakers open and all circuits feeding from the main panel. These 5 readings shall be recorded with their circuits and submitted in triplicate to the Owner's Representative 6 before the system is energized. 7 8 After the facility has been in operation for 10 days, submit with a letter of guarantee a triplicate 9 record of a voltage reading and ammeter reading on each phase of the feeder for the main and all 10 branch panels, motors, outside lighting, eta to the facility. (These readings shall be taken with all 11 equipment operating.) A second report shall be made on equipment that has a load over 20 Amp 1- 12 pole in the mechanical room, kitchen, shops, eta when in operation. 13 14 If there are any abnormal conditions, they shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing 15 as a part of this submittal. Also submit with the load readings for the motors, a list of motors with 16 the size of overload heaters used for each motor. This includes thermo switches. 17 18 Before final inspection, but after the electrical installation is complete, the Electrical Contractor shall 19 remove neutral grounding connection from main distribution panel and show to Inspector and Owner's 20 Representative, by an ohmmeter, that the electrical system neutral is grounded through main panel 21 location only. Neutral shall be reconnected after the test is complete. 22 23 FINAL REVIEW 24 25 'At the time of final review, the project foreman shall accompany the reviewing party, and remove 26 coverplates, panel covers and other access panels as requested, to allow review of the entire electrical 27 system. 28 29 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 13 „s i_J t 1 PROJECT' FINALIZATION AND START-UP 2 3 Upon completion of equipment and " system installation, assemble all equipment Factory 4 Representative and Subcontractors for system start-up. 5 6 Each-Factory-Representativ"nd-Subcontractorshall-assist in -start-up and-check-outtheir-respective�-— 7 system and remain at the site until the total system operation is accepted by the Owner's 8 Representative. 9 10 The Factory Representative and/or -System Subcontractor shall give personal instruction on operation 11 and maintenance of their equipment to the Owner's maintenance and/or operation personnel. To 12 certify acceptance of operation and instruction by the Owner's Representative, the contractor shall 13 prepare a written statement as follows: 14 15 This is to certify that the Factory Representative and/or System Subcontractor for each of the systems 16 installed below have performed start-up and final check out of their respective systems is satisfactory. 17 18 System Operating Report: After the facility has been in operation for 10 days, submit with a letter 19 of guarantee a triplicate record of a voltage reading and ammeter reading on each phase of the feeder 20 for the main and all branch panels, motors, outside lighting, eta to the facility. (These readings shall 21 be taken with all equipment operating.) A second report shall be made on equipment that has a load 22 over 20 Amp 1-pole in the mechanical room, kitchen, shops, eta when in operation. 23 24 This dated system operating report shall be submitted to the Owner's representative for distribution 25 to the engineer and a copy placed in each maintenance manual. 26 27 As a part of this document, submit a copy of each Auxiliary System tested with the proper signatures. 28 29 The Owner's Representative has received complete and thorough instruction in the operation and 30 maintenance of each system. 31 32 The Owner's Representative has received and accepted all spare parts as heretofore required by 33 contact. 34 35 Send copy of acceptance to Architect/Engineer. 36 37 38 39 40 41 END OF SECTION 16001 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16001 - 14 a I ' —} i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 16051 ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION REPORT DATE Project Street Location: City Contractor - Electrical: Address Phone Date work began Permits obtained Date Equipment storage site Project foreman Years employed Names or workmen 18 Safety instructions given Yes No 19 Record set of drawing kept Yes No 20 21 OBSERVER 22 23 II. SHOP DRAWINGS (DATES): 24 A. Fixtures D. Transformers 25 B. Coord. letter w/clg. E. Transformers test Cert._ 26 contractor F. Devices 27 C. Panels G. Emergency Equip. 28 29 Shop drawing book within 90 days after signing of contract_ 30 Samples: Devices, eta 31 32 II. ROUGH -IN CONDITIONS TO CHECK OBSERVER DATE 33 A. Service conduit installation -By: 34 Aerial Buried . 35 1. Type of conduit installed-GRM_;PVC ,other 36 ' 1 37 2. Underground conduit installation on compacted fill_, 38 loose fillother ,depth below finish grade. 39 40 B. Service Power: 41 Set main disconnect as specified, Date: 42 tight connections date energized , 43 fuse size _ 44 } 45 C. Power System: 46 1. Transformers set: a) Main 47 2. Budding Power Established Date: ' 48 3. Main Panel Set ,Condition_,Energized 49 4. Branch Panels ,Condition ,Energized 50 5. Distribution Trans. Set_Condition_Energizeh ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION REPORT 16051 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 6. Branch Panels Make-up Powered D. Light Fixtures: 1. Date set: @ store other areas: 2. Date tamped: other areas: 4. Outside lights: set Energized: E: Outlet Box Mounting: 1. Location Height 2. Ris.dity 3. Flush with finih wall 4. Fit of material around box (masonry, sheetrock,etc.) F. Conduit Installation (3/4" minimum): 1. Routing - exposed paralleled to structure 2. Supported - full straps - 8 ft. O.C. and within IT of box 3. Flex conduit (36 in.) to fixtures in accessible G. Conductors: 1. Service conductors & feeders (size shown on plans)_ Conductor type: CU AL 2. Branch circuit conduit 3. Pigtails in panel and boxes. 4. Make-up in panel 5. Color coding of phase _(no conduit should have two conductors of the same color) 6. Circuit identification in outlet box H. Identification: 1. Feeders Phase A B C 2. Labels: Main Panel Branch Panels 3. Panel Directory Typed 4. Identify branch circuits as per specifications I. Auxiliary Boxes: 1. Location and type 3. Marl panel or equip._ 2. Support 4. Wiring size, type, color code J. Receipt of motor control schematics from mechanical contractor: connection: Power Controls Tested . Load readings: RTU-1 RTU-2, ,RTU-3 K , Grounding: 1. To water main 3. To ground rod 2. Transformer ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION REPORT 5051-2 r�t 1 Special Ground: 2 1. #10 green ground from main to cash registers 3 2. To telephone board i^ 4 -� 5 6 III. FINAL OBSERVATION: OBSERVER DATE t 7 8 A. Trim out condition - appearance - uniformity 9 10 B. Cleanliness and finish - paint, etc. ' 12 C. Fixtures: 13 1. Broken diffusers 3. Proper lamps 14 2. Cleanliness 15 16 D. Devices: 17 1. Spec. grade switches 4. Connection test 18 2. Spec. grade receptacles 5. Special coverplates_ 19 3. Spec. coverplate 6. Blank covers — 20 21 E. Circuit identification and labeling: 22 1. Circuit ident. in box 3. Engineers name 23 2. Main and branch panels4. Power riser ' 24 ' 25 F. Panels: 26 1. Connection tight 4. All screws/bolts tight_ 27 2. Clean 5. Condjarrangmt & ties_ 28 3. Finish 6. Panel sch. directory 29 30 G. Pull cord in empty conduits: Telephone 31 —,Security 32 H. Auxiliaries: 33 1. Trim out 3. Operation test date— , 34 2. Clean 35 36 IV. FINALIZATION OBSERVER DATE 37 38 A. Load on power system: 39 1. Load Readings: Voltage AB_,BC_,CA ,A-N_ 40 ' 41 Panel A B C 42 43 A ,f 44 _ B 45 — C — 46 D _ 47 FD - � 48 FF — 49 FP 50 _ K1 51 _ K2 — ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION REPORT 16051 - 3 I I K3 _ 2 M _ 3 Ml _ 4 MP _ 5 S 6 W 7 X 8 Y 9 10 2. Test emergency light system: Night Lights . 11 Battery Lights 12 13 B. Spare Equipment: 14 1. Letter of transmittal from contractor for type and 15 quantity of: 16 A. DiffusersC. Lamps 17 B. Fuses 18 19 C. Auxiliary System: 20 1. A test report for system and/or equipment contractor 21 for each system: 22 A. Smoke DetectorsC. Sound 23 B. Security 24 25 D. Guarantee Letters: 26 1. Letter of completion 3. Start-up instr._ 27 2. Finalization and start-up_4. 12-month report_ 28 29 E. 1. Record drawings with owner's room identification 30 2. Update of.shop drawing books 31 32 33 34 35 END OF SECTION 16051 ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION REPORT 16051 - 4 I SECTION 16070 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 6 7 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 8 9 The Contractor shall install an electric service to the subject project as shown on the plans and 10 described herein. 11 12 Extent of electrical connection for equipment includes final electrical connection of all equipment 13 (supplied under this or any other division or by the owner) having electrical requirements. Make final 14 connections for all owner furnished equipment. See other applicable portions of specification for 15 building temperature control wiring requirements, kitchen equipment, eta 16 17 Refer to Division-15 sections for motor starters and controls furnished integrally with equipment. 18 19 Refer to Division-15 section for control system wiring, not work of this section, except as noted on 20 the electrical plans. 21 22 Refer to sections of other Divisions for specific individual equipment power requirements. 23 24 QUALITY ASSURANCE 25 26 NEC COMPLIANCE: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to typt products used and 27 installation of electrical power connections. 28 29 UL LABELS: Provide electrical connection products and materials which have been UL-Iisted and 30 labeled. 31 32 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 33 34 GENERAL: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials, 35 including but not necessarily limited to; raceways, conductors, cords, cord caps, wiring devices, 36 pressure connectors, terminals ( lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat -shrinkable insulating tubing, cable 37 ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices, terminations, 38 and connections as required. See Section 16110, Conduit Raceways; Section 16140, Wiring Devices; 39 and Section 16120 Wire Cables for additional requirements. Provide final connections for equipment 40 consistent with the following: 41 42 1. Permanently installed fixed equipment - flexible seal -tight conduit from branch circuit 43 terminal equipment, or raceway; to equipment, control cabinet, terminal junction box or 44 wiring terminals. Totally enclose all wiring in raceway. 45 46 2. Movable and/or portable equipment - wiring device, cord cap, and multi -conductor cord 47 suitable for the equipment and in accordance with NEC requirements (Article 400). 48 49 3. Other methods as required by National Electrical Code and/or as required by special 50 equipment of field conditions. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16070 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 ELECTRICAL SERVICE SYSTEM 4 5 Provide, install, and coordinate an electric service to the facility as shown on the drawings and —6 specified -herein. 7 8 The Contractor shall contact (the serving utility company) relative to the installation of this electric 9 service and is responsible for any costs assessed by the serving utility to provide electric service. These 10 costs shall be included. in_the_base_bid.Confirm the location of the point of service. 11 12 The service conduit shall be installed as per the codes and governing bodies. 13 14 Provide and install the service metering equipment, as required by the serving utility, and/or as 15 specified in the contract documents. 16 17 Construction Lighting and Power is a part of the General Conditions. 18 19 Permanent power shall be connected as soon as the main service and panel are installed. 20 21 Service feeders installed in PVC and/or RMC shall be shrouded with Red 5-bags concrete 3" minimum 22 cover with #2 rebar at all comers. 23 24 SERVICE CONNECTIONS 25 26 Provide and install the lugs, cable, labor, etc. necessary for the connection of the service power and/or 27 transformers for the project. 28 29 MAKING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 30 31 Make electrical connections to all equipment provided under Divisions 15 and/or 16, as it was shown 32 on either the mechanical or electrical plans. The connection shall be in accordance with connector 33 manufacturers written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with 34 requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that product fulfill 35 requirements. 36 37 Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment 38 manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. 39 40 Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation work. 41 42 Verify all electrical loads (voltage, phase, full load amperes, number and point of connections, 43 minimum circuit ampacity, etc.) for equipment furnished under other Divisions of this specification, 44 by reviewing respective shop drawings furnished under each division. Meet with each subcontractor 45 furnishing equipment requiring electrical service and review equipment electrical characteristics. 46 Report any variances from electrical characteristics noted -on the electrical drawings in writing to 47 Architect before proceeding with rough -in work. 48 Obtain and review the equipment shop drawings to determine particular final connection requirements 49 before rough -in begins for each equipment item. 50 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16070 - 2 r Confirm the rotation of all electric motors when making the final connection. Motors running in the reverse direction is the responsibility of this contractor. Refer to basic materials and methods Section 16120, Conductors, for identification of electrical power supply conductor terminations. 7 g 9 10 11 12 13 END OF SECTION 16070 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16070 - 3 r- I SECTION 16110 - CONDUIT RACEWAYS 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 DESCRIPT DN OF WORK 6 7 Extent of raceways in indicated by drawings and schedules. 8 9 Types of raceways in this section include the following: 10 11 Electrical metallic tubing. 12 Flexible metal conduit. 13 Intermediate metal conduit. 14 Liquid -Tight flexible metal conduit. 15 Rigid metal conduit. 16 Rigid non-metallic conduit. 17 18 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 MANUFACTURERS: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of raceway systems of types and 21 sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less that three 22 (3) years. 23 24 STANDARDS: Complywith applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. Comply 25 with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems; and provide 26 products and components which have been UL-listed and labeled. Comply with NEC requirements 27 as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems. 28 29 SUBMITTALS 30 31 Not required. 32 33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 34 35 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING 36 37 GENERAL: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings or types, grades, sizes and weights (wall 38 thicknesses) as indicated; with minimum trade size of 3/4". 39 40 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC): FS WW-C-0581 and ANSI C80.1. 41 42 INTERMEDIATE STEEL CONDUIT (IMC): FS WW-C-581. 43 44 PVC EXTERNALLY COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT: ANSI C80.1 and NEMA Std. Pub. Ro. 45 RN1. 46 47 RIGID AND INTERMEDIATE STEEL CONDUIT FITTING: Provide fully threaded malleable 48 steel couplings; raintight and concrete tight where required by application. Provide double lockouts 49 and metal bushings at conduit terminations, use OZ Type B bushing on conduits 1-1/4" and larger. 50 CONDUIT RACEWAYS 16110 - 1 I 1 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT): FS W W-C-563 and ANSI C80.3. 2 3 EMT FITTINGS (Couplings and Connectors): Provide install set -screw type malleable steel fittings: 4 connectors shall be insulated throat type, concrete tight where required by application. Install OZ 5 Type B bushings on conduits 1-1/4" and larger. 6 7 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: FS W W-C-566, of the following type: 8 9 Zinc -coated steel. 10 11 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS: FS W-F-406, Type 1 Class 1, and Style A. 12 13 LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: Provide liquid -tight, flexible metal conduit; 14 constructed of single strip, flexible, continuous interlocked, and double -wrapped steel; galvanized 15 inside and outside; coated with liquid -tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 16 17 LIQUID -TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style 18 G. 19 20 EXPANSION FITTING: OZ Type AX, or equivalent of suit application. 21 22 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS 23 24 GENERAL: Provide non-metallic conduit, ducts, and fittings of types, sizes and weights (wall 25 thicknesses) as indicated shallnot be installed inside the building, except it be encased in concrete and 26 there it shall surface through a RMC elbow; with minimum trade size of 3/4". (In this specification, 27 it is not permitted above grade for any reason.) 28 29 UNDERGROUND PVC PLASTIC UTILITIES DUCT: ANSI/NEMA TC 6, Type 1 for encased 30 burial in concrete, Type II for direct burial. 31 32 PVC AND ABS PLASTIC UTILITIES DUCT FITTINGS: ANSI/NEMA TC 9, match to duct type 33 and material. 34 35 CONDUIT, TUBING, AND DUCT ACCESSORIES: Provide conduit, tubing and duct accessories 36 of types, sizes, and materials, complying with manufacturer's published product information, which 37 mate and match conduit and tubing. 38 39 SEALING BUSHINGS: Provide OZ Type FSK, of FSKA. 40 41 PART 3 - EXECUTION 42 43 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS 44 45 Install electrical raceways where indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, 46 applicable requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with the 47 following. 48 49 FEEDERS UNDER 600 VOLTS: Install feeders to panels and motor control centers and individual 50 equipment feede rated 100 amps and greater, in rigid metal conduit (RMC), or intermediate metal CONDUIT RACEWAYS 16110 - 2 I conduit (IMC); except where buried below grade, install in non-metallic conduit or dud. Feeders 1- 2 1/2" round and larger shall be encased in concrete as a part of the floor. Not up in the floor, but just 3 below the floor with the top of the conduit touching the bottom of the slab and the bottom of the 4 conduit being covered with at least 1" of concrete. 5 6 FEEDERS OVER 600 VOLTS: All feeders over 600 volts shall be installed in RMC when installed 7 on side of building. The conduit shall be supported in accordance with Section 16136. 8 9 Feeders below grade shall be installed in RMC and/or PVC conduit shrouded with a minimum of 3" 10 cover of red concrete with a #3 rebar in opposite comers. The top of the duct bank shall be set 48- 11 inches below finish grade. 12 13 BRANCH CIRCUITS, SIGNALAND CONTROLCIRCUITS, AND INDIVIDUALEQUIPMENT 14 CIRCUITS RATED LESS THAN 100 AMPS: Install in electric metallic tubing (EMT); except in 15 poured walls, floor slabs, below concrete slab -on -grade, or in earth fill, install in non-metallic plastic 16 dud. Encase non-metallic plastic duct 1-1/4" and larger in concrete. 17 18 Coordinate with other work, including metal and concrete deck work, as necessary to interface 19 installation of electrical raceways and components. 20 21 When non-metallic conduit is used it shall come to the surface in a RMC elbow or box. 22 23 Coordinate the campus ground equipment installation with existing structures, trees, lawn sprinkler 24 systems, etc. 25 26 Install raceway in accordance with the following: 27 28 Provide a minimum of 12" clearance from flues, steam and hot water piping, etc. 29 30 Conceal raceways in finished walls, ceilings and floors (other than slab -on -grade). Where conduit is 31 exposed in mechanical spaces, etc., install parallel with or at right angles to building or room structural 32 lines. 33 34 Where cutting raceway is necessary, remove all inside and outside burrs; make cuts smooth and square 35 with raceway. 36 37 Flexible raceways shall not be concealed in construction and/or shall a inn be longer than 10 feet long. 38 39 Comply with NEC for requirements for installation of pull boxes in long runs. 40 41 NORMAL INSTALLATIONS 42 43 Cap open ends of conduits and protect other raceways as required against accumulation of dirt and 44 debris. Pull a mandril and swab through all conduit before installing conductors. Install a 2001b. 45 nylon pull cord in each empty conduit run. 46 47 Replace all crushed, wrinkled or deformed raceway before installing conductors. 48 49 Provide rigid metal conduit (RMC) for all bends in buried conduit greater than 30 degrees. Provide 50 a protective coating for RMC bend as specified herein. 51 CONDUIT RACEWAYS 16110 - 3 1 Where raceways penetrate building or vault walls and floors below grade, install rigid metal conduit 2 (RMC) for a minimum distance of 10 ft. on the exterior side of the floor or wall. Provide OZ, Type 3 FSK or WSK sealing bushings (with external membrane clamps as applicable) for all conduit 4 penetrations entering budding or vaults below grade. 6 Install liquid -tight flexible conduit for connection of motors,-transformers,-and_other-electrical 7 equipment where subject to movement and vibration. 8 9 Install five spare 3/4" conduit (ca ed) from each flush branch lb pp pane .,sr in o t e cc mg and floor 10 space. Where the floor is not accessible run six conduits into the ceiling space. Run conduits the 11 required distance necessary to reach accessible ceding space. 12 13 Provide OZ expansion fittings on all conduits crossing budding expansion joints, both in slab and 14 suspended. 15 16 Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/conductors within 17 raceways. 18 19 FIRE PENETRATION SEALS 20 21 All penetrations through fire rated floors and walls shall bL sealed to prevent the spread of smoke, 22 fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration either before, during or afte> the fire. The fire rating 23 of the penetration seal shall be at least that of the floor or wall into which it is installed so that the 24 original fire rating of the floor or wall is maintained as required by Article 300--21 of the National 25 Electrical Code. The sealant shall remain soft and pliable to allow for the removal and/or addition 26 of cables without the necessity of drilling holes. It shall adhere to itself to allow any and all repairs 27 to be made with the -ame material. It shall permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of 1 28 raceways and/or cables going through the penetration without the seal cracking or crumbling. 29 30 When damming materials are to be left in place after the seal is complete, all such materials shall be 31 non-flammable. 32 33 When sealant is injected into a penetration, the foam shall expand to surround all items within the 34 penetration and maintain pressure against the walls of the penetration. The foam shall cure within 35 five minutes and be fire resistant at that time. No heat shall be required to further expand the foam 36 to block the passage of fire and smoke or water. 37 38 All wall or floor penetration openings shall be as small as possible. 39 40 The foam sealant shall meet all of the fire test and hose stream test requirements of ASTM E119-73 41 and shall be UL Classified as a Wall Opening Protective Device. The sealant shall be CHASE -FOAM 42 CTC PR-855 Fire Resistant Foam Sealant from Chase Technology Corporation, Huntington Station, 43 New York 11746, or equals of 3-M and T & B. 44 45 Escutcheon plates - when a conduit passes through a ceding, wall and/or floor into a finished space, 46 an escutcheon plate shall be installed on the conduit to cover the unfinished hole and sealant. 47 48 CONDUIT RACEWAYS 16110 - 4 I EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 2 3 RACEWAY INSTALLATION BELOW SLAB -ON -GRADE, OR BELOW GRADE: 4 5 The Electrical contractor is responsible for all excavation and backfif! related to the electrical 6 installation defined herein and/or as indicated on the plans. 7 8 Opening of finished surfaces asphalt concrete, grass, etc. shall be accomplished by first identifying the 9 limits of the opening then cut within the limits preserving the undisturbed areas. Asphalt shall be cut 10 with a wedging tool, concrete with a diamond saw and,grass with a cutter. 11 12 Excavation shall be accomplished with the proper equipment, protective care shall be taken to not 13 disturb the adjacent surfaces and materials. This contractor is responsible and shall protect all 14 material objects and things adjacent to the excavation. 15 16 All materials not reinstalled in the installation shall be removed from the premise. 17 18 Backfill the first sic (6) inch layer over the installed subject (conduit, cable, etc.) shall be sand. 19 Subsequent six (6) inch layers shall be loan soil. Each layer shall be compacted to a 90% standard 20 proctor test before the next layer is applied. (Refer to Section 16110, Part 3 for conduits required to 21 be incased in concrete). 22 23 For slab -on -grade construction, install runs or rigid plastic conduit (PVC) below slab. Install RMC 24 (with protective coating) for raceways passing vertically through slabs on grade. Slope raceways as 25 required to drain away from electrical enclosures and to avoid collection of moisture in raceway low 26 points. 27 28 Apply protective coating to metallic raceways in direct contact with earth or fill of any type; consisting 29 of spirally wrapped PVC tape (1/2" minimum overlap os scotch wrap tape or equal); or factory applied 30 vinyl cladding (minimum thickness .020 inches). Completely wrap and tape all field joints. 31 32 Mark all buried conduits which do not require concrete encasement by placing yellow plastic marker 33 tape (minimum 6" wide) along entire length of run 12" below final grade. Where multiple small lines 34 are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16", install a single line marker. 35 36 Conduits encased in concrete shall be shrouded with a 3" of Red concrete. Install a #3 rebar in 37 opposite comers of the encasement except for two conduits or less where two #3 bars in opposite 38 comers is acceptable. 39 40 RACEWAY INSTALLATION IN SUSPENDED SLABS: 41 42 Install conduit as close to the middle of concrete slab as practicable without disturbing reinforcement. 43 Do not install conduits of diameter greater than 1-1/4" of the slab thickness. Space conduits not less 44 than 3 diameters on center (except at stub up locations). Provide OZ expansion fittings at -all 45 expansion joints. All raceways shall be installed with concrete tight fittings. 46 47 Install RMC in all hazardous locations as defined by NEC. Provide suitable fittings, seal -offs, boxes, 48 eta to comply with requirements. 49 50 CONDUIT RACEWAYS 16110 - 5 I ROOF FLASHING 2 3 Where raceways penetrate roofing or similar area, provide 26 ga. galvanized iron roof jack, sized to 4 fit tightly to raceway for weathertight seal, and with flange extending to a minimum of 9 inches under 5 roofing on all sides. Coordinate all work with roofing contractor. 6 7 PATCHING AND REPAIR 8 9 The Contractor is responsible for all block -outs, demolition, patching and repay of all finished interior 10 and exterior surfaces pertaining to the installation of this particular phase of work. All surfaces shall 11 be finished (painted, etc.) to match the adjacent materials, finishes and color. 12 13 Hard Surfaces: Whenever demolition or excavation is required for the installation of the electrical 14 system, it should be the responsibility of this Contractor to make repairs and/or replacements of hard 15 finish surfaces such as concrete, asphalt, eta 16 17 Lawn replacement is also included as a part of this section. 18 19 The method of patching and repay should follow good construction practices and all finished surfaces 20 shall match materials and finish wherein the demolition occurred. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 END OF SECTION 16110 CONDUIT RACEWAYS 16110 - 6 f I S XTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2 - 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 6 t 7 Extent of electrical conductor and electrical cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules. 8 9 Types of conductors and cables in this section include the following: 10 11 Copper Conductors (600V) 12 - 13 Applications for conductors and cables required for project include: 14 - 15 Feeders 16 Branch Circuits 17 18 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical conductors and cable. 21 Comply with UL standards and provide electrical conductors and cables which have been UL-listed 22 and labeled. 23 24 Complywith applicable portions of NEMA/Insulated Cable EngineersAssociation standards pertaining 25 to materials, construction and testing of conductors and cable. 26 27 Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM and IEEE standards pertaining to construction of 28 conductors and cable. 29 30 SUBMITTALS 31 32 FIELD TEST DATA: Submit test data in accordance with IEEE Standard 400-1980 showing ambient 33 conditions, voltage levels, level durations, and conduction current for each step. Include effective 34 insulation resistance in submittal. < 35 36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 37 38 COPPER CONDUCTORS (600V AND LESS) 39 40 Provide factory -fabricated conductors of sizes, ratings, materials, and types indicated for each service. 41 Where not indicated provide 42 43 Proper selection to comply with project's installation requirements and NEC standards. Provide 44 conductors in accordance with the following: 45 46 Distribution and Panelboard Feeders; and other conductors, #2 AWG and larger - (Copper) 47 conductor, see drawings for size. 48 49 Conductors: All conductors #3 AWG and smaller copper conductor, with THHN or THWN 50 insulation below #10AWG, and THHN above #10AWG, and where ambient temperature conditions i lJ CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 1 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 exceed 75 degrees C. Size all conductors in accordance with NEC; minimum size to be #12 AWG. Provide stranded conductors for #8 AWG and larger. Provide THHN insulated conductors (in dry areas) from outlets to fixtures, and in fixture channels. Conductor ampacity shall comply when local codes have a derating factor because of ambient Provide color and coding of conductors as follows: Lighting &.Appliance Motor Control A -phase - - - Black B-phase - - - Red C-phase - - - Blue Neutral - - - White Ground- - - - Green Motor Feeders - - -Black Hot or Stop Lead- -Red Start Lead- - - - -Blue Common- - - - - - -White Indicating Light- -Orange Interlock or Shunt -Brown Ground- - - - - - -Green CONNECTING BLOCKS Isolated Ground A circle in the shaft of the service feeder or as defined denotes a #8 green with orange stripe isolated ground conductor in that feeder conduit. A circle in the shaft of the arrow denotes #12 green with orange stripe isolated ground conductor in branch circuit. Taps made to conductors in wire way, switchgear, J-Boxes, etc. larger than #6 shall be made with an insulated connector. The connector block shall be an alloy that is completely compatible with copper, aluminum alloy 6061-T6 conductive plating for low contact resistance, excellent anti -pull out ability and set -screw for suring in place. The block shall be insulated with a molded high dielectric plastisol that will not support combustion, abrasive and chemical resistant. All connections shall comply with rated for 600 volt 90°C and comply with NEC 100. Torque each lug to the recommendations of the manufacturer. The unit shall be Polaris Series S (in and out same side), other types are: Series D (double row), Series I (in and out), Series P (pass through), Series T CT' type transition). The contractor shall decide which type of connection is best suited for installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Conductor size noted in panels is for the home -run. The conductor may be changed to code size after the fast apparatus. Parking Lot conductors shall be installed of the size noted until a change is indicated. "G" in the Conduit symbol denotes a green ground (#12 for branch circuits, #10 BC interconnecting all parking lot poles) which shall be installed in the conduit with other conductors. It shall connect with an insulated ground bar in the panel. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 o- GENERAL: Install electrical conductors and cables as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. Coordinate installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compounds must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Keep conductor splices to minimum. Install splices and tapeswhich have mechanical strength and insulation rating equivalent -or -better than conductor. Isolated Ground - Install a yellow insulated #8 isolated ground conductor in all feeder conduit connecting the main ground to isolated ground bars in the branch panels. Install a yellow green with orange stripe#12 conductor in all branch receptacle "home run" conduit. Connect the conductor to the isolated ground terminal on the IG convenience outlet. If there is no IG receptacle leave eight (8) inches of conductor in the device box for a future connection. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material. All conductor connections on lugs, breakers, connection blocks, etc. of the set -screw type shall be set with a torque wrench in strict accordance with industry standards as recommended for each conductor size. Strip Leneth Chart CONNECTOR SIZE LENGTH 500 2 350 1.75 250 1.625 3/0 1.437 1/0 1.25 #4 0.875 ORS AND CABLES 16120 - 3 N N N N ti — � i-+ . � � F f.. � A N� O %O m -1 ON N A W N O %O m -1 0% S! A W N — O o-+ 71 Tj M [r1 U I~+ CDN U O Oo O 0�o O O NW N NW N NW N NW W (AO N 4 Fes+ O U O Oo O 00 O O NW N NWN Cn NWN N1 W O 09 hi O U O co O W O O NW N NWN U i A O En U U F~+ O V1 O O~0 O W O NN U O U O W O CO f I SECTION 16135 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 6 I 7 Extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules. 8 9 Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following: "t 10 11 Outlet boxes 12 Junction boxes 13 Full boxes 14 Ground boxes 15 Conduit bodies 16 Bushings 17 Locknuts 18 Knockout closures 19 Miscellaneous boxes and fittings 20 21 QUALITY ASSURANCE 22 23 Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and fittings. 24 Comply with ANSI C 134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub. No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet -steel outlet 25 boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which have been 26 UL-listed and labeled. 27 28 SUBMITTALS 29 30 None required. 31 32 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 33 34 FABRICATED MATERIALS 35 36 INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES: Provide one piece, galvanized flat rolled sheet steel interior outlet 37 wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including box depths, to suit each respective location and 38 installation; construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded screw holes with 39 corrosion -resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices; standard box shall be 4-11/16" 40 x 2-1/8" deep x 4" x 4", (Raco 265) with 3/4" knock outs and the or masonry/type box extensions (Raco 41 838). 42 43 If the structure will not allow a 4 square box use a 3" deep single gang unit (Raco 695). 44 P 45 In spaces with restricted width, Ile between a door frame and window jam, use partition boxes (Raco 46 426). 47 48 INTERIOR OUTLET BOX ACCESSORIES: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each 49 installation; including mounting brackets, hangers, masonry extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135 - 1 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring applications. See the details on the plans. WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES: Provide corrosion -resistant cast -metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes (including depth) required, with threaded conduit ends, cast - metal face application, with face plate gaskets and corrosion -resistant fasteners. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES: Provide code -gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw - on covers; of types, shapes and sizes to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. CONDUIT BODIES: Provide galvanized cast -metal conduit bodies, of types, shapes and sizes to suit respective locations aad installation, construct with threaded -conduit -entrance ends, removable covers, and corrosion -resistant screws. BUSHINGS, KNOCKOUT CLOSURES AND LOCKNUTS: Provide corrosion -resistant punched - steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings and offset connectors, or types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation. GROUND BOXES All J-boxes installed outside where access is needed shall be a composition type capable of withstanding the elements for an indefinite period of time. The boxes shall be rated for no less than 5,000 - lbs over a 10" x 10" area and be designed and tested to temperatures of 50 degrees F. The material compressive strength shall be no less than 11,000 psL Locking covers (Label electrical with bolt and locking mechanism) shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of OS. The boxes shall be stackable for extra depth if needed. The bottoms of the boxes are open and shall have a 6" layer of pea gravel in the bottom. The size shall be 11 x 18 or as indicated on the plans. The boxes shall be as manufactured by Quazite. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS GENERAL: Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfil requirements. Minimum height of wall receptacles shall be 18". Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work. Provide coverplates for all boxes. See Section 16140, Wiring Devices. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. Provide knockout closures or cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 16135 - 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Install boxes and conduit bodies to ensure ready accessibility of electrical wiring. Install recessed boxes with face of box or ring flush with adjacent surface so the device mouL.Hng flange se., on the box mounting plate. This will cause the device and coverplate surfaces • � match. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Use bar hangers for stud construction. Use of nails for securing boxes is prohibited. Set boxes on opposite sides of common wall with minimum 10" of conduit between them. Provide electrical connections for installer' boxes. END OF SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FPITINGS 16135 - 3 1 SECTION 16136 - SUPPORTING DEVICES &z RACEWAYS 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 6 7 Extent of supports, anchors, and sleeves is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or specified in 8 other Division-16 sections. See Section 16110, Raceways, for additional requirements. 9 10 Work of this section includes supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals required for a complete raceway 11 support system, including but not limited to: clevis hangers, riser clamps, Gclamps, beam clamps, one 12 and two hold conduit straps, offset conduit clamps, expansion anchors, toggle bolts, threaded rods, U- 13 channel strut systems, and all associated accessories. 14 15 QUALITY ASSURANCE 16 17 Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. 18 Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA Std. Pub. No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for 19 Conduit and Cable Assemblies". Provide electrical components which are ULUlisted and labeled. 20 21 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 22 23 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES & RACEWAYS 24 25 GENERAL: Provide manufactured mounting brackets (such as Caddy #SDG or SDB - D - 16); 26 complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with 27 published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified. 28 See drawing details for additional requirements. 29 30 Tie -wire is not acceptable. 31 32 PART 3 - EXECUTION 33 34 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES & RACEWAYS 35 36 Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as required, in accordance with manufacturer's written 37 instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with 38 requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA for installation of 39 supporting devices. 40 41 Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface 42 installation of supporting devices with other work. 43 44 Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structures. 45 Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type 46 hangers where possible. 47 48 RACEWAYS: Support raceways which are rigidly attached to structure at intervals not to exceed 8 49 feet on center and within 12" of each junction box, outlet or fitting. Support raceway (as it is 50 installed) in accordance with the following: SUPPORTING DEVICES 16136 - 1 1 NUMBER OF RUNS 3/4" TO 1-12" 0 1-1/2" & LARGER 0 2 3 1 Full straps, clamps Hanger 4 or hangers. 5 2 Full straps, clamps Mounting Channel 6 or hangers. 7 3 Mounting Channel Mounting Channel 8 9 Support suspended raceways on trapeze hanger system, or individually by means of threaded rod and 10 straps, clamps, or hangers suitable for the application. Do not use "tie wire" as a portion of any 11 raceway support system; do not support raceway from ceiling support wires. 12 13 FLOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT: Provide rigid attachment of all floor mounted equipment to 14 the floor slab or structural system. Provide 5/8" bolts or expansion anchors at each 90 degrees comer 15 and at intervals not to exceed 48" on center along entire perimeter of the equipment. Provide rigid 16 attachment for all floor mounted switchboards, panelboards, power and control equipment, motor 17 control centers, dimmer cabinets, transformers, off switches, bat:-ry packs and racks, and similar 18 equipment furnished under Section 16. 19 20 BURIED CONDUIT 21 22 Conduit installed in the earth shall be on laid on undisturbed soil and/or compacted fill. The first six 23 (6) inches of cover shall be sand. See Excavation and Backfill. 24 25 26 27 28 29 END OF SECTION 16136 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16136 - 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 SEQ1ON 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following: Receptacles Switches Motion detectors Low voltage switching Coverplates Dimmer controls Cord caps Cord connectors QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with NEC and NEMA standards as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices. Provide electrical wiring devices which have been UL listed and labeled. SUBMITTALS PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES GENERAL: Provide factory -fabricated wiring devices, in types, and electrical ratings for applications indicated and complying with NEMA Stds. Pub. No. WD 1. Provide wiring devices (of proper voltage rating) as follows: MFGR. C.O.'S 1-POLE 3-WAY 4-WAY W-PILOT Hubbell 53621 1221 I 12231 12341 1221-P1 I P& S 53621 20ACI I 20AC3 I 20AC4 I 20ACI-CPL Leviton 53621 1223I 1223I 1224I Slater 5362G 1 7201 7231 7241 720-P1 I Sylvania 53621 1221A I 1221A I 1224A I 1271-RD I Arrowhart 53621 19911 19931 19941 1991-IL 7 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Coverplates: All devices to have matching coverplates. All coverplates to be impact resistant and shall be constructed of nylon or lexon. Special devices as indicated on the plans, complete with matching coverplates shall be provided and installed where designated on the drawings. All weatherproof covers on receptacles (GFI) and/or switches shall be recessed, such as TayMac #72204S2GA4 and #40110CLO, respectively. Provide devices in colors selected by Architect. CORDS CAPS AND CONNECTORS: Provide 3-wire grounding, cap plugs, and connectors of ampere and voltage rating required, for final equipment connection, and as indicated otherwise on drawings. Provide products of one of the following: Arrow Hart General Electric Hubbell Leviton Pass and Seymour MOTION DETECTORS: The contractor shall provide and install 20amp,120v, adjustable timer (6-15 min.) motion detectors as noted on the plans. The detectors shall be complete with sensors, relays, (or power pack) enclosures, etc. for a complete installation. 1. The ceiling detectors shall be designed for ceiling mounted and shall cover an area 30-ft in diameter. The unit shall be such as a 20amp, 120-volt Tork Model PC10T. 2. The wall detectors shall be of two types. The first shall cover a semi -circular area of 60-ft in diameter and shall be mounted 48-inches A.F.F. It shall be Sensor Switch #WS-170D. 3. The wall detector with a subscript "H" is for installation in the corridors. It shall have s narrow beam angle about 7-degrees on either side of the center line and a range of 130ft. The unit shall mount 84" A.P.F. and shall be Sensor Switch WSH-130. The detector shall have been tested and completed 60,000 successful operations. Equals of Hubbell, Tork, or Sensor Switch are approved equals if they meet the indicated criteria. If the detector requires a remote relay for power control the contractor shall provide and install these components at no addition to the contract. The contractor shall coordinate exact sensor location with manufacturer and submit manufacturer recommended layout with sensor shop drawings. , INCANDESCENT LAMP DIMMERS: Provide branch lighting solid-state AC dimmer controls for incandescent fixtures; wattage and voltage as indicated, 60 hertz, with continuously adjustable slider control. Provide dimmers manufacturer by Lutron. Color as selected by Architect. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 I FLUORESCENT LAMP DIMMERS: Provide single -point all -in -one control dimmer unit for the 2 fluorescent fixtures; with an Advance Electronic Mark VII ballast and voltage as indicated (120 or 3 277v), continuously adjustable slider control (100 to 200%), and with electromagnetic filters to reduce 4 noise and interference to minimum. Provide PA-7 dimmer manufactured by Prescolite or equals of 5 Lutron Micro-lite. Color as selected by Architect. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES WALL PLATES: Provide and install stainless steel coverplates for all wiring devices. Provide galvanized steel plates in unfinished areas. Engrave all receptacle plates other than those serving 120 volt, single phase devices. State voltage and amperage characteristics. Example: "208V, 30A". All switch banks shall have each switch identified as to its function with 1/8" thick laminated micarta engraved adhesive backed plate. Weatherproof coverplates shall be TaMac 1051OG duplex CO's. PART 3 - EXECUTION Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. Install devices in boxes such that front of device is flush and square with coverplate. Drawings are small scale and, unless dimensioned, indicate approximate locations only of outlets, devices, equipment, etc. Locate outlets and apparatus symmetrically on floors, walls and ceilings where not dimensioned and coordinated with other work. Verify all dimensioned items on job site. Consult architectural cabinet, millwork, and equipment shop drawings before beginning rough -in of electrical work. Adjust wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess building materials, dii t, and debris. Mark each with felt tip marker, indicating the circuit to which the device is connected. Example: "CKTA-1". Install blank plates on all boxes without devices. Delay installation of wiring devices until wiring work is completed. Delay installation of wall plates until after painting work is completed. Provide separate neutral conductors from panel to each GFI receptacle. PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES At time of substantial completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those stained, burned and scored. GROUNDING Provide electrical continuous, tight grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 I TESTING _ 2 3 Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity 4 connections. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with 5 requirements. 6 9 — 8 9 10 END OF SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 4 SECTION 16155 - MOTOR STARTERS 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 6 7 Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules. 8 9 Types of motor starter in this section include the following: 10 11 AC Fraction horsepower Manual Starters 12 AC Line Voltage Manual Starters 13 AC Non -Reversing Magnetic Starters 14 AC Combination Non -Reversing Magnetic Starters 15 16 QUALITY ASSURANCE 17 18 Comply with NEC and NEMA Standards as applicable to wiring methods, construction and 19 installation of motor starters. Comply with applicable requirements of UL 508, "Electric Industrial 20 Control Equipment", pertaining to electrical motor starters. Provide units which have been UL-listed 21 and labeled. 22 23 SUBMITTALS 24 25 PRODUCT DATA: Submit dimensioned drawings of motor starters showing accurately scaled 26 equipment layouts. 27 28 - MOTOR VOLTAGE/CURRENT REPORT: After installation is complete, including water and air 29 balancing, measure voltage (L L and L-N) and full load current of each phase of each motor. Submit 30 report showing field readings of voltage and amperage and thermal heater size installed for each 31 motor. 32 33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 34 35 MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the 36 following (for each type and rating of motor starter): 37 38 Allen-Bradley Co. 1 39 General Electric Co. 40 Square D Co. 41 42 MAINTENANCE STOCK, FUSES: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, 43 amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not more than 5 units of each type, for both 44 power and control circuit fuses. 45 46 MOTOR STARTERS 47 48 GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components; of types, 49 sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated which comply with manufacturer's standard MOTOR STARTERS 16155 - 1 materials, design and construction in accordance with published information, and as required for complete installations. 3 4 THERMAL OVERLOAD UNITS: Provide thermal overload units, sized in accordance with 5 manufacturer's recommendations for full load current of motor controlled. Provide thermal heater 6 units, sized to actual running full load current if actual full load current is less than 90 percent of 7 motor nameplate full load current. Size heater for mechanical equipment after air and water 8 balancing have been completed. Spare parts: Provide a spare set of each type and/or size. 10 AC FRACTIONAL HP MANUAL STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 2510): 11 Provide manual, single-phase, 1 and 2 pole, 300 volt AC may, fractional HP moc ?r starters, of types, 12 ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equip with one piece thermal overload relay with field 13 adjustment capability of plus or minus 10 percent of nominal overload heater rating; for protection 14 of AC motors of 1 HP and less. (For manually controlled motors in excess of 1 HP, see Line Voltage 15 Manual Starters specified herein.) Provide starter with quick -make, quick -break trip free toggle 16 mechanisms, green pilot lights, and with lock -off toggle operated handle. Mount surface units in 17 NEMA 1 enclosures, unless noted otherwise. Provide flush mounted units with coverplate to match 18 wiring device coverplaics. 19 20 AC LINE VOLTAGE MANUAL STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 2510): 21 Provide line voltage manual starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 22 pole, 600 volt AC max; equip with pushbutton operator, low voltage protection feature, and green 23 pilot light. Provide starters with trip free mechanism such that contacts will open under load and 24 remain open until thermal element has cooled, and unit is reset. Mount surface units in NEMA 1 25 enclosure, unless noted otherwise. Provide overlapping trim for flush mounted units. 26 27 AC NON -REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 8536): 28 Provide line voltage magnetic starters (nothing smaller than size 1- typical all arrangements), to types, 29 ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt max,120 volt control voltage with 30 thermal overload protection and under voltage trip in all phases. Equip units with holding contact, 31 2 normally open, and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts, unless noted otherwise. Provide fused 32 control transformer in each starter. Mount hand -off -auto switch, red pilot light, and reset button in 33 face of enclosure. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure unless noted otherwise. Equip all spare starters 34 complete with items as specified herein. 35 36 AC COMBINATION NON -REVERSING BREAKER AND MAGNETIC STARTERS (EQUAL 37 TO SQUARE D CLASS 8538): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings and 38 electrical characteristics and indicated for 8536; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volts maxwith non -reversing magnetic 39 starters as speed herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with motor circuit protector. 40 41 Provide instantaneous trip circuit breaker as indicated and adjust to comply with manufacturer's 42 recommendations. Provide combination starters for individual mounting, or for group mounting in 43 motor control center as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 44 45 ACCOMBINATIONNON-REVERSINGFUSED DISCONNECI'ANDMAGNETICSTARTERS 46 (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 8539): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings, 47 and electrical characteristics; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt maximum with non -reversing magnetic starters as 48 specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with fusible disconnect switch. Provide quick -make, 49 quick -break, visible blade disconnect switch. Provide 2, 3, and 4; and visible blade, automatic circuit 50 interrupters with push -to -trip feature and separate fuse clips for larger NEMA sizes. Fuse all starters 51 with dual -element (time -delay) fuses equal to Bussman FRN/FRS. Provide combination starters for MOTOR STARTERS 16155 - 2 I P [1 I 1 individual mounting, or for group mounting in motor control centers as indicated. Provide NEMA 2 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 3 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 5 6 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS 7 8 Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable 9 requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance 10 with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. 11 12 Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any. 13 14 ADJUST AND CLEAN 15 16 Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free 17mechanical movement. 18 19 Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 20 21 Each motor starter shall be equipped with lock out capabilities. 22 23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 24 25 Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energize motor starters and demonstrate functioning of equipment 26 in accordance with requirements. 27 28 29 30 END OF SECTION 16155 MOTOR STARTERS 16155 -3 I1 SECTION 16170 - MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 6 7 Extent of motor and circuit disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Work 8 includes complete installation and electrical connections. ti :0 QUAi.ITY ASSURANCE 11 12 Provide motor and circuit disconnect switches which have been UL listed and labeled. Comply with 13 applicable requirements of NEMA Standards Pub. No. KS 1, and NEC. 14 15 SUBMITTALS 16 17 PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data including specification, installation instructions and 18 general recommendations, for each type of motor and circuit disconnect switch required. 19 20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 22 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS . 23 24 MANUFACTURER: Subjects to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the 25 following (for each type of switch): 26 27 General Electric Co. 28 Square D Company 29 Westinghouse Electric Corp. 30 31 FABRICATED SWITCHES 32 33 GENERAL: Provide heavy duty type disconnect and safety switches as indicated herein. Provide: 34 35 - Heavy duty switches on 240 and/or 600 volt rated circuits. 36 - HP rated switches on all motor circuits. 37 38 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES: Provide heavy-duty type, sheet -steel enclosed switches, fusible or non- 39 fusible as indicated of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 and/or 600 volts, 40 60 hertz; incorporating spring assisted, quick -make, quick -break switches which are so constructed that 41 switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Provide single phase or three phase with 42 solid neutral as required by applications. Equip with an interlocked operating handle which is capable 43 of being padlocked in OFF position. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R as required by application, 44 unless noted. Provide fusible switches with Class R rejection fuse clip kits. 45 46 FUSES: Provide fuses for switches, as required of classes, types and ratings needed to fulfill electrical 47 requirements for services indicated. Provide spare fuses amounting to one spare fuse for each 10. 48 installed but not less than three of any one type and size. See Section 16475 Overcurrent Protective 49 Devices for fuse types. 50 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS ' 16170 - 1 i PART 3 - EXECUTION 2 3 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES 4 5 Install motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written __-6__instractions,_applicable-requirements_of NEC, NECA's_'StandarrLo£Installation"_andSnaccordance 7 with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirement. 8 9 Coordinate motor and circuit disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable 10 work, as necessary for proper interface. 11 12 Install disconnect switches with motor drive appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of 13 controller position. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 END OF SECTION 16170 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 16170 - 2 I SECTION 16181 - TRANSFORMERS 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 —" 5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 6 7 Extent of transformer work is indicated by drawings and schedule. Work includes complete 8 installation and electrical connections. 9 10 Types of transformers in this section include the following: 11 12 Dry -type transformers 13 14 QUALITY ASSURANCE 15 16 Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction of electrical power/distribution 17 transformers; with applicable portions of NEMA std. Pub. No. TRI and TR27, and with applicable 18 ANSMEEE standards pertaining to powerldistribution transformers. 19 20 SUBMITTALS 21 ' 22 PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data on transformers, including certification of 23 transformer performance efficiency, percentage regulation at 100 percent and 80 percent factor, no- ' 24 load and full -load losses in watts, percent impedance at 75 degrees C, hot -spot and average a 25 temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient, sound level in decibels, and standard published data. 26 27 SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit dimensioned drawings of transformer installations, showing layout, 28 mountings and supports, and spatial relationship to proximate walls and equipment. 29 30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 31 32 All transformers, main and branch panels, and associated equipment shall be purchased under a 33 national contract. For quote call Jim Ambuehl at 1-801-266-2096. 34 35 POWER/DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 36 37 GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard materials and 38 components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended 39 by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation. 40 41 DRY -TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS: Provide factory -assembled, general-purpose,air- 42 cooled, dry -type distribution transformers where shown; of sizes, characteristics, and rated capacities 43 indicated. Provide primary winding with 4 full capacity taps; each 5 percent, two above and two below 44 full -rated voltage for de-energizingtap-changing operation. Insulate with Class 150 insulation and fate 45 for continuous operation at KVA. Limit transformer temperature rise to 80 degrees C. Provide 46 terminal enclosure, with cover, to accommodate primary and'secondary coil wiring connections. Equip 47 terminal leads with connectors installed, suitable for copper or aluminum wiring. Cushion -mount 48 transformers with vibration isolation supports; sound -level ratings not to exceed 45 db as determined 49 in accordance with ANSI/NEMA standards. Provide transformers with fully -enclosed sheet steel ;I TRANSFORMERS 16181 - 1 1 enclosures. Apply manufacturer's standard light gray indoor enamel over cleaned and phosphatized 2 steel enclosure. Provide transformers suitable for wall or floor mounting as indicated. 3 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 5 6_ _ _INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS 7 8 Install transformers as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable 9 requirements of NEC, NEMA and IEEE standards, and in accordance with recognized industry 10 practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. 11 12 Coordinate transformer installation work with electrical raceway and wire/cable work, as necessary for 13 proper interface. 14 15 Connect transformer units to electrical wiring system; comply with requirements of other Division-16 16 sections. 17 18 MOUNTING: Provide concrete pad under all floor mounted equipment and equipment mounted at 19 grade. Anchor transformer to pad with 3/8" expansion anchors at each comer of enclosure. 20 21 Where transformers are indicated to be wall or ceding mounted, provide vertical and lateral support 22 systems from the structure. See drawings for support and attachment details. 23 24 GROUNDING: Provide tightly fastened equipment grounding and bonding connections for 25 transformers. 26 27 TESTING: Upon completion of installation of transformers, energize primary circuit at rated voltage 28 and frequency from normal power source and test transformers, including, but not limited to, audible 29 sound levels, to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct 30 malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace 31 with new units and proceed with retesting. 32 33 34 35 36 END OF SECTION 16181 37 TRANSFORMERS 16181 - 2 SECTION 16426 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 ` 5 DESCRIP170N OF WORK ~� 6 7 The extent of this work is to provide, install au-7 connect a disconnect serv;ce and distribution 8 switchboard as indicated on the Draw.:ugs. 9 10 Furnish distribution sections shall be mounted on a concrete curb and tied together as if it were 11 factory installed as a single unit. 12 13 QUALITY ASSURANCE 14 15 Provide units which have been UL listed and labeled. Comply with NEC as applicable to installation 16 of panelboards, cabinets, and cutout boxes. Comply with NEC pertaining to installation of wiring and 17 equipment in hazardous locations. Comply with NEW- Stds. Pub. No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical _ 18 Equipment (1000 volt maximum)". Pub. No. 1 "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and 19 Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less". r 20 21 SUBMITTALS 22 23 PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer data including specifications, installation instructions and 24 general recommendations, for each type of panelboard required. 25 26 SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit dimensioned drawings of main service disconnect and distribution 27 switchboard with accurately scaled layouts of enclosures and required individual switchgear, including, _ 28 but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground -fault circuit interrupters, 29 and accessories. 30 31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 32 33 All transformers, main and branch panels and associated equipment shall be purchased under a 34 national contract. Call Jim Ambuehl at 1-801-266-2096. 35 36 MAIN DISCONNECT AND SWITCHBOARD 37 38 SWITCHBOARD: Floor standing, dead front, dead rear, with all bussing and equipment accessible 39 from the front, constructed in accordance with the feeder diagram and approved shop drawings. Each 40 section of the switchboard shall bear the Underwriters label and manufactuere's label and shall comply 41 with all applicable codes and ordinaces. Provide black and white bakelite nameplates identifying each 42 function and each circuit breakers in the switchboard. 43 44 WHERE SPACES ARE INDICATZD, BUSSES: Extended full length and complete with mounting 45 holes and/or hardware for the installation of future equipment. 46 47 ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS, SWITCHES, AND OTHER INTERIOR EQUIPMENT: Mounted to 48 the framework and no equipment mounted to the front plates except as allowed by applicable codes 49 and defined detailed on the plans and/or in the schedule. 50 ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS 16426 - 1 V I Design of all current carryinig devices or parts of the switchbaord shall confrom to the latest standards 2 specked in the related section if IEEE standards except as these characteristics may be modified 3 herein. 4 � 5 All control and secondary wiring insulated for the voltage indicated in the schedule. All primary 6 connection suninsulatedexcept for special installation where insulation isspgg ed,orunlessinsulation _ 7 is required to make the equipment comply with the required dielectri., test. V` 8 9 Standard test for all swtiching and control apparatus system 61 to 600 volts; 1500 volts for 1 minute; 10 where the standards on devices used on this equipment call for a lower test voltage, such devices may 11 be disconnected during the test. Voltage tests made in accordance with ASA Standard C68.1. 12 13 Switchboard sections constructed of a code gauge steel to the dimensions indicated in the schedule 14 or on the plans. Holes, supports, studs, and openings standardized to enable interchange or interior 15 and front cover units. Sections fabricated with right angle comers and plumb edges and surfaces. 16 This panel is designed for installation in a certain space, the indicated physical dimensions are critical 17 and must be strictly followed. 18 h 19 Enclosures, parkerized or bonderized as a unit after all welding has been completed, then painted with 20 a rust -resisting prime coat of paint. Back of the enclosure and the interior finished witha coat of light 21 grey baked enamel and the front, tope, and exposed sides shall be finished with a scratch -resistant 22 silver-grey hammertone finish. 23 24 Wiring gutters extend the full depth of the switchbaord front -front to back. 25 26 Bus bars, connection bars, and wiring on -he back of the switchboard arranged so that maximum v 27 accessibility is provided for cable connections. v 28 r 29 Consideration given to the arrangement of cables so they may be connected to the swtichbaord in an ` 30 orderly manner. Electrical clearance between parts of opposite polarity and between live parts and 31 ground shall conform to the National Electric Code. 32 R' 33 Each distribution section bussed for the full connected load of the section. Bussing in all sections 34 shall extend to all spare circuit breaker spaces, the busses drilled, tapped and with straps or other 35 mounting accessories. 36 37 BUS BARS: Tin, aluminum or tined copper, meeting cross sectional area of UL Standard 891 for 38 temperature rise. The through bus shall be 100% rated, neutral bus 100% rated, provided with 39 CU/AL lugs. Ground bus sized to UL 891. - 40 41 AMPERE RATINGS: The switchgear shall be the rating indicated on the plans and in accordance 42 with the latest applicable standards of IEEE and NEMA. 43 44 BUS BRACING SUPPORTS: The bus work shall be braced to meet the short-circuit rating indicated 45 on the plans. Cables shall not be used in lieu of bus bars, riser busses, connection busses or bus 46 jumpers. All bars, riser busses, connecting busses, and bus jumpers adequatedly supported. Bus bars 47 of a length greater than 15" but less than 30" shall be supported with not less than on eintermediate } 48 insulated support (Underwirter approved) unless the bar is taped with one layer of friction tape, half P 49 lapped, and the entire taping throughly varnished with approved insulating varnish. Bus ban; of a 50 length greater than 30" shall not have less than two insulated supports; sufficient supports shall be ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS 16426 - 2 I provided so that the distance between supports shall not exceed the width of the switchboard section 2 in which they are used. Bus bars shall extend through all spare circuit breaker spaced in switchbaords. 3 i 4 GROUND BUS: A ground bus shall extend throughout the length of the switchboard assembly. 5 Each housing of the assembly shall be grounded dir"tly to this bus. 6 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 9 Torque tighten all bolted connections of bus bars in all switchboards. All torque setting shall conform 10 to NEMA, code and industry standards. 11 12 Rigidly secure and bolt switchboards to the building construction in an approved manner to resist v 13 seismic stress. Secure from the switchboard manufacturer all necessary calculations and drawings i 14 required to meet seismic conditions and be responsible for obtaining written approval of installation 15 from proper authorities. 16 n 17 Provide approved attachments for padlocking each circuit breaker or fused switch in the OFFposition. 18 19 The conduits connected to the switchboard shall be mounted in an approved place, the holes shall be 20 carefully cut and sured in place with lock -nuts and bushings. 21 22 Cable connections to the main and distribution circuit breakers shall be installed in proper size lugs 23 and torqued in place as per the manufacturers recommendation. 24 25 IDENTIFICATION 26 27 Main and distribution circuit breakers shall be labeled in accordance with the label specifications, 28 name of Engineer and Contractor. Also install a label with the Electrical Contractor and Engineers 29 name to be mounted on the main disconnect. See Section 16110 - 6, Labeling. 30 31 32 33 END OF SECTION 16426 ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS I� 16426 - 3 1 SECTION 16452 - GROUNDING 2 3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK "-� 4 - - 5 Provide grounding as specified by NEC, as noted herein, and as indicated on drawings. Types of 6 grounding in this section include the following: 7 i 8 Underground metal water piping 9 Grounding electrodes I" 10 Grounding rods 11 Separately derived systems 12 UFER ground _ 13 Service equipment ' 14 Enclosures " 15 Systems 16 Equipment ' 17 Isolated ground conductors 18 Other items indicated on drawings 19 20 "G" in the conduit symbol denotes a green ground (to match indicated conductor sizes) which shall 21 be installed in the conduit with other conductors. It shall connect to an insulated ground bar in the 22 panel. 23 24 "G" in all conduit, apparatus, equipment, etc. outside the building shall be grounded. A conduit 25 symbol denotes a #10 bare ground interconnecting all outside equipment having an electrical 26 connection. 27 28 A green ground conductor shall be installed in non-metallic conduit runs. 29 30 InsIall isolated ground conductors as indicated on the plans. ' 31 32 Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work speed elsewhere in these 33 specifications. " 34 35 QUALITY ASSURANCE 36 37 Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and ground fault protection systems. Comply 38 with applicable ANSI and IEEE requirements. Provide products which have been UL listed and • 39 labeled. 40 " 41 SUBMITTALS _ 42 43 None required. 44 45 GROUNDING 16452 - 1 1 2 3 4 5 6_ 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide each electrical grounding system as specified herein, and as shown on drawings, including but not necessarily limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and other items and accessories needed for complete installation. Where materials or components are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, NEMA and established industry standards for applications indicated. Install an isolated ground conductor to all isolated ground receptacles or as indicated. Isolated ground conductors are defined as a continuous insulated (green or yellow) conductor from the main ground point (in the main panel) to the receptacle and/or equipment. There shall be an insulated ground bar in the panel. ELECTRICAL GROUNDING CONDUCTORS Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. GROUND RODS GROUND RODS: Steel with copper welded exterior, 5/8" dia. x 8 ft. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING SYSTEMS Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure grounding devices comply with requirements. Install braided type bonding jumpers with ground clamps on water meter piping to electrically bypass water meter. Install clamp -on connectors only thoroughly cleaned and metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. Provide grounding for the entire raceway, enclosure, equipment and device system in accordance with NEC. All non-metallic raceways shall include copper grounding conductor sized in accordance with NEC. Provide a continuous service entrance ground conductor that interconnects the major ground points, namely ground rods (quantity of two, driven exterior to building), by means of bonding to water main, and by means of bonding (Cad -Weld) to building structural steel. If the conductor is not continuous each joint shall be Cad -Welded. The Cad -Weld constitutes a continuous conductor. GROUNDING 16452 - 2 1 In addition to all cold water and ground rods provided to meet this specification, each location 2 grounded either to cold water or to a ground rod shall have a UFER ground. A UFER ground shall 3 consist of a minimum of 25 feet of No 3/0 AWG bare copper cable embedded in concrete (feeder 4 encasement, footing, floor slab, etc.) so that all portions of the cable are between 2" and 4" from the 5 earth and with the center of the cable bonded to the ground rod or pipe. 6 i~ 7 Provide grounding conductors for dimming systems in accordance with manufacturers requirement. 8 9 See drawings for additional grounding requirements. h� 10 11 12 13 14 15 END OF SECTION 16452 GROUNDING 16452 - 3 I, 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 SECTION 16470 - ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK Provide and install all lighting and power panelboards as shown on the plans. They shall be surface and/or flush mounted unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Directory cards shall be provided for all lighting and power panelboards and shall match circuit number indicated on Drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide units which have been UL listed and labeled. Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of panelboards, cabinets, and cutout boxes. Comply with NEC pertaining to installation of wiring and equipment in hazardous locations. Comply with NEMA Stds. Pub. No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volt maximum)". Pub. No. 1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less". SUBMITTALS All transformers, main and branch panels and associated equipment shall be purchased under a national contract. For quote call Jim Ambuehl at 1-801-266-2096. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each type of panelboard required. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing accurately scaled layouts of enclosures and required individual panelboard devices, including, but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground -fault circuit interrupters, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS LIGHTING AND PANEL PANELBOARDS: Safety type for the voltage and phase characteristics defined on the plans. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Thermal magnetic"SWD"type approved for the designated use and voltage, plug -on or bolted -on, 20 ampere single pole branch circuit unless otherwise indicated on the Schedules. Square "D" Type NQOD and/or NEHB Branch circuit breakers, rated for 10,000 AIC, are used as the design standard. All Bussing: Aluminum, 98% conductivity. Provide 2 and 3 pole circuit breakers, shall have a common handle without tie -bars, for multiple circuiting using common neutral. ' PANELBOARD CABINETS FOR LIGHTING PANELS: Single door, and bear the Underwriters' label, 20" wide, 5-3/4" deep. CABINETS: Constructed in accordance with N.E. Code Standards, of not less than no. 14 - gauge galvanized sheet steel and painted inside with rust resistant baked on enamel. ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1 I 1 PANELBOARD CABINETS: Of sufficient height and width to allow a minimum of 4" wiring gutters 2 around all sides, except feeder entrance side which shall be 6" wide, unless otherwise noted in the 3 plan. 4 5 FRONTS OF ALL CABINETS: Constructed on 1-piece of code gauge, but not less than 12-gauge 6 steel, with concealed fasteners -mono -flat front. Finish grra 7 - ANSI-61. - - —- 8 DOORS: Fastened to trims with concealed hinges. Provide spring catch latch and cylinder lock with 9 2 keys for each door. All Locks: Master keyed. Finish Gray ANSI-61. 10 11 DIRECTORY FRAMES: 1/32 Lucite. 12 13 MANUFACTURERS: All electrical switchgear shall be of the same manufacturer. The design has 14 been developed around Square "D" Company equipment. 15 _ 16 PART 3 - EXECUTION 17 18 Torque tighten all bolted connections of bus bars in all switchboards. All torque setting shall conform 19 to NEMA, code and industry standards. 20 21 Neatly typewrite panel directory indicating the circuit breaker and the load being served. 22 23 Rigidly secure and bolt cabinets to the building construction in an approved manner to resist seismic 24 stress. 25 26 Provide approved lockoff devices on all circuit breakers serving motors, beaters, clocks, signal circuits, 27 night lights, drinking fountain, or equipment remotely located. These lockoff devices are in addition I 28 to the padlocking attachments referred on the previous page. 29 30 Spare conduit: From each panel, install five (5) spare 3/4" conduits from the top and bottom to an 31 accessible space. If access is available in only one direction, stub six (6) 3/4" conduit to that space - 32 see Section 16110-4. 33 34 FINISH: Coat interior and exterior of surface with manufacturer's standard color, baked on enamel 35 finish. 36 37 IDENTIFICATION: Provide 1/16" thick black Micarta labels with 1/4" high lettering on the interior 38 and exterior of each panelboard; include panelboard name and voltage. 39 40 41 42 END OF SECTION 16470 ELECTRICAL PANEL 30ARDS 16470 - 2 r- 1 SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 6 7 Extent of overcurrent protective device work is indicted by drawings and schedules. Overcurrent 8 protective devices specified herein are for installation as individual components in separate enclosures; 9 and for installation as integral components of switchboards and panelboards. See Section 16426, 10 Switchgear and Switchboards, and Section 16470, Panelboards. 11 12 Types of overcurrent protective devices in this section include the following for operation at 600 volts 13 and above: 14 - Molded case circuit breakers 15 - Fusible switches 16 - Molded case systems breakers 17 - Fuses 18 19 Refer to other Division-16 sections for cable/wire and connector work required in conjunction with 20 overcurrent protective devices. 21 22 QUALITY ASSURANCE 23 24 Comply with NEC requirements and NEMA an ANSI standards as applicable to construction and 25 installation of overcurrent protective devices. 26 27 SUBMITTALS 28 29 PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data on overcurrent protective devices, including catalog 30 cuts, time -current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements. 31 32 SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit layout drawings of overcurrent protective devices, with layout of circuit 33 breakers, including special relationships to proximate equipment. 34 35 MAINTENANCE STOCK, FUSES: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, 36 amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than two units of each size and type. 37 38 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 39 40 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 41 42 Provided factory -assembler, molded case circuit breakers for power distribution panelboards and 43 switchboards; and for individual mounting, as indicated. Provide breakers and amperage, voltage and 44 RMS interrupting rating shown, with permanent thermal trip and adjustable instantaneous magnetic 45 trip in each pole. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position and in an 46 ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Provide with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, 47 A11CU rated. 4F. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475 - 1 I 1 All breakers in the main distribution panel shall have sufficient interrupting capacity to safely interrupt 2 the available short circuit current from the transformer bank. Circuit breakers shall be Square "D", 3 Type FH, KH, LH, MH, or as noted on the plans. 4 5 All breakers specified with motor starters shall be SQ, "D" Mag-Guard. 6 7 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S 8 9 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (manufacturer must 10 be same as panelboard and/or switchboard manufacturer): 11 12 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 13 14 Square D. Co. 15 16 FUSIBLE SWITCHES 17 18 Provide factory -assembled fusible switch units for power distribution panelboards and switchboards, 19 and for individual mounting as indicated. Provide switch units of amperage, voltage, and RMS 20 interrupting rating as shown, with quick -make, quick -break mechanisms, visible blades and dual 21 horsepower ratings. Equip with lockable handles with on -off indication. Interlock switch covers with 22 handles to prevent opening in "ON" position. Provide switch with Class R rejection fuse clip kits. -' 23 24 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER 25 26 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ground -fault sensing and relaying equipment of one 27 of the following (manufacturer must be same as panelboard and/or switchboard manufacturer): 28 29 FUSIBLE SWITCHES 30 31 Square D Co. 32 33 FUSES 34 35 Furnish and install fuses in all switchboards, panelboards, motor controls, disconnecting switched and 36 all other equipment requiring fuses which are famished by this Contractor. 37 38 Do not shop switchboards, distribution panelboards, switches, etc. from the factories and/or deliver 39 to the job with the fuses installed in place. 40 41 Fuses. 601 amperes or larger: Bolt -on NEMA Class L, current limiting with 200,000 amperes RMS 42 symettrical, interrupting capacity. Fuses for switches in main distribution limiting with 200,000 43 amperes RMS symettrical, interrupting capacity. Fuses for switches in main distribution switchboards 44 shall have at least 45 seconds time delay at 3000% rating. 45 46 Fuses, 600 amperes or less, on circuits serving motor loads and dry -type transformers: Dual -element 47 with minimum time delay of 10 seconds at 500% rating. They shall also be current limiting and shall 48 have interrupting capactiy of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. 49 OVERCURRENT PROTECTTVE DEVICES 16475 - 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Fuses, 600 amperes or less, con circatis serving switch or breaker distribution panels, lighting panelboards and other non -motor loads: Current limiting and shall have interrupting capacity of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. These fuses do not have to be time delay type. All fuses of the same manufacturer, have characteristics to insure retention of positive selective coordinations as designed, be of the sizes shown on riser diagrams and schedules, and were not indicated on drawings, of the required size for proper operation of the equipment protected. Fuses: Class "R" rejection type, "LPN-RK". GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes and ratings and electrical characteristics as follows. Provide fuses labeled UL Class L or UL Class R, current limiting and rated for up to 200,000 amperes. MAIN SERVICE AND FEEDER CIRCUIT: For fuse ratings over 600 amperes provide UL Class L Fuses (KTX, KTS, KTU). For fuse ratings up to 600 amperes, provide UL Class RK1 (LPN-RK, LPS-RK). If fuse directly feeds motor or transformers, provide UL RK1 time delay. BRANCH CIRCUITS: For motor circuits and transformer circuits, provide UL Class RK5 (FRN, FRS). For other circuits, provide UL Class RK5, non -time delay (LPN, LPS). MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses of one of the following: Bussman Mfg. Co. Littlefuse SPARE FUSES: Provide one spare set of fuses for each size and one spare set for each additional group of five. Spare fuses to be placed in fuse cabinet located adjacent to main panel. Cabinet to be labeled "Spare Fuses". PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. Coordinate with otherwork as necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective devices with other work. Set field -adjustable circuit breakers for trip settings as indicated, subsequent to installation of devices. Furnish spare fuses of each type and size furnished and installed on the job and deliver to the Owner at the completion of the job. OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475 - 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Field test all ground fault protective devices for proper operation; test to be performed by representative of the manufacturer. Include verification of complete time current trip characteristics. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Prior to energization of overcurrent protective devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry _and for short-circuits. Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 16475 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16475 - 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 SECTION 16510 - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of interior and exterior lighting fixture work is indicated by drawings and schedules. The contractor shall provide the quantity of light fixtures on the plans. The drawn length (in standard increments) of the fixtures determines the quantity and the catalog number identifies the model or type. The catalog numbers have been carefully prepared to define the fixture type, but may not be completely accurate. At least four (4) days prior to bidding each manufacturer shall compare the catalog numbers shown with the description and requirements on the drawings and shall notify the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies. Specifically included in the evaluation shall be the verifying of proper mounting kits or accessories to facilitate installation of the fixture as shown at each location on the plans. No allowance or redress will be allowed for discrepancies that were not addressed to the indicated authorities for clarification prior to bidding. Reporting of ambiguities is the responsibility of the bidder -See Incentive Bids. On all pendent mounted fixtures, provide a second set of pendants, of a different length, as directed by the Architect/Engineer, to be used at their discretion, provide and install at no additional charge to the project. Types of lighting fixtures in this section include the following: High -Intensity -Discharge (HID) Fluorescent Incandescent QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with NEC, NEMA and ANSI 132.1 as applicable to installation and construction of lighting fixtures. Comply with NEC 410-64C for all recessed incandescent light fixtures. Provide lighting fixtures which have been UL tested with lamp and ballast for the intended use - Apply label. CBM LABELS: Provide fluorescent -lamp ballasts which complywith Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association standards and carry the CBM label. SUBMITTALS PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data on interior and exterior building lighting fixtures. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit dimensioned drawings of lighting fixtures. Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. INI'ERIOR/EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING 16510 - 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 PART 2 - PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of FLUORESCENT AND HID BALLASTS Advance Transformer Co. General Electric Co. Universal Mfg. Co. INCANDESCENT AND FLUORESCENT LAMPS General Electric Co. Sylvania Lamp Div., GTE Corp. Westinghouse Corp. HID LAMPS General Electric Co. Sylvania Lamp Div., GTE Corp. INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES GENERAL: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters and wiring. Label each fixture with manufacturer's name and catalog number. Provide all enclosed futures with positive latch mechanisms; spring tension clips not acceptable. Provide all exterior futures with damp or wet location label as required by application. SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS: Provide all pendant and stem hung futures with flexible ball joint hangers at all points of support. Equip hooks used to hang futures with safety latches. Provide all detachable fixture parts, luminous ceiling accessories, louvers, diffusers, lenses, and reflectors with locking catches, screws, safety chain or safety cable. Each hanger point shall be capable of supporting four times the future weight. Backing supports shall be installed above (or behind) sheetrock, plaster and similar ceiling and wall materials. All surface mounted ceiling fixtures shall be supported from a structural channel. See plans for additional details. ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLASTS: Provide electronic fluorescent -lamp ballasts, capable of operating one, two, three or four lamp types indicated; with high power factor, and low -noise features, Class P, sound -rated A, and with internal thermal protection. See plans for voltage requirements. For interior fixtures, provide full light output energy conserving ballasts, where available as standard products, as follows: Advance Transformer Co. - REL and RIC Series EBT - SSB1 and SSB2 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING 16510 - 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 Magnetic - B Series G.E./Motorola If a fluorescent fixture is to be dimmable, install an electronic dimming ballasts. It shall be Advance Mark VII (see Fluorescent Dimmers Section 16140-2). Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for all lamp/ballast combinations. Equip outdoor fixtures with low temperature starting ballasts. BATTERIES FOR BALLASTS: Provide and install batteries for ballasts in the fixtures where indicated on the plans. The units shall be factory installed. The unit shall be: 1. Able to operate 1, 2, 3, or 4 lamps (as indicated) at approximately 20 p = cent output for 90 minutes minimum. 2. Battery shall be long life cadmium type. Charges shall be capable of full recharge in 24 hours. 3. Unit shall be complete with charging indicator light and test switch. 4. Approved Manufacturers and Models: Bodine - B70A Chloride - CFP-4 Lithonia - PS-500 Universal - 8400 Note: Size to number of lamps. HIGH -INTENSITY -DISCHARGE -LAMP BALLASTS: Provide HID ballasts, of ratings, types and makes as recommended by lamp manufacturer, which properly match lamps to power line by providing appropriate voltage and impedances for which lamps are designed. Equip exterior fixtures with low temperature starting ballasts. Provide high power factor, or power factor improved ballasts. FLUORESCENT LAMPS: Equip interior fluorescent fixtures with full light output, energy conserving lamps where available as standard product of General Electric, Sylvania, or Westinghouse. Where applicable, equip fixtures with lamps as follows: Rapid Start T-8 2850 3500-k initial lumens Rapid Start 2700 3500-k initial lumens Slimline 5750 3500-k initial lumens High Output 8350 3500-k initial lumens General Electric Watt Miser II, Sylvania Supersaver, Westinghouse Econ-o-Watt. Equip exterior fixtures with standard lamps. INCANDESCENT LAMPS: All incandescent lamps shall be 130V rated rough and service, heavy- duty. Data shall be printed on lamp - supply wattages as shown on plans. DIFFUSERS: Where plastic diffusers are specified, provide 100 percent virgin acrylic compound; minimum thickness, .125 inches. INTERIOR/EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING 16510 - 3 Provide a spare set of diffusers (acrylic and/or glass) for each fixture type and one for each additional 10 fixtures of each type; not to exceed 10 spares for any single fixture type. 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 5 6 INSTALLATION )F LIGHTING FIXTURES 8 Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with facture manufacturer's 9 written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. Coordinate with other work as appropriate to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other work. Consult architectural reflected ceiling plan for exact location of all lighting fixtures. Provide all necessary supports, brackets, and miscellaneous equipment for mounting of fixtures. Support all ceiling mounted fixtures from the building structure; independent of the ceiling system, unless noted. Support each recessed fixture (fluorescent incandescent, and/or HID) from the building structure with #8 ga. steel wire attached to each comer (in addition to supports normally provided for attachment to the ceiling system). Provide backing supports above (or behind) sheetrock, plaster and similar ceiling and wall materials. Support ceiling mounted outlet boxes independent of the raceway system, and capable of supporting 200 pounds. See plans for additional details. Install fluorescent emergency lighting pack in ballast channel with charging indicator light and test switch mounted on fixture end, or visible and accessible through lens. Wire so unit can be tested with lights on. Wire so lamps in normal mode are switched off with other lighting in area. Connect emergency lighting unit to unswitched conductor. ADJUST AND CLEAN: Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. Repair all nicks and scratches to appearance of original finish. SITE LIGHTING The Contractor shall provide and install the poles, fixtures, anchor bolts, concrete, materials, etc. for a complete site lighting system as shown on the plans. Poles and fixtures shall be provided as indicated on fixture schedule. The light poles shall be factory finished with a 5 mil thick coating of polyester powder paint on the exterior of the pole (color by Architect). Prior to painting, the pole should be cleaned with abrasives and solvents to insure a proper surface for paint adhesion. The pole shall be protected on the inside as well by applying a thermal plastic hydrocarbon sealant to all inside surfaces for added insurance against atmospheric and corrosive matter. The pole should then be packaged with a reinforced wrapping material to protect the pole and baseplate during shipping. INTERIOR/EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING 16510 - 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 The manufacturer shall warrant the pole finish for a five (5) year period from date of shipment. The manufacturer will repair or replace (at their option) any defective exterior coating that exhibits cracking, blistering, peeling, chi^ping, corrosion, or excessive oxidation, when notified by the Owner within 60 days of such failure first becoming evident. Unless noted, poles shall be mounted on a concrete base complete with anchor bolts and reinforcing steel bars. See plans for additional requirements. Furnish and install Buss HEB fuseholders with "breakaway" receptacles in all conductors running to the top of each pole. Fuse holders shall be located at the hand pole or in the base junction box as applicable. Provide KTK fuses in each phase conductor sized at 1.5 times the maximum full load current of the ballasts service by each conductor. Maximum fuse size for any pole shall not exceed rating of circuit overcurrent device. Provide fuse blanks in neutral conductors. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then reset to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in interior lighting fixtures which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after the Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect/Engineer. In addition, furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 15 percent (but not less than one lamp) of each type and size used. (Max. 48 of any one type.) Deliver replacement stock with letter of transmittal as dirented to Owner's storage space. GROUNDING: Provide tight equipment grounding connections for each lighting fixture. END OF SECTION 16510 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING 16510 - 5 1 SECTION 16660 - SEISMIC BRACING 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Alternates and Addenda, Applicable 6 Drawings and the Technical Specifications shall apply to all work under this division. 7 8 This seismic bracing section is required only when the building location and area is within the state 9 and/or local UBC Seismic Requirements. 10 11 SCOPE OF WORK 12 13 The materials covered by these specifications consists of furnishing all labor, material and equipment 14 necessary to complete the seismic bracing for all work provided under section 16000. 15 16 The work shall include all electrical isolated and non -isolated equipment, fixtures, raceways, eta 17 18 CODES - REGULATIONS 19 20 In the installation of this work, comply in every way with the requirements of the laws, ordinances and 21 rules of the system design and installation shall be based on seismic zone III of the Uniform Building 22 code, 1991 edition and other standards listed below. 23 24 Reference Standards: 25 26 1. Uniform Building Code 1991 edition, especially Sec. 2336 27 2. NFPA bulletin 90A, current edition 28 3. UL Standard 181 29 4. Tri-services manual, fagel etal 1978 30 31 If a conflict occurs between these rules and this specification, the rules are to govern. Accept this 32 condition upon submitting bid, and no extra charge will be allowed after the contract is awarded. This 33 shall not be construed as relieving the contractor from complying with any requirements on the plans 34 or specifications which may be in excess of requirements of the hereinbefore mentioned rules and not 35 contrary to same. Contractor shall bear all costs arising from the installation of any materials or 36 equipment which is in conflict with the above mentioned codes or ordinances. 37 38 Obtain approvals, inspections, etc., required by code. All fees shall be included in the contract price. 39 The contractor shall furnish a certificate of approval to the Owner's Representative from the 40 inspection authority at completion of the work. 41 42 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 43 44 All materials and equipment, furnished and installed shall be first quality, new and meet the standards 45 of NEMA, IPCEA, LS, UL, NFPA, UBC, UOSH, NEC, and shall bear their label wherever standards 46 have been established and label service is available. Where materials and equipment are speed by 47 manufacturer's name, and type and quality required is thereby denoted. The Owner's Representative 48 shall be afforded every facility, deemed necessary to inspect and examine the materials and apparatus 49 being installed to provide their quality, skill and competency of workmanship. 50 SEISMIC BRACING 16660 - 1 1 Workmanship shall be the best quality of its kind for the respective industries, trades, crafts and 2 practices and shall be acceptable in every respect to the Owner's Representative. Nothing contained 3 herein shall relieve the contractor from making good and perfect work in all details of construction. 4 5 The contractor shall work in harmony with the Owner's Representative and with other contractors, 6 companies or individuals working in connection with this project. Imperfections or errors by other 7 contractors s all not relieve responsi'Ii ity of tHis contractor. Store materials orderly and clean up 8 without interference. 9 10 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11 12 The contractor shall be held responsible for purchasing and installing vibrator isolators, flexible 13 connections, rigid steel frames, concrete inertia bases, anchors, inserts, hangers, and attachments, 14 seismic bracing and snubbers as required for seismic control and prevention of the transmission of 15 vibration for both isolated and non -isolated systems. 16 17 Manufacturers and suppliers approved for use by the contractors Mason Industries, Inc., Korfund, and 18 Amber/Booth Company. 19 20 The approved manufacturer or supplier shall be totally responsible for the fabrication and operation - 21 of the seismic bracing components specified herein for all isolated equipment, non -isolated equipment, 22 fixtures, raceways, etc. 23 24 GUARANTEE 25 26 The entire electrical system installed under this contract shall be left in proper working order and be 27 in compliance with the drawings, specifications and/or authorized changes to the satisfaction of the 28 Owner's Representative. Without additional charge, replace any work or materials which develop 29 defects, except from ordinary wear, within one year from the date of substantial completion. A 30 written guarantee covering the above provisions shall be signed as delivered to the architect after the 31 project has Final acceptance by the inspecting authority. 32 33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 34 35 ISOLATED EQUIPMENT 36 37 All vibration isolated equipment shall be mounted on rigid steel frames or concrete bases. Each 38 spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four all directional seismic snubbers that are double 39 acting and located as close to the vibration isolators as possible to facilitate attachment both to the 40 base and the structure. The snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by shock 41 absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing specifications. 42 43 Elastomeric, 50 durometer, materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4" thick. Snubbers shall 44 be manufactured with an air gap between hard and resilient materials of not less than 1/8" nor mpre 45 than 1/4". Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. 46 47 The capacity of the seismic snubbers at 3/8" deflection shall be 3 to 4 times the load assigned to the 48 mount grouping in its immediate are-. 49 50 SEISMIC BRACING 16660 - 2 1 NON -ISOLATED EOUIPMENT RACEWAYS ETC 2 3 All non -isolated equipment shall be installed according to 1991 Uniform Building Code Sec. 2312 (g): 4 Cp Factor Table 23J, I Factor Table 23K In addition the vertical forces, restraint requirements shall 5 be computed as .5g the value of the lateral forces. 6 7 All non -isolated raceway shall be protected against seismic disturbances except as noted below: 8 9 1. All electrical conduit less than 2" inside diameter. 10 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 12 13 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS ` 14 15 All electrical work shall be braced, snubbed or supported to withstand seismic disturbances and remain 16 operational. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment to provide protection against seismic 17 disturbances and remain in place. 18 19 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL AND REVIEW 20 21 Submit complete, bound submittal in a looseleaf binder large enough for all items (8 copies) to 22 architect after award of contract. All such submittals shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, 23 the following: 24 25 1. Complete engineering calculations and shop drawings, prepared and stamped by a licensed 26 27 engineer (UBC 302-6) for all seismic requirements for all equipment that is to restrain raceways, etc. 28 29 2. The type, size and deflection of each isolator proposed for items in this specification and on the 30 drawings. 31 32 3. Details for all the isolators and seismic bracing with snubber proposed for items in this 33 specification and on the drawings. 34 35 4. Details for steel frames and concrete inertia bases to be used in conjunction with the isolation 36 of the items in this specification and drawings. 37 38 5. Clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators, seismic bracing and 39 snubbers. 40 41 6. The size, loading and location of raceway supports with either a plan or complete description of 42 the system. 43 44 All items must be submitted at the same time. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Binders and 45 indexes will remain in possession of engineer, architect, contractor and sub -contractor. 46 47 48 49 SEISMIC BRACING 16660 - 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 _7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Review is for assistance and interpreting the design concept. Changes :n requirements will not be made in the review process. Review action does not exempt requirements to meet the intent of the contract documents. Any changes will be made by change order. Items not included in the submittal or incorrectly selected shall be in accordance with the contract requirements. END OF SECTION 16660 SEISMIC BRACING 16660 - 4 W 1 SECTIONS 16700 - 16800 - AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 The Auxiliary Systems of this specification are sections that have numbers greater than 16700. This 6 specification will include the Auxiliary Sections that are relative to this project. (See Section 16001-1 7 for listing). 8 9 Each system mentioned herein is a complete system. Each network is a new system, an extension of 10 an existing and/or a new system that incorporates an existing system into the new. Whatever the 11 condition, the contractor shall provide all the equipment, materials, labor, etc. for a complete and 12 operable network. Each system is specified to perform a definite function. The function and 13 operation of a system is the final objective and whatever the requirement to accomplish that objective 14 shall be included. If for any reason the specifications do not complete the network, the bidder and/or 15 manufacturers representative shall call the deficiencies to the attention of the engineer by facsimile 16 five (5) days prior to the bid date, so they can be included in an addendum. Failure to submit this 17 information to the attention of the engineer does not relieve the bidder from supplying and installing 18 the equipment needed for a complete and operable system. 19 20 Walk through the system when the project is complete and each auxiliary system has been tested and 21 ready to be set into operation, the contractor, the owner's and manufacturer's representative shall test 22 each component of each system for normal operation and report in writing to the architect and 23 engineer that the system meets all the conditions and functions of the specifications for normal 24 operation. 25 26 Example: In the case of the Fire Detection and Alarm System, the people mentioned above plus the 27 local Fire Marshall (or his representative) shall check out the Fire Alarm System. Each component 28 (break glass station, heat detector, ionization detector, alarms, etc.) shall be tested individually to 29 prove their function in the total system. Any and all defective components shall be repaired and/or 30 replaced. 31 32 Likewise each of the other auxiliary systems, one by one (sound, F.A., telephone, computer, etc.) shall 33 be tested and written reports made on the results of the test. 34 35 Return visits: One, six, and eleven months after the system has been accepted by the owner, the 36 factory representative shall return to the project and check-out the system to determine the condition 37 of operation, answer any questions of the operator and/or administrator, make repairs, etc., to 38 determine if the system is operating to its full potential. 39 40 The factory representative shall review with the operator and administrator on their use of the 41 equipment making sure the equipment is used to the ultimate. 42 43 As heretofore mentioned in this specification each auxiliary system carries a one year warranty from 44 the date of acceptance by the owner. 45 46 47 END OF SECTIONS 16700-16800 48 49 50 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 16700 TO 16800 - 1 1 SECTION 16721 - AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 2 3 PARTI- GENERAL 4 5 The Contractor shall provide and install a complete and operable Fire Alarm System as shown on the 6 plans and as specified herein. It shall comply in all ways with the state and local codes and 7 regulations, such as UFC Article 14 and UFC Stds. 14 - 1 & 2. 8 9 See Sheet FA-1 for plans and specifications. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 END OF SECTION 16721 AUTOMATIC FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS 16721-1 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of telephone system work is indicated by drawings and is herein defined to include, but not be limited to raceway outlets, device plates, backboards, cabinets, grounding and miscellaneous items required for complete raceway system. Refer to other Division-16 sections for requirements for raceways, trays, boxes and fittings, wiring devices (plates), and supporting devices, and other sections, as applicable. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type of products used and installation of components. Provide products and materials which have been UL-listed and labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS GENERAL: Provide complete raceway system for telephone including but not limited to, raceway, outlets, device plates, backboards, cabinets, grounding and miscellaneous items as required. Provide terminal cabinets of code gauge steel, flush or surface, as indicated, with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinges and flush lock, with gray backed enamel finish to match finish of panelboard covers. Construct back boxes of code gauge galvanized steel with removable end walls. TELEPHONE LINE PROTECTOR The contractor shall provide and install on the telephone board a 25 line telephone protector unit that will dampen and/or ground out lightning and/or transient charges. The unit shall be mounted on the plywood board at a location directed by the telephone installer. The unit shall be grounded to the #6 telephone ground conductor. The unit shall be a Reliance Comm/fec unit #R66P25QC series with 89 stand-off brackets. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF TELEPHONE RACEWAY SYSTEM GENERAL: Install raceway system as indicated to comply with NEC and recognized industry practices. Run 3/4" conduit from each telephone outlet to terminal backboard, tray, or terminal cabinet. Provide nylon pull cord in all installed raceway. GROUNDING: Provide one #6 bare copper ground from each telephone terminal board to the service entrance ground. Enclose in suitable raceway for entire length. Coil six feet of conductor at TELEPHONE SYSTEM 16740 - 1 1 each terminal board. Make connection at service entrance ground. See drawings for additional 2 requirements. 3 4 POWER: Provide a minimum of one four-plex receptacle on dedicated circuit adjacent to each 5 terminal backboard or cabinet. See drawings for additional power outlets. _6 7 Service entrance raceway to be 4" minimum unless noted and shall be installed with a nylon pull-co—r . — — 8 9 TELEPHONE SYSTEM: Main service entrance conduit to be 4" unless noted otherwise. Provide 10 a nylon pull cord in entrance conduit. Coordinate the service and installation with the local telephone 11 company. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 END OF SECTION 16740 24 TELEPHONE SYSTEM 16740 - 2 I SECTION 16741 - TELEVISION ANTENNA SYSTEMS - ROOF ANTENNA 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 The General Provision of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and GeL--ral 6 Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section, as well as all codes and standards 7 referenced. 8 9 SCOPE 10 11 Provide complete and operable system including antenna, or antennas as required, amplifier, if 12 required, splitters, cable and outlets as required to provide the speed performance when receiving 13 off -the -air VHF and UHF, T.V. channels. The system shall receive and distribute channels. 14 15 Signals at the outlets shall include all VHF and UHF channels available in the local area. If the same 16 program signals are available from two or more transmitters (I.E. translators, VHF/UHF duplicates 17 or signals from different cities) only the best signal source need be provided. 18 19 Multiple antennas, preamplifiers, amplifiers, etc. shall be provided as required to meet the stated 20 performance standards. The contractor shall be responsible to conduct a signal survey at the building 21 site. All specified requirements shall be met at no additional cost to the owner unless the contractor 22 has informed the engineer in writing before construction begins of any specification items that cannot 23 be achieved. 24 25 The antenna(s) shall be roof mounted on a grounded, 1.5" rigid conduit mast with weatherhead and 26 oriented for maximum signal strength and ghost -free reception. If multiple antennas are required, 27 multiple masts shall be provided if needed to allow the antennas to be separated by a minimum of 28 2/3 wave length (I.E. 2/3 wave length of channel 2 = 145") of the lowest channel received on either 29 or two adjacent antennas. 30 31 RELATED WORK 32 33 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods - Section 16050. 34 35 QUALITY ASSURANCE 36 37 Workmen's Qualifications: All equipment shall be installed by a Communications Contractor with 38 at least five (5) years experience in installing similar systems who shall be the factory authorized 39 distributor for the equipment provided. 40 41 All equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in strict accordance with the drawings 42 and specifications. 43 44 Workmanship shall be neat, have a good appearance and conform to the best electrical engineering 45 practices. 46 47 CODES AND STANDARDS 48 49 Method of installation shall comply with the latest edition of the Uniform Building Code, National 50 Electrical Code, Life Safety Code, and all applicable local and state ordinances. TELEVISION ANTENNA SYSTEMS - ROOF ANTENNA 16741 - 1 1 SUBMITTALS 2 3 Contractor shall submit in five (5) copies a complete list of component parts of the Antenna System, 4 showing illustrations and descriptions of all items for approval to the Architect's office. 5 6 _ This contractor shall receive written approval before ordering, fabricating or installing any component 7 parts of the Antenna System. 8 9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATE 10 11 Communications Contractor shall furnish the Owner with three (3) complete sets of service and 12 operating literature in accordance with the requirement of these specifications. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 PRODUCT. DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the Television Antenna System before, during and after installation, to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary at no additional cost to the Owner. PROJECT SITE CONDITION Inspection: Prior to installing the Antenna System, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the points where installation may properly commence. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of the Television Antenna System with the schedule for work by other trades to prevent unnecessary delays in the project. Codes and Ordinances: Verify that the installation of the Television Antenna System may be made in complete accordance with all pertinent codes, regulations and the original design. CABLE The cable installed in this system shall be an RG-6. GUARANTEE System shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from date of completion against defective materials, workmanship and improper adjustment. Guarantee shall cover all parts au3 labor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE STANDARDS For purposes of this specification 0 dBmV shall be equal to 1,000 microvolts across 75 ohms. TELEVISION ANTENNA SYSTEMS - ROOF ANTENNA 16741 - 2 1 Systems utilizing amplification shall have a signal-to-noise ratio of 50 dB or greater to provide a 2 TASO grade EXCELLENT picture. Contractor shall submit a calculation showing how system noise 3 figure is derived. 4 5 Passive distribution equipment shall pass frequencies from 12-800 MHz for future all -channel 6 operation. 8 Outlets shall be isolated from each other by a minimum of 28 dB. 9 10 All "F connectors shall be the one piece type with at least a 1/2" long crimp ring. Each connector 11 shall be installed with a hex crimp tool. 12 13 Any installed electronic equipment shall be rated for continuous operation and shall be UL listed. 14 Amplifier power supplies shall be regulated compensate for line voltage fluctuations. 15 16 Lines shall be terminated with 75 ohm 5% resistors. 17 18 The contractor shall ascertain the requirements of the project and shall provide any taps, filters, 19 outlets or cable required to achieve the specified performance and provide a picture at each outlet 20 equal or superior in quality to that of signals directly from the antenna(s). 21 22 APPROVED EQUIPMENT 23 24 Antenna(s) - Delhi J series or equal 25 26 Preamplifiers and/or amplifiers - Blonder Tongue or Jerrold (as required) 27 28 Splitter - Blonder Tongue MS-2U/V or Jerrold 1596C 29 30 Outlet - Blonder Tongue V1G'VU or Jerrold UT-82 (' = isolation as required) 31 32 Cable - Times, Belden or West Penn (pre -swept to 800 MHz) 33 34 PART 3 - EXECUTION 35 36 INSTALLATION 37 38 The amplifier, splitters, etc., shall be installed in a lockable ventilated housing. All distribution cable 39 shall be installed in 1/2" conduit. 40 41 The contractor shall ascertain the requirements of the project and shall provide any taps, outlets or 42 cable required to achieve the specified performance and provide a picture in any area equal in quality 43 to that of the industry standards. 44 45 TELEVISION ANTENNA SYSTEMS - ROOF ANTENNA 16741 - 3 1 z 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 Contractor shall provide all equipment and perform test at each outlet in the presence of an authorized representative of the owner to assure proper operation of all channels on television receivers. Contractor shall provide to the Architect, a certificate of completion, stating that the system has been installed as per drawings and specifications and that it has been tested and that signals received at all outlets meet the requirements of these specifications. ` END OF SECTION 16741 TELEVISION ANTENNA SYSTEMS - ROOF ANTENNA 16741 - 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 SECTION 16775 - SOUND SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL SCOPE The owner, under separate contract, shall provide and install (2) mixer -amplifiers, all speakers, baffled, attenuators, cable, music satellite dish and telephone interface for paging and shall make all final connections at amplifier. The contractor shall provide and install back boxes, conduit, pull cord, etc., as shown on drawings. The contractor shall terminate all sound system conduit at amplifier location and shall provide pull cord. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AMPLIFIER (By Flying-J) The mixer -amplifiers shall be 3M 78-6911-1556-8. BACKBOX AND SUPPORT BRIDGE The backbox shall be a 3M 78-9010-4844-4 or approved equal recessed round enclosure designed to accommodate 8" speaker/baffle assemblies. It shall have a rust -preventative grey coating over metal which has been treated with an iron phosphate coating. The interior of the backbox shall be undercoated to prevent acoustical and mechanical resonances. Four 8/32 "J" nuts shall be provided and installed in the mounting flange. Four combination knockouts I/Z" (1.27 cm) and 3/4" (1.91 cm) spaced 90 deg. apart, shall be provided. Torsion spring mounting brackets shall be provided. The speaker/baffle support bridge shall be a 3M or approved equal. It shall serve as a universal mounting device for attaching 8" speaker assemblies to suspended ceilings. It shall not only reduce installation time but eliminate the sag frequently caused by the weight of the installation in ceilings of this type. The 3M bridge shall accept virtually all of the existing round or square baffles with or without backboxes, and any 8" torsion spring baffle with most round or square backboxes, thus eliminating the need for stocking a large variety of mounting devices to match various configurations. The practical design of the bridge shall simplify and speed speaker/baffle installation as follows: Locking tabs on the center plate shall make it simple to position the speaker on the ceiling and prevent the bridge from moving during installation. In addition, the bridge shall mount with an easy - to -cot square ceding hole, rather than the round hole required by most other bridges. The hole dimension shall remain within the baffle diameter, so that even a miscut mounting hole shall be completely concealed by the baffle. Finally, the design of the bridge shall permit compact nesting of multiple bridge to save space and to permit easier handling. END OF SECTION 16775 SOUND SYSTEM 16775-1 1 FUEL CENTERS 2 3 The electrical system for the Fuel Island, pumping, controls, power, lighting, etc. as shown on sheets 4 EQLI - 1.7 is a part of the electrical contract and the cost thereof shall be included in the electrical 5 contractor's bid. The electrical installation shall be installed in compliance with NFPA 70 and all local 6 and state codes. The electrical layout is shown schematically and does not indicate all elbows, off -sets, 7 seal -offs, etc. required for this installation, but shall be located as required by good journeyman 8 practice and code. 9 10 This phase of construction is made-up of two parts. Namely: 11 12 Phase I to install a complete conduit system as shown in the electrical drawings and specifications and 13 the Fuel Island drawings and specifications which are a part of the project documents. This phase of 14 the work shall include the conduit, fittings, seal -offs, power pedestals, trenching back -filling, etc. as 15 defined. The empty conduit shall include a nylon pull cord (200-lb. rating) installed therein. The 16 conduit shall run from the electrical room to the islands, fuel tank pumps, eta 17 18 This phase of the work also includes providing and installing the motor starters shown on sheet E-6 19 and in the Mechanical Equipment Schedule on E-7. The electrical contractor shall provide conduit 20 and wiry for the load power to the starter disconnects. 21 22 The fuel equipment contractor shall pull the wire and make connections to all equipment that he 23 installs, Le., filling seal -offs, eta The power for this system shall run from Panel FP. 24 25 Coordinate all work with the Fuel Equipment Contractor to meet the needs of his system. 26 27 Phase II of the Fuel Island electrical work is to provide all conduit and wire for the installation and 28 powering the light fixtures, post light, etc. as provided by the canopy and/or Fuel Island contractor. 29 All conduits shall carry a rg een ground conductor. The luminaries shall be circuited to Panel "Y", 30 which is controlled by a photo cell and lighting contractor - both are called out on the plans. The 31 photo cell will turn the luminaries on at dusk and off at dawn. 32 33 The equipment delivered to the electrical contractor by the fuel and/or canopy contractor shall be 34 examined for damage and returned for replacement if not in lice new condition. After acceptance 35 the electrical contractor has the responsibility of all electrical apparatus and shall replace all damaged 36 parts. 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 END OF FUEL CENTERS 46 FUEL - 1